845C Manual de Serviço 44739AENG

845C/L845C FELLER BUNCHER
SERVICE MANUAL
SERIAL NUMBER 84511861 TO 84512500
SERIAL NUMBER 84521861 TO 84522500
ISSUE 1.0, APRIL 2016
Tigercat Industries Inc.

P.O. Box 637
Brantford, Ontario
Canada N3T 5P9
Tel: (519) 753-2000
Fax: (519) 753-8272
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................. v
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS..................................................................................... vi
STANDARDS ROPS, TOPS, FOPS, OPS..........................................................................................................vii
NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES.............................................................................................viii
SAFETY...............................................................................................................................................................1
USING HIGH-SPEED DISC SAWS SAFELY.............................................................APPENDIX TO SECTION 1
CONTROLS AND OPERATION................................................................See separate OPERATOR'S MANUAL
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................4
PILOT SYSTEM...................................................................................................................................................5
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERS.......................................................................................................................6
ENGINE AND ANTI-STALL..................................................................................................................................7
COOLING SYSTEM...........................................................................................................................................10
TRACK DRIVE................................................................................................................................................... 11
BOOM FUNCTIONS..........................................................................................................................................12
LEVELING.........................................................................................................................................................13
SWING...............................................................................................................................................................15
SAW DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................17
ACCUMULATOR, CLAMPS AND WRIST..........................................................................................................18
MISCELLANEOUS............................................................................................................................................25
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its
constituents are known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects and
other reproductive harm.
845C/L845C FELLER BUNCHER Available Literature

Operator’s Manual - 845*1501 TO 845*1860..................................................................................Part No. 31379AENG
Operator’s Manual - 845*1861 TO 845*2500..................................................................................Part No. 44738AENG
Service Manual - 845*1501 TO 845*1860.......................................................................................Part No. 31380AENG
Service Manual - 845*1861 TO 845*2500 (this Manual).................................................................Part No. 44739AENG
Parts Catalogue...............................................................................................................................Part No. 31381A
iii
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................. v

INTRODUCTION
An Operator's manual, Service manual and a Parts catalog are made available by Tigercat to assist the dealer,
customer and operator in becoming familiar with the features of the 845C/L845C Feller Bunchers.
Serial numbers:
845C 84511861 TO 84512500
L845C 84521861 TO 84522500
NOTE: The 4th digit in the machine serial number indicates the machine model type. For example,
1 = Feller Buncher and 2 = Leveling Feller Buncher. For simplicity throughout this manual the 4th digit has been
replaced with an asterisk to indicate that both types of machine models are affected,
for example 845*1861 TO 845*2500.
The 845C/L845C Feller Bunchers are designed for harvesting trees, selective felling, thinning and final felling
applications in plantations and natural stands.
The operator's manual will assist the operator with the techniques of proper and safe operation of the 845C/L845C
Feller Bunchers. There is also important information regarding the safe operation of the saw head. The service
manual contains safety and servicing procedures and a preventive maintenance schedule to ensure optimum
machine performance. For manual part numbers, see the 'table of contents' page in each manual.
Section 1 in both the operator's manual and the service manual contains safety information that must be followed. As
well, throughout the rest of the manuals, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION notices are displayed where necessary,
drawing attention to possible hazards when performing certain procedures.
Only trained personnel should be allowed to operate or work on the machine.
The information contained in this manual is current at time of printing. Improvements to the machine are on-going and
may not be covered, therefore in these cases contact your Tigercat dealer for the appropriate information.
Tigercat reserves the right to make changes to the machine after this manual release date that may not immediately
appear in this manual.
Every effort is made to send out updates on a regular basis. If the machine in question was built after the release
date of this manual and there is a discrepancy, call Tigercat service department. The release date appears on the first
page.
The Company reserves the right to change information contained herein at any time without prior notice.
v
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS..................................................................................... vi
Introduction Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS
Please record all serial numbers related to this machine below and have ready before calling for assistance.
The machine serial number plate is located inside the

cab behind the operator's seat.
The machine serial number is also stamped on the front
of the upper structure between the hoist cylinder mount
and the right side of the cab.
Machine Model Number: _________________________

Machine Serial Number: _________________________
Model Year: ___________________________________
845C-128
Cab machine serial number plate location.
845C-131
Upper structure serial number stamp location.

The engine identification label is located on top of the
engine and identifies the engine serial number.
The engine serial number is also stamped on the left
side of the engine block, on top of the lubricating oil
cooler housing.
Engine Serial Number: __________________________

Engine Date of Manufacture: ______________________
845C-130
Engine identification label and stamped engine serial

number locations.
vi
STANDARDS ROPS, TOPS, FOPS, OPS..........................................................................................................vii
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Introduction
THIS OPERATOR ENCLOSURE MEETS THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS:
• OREGON OSHA 437-007-0775:14a TIP-OVER PROTECTION STRUCTURES (TOPS)
• ISO 8082-2:2011 ROLL OVER PROTECTION STRUCTURES (ROPS)
• ISO 8084:1993 OPERATOR PROTECTION STRUCTURES (OPS)
• ISO 8083:1989 11 600J FALLING OBJECTS PROTECTION STRUCTURES (FOPS)
• ISO 2867:1994
• SAE J1356: FEB. 1988
• Oregon osha 437-007-0775:14b,c
• AS 4988 2002
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIRS:
The integrity of the ROPS, TOPS, FOPS, OPS structure and its continued ability to provide the level of protection it
was designed for could be seriously affected by any modifications to the structure, its mounting or to the chassis to
which it is attached.
Tigercat emphasizes that the certification of approval of the ROPS, TOPS, FOPS, OPS structure will become void if
any such modifications take place.
Tigercat may officially grant approval for modifications only by:
(i) Written approval of repairs or modifications signed by the Tigercat Engineering Manager; or
(ii) Approved modifications officially released by Tigercat.
Both of the above are provided that the work is carried out in the factory approved manner.
Unauthorized modifications and/or repairs made or contributed to by a customer or a Tigercat distributor may
result in creating a dangerous situation and therefore the customer or Tigercat distributor will be considered to have
assumed the risk involved or be negligent in creating this situation.
Tigercat will not be held responsible for situations arising from having created unauthorized modifications/changes to
the structure.
Operator's cabs are designed to ROPS, TOPS, FOPS, OPS standards so that they will withstand force and absorb
energy during a roll over (ROPS), tip-over (TOPS), when resisting the impact of a falling object (FOPS) and minimize
the possibility of operator injury from penetrating objects (OPS). When a permanent deflection of the structure
occurs, the structure can no longer provide the original designed level of protection and should be replaced. Attempts
to straighten the structure, particularly by the application of heat, can reduce still further the structures remaining
capability to protect.
The mounting and the frame or chassis to which the cab is attached is considered an integral part of the ROPS,
TOPS, FOPS, OPS and is included in the design, test and certification of the product.
Contact the Service department before attempting any modifications or repair
to tip-over protective structures.
vii
NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES.............................................................................................viii
Introduction Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher

NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES
The installation of any unauthorized attachment or changes made of any kind to this Tigercat product could affect the
product's ability to perform as originally intended. The product's integrity, stability and it's ability to perform safely could
be at serious risk.
IT IS Tigercat POLICY THAT NO CHANGES ARE TO BE MADE TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING DELETIONS OR
ADDITIONS OTHER THAN A Tigercat APPROVED OPTION FITTED IN THE FACTORY APPROVED MANNER.
Official approval to make changes or install options is only to be undertaken as follows:
(i) The relevant options for that product must be shown or listed on current Tigercat documentation or
literature such as a printed specification sheet, price list, parts manual, or product literature issued by
Tigercat.
(ii) Approved options or product changes authorized in writing by the Tigercat Engineering Manager.
AUTHORIZATION BY ANY OTHER PERSON IS UNACCEPTABLE.
Unauthorized changes made or contributed to by a person or organization may result in creating a dangerous
situation and therefore the person or organization will be considered to have assumed the risk involved or be
negligent in having created this situation.
Weight is an important factor when considering the addition of options or an attachment, Refer to your Tigercat
distributor for information on maximum permissible operating weight and the effect the addition of various options may
have on your machine.
Tigercat will not be held responsible for any situation that may arise resulting from Non-approved Field Product
Changes to its product.
Should Tigercat become involved in a dispute resulting from changes made to the product without proper
authorization by Tigercat as stated above, Tigercat will take whatever action is appropriate to protect its interests.
The product warranty policy and the certification on any safety items installed on the modified product will become
NULL and VOID if the above policy is not adhered to as specified.
Non-approved product changes also nullify warranties given to Tigercat by its component manufacturers.
viii
SAFETY...............................................................................................................................................................1

SECTION 1 – SAFETY
Read and understand this safety section prior to operating any equipment.
Read and understand all manuals for any attachment or accessories.
CONTENTS – SECTION 1 ISSUE 1.1, APRIL 2016
BACKOVER ACCIDENTS – AVOIDING..................................................................................................... 1.9

BATTERY SAFETY.................................................................................................................................... 1.8
BEFORE WELDING................................................................................................................................. 1.23
CAB EXITS...............................................................................................................................................1.10
CABLE ASSIST........................................................................................................................................ 1.15
CABLE ASSIST MOUNT...................................................................................................................... 1.15
CABLE TENSION................................................................................................................................. 1.16
DAILY CHECKS.................................................................................................................................... 1.15
LOADING DIRECTIONS....................................................................................................................... 1.16
COOLING SYSTEM....................................................................................................................... 1.21, 1.43
EMERGENCY CAB EXITS....................................................................................................................... 1.10
ER BOOM SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................................... 1.25
EXHAUST FUMES................................................................................................................................... 1.22
FELLING TREES......................................................................................................................................1.17
FIRE PREVENTION................................................................................................................................. 1.31
DRY CHEMICAL CLEANUP PROCEDURES....................................................................................... 1.35
FIRE PREVENTION GUIDELINES....................................................................................................... 1.31
WHAT TO DO AFTER A MACHINE FIRE HAS OCCURRED............................................................... 1.34
WHAT TO DO TO PREPARE FOR A MACHINE FIRE......................................................................... 1.32
WHAT TO DO WHEN A MACHINE FIRE OCCURS............................................................................. 1.33
FLUID INJECTION INJURY..................................................................................................................... 1.26
FLUID LEAKS..........................................................................................................................................1.21
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS........................................................................................................ 1.4
GREASE INJECTION INJURY................................................................................................................. 1.27
HAZARD ZONE..........................................................................................................................................1.5
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE HAZARD........................................................................................................ 1.21
INTERLOCK SWITCH, SAFETY.............................................................................................................. 1.10
LIGHTENING SAFETY AWARENESS
LIGHTNING SAFETY........................................................................................................................... 1.28
WHAT IS A LIGHTNING STRIKE?........................................................................................................ 1.28
LIGHTNING SAFETY AWARENESS
WHAT IS A LIGHTNING STRIKE?........................................................................................................ 1.28
LIQUID STARTING AID.............................................................................................................................. 1.9
LOOSE CLOTHING HAZARD.................................................................................................................. 1.21
MACHINE STABILITY AND TRACTION
WITH LEVELER................................................................................................................................... 1.12
WITHOUT LEVELER............................................................................................................................ 1.14
NOISE LEVEL INSIDE CAB....................................................................................................................... 1.3
OPERATING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS..................................................................................................... 1.9
PARKING THE MACHINE........................................................................................................................ 1.18
PNEUMATIC GREASE GUNS, USING.................................................................................................... 1.27
1.1
Safety Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
PRIOR TO WELDING.............................................................................................................................. 1.23
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT...................................................................................................................... 1.4
REFUELLING.............................................................................................................................................1.9
SAFETY HAZARDS – OPERATING.......................................................................................................... 1.7
SAFETY HAZARDS – VITON SEALS........................................................................................................ 1.7
SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH ON FRONT DOOR............................................................................... 1.10
SAFETY LABELS..................................................................................................................................... 1.36
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERAL....................................................................................................... 1.4
BACKOVER ACCIDENTS...................................................................................................................... 1.9
HAZARD ZONE...................................................................................................................................... 1.5
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING..................................................................................................................... 1.4
VITON SEALS........................................................................................................................................ 1.7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, OPERATING.................................................................................................... 1.9
CAB EXITS...........................................................................................................................................1.10
FELLING TREES.................................................................................................................................. 1.17
INTERLOCK SWITCH.......................................................................................................................... 1.10
LIQUID STARTING AID.......................................................................................................................... 1.9
MACHINE STABILITY AND TRACTION............................................................................................... 1.12
PARKING THE MACHINE.................................................................................................................... 1.18
SEAT BELT.............................................................................................................................................1.9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, SERVICING................................................................................................... 1.19
BEFORE SERVICING OR REPAIRING EQUIPMENT......................................................................... 1.19
CONNECTING BATTERY CABLES..................................................................................................... 1.19
DISCONNECTING BATTERY CABLES............................................................................................... 1.19
ER BOOM SYSTEM............................................................................................................................. 1.25
FLUID INJECTION INJURY.................................................................................................................. 1.26
GREASE INJECTION INJURY............................................................................................................. 1.27
LEVELING SYSTEM............................................................................................................................ 1.22
WHEN SERVICING THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM............................................................................... 1.19
SAFETY SYMBOLS................................................................................................................................... 1.4
SEAT BELT.................................................................................................................................................1.9
SERVICING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.................................................................................................... 1.19
SIGNAL WORDS........................................................................................................................................ 1.4
TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE........................................................................................................... 1.18
1.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Safety
VIBRATION AND NOISE LEVEL INSIDE
CAB
NOISELEVELS
Noise Level Inside Cab dB(A)
As per Tigercat test ETR00107
Microphone direction:
Forward Rear Left Right
Driving max speed (High) 75 77 78 77
Driving max speed (Low) 71 71 72 71
Boom opertation 74 72 75 73
Wear a suitable hearing protective device such

as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against noise.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause
impairment or loss of hearing. This machine exceeds
70 dB(A) in the cab and exceeds 85 dB(A) when
servicing machine engine.
Check with your local Safety Commission to determine
if hearing protection is required at these levels.
Vibration Level - Whole-body

As per Tigercat test ETR007 & ISO 2631-1
Weighted rms acceleration (m/s2)
Seat
Seat-back Feet
Health Comfort
Driving max speed (High)
x-axis (back-to-chest) 0.2370 0.5630 0.4020
y-axis (right-to-left) 0.2310 0.3200 0.4200
z-axis (buttocks-to-head) 0.4660 0.2110 0.6140
Σ 0.6571 0.5700 0.4850 0.2850
Driving max speed (Low)
Σ 0.2890 0.2568 0.1800 0.1000
Boom operation
Σ 0.9304 0.7310 0.5070 0.1740
*Note for whole-body, weighted RMS acceleration values can exceed 0,5m/s2.
as per clause 3.6.3 Machinery Directive 98/37/EC Annex 1.
Vibration Level - Hand/Arm

As per Tigercat test ETR007
Weighted rms acceleration (m/s2)
Driving max speed (High)
Σ 1.770
Driving max speed (Low)
Σ 1.170
Boom operation
Σ 0.770
*Note for hand/arm, all weighted RMS acceleration values are below 2.5 m/s 2
as per clause 3.6.3 Machinery Directive 98/37/EC Annex 1.
VIBRATION LEVEL
1.3
SAFETY SYMBOLS GENERAL

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Remember that safety is a prime responsibility of
all.
To minimize the risks and promote safety at all
times, this section of the operator’s manual details
a number of safety rules which should always be
followed and obeyed.
This safety alert symbol means ATTENTION! Always read the operator's manual before
BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED! operating the machine. Pay close attention to
WARNINGS and HAZARD identifications.
The safety alert symbol identifies important safety
messages on machines, safety signs, in manuals,
or elsewhere. When you see this symbol, be alert
to the possibility of personal injury or death. Follow
the instructions in the safety message.
UNDERSTANDING SIGNAL WORDS
DANGER
Follow all instructions from safety inspector and
DANGER indicates an imminently supervisors.
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, You must be fully trained to operate this piece
will result in death or serious injury. of equipment. Know the capabilities and the
limitations of the equipment. Learn the most
efficient operating techniques.
WARNING
Do not let untrained persons operate the machine.
WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury.
Use recommended protective clothing and safety

devices such as gloves, safety boots, safety hat,
goggles, and ear protection when necessary.
These safety rules highlight both general and
specific measures the operator should be familiar
with and adhere to. More specific measures are
illustrated with pictograms which may also be
attached to the machine in locations pertinent to
their respective message. Keep safety labels in
good condition. Repair or replace damaged labels.
1.4
KEEP BACK
150 m (500 ft)
The following diagram illustrates the hazard zone.

All personnel should be kept clear of this zone Wear a suitable hearing protective device such
while the equipment is operating. as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against noise.
The hazard zone should be considered off limits Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause
to all individuals. impairment or loss of hearing. This machine
exceeds 70 dB(A) in the cab and exceeds
85 dB(A) when servicing machine engine.
Always use the handrails and steps provided when
mounting and dismounting from the machine.
150 M (500
Do not jump off the machine at any time.
Do not try to climb onto or off of a moving
machine.
150 M (500 150 M (500 Do not use the seat armrest or joystick as handles
when entering or leaving the cab.
150 M (500
860C-039 HAZARD ZONE
DANGER
The safety of persons outside the cab is the Do not use the machine foot controls as steps.
responsibility of the machine operator.
When mounting or dismounting the machine
When approaching an operating machine on foot, always use the three point technique. Use one
stay at least 150 m (500 ft) away until the operator hand with two feet or two hands with one foot.
recognizes your presence. Make sure that all
equipment is shut down before advancing to the
machine. WARNING
NOTE: Opening the cab front door will stop
machine functions. Opening the cab side door will
NOT stop machine functions.
Avoid mounting or dismounting the

machine in areas with slippery surfaces.
Dry, deice, clean up or cover slippery
surfaces with an anti-slip material before
mounting or dismounting the machine.
1.5
Do not operate the machine with any defective or
WARNING inoperable components.
Check all fluid levels.
Do not walk on machine surfaces with
steel cleated foot wear. Steel cleats on Do not operate the machine with any of the
steel surfaces are slippery and do not exhaust system, safety covers, oil shields, or other
provide a safe foot hold. devices removed.
WARNING
It is not recommended to walk on machine

surfaces that are not designated walking
areas.
No attempt should be made to walk on
angled steel surfaces or surfaces that are
irregular in shape. Keep a first aid kit in an easily accessible location
on the vehicle at all times.
Walking surfaces on the machine must be
covered with anti-slip materials to provide WORKING WITH OIL
a safe foot hold and prevent slipping.
Direct contact with oil implies a risk of skin
These anti-slip surfaces should be complaints e.g., eczema. Strict hygiene should
maintained on a regular basis. If the always be observed.
surface shows signs of wear, the anti-slip
Some advice which should be observed:
material must be replaced immediately.
• Oils used in this machine may be hot enough
to cause serious burns.
To reduce risk of fire, machines should be
completely cleaned of debris at least daily, • Avoid contact with oil, particularly heated oil.
particularly around the engine exhaust • Oil on the skin should be washed off
components. Hydraulic oil leaks, excess grease, immediately with soap and water.
fuel and oil accumulation (including spillage)
should be eliminated immediately, always turn • Wear protective gloves. Hands should
OFF the engine before cleaning the machine. be clean before putting on gloves. Apply
protective cream to the hands to make
Maintain a clean cab interior, clear away trash or washing easier.
debris.
• Don't put oily rags in your pockets.
The machine should be washed completely at
every major service. • Oil soiled clothing should be changed as soon
as possible.
Inspect the machine daily for signs of damage or
unusual wear, to structures. • Always keep a change of clothing, but not in
the machine where it can become dirty.
Check for fluid leaks, or faulty operation. Repair
or replace malfunctioning parts and systems • Cuts and abrasions must be attended to
immediately. immediately. Clean them and apply first-aid.
Check windows and door guards for damage. • Avoid breathing in oil fumes.
Check protective windows for cracks, a damaged • Wash hands and arms frequently, e.g., at each
window has reduced strength at stopping objects. meal break.
All damaged windows must be replaced with • Oily rags and gloves must be safely discarded
original equipment. after use.
Check windows for scratching, crazing and Read, understand and follow all general
cloudiness that could impair visibility. safety precautions specified by the saw head
manufacturer.
1.6
SAFETY HAZARDS – VITON SEALS SAFETY HAZARDS – OPERATING
O-rings and other seals manufactured of Viton Maintain a charged fire extinguisher on the vehicle
material (fluorine rubber) produce a highly at all times and know how to use it.
corrosive acid (Hydrofluoric) when subjected to
Do not carry passengers either in the cab or
temperatures above 315°C (600°F).
anywhere else on the machine. The vehicle is
This contamination can have extreme provided with, and approved for seating for the
consequences on human tissue since it is almost operator only.
impossible to remove after contact.
Do not allow anyone who may be unfit, physically
The following procedures are recommended when or mentally or who may be under the influence of
inspecting equipment that has been subjected to alcohol or drugs, to operate the machine.
high temperatures such as fire:
When moving the machine, watch that enough
• Visually inspect any seals or gaskets which clearance is available on both sides and above the
have suffered from heat, they will appear black machine or any of its attachments. Extra clearance
and sticky. may be required particularly where the ground is
uneven.
• If these are found, do not touch!
Approach with extreme caution any area where
• Determine the material composition of any
overhanging electrical power lines are present.
seals or gaskets. If fluoro-elastomer seals
Serious injury or death by electrocution can result
(Viton, fluorel, or tecmoflon) have been used,
if the machine or any of its attachments are not
the affected area must be decontaminated
kept a safe distance from these lines.
before undertaking further work. Natural
rubber and nitrile materials are not hazardous. Maintain a distance of 3 m (10 ft) between the
machine or boom and any power line carrying up
• Disposable heavy duty gloves (neoprene)
to 50,000 volts or less plus 10 mm (0.5 in) for each
must be worn and the affected area
additional 1,000 volts above the 50,000 volt level.
decontaminated by washing thoroughly with
limewater (Calcium Hydroxide solution). If State/Provincial, local or job site regulations
require even greater safety distances than stated
• Any cloths, residue and gloves must be safely
above, adhere strictly to these regulations for your
discarded after use.
own protection.
NOTE: Burning discarded items is not
If the machine must be transported, make
recommended except in an approved incineration
sure that it is adequately secured to the
process where the dangerous products are treated
transporting vehicle. Refer to VEHICLE
by alkaline scrubbing.
MOVING INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR'S MANUAL.
Stopping the engine immediately after it has been
working under load can result in overheating
and premature wear of the engine components.
Reduce engine speed to LOW IDLE and let run
for approximately five minutes to allow gradual
dissipation of heat and also to reduce turbo speed.
This will also prevent loss of coolant by after boil
and possible hot spot damage to the engine.
1.7
Be aware when performing service and

maintenance tasks that surfaces and grab handles
in and around the engine and cooling system
may become very hot when the engine has been
running. Contact with hot surfaces may cause
injury.
WARNING
Comply with instructions in this manual and also
your company’s regulations for the operation of Battery posts, terminals and related
this machine. accessories contain lead and lead
Read, understand and follow all general compounds, chemicals known to the State
safety precautions specified by the saw head of California to cause cancer and birth
manufacturer. defects or other reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
If acid is accidentally splashed into your eyes,
flush immediately with clean water and get
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
medical attention.
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State Do not attempt to charge a frozen battery, it can
of California to cause cancer and birth explode.
defects or other reproductive harm.
When servicing the electrical system, turn OFF
the battery disconnect switch before removing
the battery compartment cover. Remove the
battery cables from the batteries disconnecting the
negative (–) cables first. Perform the service work,
then attach the battery cables reconnecting the
positive (+) cables first.
Do not short out battery terminals for any reason.
Serious burns or an explosion can result.
CAUTION
Lead-acid batteries contain sulphuric

acid which can severely damage eyes
or skin on contact. Always wear a safety
face shield, rubber gloves and protective
clothing to reduce risk of accidents.
Lead-acid batteries produce flammable
and explosive gasses. Keep arcs, sparks,
and open flames a safe distance from the
batteries.
1.8
AVOID INJURY FROM BACKOVER
ACCIDENTS OPERATING
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
S≤15 mg/kg
ULTRA
Turn OFF the engine when LOW SULFUR
refuelling. Do not
FUEL
refuel the machine or work on the ONLY
fuel system
36686AUNI R0
while smoking or near flames or sparks.
Before moving machine, be sure all persons are Attach a grounding strap to an unpainted metal
clear of the area. surface on the machine if the refuelling tank or
nozzle is so equipped.
Always be alert for bystanders moving into the
work area. Use horn to warn bystanders before Check that no other personnel have moved into a
moving the machine. hazardous area before starting the machine.
When using a signal person, keep the person in Sound the machine horn before starting the
view at all times. Always be sure the signal person machine.
is clear before backing up.
To avoid backover accidents:
• Always look around before you back up. Be
sure that everyone is clear.
• Keep the motion warning alarm in working
condition. The motion warning alarm must
sound when the machine is moving in forward
or reverse. The operator’s seat is equipped with lap and
shoulder harness belts. Use both of these restraint
• Use a signal person when backing up if view
systems at all times when operating the machine.
is obstructed. Always keep the signal person
in view. Start the engine according to the instructions in
this manual. Refer to OPERATING THE MACHINE
• Learn the meaning of all flags, signs
in SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S MANUAL.
and markings on the job site and who is
responsible for signalling.
• Keep windows, mirrors and lights in good WARNING
condition.
• EXPLOSION HAZARD.
• Dust, heavy rain, fog, snow etc. can reduce • DO NOT USE ETHER.
visibility. As visibility decreases, reduce speed • ENGINE EQUIPPED WITH
and use proper lighting. HEATER STARTING AID.
• USE OF ETHER COULD
Turn OFF the engine when refuelling. Do not RESULT IN DEATH OR
smoke while refuelling. SERIOUS INJURY.
36782BENG R0
Never use a liquid starting aid to start an engine.

This machine is equipped with a computer
controlled heating element in the engine intake
system. Starting fluids will explode on contact
with the heating element.
1.9
CAB EXITS SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH ON
Before moving the machine to the work site, check
FRONT DOOR:
to ensure that all doors, panels, and access covers The front door is equipped with a safety interlock
are installed properly and secured. switch to prevent the machine from being operated
while the front door is open (pilot system is shut
There are three ways to exit the cab in case of an
off).
emergency.
1. Front door, this is also the main point of
INTERLOCK
entry and is the only door that should be used SWITCH
ACTUATOR
under normal operating conditions to enter or ON DOOR
leave the cab. This door is also equipped with
a safety interlock switch. Refer to SAFETY
INTERLOCK SWITCH ON FRONT DOOR in
THIS SECTION.
INTERLOCK SWITCH
2. Side door, should be used for emergency 822C-251 (FRONT DOOR)
exits only. Do not use this door to routinely
enter or leave the cab. This door is not Push the red PILOT OFF switch and confirm
equipped with a safety interlock switch and the PILOT OFF Icon is activated (yellow) on the
therefore when left open will not deactivate the MD3 display before removing seat belt. Do not
pilot controls in the cab. Always turn OFF the use the front door interlock switch to turn pilot
engine before using the side door exit. OFF.
3. Escape hatch, this is a third cab exit for use if NOTE: Engine can be started but the machine
the side exit or front door exit become blocked. functions cannot be operated with the door open.
This hatch is not equipped with a safety
interlock switch and therefore when left open
WARNING
will not deactivate the pilot controls in the cab.
Always turn OFF the engine before using the
escape hatch exit. The door safety interlock switch and the
pilot reset switch are a safety feature and
It is important that the operator of the machine be their function must not be compromised in
familiar with these emergency exits and how to any way.
use them.
All operators should practice using all the cab exits
to become familiar with escape procedures should
they need to perform them in the dark, when the
machine is in a rolled position, or other possible
adverse condition.
All three exits should be checked to make sure
they are operational and will function in an
emergency. The safety interlock mechanism on
the front door or the side door and escape hatch
retaining mechanisms must not be tampered with
or compromised.
IMPORTANT!
Unlock both doors before operating the machine
to allow opening from the outside in case of an
emergency. Make sure the doors are operational,
open the doors twice, once using the exterior latch
handle and once using the interior handle.
For additional information, refer to EMERGENCY
EXITS in SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S
MANUAL.
1.10
TO OPERATE:
Close the front door and press the green pilot ON WARNING
reset switch . The pilot ON icon will be activated
(green) on the MD3 display.
Once the safety interlock system has been
activated, the safety of both the operator
and all persons outside the cab becomes the
responsibility of the operator.
WARNING Keep the cab doors closed when driving or

steering the machine to prevent accidental entry of
branches and debris into the cab.
Keep the cab doors closed and use the lap
and shoulder belts when driving or steering
the machine to prevent being thrown from the
operator's cab.
Secure loose items in the cab.
Prior to commencing work, check all equipment
1. When the engine is running, Do not allow controls to ensure the machine responds correctly.
anyone in areas of the machine where they
may be crushed by moving components. Make sure that all safety screens and guards
including the skylight are installed and properly
2. Maintain a safe operating distance between secured.
the machine and other personnel. Never
operate the boom or saw head over the heads Always rest the saw head on the ground when
of bystanders. operation is stopped, regardless if the engine is
running or not.
3. Never travel near coworkers or other pieces of
equipment with the saw head running. Operate the machine only from a seated position
in the operator’s seat.
4. Do not allow people or other pieces of
equipment near the harvesting operation. Watch for ground hazards such as metal debris,
wire fencing or rocks.
5. Do not turn on the saw head until the machine
is at the harvesting site. When travelling, position the saw head and boom
so as not to impair vision.
6. Use only prearranged and approved signalling
practices. If vision is limited by dust, smoke, fog, rain or
snow, stop the machine until visibility is restored.
Do not open an escape hatch or the cab doors to
increase ventilation when operating the machine. If the saw guard has been installed, do not remove
until at the cutting site. Remove the guard before
starting the engine.
CAUTION
Do not open the cab doors or window

screens when cab is on a slope. The doors
and screens are heavy and could swing
out with considerable force. Anyone in the
path of swing could be injured. Anyone
opening the door or screen and holding
on to it could be pulled out of the cab and
injured.
1.11
MACHINE STABILITY AND TRACTION –
MACHINES WITH LEVELER
This machine is designed to operate on rough
terrain and slopes commonly found in forestry
applications. However, ground conditions vary
greatly with changing soil types, slope angles,
moisture, snow and ice, rocks, boulders and
stumps, and fallen trees. All of these factors
affect the machine’s stability against tip-over and
traction to resist slipping. This machine may not be
capable of operating on some ground conditions,
and must be used with caution. 20°
Whenever possible work within the normal working 860C-009
range of the boom system as shown in FIG. 1.

NOTE: In any boom position, both inside and
outside of the normal operating range, there is a
risk of instability and tipping.
When it is necessary to work outside of the
normal working range, be aware the stability of
the machine is reduced. The risk of tipping is
increased while operating in the reduced stability
working range.
NORMAL 16°
WORKING
RANGE OF BOOM 860C-010
SYSTEM
FIG.2–UNDERCARRIAGE LEVELING ANGLES
UPHILL
REDUCED
STABILITY To minimize the risk of tipping observe the
WORKING
RANGE following:
• Do not attempt to operate this machine on
slopes without first receiving proper training.
• Learn the stability limits or “feel” of the
machine by first working on gentle slopes
and by positioning the boom to reduce the
TRACK GEAR
BOX AT REAR OF risk of tipping. Gain experience over time by
UNDERCARRIAGE
gradually increasing the angle of the slopes on
860C-030 FIG. 1 - WORKING RANGES which you are working.
• Keep the saw head as close to the ground as
Be aware the machine is in its least stable position
possible to increase machine stability, and to
on a slope with the boom to the rear.
allow the boom to be quickly lowered to the
All efforts have been made in the design of the ground should the machine begin to tip.
machine to reduce the risk of tipping, however it is
• Always use the LOW speed setting for the
not possible to eliminate the risk of tipping.
track drives when on slopes.
• Travelling at an angle to the slope other than
straight up and down decreases the traction
of the tracks. Increasing the angle to the slope
away from straight up and down can cause
the machine to slide sideways downhill and/or
possibly tip over.
1.12
• Never travel across a steep slope or side hill.
• Always carry any load on the uphill side of the
BOOM TO
machine. FRONT
• Do not lift or move objects that exceed

machine stability.
• Always be prepared to release the load in
case it causes the machine to tip.
• Always position the cab so that you have a
clear view in the direction of travel. Be aware
of ground conditions and obstacles in the
machine’s path before moving the machine.
KEEP SAW HEAD
• When crossing obstacles (boulders, stumps, CLOSE TO GROUND
ditches etc.) the machine can shift rapidly,
TRACK GEAR
greatly affecting the stability of the machine. BOX AT REAR OF
Move slowly over obstacles, and position the UNDERCARRIAGE
boom against the ground to reduce the risk of 860C-013 FIG.3 – CLIMBING SLOPE
the machine shifting rapidly.
• Backing over obstacles unexpectedly while
travelling down a slope poses a tipping risk.
Know the path of the tracks whenever the
machine is moved.
• When climbing a slope the boom should face KEEP SAW
HEAD CLOSE
uphill and the saw head should be kept close TO GROUND
to the ground (FIG. 3). When descending a
slope the boom should face down hill and the
saw head should be kept close to the ground
(FIG. 4). Be particularly aware of machine
stability when changing directions on, or
travelling back down a slope.
860C-011 FIG.4 – DESCENDING SLOPE
• As you gain experience, recognize the
maximum slope on which the machine can
operate cannot be defined simply by an
angle value. Variables in surface terrain, soil
types, rocks, boulders, stumps, and fallen
trees, changing weather conditions, and first
and foremost the operator’s experience and
skill levels greatly affect the maximum slope
limitations. Be aware these factors can result
in a shallow slope posing greater risk than
a relatively steeper slope. Do not attempt to
work on slopes if conditions are beyond your
ability level.
1.13
MACHINE STABILITY AND TRACTION –
MACHINES WITHOUT LEVELER
When working on slopes, travel straight up or
down the slope to prevent roll-over.
Never travel across a steep slope or side hill:
• As a load is added to the saw head the
handling and the stability of the machine will
change.
• To avoid tip over, keep the saw head as low as
possible to maintain a low centre of gravity.
• Always be prepared to dump the load in case
of an emergency.
• Do not overload the machine as this can
create an unstable condition and cause a roll-
over.
1.14
CABLE ASSIST CABLE ASSIST MOUNT
The leveler cable assist mount may improve The cable assist mount can be used with a single
machine maneuverability on steep slopes when or double shackle configuration depending on
attached to a suitable winching device. the winch system. Use only shackles with a pin
diameter of 21⁄2 in. and rated for 55 tonne (121,000
Factors that will affect the safety of the machine as lbf).
it works on steep slopes are:
• Direction of machine travel
• Limitations of machine tractive effort and soil
conditions
• Experience of the operator
• Weather
• Load sizes (boom position and load)
• Poor visibility/lighting conditions
DAILY CHECKS B
On a daily basis prior to operating the equipment A

check: 855D-036
Single Shackle Configuration

• All equipment fluid levels.
A Shackle
• Maintain a clean cab interior, clear away trash B Cable Assist Mount
or debris.
• Secure loose items in the cab.
• Do not store tools, oil containers or other
equipment in the cab
• Functional check of all escape hatches.
• All covers, roof and doors are closed and
latched.
• The cable assist mount for structural cracks
and loose or missing bolts.
On a weekly basis check the torque tightening
points on the cable assist mount. Make sure the 855D-037
A B
M24 bolts have a torque value of 915 Nm (675
lbf-ft). Double Shackle Configuration
A Shackle
For additional information refer to MACHINE B Cable Assist Mount
STABILITY AND TRACTION – MACHINES WITH
LEVELER in THIS SECTION.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not open cab doors or window screens

when cab is on a slope. The doors and
screens are heavy and could swing out
with considerable force. Anyone in the
path of swing could be injured. Anyone
opening the door or screen and holding The lifting bail on the cable assist mount
on to it could be pulled out of the cab and is for installation of the cable assist mount
injured. only. Do not use the lifting bail for anything
other than its intended use.
1.15
CABLE TENSION
To prevent damaging the cable assist mount and WARNING
undercarriage the following acceptable maximum
continuous cable tensions must not be exceeded. Always use the proper equipment.
Always inspect the cable and cable assist
• Maximum continuous cable tension for a
mount for damage before using. Never
single shackle configuration is 18 tonne
use equipment that shows signs of poor
(40,000 lbf).
maintenance or damage. Repairs should
• Maximum continuous cable tension for a only be made by qualified personnel.
double shackle configuration is 9 tonne
(20,000 lbf) for each cable.
LOADING DIRECTIONS
To prevent damaging the cable assist mount and
undercarriage the following acceptable loading
directions must not be exceeded.
855D-038
1.16
FELLING TREES
WARNING
Pieces of wood, debris from the ground and even
teeth separating from the saw blade become
potentially dangerous missiles when thrown from Do not operate this machine to lift or move
these machines. any objects other than what it is designed
to lift or move.
Inspect saw teeth, tooth retaining bolts, saw disc
The boom system is intended for use in
and felling head assembly.
tree felling applications only.
Ensure that all saw tooth retaining bolts are at
• Do not use the boom to service other
correct torque value. Refer to attachment manual
equipment.
for correct values.
• Do not use the boom to lift items such
Replace all worn saw teeth or rotate worn teeth to as tires, engines, cylinders, boom
align unused cutting tips. components, etc.
Always replace saw tooth retaining bolts when • Do not modify the boom system.
replacing saw teeth.
• Do not add hooks or lugs to the boom
Inspect saw disc for stress cracks and that saw for the purpose of attaching lifting
disc does not wobble due to worn saw shaft rigging.
bearings.
• Do not use the attachment for any
Never start the machine if saw blade has missing purpose other than the intended felling
teeth or teeth retaining bolts or a bent saw disc. function.
Shut down machine immediately if vibration occurs Maintain a safe operating distance between
during cutting. the machine and workers and all other
Check the saw discharge area is clear and personnel. It is the duty of the operator
undamaged. to ensure that no person approach the
machine while in use.
When moving from tree to tree with the saw blade
Failure to follow the above instructions
turning, take care not to make contact with other
could result in serious injury or death.
vegetation or debris.
Do not over load felling head.
Never use this machine to clear a logging deck
Work within your operating skills, do not attempt on a new tract of timber when the rest of the
to cut down a tree that is too large for the felling equipment and operator's are also moving in.
head. Preplan to clear decks in advance before other
Operate so the chip discharge area of the felling equipment arrives.
head (where applicable) is not directed at people, Never work alone. Regularly inform other crew
livestock, buildings or other machines. members of your intentions, location and length of
When cutting, properly position felling head in front time to perform duties.
of tree and have saw blade running at full rpm. Stop the saw blade before leaving the cutting area.
Always know and control the direction the tree will NOTE: The saw blade will continue to free wheel
fall to prevent injury to coworkers or damage other for several minutes after the saw switch has been
vehicles. turned OFF.
When backing away from a cut, watch out for To stop the blade from rotating, carefully lower
obstacles in your path. the saw blade onto a stump gently to prevent
Always travel with felling head as close to the unnecessary loading of the saw blade, saw
ground as possible, never elevate the felling head housing and bearings.
unless necessary.
1.17
WHEN PARKING THE MACHINE: TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE
Park the machine at least 15 m (50 ft) away from When transporting the machine watch that enough
other equipment and in a cleared area. In the clearance is available on both sides and above the
event of a fire, this distance will minimize the machine or any of its attachments to avoid contact
chance of the fire spreading to other equipment. with power or telephone lines, bridge structures,
Before leaving the operator's cab, lower the saw etc.
head onto the ground. Before transporting the machine check to
If out of the operator's cab for an extended period ensure that all doors, panels and access covers
turn OFF the engine. are installed properly and secured. Improperly
secured doors or panels pose a serious danger to
STICK CYLINDERS pedestrians and other vehicles.
FULLY EXTENDED
WARNING
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY DO NOT operate this machine to lift or
SUPPORTED move any objects other than what it is
860C-001 designed to lift or move.
• Do not use the boom to service other
1. Park the machine on level ground with the equipment.
attachment resting firmly on the ground. • Do not use the boom to lift items such
2. Apply the swing brake. as tires, engines, cylinders, boom
components, etc.
3. Turn OFF the engine.
• Do not modify the boom system.
4. Remove the ignition key.
for the purpose of attaching lifting
rigging.
purpose other than the intended
function.
OFF ON
24863A 24863A R0 Maintain a safe operating distance between
the machine and workers and all other
5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. personnel. It is the duty of the operator
to ensure that no person approach the
NOTE: Wait 30 seconds after turning OFF the
engine before turning off the battery disconnect
switch. If the battery disconnect is turned off Failure to follow the above instructions
before this time period the engine electronic could result in serious injury or death..
control unit (ECU) will register a fault.
1.18
WHEN SERVICING THE ELECTRICAL
SERVICING SAFETY SYSTEM:
PRECAUTIONS 1. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
2. Remove the battery cables from the batteries
disconnecting the negative (–) cables first.
3. Perform the service work.
4. Attach the battery cables reconnecting the
5. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.
Conduct maintenance inspections at least as

frequently as recommended in SECTION 3 of
THIS MANUAL.
Install a DO NOT START ENGINE sign on
the operator’s cab door and in the engine Before performing maintenance or repair work
compartment when making repairs to the machine. on any equipment, consult the manufacturer’s
BEFORE SERVICING OR REPAIRING instruction manual and follow the recommended
EQUIPMENT: procedures.
The charge air cooler, radiator and the engine
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED cooling system should be cleaned and serviced
at least daily to maintain moderate engine
temperatures.
TIP OF STICK WARNING

BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
This machine is equipped with a reversible
860C-001 cooling fan. Exercise care when working in
this area with the engine running.
1. Park the machine on level ground with the

If the fan switch in the cab is in the AUTO position,
attachment resting firmly on the ground.
the fan could turn ON and go into REVERSE mode
2. Apply the swing brake. without warning.
OFF ON
24863A 24863A R0
5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

NOTE: Some wiring on the machine is live
even when the battery disconnect switch is off.
1.19
The radiator and the engine cooling system
should be cleaned and serviced daily to maintain
moderate engine temperatures.
IMPORTANT!
PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK
WARNING A
845C-097 B
845C-001
Hot fluids and hot machine surfaces can Before servicing the hydraulic system, open
cause serious burns! the air vent valve (A) to release air pressure
from the hydraulic oil tank.
• Before servicing the machine, allow the
engine cooling system, fuel system, Air vent valve is open when handle is parallel
exhaust system, hydraulic system and to valve.
machine surfaces to cool down. Air vent valve is closed when handle is
• Use a thermometer to check surface perpendicular to valve (shown).
and system temperatures to ensure it After service is complete, close the air vent
is safe to begin service work. valve and add air pressure to the hydraulic
• Do not begin service work until the tank using the Schrader valve (B). Make
surface or system temperature has sure the air is clean and dry. Do not exceed
cooled down to below 38°C (100°F)! 34.5 kPa (5 psi). Refer to HYDRAULIC
TANK PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS in
SECTION 3 for details.
1.20
WARNING
Diesel fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure

can penetrate the skin and cause serious
personal injury, blindness, or death. If Explosive release of fluids from pressurized
any oil is injected into the skin, it must be cooling system can cause serious burns.
surgically removed within a few hours by Shut off engine. Only remove coolant fill cap when
a doctor familiar with treating this type of cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
injury. loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure before
removing completely.
Never use your bare hand to check for fluid leaks.
Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
When searching for leaks, wear work gloves and
use a wrench or piece of wood to move hydraulic
hoses. Do not grab hold of hydraulic hoses. Wear
safety goggles for eye protection.
Do not change any pressure or relief setting

unless Tigercat authorized instruction has been
obtained.
Use the proper tool for the job. Repair or replace
worn or damaged tools including lifting equipment
immediately.
Pressure can be maintained in a hydraulic
system long after the power source and pump
have been shut down. Lower the saw head to the
ground, turn OFF the engine and relieve trapped
pressure before performing work on components,
or disconnecting any hoses. Refer to PARKING
BOOM diagram (FIG. 1). Accumulators will self
drain within two minutes of stopping the engine.
Keep your hands, feet, head, and loose clothing
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
away from power driven parts. Tie long hair behind
your head. Remove rings and other jewellery to
prevent electrical shorts and entanglement in
moving parts.
TIP OF STICK
Always be aware of machine pinch points that
BOOM FULLY could cause injury. Never place body parts within
SUPPORTED
the range of motion of the working parts of the
machine.
860C-001 PARKING BOOM FIG.1
Never stand under an object supported with
hydraulics. Always use safety stands or a locking
device.
1.21
Before performing work under the boom system Work in a ventilated area. If it is necessary to run
ensure it is firmly supported. an engine in an enclosed area, use an exhaust
pipe extension to remove toxic exhaust fumes.
WARNING If you don't have an exhaust pipe extension, either

work outside, or open the shop doors.
Always follow saw head manufacturer's
instructions and safety warnings
before approaching saw head to make
adjustments.
WARNING
Do not work below or behind a machine

that is parked on a grade.
Dispose of fluids properly.

WARNING
Do not pour fluids into the ground, stream, pond or
Failure to follow all of the above lake.
instructions could result in serious injury Before draining any fluids, know the proper way to
or death from crushing. dispose of them.
When performing required hydraulic checks
CAUTION and blade speed adjustments. Install the saw
blade guard. Refer to saw head manufacturer's
Do not open cab doors or window screens instructions.
when cab is on a slope. The doors and Read, understand and follow all operating
screens are heavy and could swing out safety precautions specified by the saw head
with considerable force. Anyone in the manufacturer.
path of swing could be injured.
MACHINE MODELS EQUIPPED WITH A
Anyone opening the door or screen and LEVELING SYSTEM
holding on to it could be pulled out of the
cab and injured.
Ensure all personnel are clear before opening or

closing the engine enclosure power roof.
Always install support braces in the leveling

mechanism while performing service and
maintenance tasks. This area is a crush zone.
Keep clear to avoid personal injury or death.
If the engine is running inside a building, ensure

that sufficient ventilation is available to prevent
a build-up of toxic exhaust fumes. Run the
engine only when it is necessary for testing or
adjustments.
1.22
IMPORTANT!
24 VOLT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DISCONNECT THE TWO
PRIOR TO WELDING MULTI-PIN PLUGS FROM THE
ENGINE ECU
NOTE: Prior to welding on any part of the
machine, the repair area should be cleaned and a
fire extinguisher should be made available at the
welding location.
DISCONNECT 4 PIN
ENGINE POWER
STICK CYLINDERS CONNECTOR
FULLY EXTENDED
ENGINE ECU DISCONNECT
855C-017 (LEFT SIDE OF ENGINE)
9. Disconnect the engine electronic control unit

TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY (ECU) by unplugging the four pin engine
SUPPORTED
power connector and the two multi-pin
860C-001 connectors from the left side of the engine.
IMPORTANT!
This machine is equipped with sensitive
electronic control equipment
H845C-209
2. Apply the swing brake.
3. Turn OFF the engine. CHASSIS
GROUND
4. Remove the ignition key. CONNECTION
GROUND
HARNESS
845C-113
OFF ON
24863A 24863A R0
ENGINE GROUND DISCONNECT

5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. (RIGHT SIDE)
6. Attach the welding machine grounding clamp 10. Disconnect the engine ground connection at
so current does not pass through bearings, the chassis.
especially the swing bearing.
7. Removing the battery compartment cover.
8. Disconnect the battery cables from the
batteries, negative (–) cables first.
1.23
DISCONNECT THE
MULTI-PIN PLUG
FROM THE XS2
MODULE
DISCONNECT THE
MULTI-PIN PLUGS
FROM THE XA2
MODULES
H845C-51
13. Disconnect the multi-pin connectors on the

two XA2 Modules mounted on the hydraulic
tank.
When welding is completed reconnect all
DISCONNECT THE
connectors, engine ground and MD3 computer
TWO MULTI-PIN fuse. Attach the battery cables reconnecting
CONNECTORS IN
THE HARNESS the positive (+) cables first and turn the battery
disconnect switch ON.
845D-001 CAB FUSE AND RELAY PANEL
11. Disconnect the XS2 Module multi-pin

connector and the two multi-pin connectors in
the wiring harness.
845C-263
A MD3 Computer Fuse
12. Remove the MD3 computer fuse in the cab

fuse and relay electrical cabinet.
1.24
MACHINE MODELS EQUIPPED WITH
AN ER BOOM SYSTEM
WARNING
This machine is equipped with an ER boom

system. Because of this, it may behave
in an unexpected manner compared to a
conventional boom system.
Pay attention to the following when servicing

the ER Boom System. Certain hydraulic circuits
on this machine are inter-connected in order
to provide level head-travel and to recirculate
hydraulic oil to reduce heat generation and fuel
consumption. As a result, disconnecting hydraulic
lines from one cylinder may release pressure
in a different cylinder at the same time. Before 55987BUNI R0
attempting to disconnect hydraulic hoses or

perform work on the boom system, ensure that:
WARNING
1. The machine is parked on level ground with
the saw head on the ground (FIG. 1). DO NOT operate this machine to lift or
2. The stick cylinders are fully extended (FIG. 1) move any objects other than what it is
or the hoist cylinder fully retracted (FIG. 2). designed to lift or move.
Do not rely on the saw head to support the • Do not use the boom to service other
boom system during servicing. Slow leakage equipment.
in the hydraulic components can cause the • Do not use the boom to lift items such
saw head to move unexpectedly. as tires, engines, cylinders, boom
components, etc.
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED • Do not modify the boom system.
for the purpose of attaching lifting
rigging.
HEAD FLAT
ON GROUND purpose other than the intended
function.
845C-002 FIG. 1 – PARKING BOOM
Maintain a safe operating distance between
HOIST CYLINDER the machine and workers and all other
FULLY RETRACTED
personnel. It is the duty of the operator
to ensure that no person approach the
Failure to follow the above instructions
could result in serious injury or death..
TIP OF STICK BOOM
FULLY SUPPORTED
845C-003 FIG. 2 – PARKING BOOM
1.25
FLUID INJECTION INJURY As always, the best defence against suffering the
effects of fluid injection is to prevent the accident
from occurring in the first place.
WARNING
WHEN SEARCHING FOR POSSIBLE FLUID
LEAKS:
Diesel fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure
can penetrate the skin and could result in • Never search for leaks with your bare hands.
death or serious injury. If any fluid is injected Always wear thick protective gloves.
under the skin, a medical doctor familiar
with the treatment of this type of injury must
surgically remove it within a few hours.
Hydraulic and diesel fuel systems on forestry

machines operate at very high pressures,
often 207 bar (3000 psi) and above. If a loose
connection or a defect in a hose should occur, a
fine, high velocity stream of fluid will result.
Even for systems pressurized to as little as • Be sure to wear safety goggles for eye
7 bar (100 psi), this fluid stream can penetrate protection.
human skin as if it were a hypodermic needle. • Keep all body parts well away from the area
Initially, an accidental fluid injection beneath the being investigated for leaks.
skin may only produce a slight stinging sensation. • Use the end of a long piece of wood to move
There is a danger that you will tend to ignore this, hoses or other obstacles.
thinking that it will get better with time. Most often,
it does not. Within a very short time the wound
may begin to throb painfully, indicating that tissue
damage has already begun.
Similarly fluid injected directly into a blood vessel
can spread rapidly through your circulatory
system. The human body has little ability to purge
injected fluid.
Time becomes critical as tissue damage • Place the end of a long piece of wood in the
progresses rapidly. The longer you delay getting suspected path of any fluid stream. Never use
professional medical attention, the more damage any part of your body.
can occur. • Recognize the source of the leak and the fluid
Although fluid injection accidents are rare, the streaming from it may be very small and not
resulting injury has on occasion required the easily visible. You may only be able to see the
amputation of a finger, a hand or in some cases fluid that accumulates as a result of the fluid
the entire limb. The longer the delay in getting stream.
professional medical aid, the further up the limb WHEN PERFORMING ANY SERVICE
the tissue damage can spread. An injury of this WORK
type can become very serious or even fatal if not
• Stop the engine and relieve all diesel fuel or
dealt with promptly and properly.
hydraulic pressure before disconnecting any
In the event of any suspected fluid injection injury: lines or otherwise working on the system.
• Report the injury to your supervisor • Never grab any hydraulic or diesel fuel
immediately. connectors or hoses when they are subjected
• Seek professional medical attention to pressure.
immediately. • Always ensure that hoses are rated for the
pressures to which they will be subjected.
• Never use any hoses that you suspect could
be defective.
1.26
GREASE INJECTION INJURY WHEN Prior to using a high pressure pneumatic
USING PNEUMATIC GREASE GUNS grease gun perform the following:
Pneumatic grease guns can deliver grease at • All operators of high pressure pneumatic
pressures from 17 – 400 bar (246 – 5,801 psi). grease guns must be trained in the hazards
It takes less than 7 bar (100 psi) to inject a of its operations and the treatment for such
substance through human skin. injuries.
Always get professional medical treatment • Do not operate a high pressure pneumatic
immediately after any type of injection injury. grease gun unless you have been trained
in the proper operation and are aware of all
Provide the physician with information on the type
safety precautions of such a tool.
of grease, the pressure setting of the gun, and
similar details. • Wear protective clothing such as gloves,
safety hat and safety glasses.
The amount of fluid injected, type of fluid (or
material), pressure at which it was injected and • Inspect all parts of the grease gun for wear
the elapsed time between injection and seeking and tear and replace all worn or damaged
medical attention all influence the chances of parts.
successful treatment for this type of serious injury. • Ensure that protective shrouds are installed on
all grease gun nozzles as safety devices.
• Remove dirt and grease from grease fittings
prior to greasing.
• Replace any defective grease fittings on
equipment with new fittings immediately.
• When badly positioned fittings are identified,
replace them with angled or swivel fittings for
easier access.
1.27
LIGHTNING SAFETY
LIGHTNING SAFETY In spite of the popular myth that being struck
AWARENESS by lightning is an unlikely event, the facts show
that lightning strikes occur frequently. As a result
WHAT IS A LIGHTNING STRIKE? loggers are at high risk because their work is
outdoors and close to known strike points such as
Lightning is a discharge of the electricity produced tall trees and heavy equipment.
by a thunderstorm. As the thunderstorm develops,
many small particles of ice within the storm clouds Loggers can increase their chances of avoiding
bump together. These collisions create a positive a lightning strike by following a few simple safety
charge at the top of a cloud and a negative charge practices.
at the bottom. As this continues a second positive 1. Designate a member of your crew to:
charge builds up on the ground beneath the cloud,
▪▪ Monitor daily weather forecasts
concentrated around high objects such as hills,
trees, buildings, equipment and even people. ▪▪ Observe local weather conditions
When the difference between the electrical ▪▪ Alert all other members of the crew when a
charge in the cloud and on the ground becomes possible lightning threat develops
great enough to overcome the resistance of the
2. Don’t start or continue any work that cannot
insulating air between them, an electrical current
be stopped immediately, when a storm moves
flows instantly. This is a lightning strike.
nearby.
The electrical potential in a lightning strike can be
3. Anticipate a high-risk situation and take action
as much as 100 million volts. Lightning strikes can
early by moving to a low-risk location. Do
occur over very large distances, even as much as
not hesitate. If there is lightning, you are in
60 km (37 miles). Lightning travels both in front of
danger.
and behind a thunderstorm and so strikes happen
even when rain has not started or has stopped. 4. Obey the rule - If you see lightning, Flee. If
Lightning can hit in the same place, many times you hear thunder, Clear.
and often spreads out over 18 m (60 feet) within 5. Do not follow the now obsolete guideline to
the soil around the strike point. take shelter when the time between seeing
Thunder always accompanies lightning. When lightning and hearing thunder is 30 seconds or
lightning occurs, the air through which it travels less. This does not provide sufficient time to
is instantaneously heated to a temperature more ensure safety. Always follow step 4.
than 28,000°C (50,000°F). The air expands rapidly 6. Remain in your safe location for 30 minutes
due to this heating, then quickly contracts as it after the last sight of lightning or the last sound
cools. It is this contracting shock wave that we of thunder.
hear as thunder.
The safest location during lightning activity is
In many areas of the world, lightning strikes are inside a fully enclosed, substantially constructed
second only to flooding as the greatest cause of building, a house, office, school, shopping area,
storm related deaths and injuries. Although only etc. These are the safest because of the electrical
10% of lightning strike victims are killed, virtually wiring and plumbing that they contain. Should
all from cardiac or respiratory arrest, over 70% lightning strike, the electrical current will travel
of those that survive suffer severe, life-long through the wiring or plumbing into the ground.
injury and disability. The symptoms of a lightning When such a building is nearby, always seek
strike include memory loss, fatigue, chronic pain, shelter there first.
dizziness, sleeping difficulty and the inability to
complete several tasks at one time.
1.28
Unfortunately loggers do not often work close to WHAT TO DO IF YOU ARE OUTSIDE
buildings and therefore other alternatives need to AND SEE LIGHTNING OR HEAR
be considered. THUNDER
Sheds, weather shelters, hunting blinds, tents If you can, get inside:
and other partially open or small structures are Run to the nearest building, motor vehicle or fully
not safe against lightning strikes as they lack enclosed ROPS equipment cab immediately.
the electrically grounded components of larger Being anywhere outside is not safe.
buildings. They are intended for sun or rain
protection only. Do not seek shelter from lightning If inside a building:
strikes inside these structures. • Don’t watch the lightning storm from open
windows or doorways. Stay in inner rooms.
The second safest location during lightning activity
is inside a fully enclosed car, van, truck or bus with • Stay well away from corded telephones,
a metal roof and metal sides. The electrical energy electrical appliances, lighting fixtures, radio
of a lightning strike to these vehicles is carried to microphones, electrical sockets and plumbing
ground by the conducting outer metal surfaces. pipes and fixtures.
This is called the skin effect. If inside a motor vehicle or fully enclosed
Do not seek safety from lightning strikes in ROPS equipment cab:
vehicles with fibreglass or plastic body shells or in • Under no circumstances whatsoever step
convertible top vehicles. None of these are safe, outside of the vehicle or off the equipment
as they do not offer skin effect lightning protection. to move to another shelter. Very dangerous
Heavy forestry equipment such as a skidder, electrical pathways to ground may go through
loader, feller buncher, forwarder, etc. with a fully you.
enclosed rollover protective structure (ROPS) cab • Shut down all operation, turn off the engine,
take advantage of the skin effect and are therefore close all doors and raise all windows.
safe in electrical storms.
• Sit squarely in the seat with your hands in your
However machines with a rollover canopy only lap and your feet flat on the floor mat.
are not safe against lightning strikes as they are
• Do not touch any metallic objects referenced
open to electrically conductive rainwater and do
to the outside of the vehicle. Do not touch any
not benefit from the skin effect. Operators of this
door and window handles, control levers, foot
equipment must abandon their machines and get
pedals, steering wheels, cab interior walls and
to a safer location before lightning strikes.
any other inside to outside metal objects.
NOTE: Rubber tires on motor vehicles and heavy
• Do not touch any radio or telephone
equipment do not increase safety from lightning
connected to an outside antenna.
strikes. Lightning has already travelled a great
distance through the air to strike the vehicle. In
comparison a few inches of rubber in a tire offers
absolutely no additional insulation.
1.29
If you are caught outside and have nowhere to WHAT TO DO IF YOU FEEL YOUR
go: SKIN TINGLING, YOUR HAIR
• Avoid wide-open areas where you project STANDS ON END, LIGHT METAL
above the surrounding landscape. OBJECTS VIBRATE OR YOU HEAR A
CRACKLING SOUND:
• Seek shelter in a low place, such as a ditch,
ravine, valley, canyon or cave. • Lightning is probably about to strike. You only
have a few seconds to act.
• Get away from open water such as ponds or
streams. • Put your feet together. Crouch down like in a
baseball catcher’s position. Hold your head
• Do not take shelter under any isolated tall
down. Cover your ears to protect them against
trees or small groups of trees.
the noise of the thunder.
• Seek shelter amongst the dense, thick growth
• Do not lie flat on the ground. By touching as
of the shortest trees.
little of the ground as possible, the lightning
• Avoid entering any small enclosures or may not move across the ground to you.
shelters.
WHAT TO DO IF A CO-WORKER HAS
• Do not seek shelter under any motor vehicle BEEN STRUCK BY LIGHTNING:
or heavy equipment.
• The victim does not carry any electrical
• Keep clear of any materials that can conduct charge. There is no danger to anyone
electricity such as wire fences and gates, helping this person. You can touch him or her
metal pipes, poles, rails and tools. immediately.
• Stay at least 15m (50 feet) away from metal • Call your local emergency response telephone
objects such as a fuel tank, a vehicle or number immediately.
machinery without a cab, motorcycle, ATV, etc.
• If the victim has no pulse, their heart has
• Stay at least 5m (16 feet) apart from any other stopped or they have stopped breathing, start
members of a group so that lightning won’t cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) or mouth
travel between you. –to-mouth resuscitation immediately. Use a
• Do not use the telephone except for portable defibrillator if one is available.
emergencies. • Be careful about staying in the storm to take
care of the victim. You can get hit by lightning
too. If you can, move the victim to a building
as soon as possible.
• To further increase your awareness about
lightning safety, see the following web sites:
▪▪ National Weather Service Lightning Safety
http://www.lightningsafety.noaa.gov
▪▪ National Lightning Safety Institute
http://www.lightningsafety.com
1.30
3. Blow off all forest debris and fine organic
FIRE PREVENTION material accumulated near hot engine

exhaust components (turbocharger and
exhaust manifold as well as exhaust pipes
and muffler) at the completion of each work
shift or more frequently when working in
logging conditions where large amounts
of combustible forest debris are present.
Visual inspection after blow off to ensure
thorough cleanliness is vital. Engine exhaust
systems provide numerous small pockets
where saw dust, small wood chips and other
flammable forest debris can gather. Even
When working in a forest environment, it is small accumulations close to hot exhaust
impossible to prevent combustible debris from components can ignite and smoulder. If
collecting in tight corners of the machine. This dislodged this smouldering debris can fall
debris, in itself, may cause a fire; however, when into other areas of the machine and thereby
mixed with fuel, oil or grease in a hot or confined spread a fire.
place, the danger of fire is greatly increased.
4. Clean out all accumulated forest debris
The following fire prevention guidelines should be (twigs, pine needles, branches, bark, leaves,
used to supplement the operator’s fire prevention saw dust, small wood chips) and any other
efforts. In no case should the guidelines be used, combustible materials from inside the machine
or assumed, as replacements for diligent operator belly pans or lower machine structures as well
efforts at preventing fires. as from areas in proximity to the engine, fuel
The following guidelines will help to keep your and hydraulic oil systems no less frequently
equipment up and running efficiently and keep the than at the completion of each work shift.
risk of fire to a minimum. 5. Inspect the machine regularly for any signs
1. Maintain a CHARGED fire extinguisher on of diesel fuel or hydraulic system leakage.
the machine at all times and KNOW HOW TO Check for worn or eroded fuel or hydraulic
USE IT. lines before starting up any equipment.
2. Remove debris and blow out dust regularly 6. Clean up any grease, diesel fuel, hydraulic
from the air intake doors, engine radiator and and lubricating oil accumulation and spillage
charge air cooler, hydraulic oil cooler, diesel immediately.
fuel cooler and air conditioning condenser
7. Steam clean the engine, hydraulic pumps,
core to prevent overheating of the engine and
transmission, brake, fuel and hydraulic tank
hydraulics and to maintain efficient operation
compartments and all machine belly pans at
of the machine. Refer to CLEANING A/C
least once a month or more frequently when
CONDENSER, OIL COOLER AND RADIATOR
working in logging conditions where large
in SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
amounts of combustible forest debris are
present.
8. Use only non-flammable solutions for
cleaning the machine and components.
9. Inspect the exhaust system daily for any
signs of leakage. Check for worn, cracked,
broken or damaged pipes or muffler. Also
check for missing or damaged bolts or clamps.
Should any exhaust leaks or defective parts
be found, repairs must be made immediately.
Engine exhaust leaks can cause fires. Do not
operate the machine until the exhaust leak is
repaired.
1.31
10. During daily operation of the machine, the 17. AFTER transporting (trucking) a machine
occurrence of exhaust leaks are usually from one job site to the next, open all doors
accompanied by a change or increase in and access panels and blow off any debris
engine exhaust noise levels. These audible that may have repositioned itself onto the
warnings cannot be ignored. Should any engine and exhaust parts due to wind
exhaust leaks occur during operation, the turbulence caused by the journey.
machine must be shut down immediately
18. Before starting repair work, such as welding,
and not put back to work until the necessary
the surrounding area should be cleaned and a
repairs have been completed.
fire extinguisher should be close by.
11. Park the machine at least 15 METERS (50
19. Store rags and other combustible materials
feet) away from other equipment at the end of
in a safe, fireproof location.
each shift.
20. Do not use the machine on top of or to push
12. Never leave the machine parked with
piles of burning timber. A machine fire will
boom, arch or blade suspended off the
most probably result.
ground. Should their supporting hydraulic
hoses burn through during a fire, pressurized EQUIPMENT FIRES ADVERSELY EFFECT
hydraulic oil may be injected into the fire and YOUR ABILITY TO LOG, MAY INCREASE YOUR
the boom, arch or blade will fall rapidly to the INSURANCE PREMIUMS DRAMATICALLY OR
ground. PREVENT YOU FROM OBTAINING INSURANCE
COVERAGE AT ALL.
13. Turn the battery disconnect switch to OFF
at shut down to de-energize all electrical WHAT TO DO TO PREPARE FOR A
circuits. MACHINE FIRE
14. Remain with the machine for at least 45 • Prevent the fire from happening in the first
minutes at the end of operations while the place by ensuring that all machine systems
machine cools. are frequently inspected and always well
maintained.
• Ensure that any hand held fire extinguishers
are charged and in working order. Fire
extinguishers require routine care. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for inspection
and maintenance shown on the label of
the fire extinguisher and in the extinguisher
manufacturer's manual.
• Ensure that any pressurized water systems
on the machine (if applicable) are charged
and in working order. Refer to PRESSURIZED
WATER SYSTEM MAINTENANCE in
SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
• Ensure that you have the proper fire
extinguishers on site. Most fires involving
mobile forestry equipment will be Class A or
B.
15. Remove all keys, lock equipment and fuel

cap at the end of operations to reduce the risk
of vandalism.
16. Be cautious when smoking. An open flame,
a lit cigarette, etc., should not be permitted
around any vehicle, especially during fuelling
operations or when the fuel system is open to
the atmosphere or when servicing batteries.
1.32
Dry chemical extinguishers should be rated • Ensure that after you have received the
ABC and pressurized water extinguishers training as outlined above, that you know how
should be rated A. to use the fire extinguisher, the pressurized
water system (if applicable) and the fire
Class A fires involve ordinary combustibles
suppression system** on your machine.
such as wood, cloth, paper, rubber and many
There is not enough time available to read
plastics, Class B fires occur with flammable
instructions during a fire emergency.
liquids such as diesel fuel, oil and grease and
Class C fires apply to energized electrical • Ensure that all information necessary for you
equipment. to immediately contact all sources of help
(local fire department, etc) in the event of a fire
• Ensure the nozzle of any hand held
emergency is recorded and readily available at
extinguisher and pressurized water system
all times.
available on the machine and at the work site
fits within the fire extinguisher access holes in WHAT TO DO WHEN A MACHINE FIRE
the doors of the machine. OCCURS
• Ensure that your fire detection system* is in If operating the machine when a fire occurs:
working order. Refer to FIRE DETECTION 1. Lower all working attachments to the ground.
SYSTEM in SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR’S
MANUAL. 2. Turn OFF the engine.
• Ensure that your fire suppression system** is 3. Activate the fire suppression system**.
charged and in working order. Refer to FIRE 4. Radio or call for help. Be certain to report a
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM in SECTION 2 of fire immediately.
the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
5. Exit the machine taking fire extinguisher and
• Ensure that you are familiar with the pressurized water system hose (if applicable)
recommended procedures for fire contained in with you.
the emergency action plan of your company. 6. At all times ensure your own personal safety
• Ensure that you follow all national, state/ and the safety of anyone that may be in the
provincial and local regulations dealing area. Approach any fire with extreme caution.
with fire fighting in effect in your specific All fires can be very dangerous and life
geographic region. Regulations will vary from threatening.
region to region but most will usually require 7. Only if you can safely do so, turn OFF the
that: battery disconnect switch.
1. Workers assigned to fire fighting duties Before deciding to fight the fire, be certain that:
must be physically capable of performing
1. The fire is small and not rapidly spreading.
them safely and effectively.
2. There is always a clear, safe escape route to
2. Workers designated to use fire fighting
your back.
equipment as part of an emergency action
plan must receive full and proper training 3. You have received training in the use of the
from a qualified instructor. available fire extinguishing systems and
are confident that you can operate them
3. Whenever portable fire extinguishers
effectively.
are provided for use in the workplace,
training must be provided to familiarize 4. If in any doubt about whether or not to fight the
workers with the general principles of fire fire – DON’T. Instead stand well clear of the
extinguisher use and the hazards involved fire and wait for help to arrive.
with fire fighting. 5. Be aware that engine coolant, diesel fuel or
4. Training must be provided upon initial hydraulic hoses could fail during a fire. If this
employment and at least annually happens, hot coolant, fuel or oil could possibly
thereafter. be ignited by the fire.
6. If possible a dry chemical fire extinguisher
or fire suppression system** should be used
first to fight a machine fire. Then immediately
afterwards use the pressurized water hose
supplied with the machine (if applicable) or a
1.33
pressurized water extinguisher (if available). A ▪▪ Failing all attempts to access the machine
fire suppressed by dry chemical may re-ignite compartment, discharge the extinguisher
from the heat retained by any debris or hot through the mesh or any available openings
machine components in the area. The water on the machine.
will cool the area, reducing the chances of ▪▪ Ensure the machine and all components
re-ignition. have cooled down sufficiently after a fire so
▪▪ Use the PASS method. This is the most that re-ignition does not occur.
effective use of a fire extinguisher. ▪▪ Remain with the machine until help arrives.
▫▫ Pull the pin at the top of the extinguisher WHAT TO DO AFTER A MACHINE FIRE
that keeps the handle from being HAS OCCURRED
pressed. Break the plastic seal as the
pin is pulled. • Before returning the machine to work.
1. Ensure the cause of the fire is determined
▫▫ Aim the nozzle at the base of the fire.
and all appropriate repairs are completed.
Do not aim the nozzle at the flames.
In order to put out the fire, you must 2. Ensure the fire detection system* or the
extinguish the fuel, not the flames. fire suppression system** is properly
Hose nozzles are often clipped to the serviced and in working order (if
extinguisher body. Release the hose applicable).
before taking aim. 3. Ensure that all extinguishers used in
▫▫ Squeeze the handle to release the fighting the fire are replaced or recharged.
pressurized extinguishing agent. The • Notify your equipment dealer and/or Tigercat
handle can be released at any time to Industries Inc. by completing an incident
stop the discharge. report, Tigercat form number 5101.
▫▫ Sweep from side to side at the base of *NOTE: Fire detection systems are offered by
the fire until the fire is completely out or Tigercat as an optional installation on some
the fire extinguisher is empty Tigercat product lines. Please disregard any
references made to fire detection systems if not
installed on your machine.
**NOTE: Dry chemical fire suppression systems
are offered by Tigercat as an optional installation
on some Tigercat product lines. Please disregard
any references made to fire suppression systems
if not installed on your machine.
TYPICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER

822C-190 ACCESS HOLE
▪▪ Place the nozzle of the fire extinguisher into

the appropriate fire extinguisher access hole
and discharge the extinguisher.
▪▪ Only if you can safely do so, open the
access panels to the machine in the area of
the fire.
1.34
DRY CHEMICAL CLEANUP 3. In areas exposed to heat during the fire,
PROCEDURES the dry chemical powder will melt forming a
coating that cakes or crusts on all surfaces.
Both ABC dry chemical fire extinguishers and
fire suppression systems discharge a chemical To break down the caked dry chemical, spray
powder to extinguish the fire. The chemical or wash these areas with a 50/50 mixture of
makeup and the small particle size of the powder hot water and isopropyl alcohol. Allow this
as well as the force of the discharge all contribute mixture to stand in place for several minutes.
to the fire fighting capability. These same The caked dry chemical when exposed to
characteristics also permit the powder to penetrate moisture is also mildly acidic. Therefore
into and fully cover all components in the vicinity of when the break down procedure has been
the discharge. completed, follow this immediately with the
The following are recommendations for the neutralizing procedure as described in step 2.
cleanup and neutralizing of areas exposed to dry
chemical powder.
Workers performing this work should wear
protective clothing, safety goggles and a fine
particle dust mask to minimize their personal
exposure to the dry chemical powder.
Ensure that all electrical systems have been
completely de-energized prior to any cleanup.
1. In areas of the machine that remained cool
and dry during the fire, the dry chemical will
stay in powder form.
Be certain to clean these areas immediately
to prevent any settled residual powder from
coming into contact with moisture whether
through direct contact or humidity in the air.
Remove the powder residue by blowing off
with air, sweeping, dusting or vacuuming using
a HEPA filter capable of trapping the small dry
chemical particles. Then wipe all surfaces with
a damp cloth.
2. In areas exposed to moisture, the dry
chemical powder will combine with water to
form a paste that is mildly acidic. Note that all
surfaces covered by this dry chemical paste
including electrical contacts are vulnerable to
corrosive attack.
To neutralize the acidic paste on large
surfaces, spray or wash these areas with a
mixture of 3 parts hot water to 1 part baking
soda. Allow this mixture to stand for several
minutes before rinsing with warm water. Wash
the area with a mild soap and water solution.
Rinse thoroughly with water. Blow-dry to
remove all residual water.
Cleaning of electrical contacts should be done
using an electrical contact cleaner that has
no flash or fire point and is non-corrosive and
non-conductive such as CRC Contact Cleaner
2000.
1.35
READ OPERATOR'S MANUAL AND
USE THE SEAT BELT AT ALL TIMES!
SAFETY LABELS
SAFETY LABELS
The following safety labels must be periodically
cleaned and inspected to ensure legibility is
maintained. Replace any label that becomes
illegible, damaged or removed.
OPERATOR'S MANUAL LOCATION
This label indicates the storage location of the

operator's manual. This label is located on the
outside of the operator's manual case inside the
cab.
55737BUNI R0
READ MANUAL
Always read the operator’s manual before
operating the machine. Pay close attention to
WARNINGS and HAZARD identifications.
Study all the safety messages in this manual and
on the labels on the machine carefully.
USE SEAT BELT
The operator's seat is equipped with lap and
shoulder harness belts. Use both of these restraint
systems at all times when operating the machine.
Do not attempt to move or operate the machine
until the seat belt is fastened properly.
1.36
REMOVE IGNITION KEY BEFORE CRUSH HAZARD
SERVICING THE MACHINE
This label warns of a downward force crush zone

Prior to performing any service work or caused by swinging or falling logs.
maintenance on the machine, turn OFF the
Approaching personnel are subject to crush
engine, remove the ignition key and store it in a
injuries by falling or swinging logs which could
safe place.
result in death or serious injury!
Read and understand all service manual
Do not start the machine until other personnel are
instructions before servicing this machine.
a safe distance away from the machine.
When the engine is running, do not allow anyone
in areas of the machine where they may be
crushed by moving components.
Maintain a safe operating distance between the
machine and workers and all other personnel. It is
the duty of the operator to ensure that no person
approach the machine while in use, the risk zone
is 150 m (500 ft).
Do not attempt to service or work on the machine
until the load is removed from the saw head, the
vehicle is in the parked position and the engine is
turned OFF.
1.37
CRUSH HAZARD CRUSH HAZARD
This label warns of the crush hazard caused by

the engine enclosure power door/roof.
Ensure all personnel are clear before opening
or closing the engine enclosure power door/roof.
Operating the engine enclosure power door/roof
with personnel in the crush zone could result in
death or serious injury!
This label warns of the crush hazard caused by Keep all personnel clear of the machine before
boom movement. operating the engine enclosure power door/roof.
Movement of booms and cylinders could result in
death or serious injury! CRUSH HAZARD, LEVELER
Keep all personnel clear of the machine before
operating boom functions.
Do not approach the machine until the boom is
lowered to the ground and the engine is turned
OFF.
This label warns of the crush hazard caused by

movement of the leveling frames and cylinders
when not properly supported.
Never work under the machine or near the leveler
area when it is unsupported. Contact with moving
frames and cylinders could result in death or
serious injury!
Properly support and brace the leveler cylinders
and turn OFF the engine before performing service
work in this area.
1.38
CUTTING HAZARD ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD
36779BUNI R0
This label informs you of the cutting hazards of This label warns of an entanglement hazard
the cooling fan blade when the engine is running. (rotating parts) zone.
Keep clear of cutting hazards caused by rotating Do not place hands or fingers in this area. Rotating
components. parts such as pulleys, belts and drives can cause
entanglement of body parts resulting in serious
Do not place hands or fingers in this area. Rotating
injury.
parts such as cooling fan blades can cause
entanglement of body parts resulting in serious Keep hands and fingers clear of rotating belt, drive
injury. or pulley! Before performing any service work on
these parts or in this area, turn OFF the engine
Keep hands and fingers clear of rotating fan
and wait for rotating parts to come to a complete
blades! Before performing any service work on
stop.
these parts or in this area, turn OFF the engine
and wait for rotating parts to come to a complete
stop.
1.39
ER BOOM WARNING ER BOOM WARNING
55987BUNI R0
This label warns the machine is equipped with an Located on the control valve cover in the engine
ER boom system. compartment, this label warns the machine is
equipped with an ER boom system. Because
Read the Operator's Manual to become familiar
of this it may behave in an unexpected manner
with the operation and movement of the ER boom
when performing any service work or maintenance
system.
on the machine. Ensure no persons are near the
Never permit persons to stand under the boom machine during operation.
or the saw head. Contact could result in death or
Read and understand the servicing procedures
serious injury.
in the Service Manual and make sure the
Always ensure the attachment is resting securely boom and attachment are securely braced and
on the ground before performing any of the supported before attempting to adjust pressures or
following functions: disconnect hydraulic lines. Serious injury or death
1. Turning OFF the engine. could result from crushing.
2. De-energizing the pilot circuit

3. Opening the front door.
1.40
HOT SURFACES STORED ENERGY HAZARD
This label warns of hot machine and machine

component surfaces. Be aware when performing
service and maintenance tasks that surfaces and
grab handles in and around the engine hydraulic
tank and cooling system may become very hot
when the machine has been running. Do not touch
these hot surfaces, contact with hot surfaces may
cause injury.
This label warns of a stored energy hazard. This
• Before servicing the machine, allow the engine
label is located near the hydraulic tank.
cooling system, fuel system, exhaust system,
hydraulic system and machine surfaces to The machine is equipped with an accumulator
cool down. (located in the hydraulic tank area, attached to
the pilot manifold). The accumulator has stored
• Use a thermometer to check surface and
energy in the form of hydraulic pressure. Servicing
system temperatures to ensure it is safe to
the accumulator, hydraulic tank or any hydraulic
begin service work.
components before releasing pressure could result
• Do not begin service work until the surface or in death or serious injury.
system temperature has cooled to below 38°C
Do not service accumulator or any hydraulic
(100°F).
components before releasing pressure.
1.41
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD! ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
55992BUNI R0
This label is located in the cab. It warns of a This label warns of the potential of a severe
potential electrocution hazard. Contact with electric shock hazard. It is located on the top
electric lines will result in death or serious injury! frame of the battery compartment housing.
Before beginning work in any area study the area When servicing the electrical system, turn OFF
thoroughly and become familiar with any potential the battery disconnect switch before removing
hazards especially electrocution hazards from the battery compartment cover. Remove the
electric lines. battery cables from the batteries disconnecting the
negative (-) cables first. Perform the service work,
Do not move any part of the machine or load
then attach the battery cables reconnecting the
within 3 m (10 ft) plus two times line insulator
length of any electric lines!
Do not short out battery terminals for any reason.
Serious burns and/or an explosion can result.
Refer to GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS in
THIS SECTION.
KEEP BACK
This label warns personnel to keep back When approaching an operating machine on foot,
150 m (500 ft) due to flying projectiles and falling stay at least 150 m (500 ft) away until the operator
trees. Danger exists predominantly around the recognizes your presence. Make sure that all
attachment. equipment has been shut down before advancing
to the machine.
1.42
EXPLOSIVE RELEASE OF HOT EXPLOSION HAZARD
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURIZED
FLUID
WARNING
• EXPLOSION HAZARD.
• DO NOT USE ETHER.
• ENGINE EQUIPPED WITH
HEATER STARTING AID.
• USE OF ETHER COULD
RESULT IN DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY.
36782BENG R0
This label warns of an explosion hazard. It is

located on the end of the air cleaner (air filter
housing). The engine is equipped with a heater
starting aid, do not use ether to assist in starting
the engine.
Using ether could cause an explosion which could
result in death or serious injury.
33952AUNI R0
This label warns of a pressure and fluid spray PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
hazard when the coolant in the radiator is hot.
Do not loosen the radiator fill cap until it is cool,
explosive release of fluids from pressurized
cooling system can cause serious burns.
Turn OFF the engine. Only remove the radiator fill
cap when cool enough to touch with bare hands.
Slowly loosen the cap to the first stop to relieve
pressure before removing it completely.
This label indicates portable fire extinguisher

location.
1.43
NO RIDERS EMERGENCY EXIT, CAB, LEFT-HAND
SIDE DOOR
This label is located on the left-hand cab door post

next to the door, alerting the operator that, in the
event of an emergency this door can be used as
an emergency exit.
This label is also located just below the bottom
No riders inside or outside of the machine. Do not
of the left-hand emergency exit doorway, on the
carry passengers either in the cab or anywhere
outside of the cab frame. This label reminds the
else on the machine. The vehicle seating
operator that this door should not be used as a
accommodation is for one operator only. Persons
point of entry into the cab, except in the case of an
riding on the outside of the machine are subject
emergency where emergency personnel need to
to hazards such as falling off the machine, crush
gain access to the operator.
hazards, thrown object hazards and many other
hazards which could result in death or serious Ensure all exit doors and exit hatch are functioning
injury. properly at all times.
If any person attempts to climb onto the machine Refer to SIDE DOOR AND ESCAPE HATCH
during operation, stop the machine immediately. EMERGENCY EXIT MAINTENANCE GUIDE in
Do not operate the machine until other personnel SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S MANUAL.
are a safe distance away from the machine.
EMERGENCY EXIT, HAND TIGHTEN
ONLY
This label is located on each of the escape hatch

clamp-brackets to indicate the escape hatch can
also be used as an emergency exit.
The label also indicates the escape hatch knobs
should be hand tightened only to allow for easy
exit.
Ensure all exit locations are functioning properly.
Refer to SIDE DOOR AND ESCAPE HATCH
EMERGENCY EXIT MAINTENANCE GUIDE in
SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S MANUAL.
1.44
FIRE PREVENTION! CHECK DAILY
This label advises operators of the following: In addition to the previous label it is a reminder to
check the machine daily for the possibility of debris
Read, understand and follow the fire prevention
build-up, leaks, damaged wires and hoses and
guidelines in this manual. These guidelines
take the necessary action required to clean up any
provide all the necessary action required
debris accumulation, repair any leaks, damaged
to preventing fires on this machine. Do not
wires or hoses.
operate this machine until you have read these
instructions and have performed any necessary The label also advises to check and ensure that all
maintenance required that will prevent the fire fighting devices are in good working order.
potential of a fire from starting on this machine.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER ACCESS HOLE
It is also important to note that fire prevention
inspections and maintenance must be performed
frequently (several times per day). A clean
combustible free machine as well as frequent
inspections of the exhaust components, hydraulic
hoses and electrical cables and performing any
necessary repairs immediately will help prevent
fires.
Maintain a charged fire extinguisher on the
machine at all times, know where it is and know
how to use it!
This label indicates the location of each fire

extinguisher access hole. The label is installed
on each fire extinguisher hole around the machine.
1.45
1.46
USING HIGH-SPEED DISC SAWS SAFELY.............................................................APPENDIX TO SECTION 1
USING HIGH-SPEED DISC SAWS SAFELY
DANGER
This information is intended to encourage logging organizations and operators to develop and practice additional
rules that suit particular terrain conditions and job requirements. It is also intended to assist towards a quicker
understanding of how and why things can happen when a high speed disc saw is in use; and hence to assist
in development of safe operating practices.
The following information is in addition to any safety instructions or recommended safe operating practices
that may already be in circulation.
DANGER
CONTENTS - APPENDIX TO SECTION 1

C
COMMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS

DIRECTION OF THROW...........................................................................................................................................A.7
HIGH ANGLE WRIST ROTATION ABILITY...............................................................................................................A.8
RECOGNIZING THE DANGERS...............................................................................................................................A.7
THROWING LONG WOOD PIECES.......................................................................................................................A.10
D
DANGERS.....................................................................................................................................................................A.3
F
FOREWORD.................................................................................................................................................................A.2
BE AWARE OF THE HAZARDS................................................................................................................................A.3
OTHER INSTRUCTIONS..........................................................................................................................................A.3
SAFE PRACTICES....................................................................................................................................................A.3
SEVERAL TYPES OF HEADS INVOLVED...............................................................................................................A.2
STORED ENERGY....................................................................................................................................................A.3
H
HIGH ANGLE WRIST ROTATION CAPABILITY...........................................................................................................A.9

S
SAW HEAD DON'TS...................................................................................................................................................A.15

T
TYPE OF HOUSING MAKES A DIFFERENCE.............................................................................................................A.4
5211A • R4-1015
Using High-Speed Disc Saws Safely Tigercat
FOREWORD
SEVERAL TYPES OF HEADS INVOLVED
Tigercat wheel type feller bunchers (figure 1) and crawler
feller bunchers (figure 2) can be supplied with several
optional makes and models of high speed disc saw tree
felling heads. Because each has certain advantages
and disadvantages they are chosen where they best do
specific types of work.
SAW25A FIGURE 1: BROADSIDE SAW CONTACT WITH A LOG COULD PRODUCE A THROW
SAW24
FIGURE 2: A SUDDEN MACHINE MOVEMENT MAY CAUSE AN UNEXPECTED THROW AT THE CAB
A.2
Tigercat Using High-Speed Disc Saws Safely
STORED ENERGY OTHER INSTRUCTIONS

The saw blade stores energy from the hydraulic motor It is also understood and expected that all instructions
during the times between tree cuts so that it can supply contained in service and operator's manuals for use
up to 1000 hp during a 1 sec tree cut. However this and maintenance of Tigercat disc saw heads and other
rotational energy, if misapplied can result in wood disc saw heads installed on Tigercat machines will be
materials or other objects being thrown strongly enough followed.
to cause damage and to hurt people.
THE DANGERS
BE AWARE OF THE HAZARDS There are at least these means by which a rotating disc
It is important that users of machines with disc saw saw can cause harm by throwing:
felling heads are aware of certain safety precautions
that need to be taken. In this section some previously • The normal throwing of chips from the cut.
unknown, unexpected safety hazards are illustrated and • Soil particles are thrown from the ground.
explained . These should be studied before use of the
• Loose chunks of wood encountered or produced are
machinery and then reviewed again after use has begun.
tossed by the exposed blade.
• Sticks and debris falling onto the blade or sliding
across the blade are struck by the teeth and thrown.
SAFE PRACTICES
It is understood and expected that logging organizations • Metal pieces from the blade or from objects
and operators will develop and practice additional rules encountered are thrown.
that suit (for example) particular conditions of terrain, • Wood pieces enter the saw housing and are expelled
trees, soil and job requirements. The information by the blade.
given here is intended to assist towards a quicker
understanding of how and why things can happen when • In very peculiar cases the saw can throw long
a high speed disc saw is in use; and hence to assist in lengths of wood as spears.
development of safe operating practices.
It should not be assumed that all possible dangers have
been discovered and described here.
A.3
HOUSING TYPES
TYPE OF HOUSING MAKES A DIFFERENCE
Since the configuration of the saw housing can affect
the safety of its use we need to identify some particular
types of housing shapes and guarding being used.
Figure 3 shows a typical commonly used saw housing
plan where there is a continuous skirt around the saw
except at a mouth opening where the trees are cut
and taken. The skirt extends below the saw enough to
intercept tangential throw. There are snouts on both
sides of the mouth so that if pushed against the side of a
felled tree or log the saw teeth will not contact the wood.
THROW IF A SAW HEAD IS PUSHED AGAINST THE SIDE OF

ANGLE A FELLED TREE, SNOUTS PREVENT SAW TEETH
FROM CONTACTING WOOD.
FIGURE 3: TYPICAL COMMONLY USED SAW HOUSING, CONTINUOUS SKIRT WITH

SAW13 OPENING WHERE TREES ARE CUT. SNOUTS ON BOTH SIDES OF THE MOUTH. SAW17
A.4
Figure 4 shows another commonly used plan. It has no

blade guarding snouts so that the saw blade teeth do
protrude ahead of the housing. This may be preferred
over figures 3 and 5 for dexterity in tree getting.
THROW IF A SAW HEAD WITHOUT SNOUTS

ANGLE IS PUSHED AGAINST THE SIDE OF
A FELLED TREE, THE SAW TEETH
WILL CONTACT WOOD.
FIGURE 4: ANOTHER COMMONLY USED HOUSING PLAN WITH NO

SAW14 SNOUTS, BLADE TEETH PROTRUDE AHEAD OF THE HOUSING. SAW15
In figure 5, there is a much longer snout on the ingoing

side of the mouth, i.e., where the teeth of the rotating
blade are entering the housing. The broad side of a
log, if nudged, will not contact the saw teeth and more
thrown material will be intercepted by the extra length of
snout.
THROW
ANGLE
NUDGED LOG WILL NOT

CONTACT SAW TEETH
EXTRA LENGTH
OF SNOUT WILL
INTERCEPT
PORTION
OF THROWN
MATERIAL
FIGURE 5: HOUSING USES LONGER SNOUT ON IN-GOING SIDE OF

SAW12 MOUTH WHERE ROTATING BLADE ENTERS HOUSING. SAW18
A.5
HOUSING TYPES CONTINUED
In figure 6a and 6b there is an additional opening in the

housing skirt. Openings in this location are sometimes
provided for escape of wood chips produced by the saw
teeth in the cut and being taken into the housing.
In figure 6c a guard has been added to the chip escape
port so that tangential travel of chips and other material
is intercepted as soon as it leaves the housing.
Each figure shows a shaded area where normally
tangentially thrown material can escape from the saw
housing. Deflected and dropped chips escaping below
the bottom edge of the housing skirt are not included.
The areas and angles are not exact but do show that
one head can be different from another.
It is important that the operator familiarize himself
with the blade rotation direction, the effectiveness of
any snout on the in-going side and which direction
any chip escape ports allow material to fly.
A CHIP ESCAPE PORT

CAN ALLOW THROW
REAR BEHIND THE MACHINE
FRONT
FIGURE 6a FIGURE 6b FIGURE 6c
SAW19
SAW20
SAW26 FIGURE 6: ADDITIONAL OPENING IN THE HOUSING SKIRT.
A.6
ASSESSING THE POTENTIAL DANGERS

COMMENTS AND ON THE JOB SITE
INSTRUCTIONS The extent of danger from high speed disc saws on the
logging operation has to be assessed on the job site,
RECOGNIZING THE DANGERS depending on how much other work activity is in the area
and whether the operator can do his job of cutting and
While it may appear that these illustrated danger areas bunching with good control of throw patterns. Danger
can be visually recognized on the job by observing how is greater if the saw is equipped with detachable, or
far chips fly during a cut, that is only true for chips and fragile, or brittle teeth, or if the site contains stones or
other light weight materials. Metal parts and wooden abandoned metal.
spears can be thrown to surprisingly greater distances.
Even distant personnel on the ground, in other vehicles,
or in buildings are at risk if the throw is in their direction.
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
Poor saw maintenance increases these dangers. Some
DIRECTION OF THROW designs that might allow fasteners to wear thin or fatigue
and suddenly break, need thorough timely replacement
The direction of possible tangential throw for metal parts procedures. It is important that the warning signs of
and stones is dependent on the housing configuration missing saw tooth parts or the sounds of striking rocks
and might be expected to be the same as observed for be heeded and the operation adjusted to avoid danger.
the chips. However, these throws can occur at any time
the saw is running, in whichever direction the angle of
throw is pointed by boom geometry, not just when a cut
is being made.
THROW DISTANCE
The throw distance for metal pieces and stones, can be
many times the distance shown by the pattern for chips.
More testing and data collection is needed to pin down
a “safe distance” but if someone or something is in a
place that can be seen by the operator and in the throw
direction of a high speed disc saw, then the operation is
not safe regardless of the distance.
SAFE OPERATING AREAS

These saw heads must not be used in areas where
the logging operation does not have control over the
presence and movement of people. In particular, clearing
of vegetation in urban and populated areas should
not be done with a Tigercat manufactured or supplied
high speed disc saw. High speed disc saw heads are
intended for high productivity wood harvesting in areas
remote from normal habitation. The possible presence
of people and property within throw range and the
likelihood of encountering scrap metal, wire fencing,
steel posts and concrete must be respected.
A.7

CONTINUED
HIGH ANGLE WRIST ROTATION ABILITY

When a felling machine is equipped with a high speed
disc saw head with a high angle wrist rotation ability it
should be determined that the limits of the boom, stick,
tilt, wrist, upper leveling and any other freedoms, do not
permit a direct throw at the operators cab during normal
operation, see figure 7a. It is probably essential that the
housing have a long snout on the throw side and that if a
chip escape port is used it should be guarded.
With these high mechanical freedom arrangements
there is a chance that an unforeseeable operator
misadventure or equipment failure could result in an
accidental direct or deflected throw at the operators
cab, refer to figure 2 and 7b. The cab should be capable
of resisting such accidental and ricochet throws. The
velocity energy of metal or rock pieces leaving the
blade is extremely high. The operators cab cannot be
considered safe to routinely operate in the chip throw
area, even if it has been especially constructed to
prevent penetration by accidentally thrown objects.
A.8
FELLING HEAD
• WITH A CHIP ESCAPE PORT AND
SHORT SNOUT.
• SHOWN IN A HIGH ANGLE WRIST
ROTATION POSITION, PLACING
OPERATOR'S CAB IN DIRECT LINE
WITH UNGUARDED CHIP ESCAPE
PORT
FIGURE 7a
PLAN VIEW OF MACHINE SHOWING CLOCKWISE AND

COUNTERCLOCKWISE BLADE ROTATION
FIGURE 7b
FELLING HEAD
• WITH LONGER SNOUT ON THROW
SIDE OF OPENING AND WITH A
GUARDED CHIP ESCAPE PORT.
SAW21A
SAW23 FIGURE 7: DISC SAW FELLING HEAD WITH HIGH ANGLE WRIST ROTATION CAPABILITY
A.9
In this last case tests have shown that if the piece of

COMMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS wood is backed-up by a solid slippery surface; and if
CONTINUED the feed in is very fast; and if the piece of wood is long
enough; then the tangential movement is a dangerous
THROWING LONG WOOD PIECES spear-like throw.
Dangers from throws of long wood pieces are illustrated
in figures 8 to 11.
Tests and experience have shown that when a high
speed rotating saw is applied to a loose piece of wood,
the wood is either blown or pushed away, without a
throw. If the wood is held firmly in all directions and the
saw advanced into it at any feed speed, cutting will take
place. If the wood is only held against escape from the
saw radially, but not held tangentially, then the wood will
be both partly cut and partly moved tangentially.
SAW HOUSING HAS SKIS,

BUT WITHOUT SNOUTS AND
SLAB BLADE TEETH PROTRUDE
A SLAB, WHICH AHEAD OF THE HOUSING.
COULD LATER
BE THROWN,
MIGHT HAPPEN
WHEN NOT
ENOUGH ROOM
IN HEAD TO
COMPLETELY
CUT THE LAST
TREE
SLAB
TH
DIR ROW
N
E DI EC
TIO
FE N
SAW2
SAW10 FIGURE 8 FIGURE 8a: HOW A SLAB CAN BE THROWN FROM THE SIDE OF A LOG
THROW ENGAGEMENT
IF THE SIDE OF A LOG CAN DISTANCE
CONTACT THE SAW, THE
THROW ENGAGEMENT
DISTANCE CAN BE LONG
FELLING HEAD
MOVING INTO SLAB
SLAB/LOG LOG
A LONG THROW
ENGAGEMENT
DISTANCE
CAN CAUSE A
DANGEROUS
SPEAR THROW
FEED IN
SAW7 FIGURE 8B SIDE VIEW SAW7 FIGURE 8C TOP VIEW
A.10
Figures 8 and 9 show two ways that this might happen

in the woods if using the saw head of figure 4 (where the
throw contact can be long). A slab, still partly attached to
a well backed-up tree bole and wet with sap, makes an
ideally bad throw situation which could unintentionally
occur in woods work. A small log in a pile of other logs
might also be propelled out with enough length of
continued contact to reach near saw tip speed.
A SMALL LOG IN A PILE OF OTHER LOGS

MIGHT ALSO BE PROPELLED OUT WITH
ENOUGH LENGTH OF CONTINUED CONTACT
WITH THE BLADE TO REACH NEAR SAW TIP
SPEED.
IN
ED
FE
SAW HOUSING
FELLING HEAD WITHOUT SNOUTS
MOVING INTO AND BLADE TEETH
LOG PILE PROTRUDE AHEAD OF
THE HOUSING.
SAW3 FIGURE 9a: HOW A LOG CAN BE THROWN LIKE A SPEAR
THROW ENGAGEMENT
DISTANCE
SMALL
LOG
LOG
PILE A SAW HOUSING WITHOUT
FEED IN SNOUTS ALLOWS A LONG
THROW ENGAGEMENT
DISTANCE
IF THE SIDE OF A LOG CAN CONTACT THE SAW, THE THROW

ENGAGEMENT DISTANCE CAN BE LONG FEED IN
SAW8 FIGURE 9b SIDE VIEW SAW8 FIGURE 9c TOP VIEW
A.11

CONTINUED
Figure 10 shows how a head with snouts does not allow

a long throw contact. Although tests show that a short
contact length on a long log or tree butt does not result
in a spear like throw, this action should nevertheless be
avoided because abnormally large chips are sometimes
produced and thrown.
UNCUT TREE OR
THROW ENGAGEMENT STUMP BACKUP
DISTANCE
WHEN ONLY THE END OF A

LOG CAN MAKE CONTACT
WITH THE SAW, THERE
IS NOT MUCH THROW
ENGAGEMENT DISTANCE
FELLING HEAD
MOVING INTO LOG
SAW6
FIGURE 10: FELLING HEAD HOUSING WITH SNOUTS DOES NOT ALLOW A LONG THROW CONTACT
Figure 11 warns that blocks of wood can be tossed in

any direction when improvising with a disc saw to trim
over-size stumps. A long snout and a slow feed speed
lessen danger during stump trimming. A similar danger
of throw may exist when clearing small brush with
multiple pass cuts.
FELLING HEAD
MOVING INTO
STUMP
(FEED SPEED)
SAW11 FIGURE 11: A BLOCK OF WOOD CAN BE TOSSED WHEN TRIMMING STUMPS
A.12
SAW BLADE THROW GAP

Saw blades have gaps between adjacent teeth and
holders to permit installation and removal of the teeth
and to provide spaces to accumulate chips in the cut,
see figure 12. Fallen sticks and debris or sticks and
debris sliding across the saw blade can enter these gaps
when the blade is rotating and be struck by the teeth
and be tossed or thrown. Larger gaps and lower rotation
speeds increase these dangers.
THROW GAP
SAW122 FIGURE 12: SAW BLADE THROW GAP
A.13

CONTINUED
SAW HOUSING ENTRANCE AND EXIT

SPACE
To avoid the ingestion of materials into the housing
space above the disc (and later ejection) the ingoing
entrance for the saw rim of teeth is kept as small as
practical. It is important that this high wear area be
maintained at its original size and shape. The outgoing
opening is large enough to allow the housing to clean
itself and will allow most things inside to be thrown out,
see figure 13. Its throw direction and angle must be
respected. A long snout on the other side reduces this
danger.
The ingoing entrance OF The outgoing opening is larger

THE HOUSING for the to allow the housing to clean
saw rim of teeth should itself and will allow most things
be small inside to be thrown out
SAW22
SAW22A
SAW22B FIGURE 13: SAW BLADE ENTRANCE AND EXIT SPACE
A.14
This information is offered by Tigercat as part of interim action to make saw heads safer. It is based on what has
recently been reported from the field and on tests conducted on proving grounds. Tigercat is continuing to do design
and testing of tree felling machinery towards achieving greater safety in the woods. Tigercat would be thankful for
written reports describing any unsafe happenings, including near misses, in the use of felling heads and their carriers.
THE FOLLOWING ARE SOME SAW HEAD DON’TS THAT APPLY PARTICULARLY TO
THROW PREVENTION:
• Do not point the throw of a disc saw head in a direction towards people, vehicles or buildings at any visible distance.
• Do not operate in a way that throws chips in a direct-line at the machine cab.
• Do not push hard with the saw against anything except a standing tree to be cut.
• Do not mix new sharp teeth with old dull teeth on the same saw.
• Do not change the blade rotation from its designed direction in the head.
• Do not over speed the blade rpm.
• Do not remove or shorten snouts provided by the head manufacturer or installer.
• Do not neglect tooth fastening inspection, maintenance and replacement.
• Do not neglect to repair worn or damaged saw housings.
• Do not neglect to replace any covers removed for service or clean out.
• Do not count on skis to give the throw protection that snouts do.
• Do not nudge loose short pieces with the front of any type of head.
• Do not nudge anything, even long logs, with the front of a head which has no snouts.
• Do not cut short small stalks when blade speed is low.
• Do not operate a high speed disc saw in a populated area.
• Do not assume that visitors and other workers are aware of disc saw dangers.
• Do not assume that the operator will spare you, a visitor, from danger.
• Do not select and operate heads that throw rearward.
• Do not select and operate heads with unnecessarily wide throw angles.
• Do not neglect to read and follow all instructions provided by the saw and head manufacturers.
A.15
A.16
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................3

SECTION 3 – LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
A
AIR CLEANER ........................................................................................................................................3.46

AIR CLEANER SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 3.46
IMPROPER SERVICING ..................................................................................................................... 3.46
OVER SERVICING .............................................................................................................................. 3.46
AIR CLEANER UNLOADER VALVE ....................................................................................................... 3.47
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM, CHECKING THE SYSTEM .................................................................. 3.24
AIR FILTER - CHANGING ....................................................................................................................... 3.46
AIR INTAKE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................. 3.45
AIR INTAKE PRECLEANER - ENGINE .................................................................................................. 3.45
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - ENGINE
AIR INTAKE BY-PASS ......................................................................................................................... 3.48
FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR ................................................................................................... 3.47
INTAKE TUBING AND JOINTS ........................................................................................................... 3.48
PRECLEANER .................................................................................................................................... 3.45
AIR PRECLEANER ................................................................................................................................. 3.45
APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS ............................................................................................................. 3.19
B
BELT, SERPENTINE, INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 3.26

BOTTOM REFUELLING PROCEDURE .................................................................................................. 3.33
C
CASE DRAIN STRAINERS ..................................................................................................................... 3.44

CHANGING FILTER ELEMENTS ............................................................................................................ 3.46
CHECKING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ................................................................................... 3.24
COMMERCIAL WOOD, WEIGHTS OF ................................................................................................... 3.59
COMMON CONVERSIONS .................................................................................................................... 3.58
E
EMERGENCY EXITS, CHECK MONTHLY ............................................................................................... 3.7

ENGINE AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
AIR INTAKE BY-PASS ......................................................................................................................... 3.48
FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR ................................................................................................... 3.47
INTAKE TUBING AND JOINTS ........................................................................................................... 3.48
PRECLEANER .................................................................................................................................... 3.45
ER BOOM SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................ 3.15
F
FILTER AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULE .............................................................................................. 3.17

FILTER ELEMENTS - CHANGING ......................................................................................................... 3.46
FILTERS
CHANGING FILTER ELEMENTS ........................................................................................................ 3.46
ENGINE FILTERS ................................................................................................................................ 3.27
FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR ................................................................................................... 3.27
FUEL TANK STRAINERS .................................................................................................................... 3.28
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN STRAINERS ............................................................................................ 3.42
HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER .......................................................................................................... 3.44
REMOVE AND REPLACE, ENGINE ................................................................................................... 3.27
REMOVE AND REPLACE, HYDRAULIC ............................................................................................ 3.39
RESTRICTION PRESSURE SWITCH, HYDRAULIC OIL ................................................................... 3.39
FILTERS - REMOVE AND REPLACE ..................................................................................................... 3.27
FIRE PREVENTION .................................................................................................................................. 3.8
FUEL
REFUELLING ...................................................................................................................................... 3.31
FUEL FILTER AND FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR ....................................................................... 3.27
3.1
Lubrication and Maintenance Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
FUEL TANK
CAPACITY ...........................................................................................................................................3.28
COMPONENTS ................................................................................................................................... 3.28
REFUELLING PROCEDURE, BOTTOM FUELLING OPTION ............................................................ 3.33
STRAINER - CHANGING/CLEANING ................................................................................................. 3.29
H
HYDRAULIC OIL FILL PUMP - HAND .................................................................................................... 3.37

HYDRAULIC OIL FILTERS ..................................................................................................................... 3.38
HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATING RANGE ................................................................................................. 3.19
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN DIFFUSERS/STRAINERS .......................................................................... 3.42
CHANGING OR CLEANING ................................................................................................................ 3.42
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTERS
FILTER CHANGE PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................ 3.39
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
FILTER RESTRICTION PRESSURE SWITCH ................................................................................... 3.39
HYDRAULIC OIL FILL PUMP - HAND ................................................................................................. 3.37
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - REFILLING ...................................................................................................... 3.36
HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER ............................................................................................................. 3.44
HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................... 3.35
L
LEVELER LUBRICATION POINTS ......................................................................................................... 3.18

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .................................................................................. 3.4
LUBRICATION POINTS DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................ 3.16
LUBRICATION POINTS DIAGRAM, LEVELER ...................................................................................... 3.18
M
MEASURING TRACK SAG ..................................................................................................................... 3.51

N
NEW MACHINE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3.4

FIRST 125 HOUR INSPECTION REPORT ........................................................................................... 3.4
INITIAL PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION ................................................................................................. 3.4
TIGHTENING POINTS .......................................................................................................................... 3.4
O
OIL ANALYSIS KITS .................................................................................................................................. 3.5

OIL ANALYSIS PROGRAM ....................................................................................................................... 3.5
OIL FILL - HYDRAULIC ........................................................................................................................... 3.37
OIL LOST FROM LEAKAGE ..................................................................................................................... 3.7
OIL SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURES ........................................................................................... 3.6
OIL SAMPLING PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................... 3.6
P
PRECLEANER - ENGINE AIR ................................................................................................................ 3.45
PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS .......................................................................3.60, 3.61, 3.62, 3.63
PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK ....................................................................................................... 3.35
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................................................................................ 3.4
PUMP - HYDRAULIC OIL FILL - HAND .................................................................................................. 3.37
R
REFILLING THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 3.36

REFUELLING PROCEDURE .................................................................................................................. 3.31
3.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Lubrication and Maintenance
ROTARY MANIFOLD SEAL - LUBRICATING ......................................................................................... 3.23
S
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
FREQUENTLY ....................................................................................................................................... 3.9
8 HOURS ...............................................................................................................................................3.9
24 HOURS ...........................................................................................................................................3.10
125 HOURS ......................................................................................................................................... 3.11
250 HOURS ......................................................................................................................................... 3.12
500 HOURS ......................................................................................................................................... 3.13
1000 HOURS ....................................................................................................................................... 3.13
1500 HOURS ....................................................................................................................................... 3.13
2000 HOURS ....................................................................................................................................... 3.14
2 YEARS ..............................................................................................................................................3.14
SEASONAL ..........................................................................................................................................3.14
SERPENTINE BELT, INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT ............................................................................ 3.26
STRAINER - FUEL TANK .............................................................................................................. 3.28, 3.29
SWING DRIVE LUBRICATION
GEARBOX LOWER BEARINGS ......................................................................................................... 3.20
GEARBOX UPPER GEARING
CHANGE OIL ................................................................................................................................... 3.21
ROTARY MANIFOLD ........................................................................................................................... 3.23
SWING PINION AND SWING BEARING ............................................................................................. 3.23
T
TORQUE CHART .................................................................................................................................... 3.53

TORQUE CHART, GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 3.54
TORQUE, FLUID CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................... 3.55, 3.56, 3.57
TORQUE PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................... 3.52
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS, GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3.54
TRACK
COMPONENTS
TRACK SAG ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................. 3.51, 3.52
TRACK CHAIN SAG ................................................................................................................................ 3.51
TRACK COMPONENTS .......................................................................................................................... 3.51
MEASURING TRACK SAG
TRACK SAG ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................. 3.51, 3.52
TRACK OPERATION AND WEAR PREVENTION
MEASURING SAG DIMENSION ......................................................................................................... 3.51
TORQUE PROCEDURE ...................................................................................................................... 3.52
TRACK CHAIN SAG ............................................................................................................................ 3.51
TRACKS, PROTECTING STEEL TRACKS ............................................................................................. 3.49
U
UNLOADER VALVE – AIR CLEANER ..................................................................................................... 3.47

W
WEIGHTS OF COMMERCIAL WOOD .................................................................................................... 3.59

WIRE COLOUR CODE CHART .............................................................................................................. 3.58
WOOD, WEIGHTS OF COMMERCIAL WOOD ...................................................................................... 3.59
3.3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

NEW MACHINE MAINTENANCE
*INITIAL PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION:
PERFORM THE INITIAL PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
USING Tigercat FORM NUMBERS 5341 and 5347:
"PDI AND 125 HOUR INSPECTION REPORT"
*FIRST 125 HOUR INSPECTION AND SERVICE REPORT:

WITH THE OWNER'S MECHANIC PRESENT,
PERFORM AN INSPECTION AND SERVICE
ACCORDING TO THE Tigercat FORM NUMBERS 5341 and 5347:
"PDI AND 125 HOUR INSPECTION REPORT"
THIS MUST BE COMPLETED WITHIN THE FIRST 125 HOUR TIME FRAME.
*IMPORTANT: TO QUALIFY FOR CONTINUED WARRANTY,

THIS REPORT MUST BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED TO
Tigercat Industries Inc. WARRANTY DEPARTMENT.
Tightening points: NOTE: Use of filters other than genuine

Tigercat replacement filters is not
All hydraulic connections
recommended.
Hose clamps Refer to engine SERVICE MANUAL and
All cylinder and boom pin retainers ATTACHMENT MANUAL for additional
required maintenance at this scheduled time
Check all leveler pivot bearing retaining bolts period.
(If equipped with leveler)
853ILL8
Check swing bearing bolt torque
IMPORTANT!
Engine mounting bolts BEFORE DRIVING THE MACHINE MAKE SURE
Pump mounting bolts THE TRACK TENSION (SAG) IS SET CORRECTLY.
Track shoe bolts TRACK SAG MAY BE SET LESS THAN SPECIFIED
FOR SHIPPING PURPOSES.
Track roller retaining bolts
Track sprocket retaining bolts
Track drive gearbox mounting bolts
Track drive motor mounting bolts
Swing gearbox mounting bolts UNDERSIDE SAG
OF TRACK DIMENSION
Swing motor mounting bolts GUARD
UPPER
Cab securing bolts SURFACE
OF
Any other loose nut, bolt or fitting TRACK
SHOE
MEASURING SAG DIMENSION

REFER TO THIS SECTION FOR THIS PROCEDURE.
3.4
TIGERCAT OIL ANALYSIS PROGRAM

Using the Tigercat Advanced Oil Analysis Program on a regular basis is an excellent preventative
maintenance tool.
Studies have shown that it is possible to receive a 10 to 1 payback when looking at the amount saved
on repair costs to the amount invested in a scheduled oil analysis program. Some of the benefits of a
sampling program include:
• Detect problems early before they become major catastrophic failures.
• Better ability to schedule downtime and forecast cost of repairs.
• Monitor maintenance schedules and practices and confirm the required maintenance is being done
on time.
• Increase used equipment value by providing proof of proper maintenance.
This Program uses the most modern technology available to analyze all oil samples. Most test results are
available within 24 hours after receipt of the sample and are supplied in an easy to understand report,
which calls for specific action and makes detailed recommendations. This report is available as a mailed
or faxed hardcopy, sent by e-mail or can be viewed on the Internet.
This program will provide Tigercat machine owners access to an Advanced Oil Analysis Program for all
major machine components including Engines, Hydraulic Circuits, Axles, Final Drives, Gearboxes, etc.
800 Series Models Recommended Testing Schedule

Location First Sample Follow-up Samples
Hydraulic Oil 125 Hours Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months
Swing Drive Gearbox
125 Hours Every Oil Change (250 Hours or 1.5 Months)
(if applicable*)
Track Drive Gearboxes 125 Hours Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months
Pump Drive Gearbox
125 Hours Every 1000 Hours or 6 Months
(if applicable)
* Note that swing drive gearbox oil sampling applies only to machines
that use gear oil in the swing drive gearbox.
Tigercat Oil Analysis Kits are available from your Tigercat dealer parts department. If required,
arrangements can also be made with your Tigercat dealer to supply and perform all of the required follow-
up oil samples.
Refer to OIL SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURES in THIS SECTION for sample valve and drain plug
locations.
TIGERCAT OIL ANALYSIS KITS
Each kit includes a pre-paid Sample Bottle and Sample Information Form. Pre-printed mailing labels are
also included to ensure all samples are quickly returned directly to the lab for immediate analysis and
results within 24 hours of receipt.
The same type of sample bottle can be used for all types of oil testing including:
Hydraulic Circuits, Final Drives, Axles, Gearboxes, Engines, etc.
To ensure accurate and meaningful results are obtained, each kit also includes detailed instructions on
how to properly collect, prepare and ship the oil samples.
Contact your Tigercat Dealer Parts Department to order Kits.
3.5
TIGERCAT OIL SAMPLING PROGRAM

OIL SAMPLE COLLECTION HYDRAULIC
PROCEDURES SAMPLE VALVE
Fill out the Sample Information Form (SIF)

completely and accurately. When taking multiple
oil samples, fill out all of the required SIF's in their
entirety, prior to taking any oil samples. Then,
immediately package each completed SIF together
H855C-31 HYDRAULIC OIL
with the matching oil sample in the black outer
shipping container as each individual sample is
taken. This will reduce the possibility of mixing up HYDRAULIC OIL SAMPLES:
or incorrectly identifying the SIF's and oil samples. • Hydraulic oil samples should be taken from the
Incorrectly identified samples could result in a circulating oil flow at operating temperature,
false warning alarm. with no functions actuated, using sample
valves that are permanently located on the
The accuracy of the lab analysis results is very machine whenever possible.
dependent on the quality of the oil sample
taken. Collection of clean oil samples that are • To obtain a representative oil sample, sample
representative of the main body of oil are essential valves must be purged before the actual oil
if meaningful lab results are to be obtained. sample is taken. Drain a minimum of
Erroneous readings may result if proper collection, 90 – 120 ml (3 – 4 oz) of oil into a separate
handling, packaging and shipping practices are not container and discard this oil using approved
followed prior to the sample being tested by the recycling methods.
lab. To be able to accurately compare and trend • Replace the dust cover on the sample valve
the lab results over time, all follow-up samples immediately after taking the oil sample and
should be consistently taken from the same sealing the sample bottle.
location using the same techniques as all previous
samples. GEARBOX SAMPLES:
• Ensure that all sample valves and drain plugs • These samples can be taken during the oil
are clean and free of debris. change process.
• Remove the sample bottle cap only when • To obtain a representative oil sample, ensure
ready to take the sample. Keep the cap the oil is warm and has not settled very long
clean – do not put it in your pocket or let it get (within 30 minutes of shutdown).
contaminated in any way. • Place the required drain container under
• Do not allow any airborne dirt, etc. to enter the the machine to capture the used oil to be
sample bottle. discarded using approved recycling methods.
• Avoid contamination of the sample – replace • Remove the drain plug and allow
the sample bottle cap immediately after filling approximately 50% of the oil to drain, then
the bottle to approximately ¾ full. place the sample bottle in the stream of
draining oil to obtain a representative sample.
All samples taken should be immediately
forwarded to the lab for processing.
Contact your Tigercat dealer to purchase
additional or replacement hydraulic sample valves
or drain plugs.
In cases where oil samples must be pumped
or otherwise drawn out of a hydraulic tank or
housing, a hand operated oil suction pump is also
available from your Tigercat dealer.
3.6
GENERAL
• Inspect the EXHAUST BLANKET and
CAUTION EXHAUST SYSTEM DAILY for any signs of
leakage. Check for worn, cracked, broken,
All handles, steps and platforms must be or damaged pipes or muffler. Also check for
kept free of grease, oil, fuel, mud, snow, missing or damaged bolts or clamps. Should
ice and forest debris. any exhaust leaks or defective parts be found,
repairs must be made immediately. Engine
exhaust leaks can cause fires, do not operate
• Clean around fill caps before checking or the machine until the exhaust leak is repaired.
adding fluids.
• During daily operation of the machine, the
• Clean around hydraulic fittings before breaking occurrence of exhaust leaks are usually
connection. Plug or cap immediately. accompanied by a change or increase in
• Clean up all spills immediately. engine exhaust noise levels. These audible
warnings cannot be ignored. Should any
• Always use clean oil and containers. exhaust leaks occur during operation,turn
• Drain dirty oil while still warm. OFF the engine immediately and do not put
the machine back to work until the necessary
• Do not exceed recommended fluid levels.
repairs have been completed.
• Service all hydraulic strainers and filters after
• Always have a fire extinguisher at hand.
the failure of a pump, motor, cylinder or valve.
Failures of this nature could contaminate the • For safety, always lower the boom to the
entire hydraulic system. ground when leaving cab, leaving machine
unattended or during service.
• Always fill the fuel tank at the end of the day to
minimize condensation in the fuel tank. • Always install door safety struts when working
on machine.
• Before welding on the machine, disconnect
all electrical connections and follow servicing • Clean fire suppression system sensors.
safety precautions as outlined in the PRIOR
TO WELDING in SECTION 1 of THIS
MANUAL. CHECK EMERGENCY EXITS,
MONTHLY:
• When welding, secure ground connection
as close to working position as possible to Two alternate exit routes are provided: side door
prevent arcing across machined surfaces or emergency exit and roof escape hatch/emergency
through bearings. exit. These are only to be used if the front door
cannot be opened.
• Clean away all branches, bark and chips.
Clean up all traces of oil to avoid fires. It is therefore essential these emergency exits be
checked at least once per month to ensure they
are fully operational.
Refer to EMERGENCY EXITS – MAINTENANCE
GUIDE in SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S
MANUAL for checking procedure.
*OIL LOST FROM LEAKAGE

LOST OIL (LITERS) LOST OIL (GALLONS)
PER PER PER PER PER PER
LEAKAGE RATE DAY MONTH YEAR DAY MONTH YEAR
ONE DROP IN 10 SECONDS 0.424 12.72 152.0 0.112 3.36 40.0
ONE DROP IN 5 SECONDS 0.852 25.6 306.6 0.225 6.75 81.0
ONE DROP PER SECOND 4.26 127.76 1533.1 1.125 33.75 405.0
THREE DROP PER SECOND 14.2 425.86 5110.31 3.75 112.5 1350.0
DROPS BREAK INTO STREAM 90.83 2725.5 32706.0 24.00 720.0 8640.0
3.7 OIL LOST FROM LEAKAGE

FIRE PREVENTION
Maintaining your machine properly will greatly IMPORTANT!
extend its life and reduce your operating costs. PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK
Fire can result in a machine loss which can be
financially devastating. A
CAUTION
AFTER transporting (trucking) a machine

from one job sight to the next, open all
doors and access panels and blow off any
debris that could have re-positioned itself
845C-097 B
onto the engine and exhaust parts due to 845C-001
wind turbulence caused by the journey.

Before servicing the hydraulic system, open the
air vent valve (A) to release air pressure from
1. Pine needles and bark when allowed to the hydraulic oil tank.
accumulate, form a fuel source that when Air vent valve is open when handle is parallel to
ignited is extremely difficult to extinguish. A valve.
thorough program of regular cleaning and
washing will reduce the possibility of a fire Air vent valve is closed when handle is
starting. In the event a fire does start, the perpendicular to valve (shown).
regular cleaning program will improve the After service is complete, close the air vent
chances of successfully extinguishing a fire. valve and add air pressure to the hydraulic tank
2. Pay close attention to wiring and plumbing using the Schrader valve (B). Make sure the air
routing during maintenance, ensure that is clean and dry. Do not exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi).
ALL wiring harnesses or hydraulic hoses are Refer to HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION
properly restrained and clamped to prevent INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 3 for details.
damage from chaffing.
3. Read the fire suppression system manual
and have the system serviced regularly by
qualified personnel.
4. In case of fire lower the boom system to
the ground and shut OFF the engine before
discharging the fire suppression system.
Also refer to FIRE PREVENTION in SECTION 1 of
THIS MANUAL for additional information.
3.8
For service and replacement intervals see EVERY 8 HOURS:
SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS in THIS • Perform FREQUENTLY maintenance
SECTION.
In addition:
FREQUENTLY:
• Drain water from fuel/water separator.
• Check engine cooling air intake enclosure
screens for possible restriction Check:
• In broad leaf applications it may be necessary • Engine coolant level
to reverse the cooling fan as frequently as • Engine oil level
every 10 minutes.
• Hydraulic oil level
• Check for debris, snow and ice buildup on
emergency exits and remove accumulation • Air intake precleaner operation
immediately. • Air cleaner unloader valve
ER Boom System: • Air intake filter restriction indicator.
• Periodically, the hoist boom must be lifted Replace primary filter if indicator is in red
up as far as it will go and then lowered to zone.
operating height in an area free from overhead
obstructions in order to circulate hydraulic oil Replace secondary (safety) filter every third
from the cylinders back through the cooler primary filter change to guarantee maximum
and filters. This oil does not circulate through performance and reliability.
the cooler or filters during normal horizontal • All air intake system components (including
motion and the oil does not get completely charge air cooler) rubber elbows, connector
changed during normal vertical motion, so it hoses, tubes and clamps for damage,
is important that this procedure be followed at hardening, wear, cracks, leaks, loose clamps
least once every hour. or loose hanger bracket hardware and repair
or replace immediately.
• Swing drive gear box upper bearing gear oil
level
• Charge air cooler for damage, wear, cracks, or
leaks and repair immediately.
• For leakage around hydraulic components and
flexible hoses.
• For loose nuts, bolts and fittings.
• Condition and tension of belts.
• Visually check condition of tracks.
• Exhaust system for leaks.
• Conduct an overall visual inspection.
Clean:
• Oil cooler, engine radiator and enclosure
screens.
• Remove potentially damaging limbs or sticks.
3.9
Lubricate: EVERY 24 HOURS:
• Swing pinion: 1 fitting – 20 shots while • Perform FREQUENT maintenance
swinging. • Perform 8 HOURS maintenance
• Cylinders, Leveling: 4 fittings total – purge (If And in addition:
equipped with leveler)
• Lubricate swing bearing;
• Thrust bearing, Leveling: 2 fittings – purge (If 1 fitting – 10 shots while swinging
equipped with leveler)
Boom Joints:
▪▪ 13 fittings – purge
• Cylinders: hoist, stick and tilt:*
▪▪ 8 fittings – purge
* Lubricating cylinder pins and boom
joints:
1. Ensure machine is on level ground
2. Completely tilt felling head back
3. Fully extend stick boom cylinder
4. Force heel of felling head onto ground
5. While in this position lubricate all
cylinder retaining pins and boom joints
NOTE: This procedure will allow grease to flow
to the normally "loaded side" of the pin/bearing
surfaces.
Refer to engine SERVICE MANUAL and
ATTACHMENT MANUAL for additional required
maintenance at this scheduled time period.
3.10
EVERY 125 HOURS: Visually inspect for:
• Perform FREQUENT maintenance • Frayed electrical wiring and hydraulic hoses.
• Perform 8 HOURS maintenance NOTE: Neglecting the proper maintenance of
• Perform 24 HOURS maintenance these items can result in fire.
In addition: • Wear in any other components.
• Open both (left side door and cab roof escape • Signs of cracks beginning in booms and
hatch) emergency exits to ensure they are attachments.
fully operational. Failure to properly repair cracks in structures
• Carry out A/C system inspection. Refer in a timely manner can result in component
to CHECKING THE AIR CONDITIONING failure and costly repairs which are not
SYSTEM in THIS SECTION. covered under warranty.
Check:
• Return filter bypass message is NOT
displayed on the computer/controller with the
engine running at high idle with oil flow and oil
at operating temperature.
• Pilot filter restriction indicator (when fitted) with
the engine running at high idle.
• Track gearboxes oil level with the level plug
at the 9 O’clock and the other plug at the 6
O’clock position.
• Hydraulic pump and motor securing bolts.
• Torque tightening points as per new machine
maintenance.
Clean/replace:
• Inspect for debris buildup on cooler package
debris screens. Clean as required.
• Air conditioner re-circulation filter
• Cab fresh air filter
Refer to engine SERVICE MANUAL and
ATTACHMENT MANUAL for additional
required maintenance at this scheduled time
period.
Visually check for damage to:
• The hoist and stick booms
• Track components and undercarriage frames
• Swing bearing area
• Attachment
Complete repairs immediately.
3.11
EVERY 250 HOURS: Replace:
• Perform FREQUENT maintenance • Engine fuel filters.*
• Perform 8 HOURS maintenance • Filter in the remote mounted fuel filter/water
• Perform 24 HOURS maintenance separator.
• Perform 125 HOURS maintenance • Swing drive gearbox upper gearing oil. Fill
gear oil bottle half full.
Check:
• Oil in the track drive gearboxes with the drain
• Condition and tension of serpentine belt. plug at the 6 O’clock position and the fill plug
• Check all hydraulic pressures. at the 9 O’clock position.
Clean: *Refer to FILTERS – REMOVE AND REPLACE in
THIS SECTION.
• Clean and thoroughly inspect all surfaces of
the hoist and stick booms for cracks.
All cracks must be properly repaired in their
early stages. In most cases, cracks will
continue to grow in size and often lead to
major structural damage. Failure to regularly
inspect for cracks and immediately repair the
boom system will void the structural warranty.
Contact your Tigercat dealer for specific
procedures required to correctly repair any
cracks found.
Lubricate:
• Rotary manifold seal: 1 fitting – 2 shots. Do not
use power grease gun.
• Swing drive gearbox lower bearing: 2 fittings
– 5 shots each * Do not use a power grease
gun.
* With the swing gearbox at operating
temperature slowly add 5 shots of lithium
based EP2 to each side of the gearbox.
NOTE: During cold weather, the swing
function must be operated for several hours to
achieve operating temperature.
** Use of filters other than genuine Tigercat replacement filters is not recommended.
3.12
EVERY 500 HOURS: EVERY 1000 HOURS:
• Perform FREQUENTLY maintenance • Perform FREQUENTLY maintenance
• Perform 8 HOURS maintenance • Perform 8 HOURS maintenance
Check: • Perform 500 HOURS maintenance
• Torque on the swing bearing, swing gearbox And in addition:
retaining bolts, track drive gearboxes and the Replace:
motor mounting bolts.
• Engine serpentine belt
• Track rollers for leakage.
Check:
Rollers are considered to be maintenance
free. If a lubricant leakage is detected the • Fuel in-tank strainer.
rollers must be removed, repaired and Refer to engine OPERATION AND
replaced. MAINTENANCE MANUAL and ATTACHMENT
• Track idler assembly for leakage. MANUAL for additional required maintenance at
this scheduled time period.
The bearing is filled with oil and is considered
to be maintenance free. If a lubricant leakage
is detected, the idler must be removed, EVERY 1500 HOURS:
repaired and replaced. • Perform FREQUENTLY maintenance
Refer to engine SERVICE MANUAL and • Perform 8 HOURS maintenance
ATTACHMENT MANUAL for additional required
maintenance at this scheduled time period. • Perform 24 HOURS maintenance
Lubricate: • Perform 125 HOURS maintenance
• All door hinges and cover: 24 fittings – 1 shot • Perform 250 HOURS maintenance
• Engine roof cylinder pins: apply oil liberally • Perform 500 HOURS maintenance
Replace: • Perform 1000 HOURS maintenance
• Case drain return filter.** Replace:
• Hydraulic oil return filters.** • Crankcase ventilation filter.
• Pilot filter.* • Air cleaner unloader valve.
* Refer to FILTERS – REMOVE AND REPLACE in Refer to engine OPERATION AND

this section. MAINTENANCE MANUAL for replacement
instructions.
** Use of filters other than genuine Tigercat replacement filters is not recommended.
3.13
EVERY 2000 HOURS: 2 YEARS:
• Perform FREQUENT maintenance Replace:
• Perform 8 HOUR maintenance • Engine coolant. Antifreeze must comply with
international specifications ASTM D-6210.
• Perform 24 HOUR maintenance
Refer to engine OPERATION AND
• Perform 125 HOUR maintenance MAINTENANCE MANUAL for additional
• Perform 250 HOUR maintenance required maintenance at this scheduled time
period.
SEASONAL:
• Drain and refill hydraulic oil tank with
And in addition: recommended hydraulic oil if required to
• Drain and refill hydraulic oil tank with meet operating temperature range. See
recommended hydraulic oil. Refer to APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS in THIS
APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS in THIS SECTION.
SECTION.
It is strongly recommended that a program
of regular oil testing be used. Oil change
intervals can be established from oil test
results.
Check:
• All air intake tubing, rubber couplings and
band clamps for signs of wear and leakage.
• Make sure the hydraulic oil type selected in
the MD3 computer program matches the oil
type being used. Adjust oil type if needed.
Refer to COMPUTER - ADJUSTMENT MENU
- OIL GRADE SELECTION in SECTION 2 of
the OPERATOR’S MANUAL or SECTION 6 of
the SERVICE MANUAL, for selecting hydraulic
oil type setting procedure.
Replace:
• All air intake rubber components such as
elbows and connectors. High temperatures in
this area can cause the rubber to harden.
NOTE: high-temperature silicone connectors
do not need to be replaced unless they are
damaged.
Refer to AIR INTAKE MAINTENANCE in THIS
SECTION.
• Hydraulic tank breather.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for replacement
instructions.
* Use of filters other than genuine Tigercat replacement filters is not recommended.
3.14
ER BOOM SYSTEM Before attempting to disconnect hydraulic hoses or
WARNING STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED

system. Because of this, it may behave
in an unexpected manner compared to a
conventional boom system.
HEAD FLAT
ON GROUND
When performing maintenance procedures or 845C-002 FIG. 1 – PARKING BOOM

setting up a machine equipped with an ER boom
system, the following points must be noted: HOIST CYLINDER
FULLY RETRACTED
The hoist and stick cylinders circuits are
connected hydraulically. Thus, disconnecting a
hydraulic line to a boom cylinder may cause either
boom to move unexpectedly. The booms may
also move unexpectedly if a port relief adjusting
screw is unscrewed (counterclockwise) too far and TIP OF STICK BOOM
FULLY SUPPORTED
the pressure drops below that which is required
to hold the weight of the booms and saw head. 845C-003 FIG. 2 – PARKING BOOM
Ensure the saw head is resting squarely on a solid
1. The machine is parked on level ground with
footing stick cylinders are fully extended, hydraulic
the attachment on the ground (FIG. 1).
tank pressure is relieved, and engine is shut off
before disconnecting any hydraulic lines. 2. The stick cylinders are fully extended (FIG. 1)
or the hoist cylinders fully retracted (FIG. 2).
3. The tip of the stick boom is fully supported.
Do not rely on the saw head to support the
boom system during servicing. Slow leakage
in the hydraulic components can cause the
attachment to move unexpectedly.
For additional safety precautions refer to ER
BOOM SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS in SECTION 1
OF THIS MANUAL.
NOTE: Because of the hydraulic connection
between the hoist and stick cylinders, the hoist
cylinders can overpower the stick cylinders under
certain conditions, causing the stick boom to move
unexpectedly. This most often occurs when setting
the HOIST BOOM UP relief valve, causing the
stick cylinders to extend, but it may also happen
at other times if the relief settings are not correct.
Ensure that all personnel and equipment are
clear of the boom path and that there is sufficient
overhead clearance for the head to rise before
making any adjustments.
3.15
LUBRICATION POINTS DIAGRAM
ROTARY MANIFOLD
TOP SEAL
19 1 FTG/250
23 4 7 3 23 6
SWING GEARBOX 8
LOWER BEARING
18 2 FTG/250
10
TILT CYLINDER
ROD END 1
1 FTG/8 22
5
20
STICK CYLINDER
BASE END
TILT CYLINDER 22
BASE END 1 FTG/8
22 1 FTG/8
HOIST CYLINDER 24
ROD END
HOIST BOOM 22
BASE END 1 FTG/8
21 2 FTG/8 11 13 12
STICK CYLINDER
BASE END
1 FTG/8 22
STICK CYLINDER
ROD END
DOOR HINGES
22 2 FTG/8
7 FTG/500 23 9
TILT LINK
21 5 FTG/8
23
BOOM KNUCKLE
2 FTG/8 21
23
SWING PINION
17 1 FTG/8
2 23
SWING BEARING
16 1 FTG/24
TILT LINK PIN

2 FTG/8 21
STICK BOOM HOIST CYLINDER
BASE END 14
OUTER END
25 2 FTG/8 21 15 2 FTG/8 22
LEGEND
* ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION MUST MEET GM 6038M SPECIFICATIONS - SEE HOURS
MANUFACTURERS MAINTENANCE MANUAL CHK CHECK
2 FTG/125 LUBRICATION POINT WITH A DESIGNATED NUMBER OF FITTINGS (2FTG) AND REP REPLACE
HOURS BETWEEN SERVICING (125 ). JOINT TO BE PURGED. DRN DRAIN
♦ USE LITHIUM BASED GREASE CONTAINING MOLYBDENUM DISULFIDE. D/R DRAIN AND REFILL
† USE OF FILTERS OTHER THAN GENUINE TIGERCAT REPLACEMENT FILTERS LUB LUBRICATE
IS NOT RECOMMENDED.
65138BENG R0
3.16
FILTER AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
Tigercat Model 845C/L845C

FILTER AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
REFER TO Tigercat OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
SERVICE EVERY CAPACITY
POINT NO.
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION REMARKS/LUBRICANT
US gal
1000 
1500 
2000 
LITER
125 
250 
500 
QTY
8
CHANGE COOLANT 60% ANTIFREEZE *
1 COOLING SYSTEM CHK 36 9.5
EVERY 2 YEARS 40% DISTILLED WATER
CHK REP
2 ENGINE OIL/FILTER • • • SEE ENGINE MANUFACTURER’S OPERATION AND
• •
MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR PROCEDURES AND
REP
3 FUEL FILTER (ENGINE) 1 CAPACITIES
•
REFER TO SECTION 3 OF THIS MANUAL FOR
4 FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR DRN REP 1
DETAILS.
DRAIN TANK, CLEAN OR
5 IN-TANK FUEL STRAINER CHK
REPLACE AS NECESSARY.
6 AIR INTAKE PRECLEANER CHK 1 CLEAN AS REQUIRED
7 AIR INTAKE PRIMARY ELEMENT CHK 1 CHECK FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR. REFER
8 AIR INTAKE SAFETY ELEMENT CHK 1 TO 8 HOUR SCHEDULED MAINT. FOR DETAILS.
9 AIR CLEANER UNLOADER VALVE CHK REP

CHECK FOR LOOSE CLAMPS AND DAMAGED
10 AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS CHK REP RUBBER COMPONENTS. REPLACE RUBBER
COMPONENTS.
DRAIN AND REFILL AT SEASONAL OIL CHANGE
SEE APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS*
11 HYDRAULIC TANK CHK D/R 190 50 1
*Tigercat RECOMMENDS REGULAR USE
OF AN OIL TESTING PROGRAM.
IF THE FILTER BYPASS ICON ON THE COMPUTER
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTERS,
REP DISPLAY TURNS RED BETWEEN SCHEDULED
12 1 BLUE WATER ABSORBING ELEMENT CHK 6
† MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES, CHANGE THE
5 WHITE HIGH PERFORMANCE FILTERS
ELEMENTS.
13 HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER REP 1
FILL WITH 75W-90 (SPEC)
RECOMMENDED SYNTHETIC GEAR OIL
††
14 TRACK DRIVE GEARBOX D/R 6 1.5 2 FOR SEVERE DUTY APPLICATIONS
CHK
†† CHECK OIL WITH LEVEL PLUGS AT
6 AND 9 O'CLOCK POSITIONS.
IF LEAKING REMOVE AND REPAIR, FILL WITH SAE
TRACK ROLLERS AND IDLERS
15 CHK 7.6 2 1 75W-90 HT OR 80W-140 HT OIL, REFER TO 500
CHECK FOR LUBRICANT LEAKAGE
HOURS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE FOR DETAILS
LUB GREASE EVERY 24 HOURS WHILE SWINGING
16 SWING BEARING 10 SHOTS 1
24HR LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
GREASE WHILE SWINGING.
17 SWING PINION LUB 20 SHOTS 1
LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
5 SHOTS REFER TO 250 HOURS SCHEDULED
18 SWING GEARBOX LOWER BEARINGS LUB EACH 2 MAINTENANCE FOR DETAILS.
FITTING LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
REFER TO 250 HOURS SCHEDULED
19 ROTARY MANIFOLD TOP SEAL LUB 2 SHOTS 1 MAINTENANCE FOR DETAILS.
LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
FILL WITH 75W-90 OR 80W-140 SYNTHETIC GEAR OIL
20 SWING GEARBOX UPPER GEARING CHK D/R 1
UNTIL BOTTLE REMAINS HALF FULL WHEN OIL IS HOT.
21 HOIST & STICK BOOM JOINTS LUB PURGE 13 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
22 CYLINDERS; HOIST, STICK, TILT LUB PURGE 8 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
23 DOOR AND ROOF HINGES LUB 1 SHOT 17 LITHIUM BASE EP2 GREASE 
24 ROOF CYLINDER PINS LUB LUBRICATE 4 APPLY OIL LIBERALLY
25 ATTACHMENT SEE MANUFACTURER'S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
65138BENG R1
3.17
845CH-233
LUBRICATION POINTS DIAGRAM, LEVELER 3.18

APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS

Use one of the following oils to fill or replenish the hydraulic system.
3.19
SWING DRIVE LUBRICATION LUBRICATION OF SWING DRIVE
GEARBOX UPPER GEARING
LUBRICATION OF SWING DRIVE
GEARBOX LOWER BEARINGS
845C-099
GEAR OIL
BOTTLE
845C-084 UPPER GEARING LUBRICATION

LOWER BEARINGS GREASE FITTINGS The swing gearbox upper gearing is filled with
gear oil. Check oil level in the bottle every 8 hours.
The cavity in the lower portion of the gearbox Oil level in the bottle must be kept at the half full
where the two lower bearings are housed is mark at all times. Drain and replace swing drive
completely filled with grease. gear box upper bearing gear oil every 250 hours.
845C-017 Use 75W-90 or 80W-140 gear oil.
For additional information refer to SECTION 15 in
the SERVICE MANUAL.
LOWER BEARINGS
GREASE FITTINGS
LOWER BEARINGS GREASE FITTINGS

Open the hydraulic pump compartment and locate
the grease fittings. Using a hand grease gun and
with the gearbox at operating temperature slowly
add 5 shots of lithium based EP2 grease to each
side of gearbox every 250 hours. Do not over
grease.
NOTE: During cold weather applications the swing
function must operate for several hours to achieve
operating temperature. If machine is not warmed
up, the lower seal can be damaged.
IMPORTANT!
Do not force grease, gearbox failure may result.
Do not use a power grease gun to lubricate this
machine. Use a hand grease gun only.
For additional information refer to SECTION 15 of
THE SERVICE MANUAL.
3.20
CHANGE SWING DRIVE GEARBOX UPPER 8. Lift and rotate the main control valve cover.
GEARING OIL
NOTE: Change swing drive gearbox oil after 250
hours maximum operation and every 250 hours
from then on.
860C-001

4. Remove the ignition key. A
5. Open engine enclosure roof and doors. 845C-257
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. A Main Control Valve Holding Bracket
9. Prop the bottom of the main control valve

cover into the holding bracket (A).
B 845C-258
A Cover
B Cover Hardware (QTY 6)
845C-256
A Main Control Valve Cover 10. Remove the main control valve upper frame
B Main Control Valve Cover Release Handle
cover.
7. Turn the main control valve cover release

handle (A) clockwise.
CAUTION
Due to high temperatures in this area the

main control valve release handle may be
hot. Use caution when handling.
3.21
845C-149
A Drain Manifold
B Drain Hose
11. Remove the dust cap from the drain manifold

environmental drain plug.
12. Install the drain hose on the drain manifold
environmental drain plug.
13. Drain the swing gearbox upper gearing
through the drain hose.
NOTE: Dispose of the waste oil according to
local regulations.
14. Remove and store the drain hose.
15. Install the environmental drain plug dust cap.
16. Install the main control valve cover.
17. Add gear oil to both gear oil bottles. Refer to
APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS in SECTION
3 of THIS SECTION.
NOTE: When the oil is hot, only fill the gear oil
bottles half full.
18. Close engine enclosure roof and doors.
3.22
LUBRICATION OF SWING PINION AND ROTARY MANIFOLD SEAL
SWING BEARING
24
ROTARY MANIFOLD
SEAL GREASE
SWING PINION SWING BEARING
GREASE FITTING GREASE FITTING
SWING PINION AND 845C-017

860-096 BEARING GREASE
To lubricate the rotary manifold seal, apply 2 shots
To lubricate the swing bearing, apply 10 shots grease every 250 hours to the lower grease fitting.
of grease while swinging, every 24 hours to the NOTE: During cold weather applications the swing
lower grease fitting located on the seat pedestal and machine functions must operate for several
in the operator’s cab. To lubricate the swing pinion hours to achieve operating temperature. Warm the
(or teeth) apply 20 shots of grease every 8 hours lubricating grease to 22°C (72°F) before lubricating
while swinging, to the upper grease fitting located the rotary manifold seal. Do not over grease!
on the seat pedestal. The grease fittings are
clearly labeled.
For lubrication schedule, refer to LUBRICATION
AND MAINTENANCE schedule and SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE - 250 HOURS in THIS SECTION.
THE SERVICE MANUAL.
3.23
CHECKING THE AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM
A
Any service work must be performed by a certified
A/C technician. The system should be charged
with R134a refrigerant only. PAG (polyalkylene
glycol) oil should be present in the system and
must be used on O-rings and fittings during
assembly.
A/C System Total Capacities

R134a refrigerant 1.36 kg (3 lb)
PAG oil (polyalkylene glycol) 207 ml (7 oz)
The compressor and charge valves are accessed

on the right side of the engine. The receiver drier
B
is mounted to the fan shroud seal support bracket.
Perform following inspection along with 125 845C-246
HOURS inspection outlined in SCHEDULED
A A/C Condenser Mounting Hardware
MAINTENANCE in THIS SECTION.
B A/C Condenser
1. Check re-circulating and fresh air filters in
operator's cab. Refer to SECTION 2 of the 5. Remove the A/C condenser mounting
OPERATOR'S MANUAL. hardware
2. Check for dirt and debris on the evaporator 6. Rotate the condenser away from the cooler
coil located inside the A/C-heater unit and also package.
the inside of the A/C-heater unit. Clean as
required. 7. Check the condenser core for dirt and debris.
Clean as required. Refer to CLEANING A/C
CONDENSER, OIL COOLER, RADIATOR and
CHARGE AIR COOLER in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR'S MANUAL.
CAUTION
If using pressurized water or compressed
air for cleaning, use at 2 bar (30 psi) or less.
A Always use personal protective equipment
(safety glasses) to guard against flying
debris.
845C-238
A Debris Screen
B Cooler Package
3. Remove the debris screen from the cooler

package.
4. Remove potentially damaging limbs or sticks.
3.24
HIGH PRESSURE
MOISTURE RELIEF VALVE
INDICATOR
SIGHT GLASS
BINARY SWITCH
A/C RECEIVER/DRIER
875-371 (TOP VIEW)
845C-252
A Compressor Drive Belt 14. Inspect the sight glass on the receiver drier
when the A/C system is ON. A constant stream
8. With engine turned OFF, check and adjust of bubbles indicates the system requires
compressor drive belt tension. charging.*
NOTE: Belt tension specifications are 15. Check the colour of the moisture indicator:
55 ± 2 kgf (121 ± 5 lb).
Blue = normal
9. Check all A/C hoses for kinks.*
Pink = moisture in the system
10. Run air conditioning system for 3 to 5 minutes.
NOTE: If the moisture indicator is
11. Check to see that compressor clutch will pink,replace receiver/drier, evacuate and
engage.* recharge system with both refrigerant and
PAG oil.*
12. Listen to the compressor and blower motor for
abnormal noises. *Indicates these repairs must only be carried
out by a certified A/C technician.
13. Check air temperatures exiting the vents in the
cab. For additional SERVICE information refer to
the Tigercat A/C SERVICE MANUAL, part
number 18795A, available from Tigercat parts
department.
IMPORTANT!
It is recommended that during cold weather when
the A/C system is not in use, that it be run for a
period of five minutes every two weeks. This will
circulate oil to all components of the A/C system.
3.25
INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT OF
SERPENTINE BELT
845C-252
A Serpentine Belt
All belts should be inspected periodically for signs

of incisions, cracks, excessive wear in grooves,
and signs of end or surface grinding.
Drive belt tensioning is controlled by the automatic
tensioner, therefore checking belt tension is not
required.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for inspection/
replacement information.
3.26
FILTERS – REMOVE AND REPLACE IMPORTANT!
Filters that are an integral part of the engine
IMPORTANT!
(fuel and lubricating oil) should be serviced and
Failure to service and replace filters at the proper
replaced according to the engine manufacturer’s
intervals specified in the manufacturer's manuals,
operation and maintenance manual.
could cause damage to the machine and result in
the product warranty becoming NULL and VOID. Tier 3 and Tier 4 engines typically use filters with
Check Tigercat parts catalog for replacement a very fine micron rating. If the fuel supply is dirty,
filters. the fuel filter must be replaced more frequently
than recommended in the owner’s manual.
Refer to the appropriate engine OPERATION AND
Operating the machine with a clogged fuel filter will
MAINTENANCE MANUAL for correct procedures
result in low engine power. It is also recommended
and time intervals when servicing the engine oil
the fuel/water separator bowl be drained daily.
and fuel filters. Read and understand the SAFETY
section in each of these manuals. When installing a new fuel filter, do not pre-fill with
diesel fuel, or engine fuel pump damage will result.
This type of failure will void warranty by the engine
H845C-49
FUEL FILTER/
manufacturer.
FUEL WATER
FILTER SEPARATOR To prolong the operating life of the fuel filter,
ensure the fuel supply storage tank is clean and
free of water and the fuel is pre-filtered prior to
adding it to the machine.
DRAIN
TAP
ENGINE FUEL FILTER AND FUEL FILTER/

WATER SEPARATOR
ENGINE
OIL FILTER
855C-018 CUMMINS ENGINE OIL FILTER
3.27
D B
I F
845CH-075
A Fuel Fill Cap F Centre Fuel Tank Drain Plug

B Fuel Level Sender G Left Side Fuel Tank Environmental Drain Plug
C Fuel Supply Shut-off Solenoid Valve H Right Side Fuel Tank Environmental Drain Plug
D Fuel Return Check Valve I Fuel Tank Strainer
E Clean Out Cover
FUEL TANK COMPONENTS The return line (D) on the top of the right tank is
fitted with a check valve to prevent reverse flow
Located at the rear of the upper structure the fuel
from the tank.
tank assembly consists of three compartments, a
left tank, a centre section and a right tank. FUEL TANK CAPACITY
The fuel filler cap (A) is located on top of the left The fuel tanks have a total capacity of 1003 L (265
tank and incorporates a strainer built into the neck US gal)
of the fill pipe to prevent foreign particles from FUEL TANK STRAINER
entering the tank during filling.
A stainless steel 150 micron fuel strainer (7) is
The fuel level sender (B) is located on top of the screwed onto the end of the fuel supply pipe
right tank. located inside the fuel tank. The fuel tank strainer
An electric fuel shut-off valve (C) is located on top is accessible by removing the centre fuel tank
of the right tank fuel supply fitting. The fuel shut-off clean out cover (5).
valve is activated by the ignition switch. When the
ignition switch is ON or in the RUN position the
shut-off valve is open allowing fuel to flow to the
engine. When the ignition switch is OFF the fuel
shut-off valve is turned OFF.
3.28
FUEL TANK STRAINER 9. Drain the fuel from the left, right and centre
fuel tanks into a suitable container.
A stainless steel 150 micron fuel tank strainer (I)
is screwed onto the end of the fuel supply pipe NOTE: the fuel will be reused after the fuel
located inside the fuel tank. The fuel tank strainer tank strainer has been changed/cleaned.
is accessible by removing the centre fuel tank
clean out cover (E).
CHANGING/CLEANING THE FUEL TANK
STRAINER:
NOTE: Changing the fuel tank strainer is only A
required if excessive quantities of foreign material B
has built up inside the fuel tank.
C
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
845C-259
A Cover Hardware
TIP OF STICK B Clean Out Cover
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED C O-ring
860C-001
10. Remove the clean out cover and O-ring.

1. Park the machine on level ground with the 11. Visually inspect the bottom of the centre fuel
attachment resting firmly on the ground. tank for debris. Remove and wipe clean any
2. Apply the swing brake. debris found.
4. Remove the ignition key. WARNING
5. Open engine enclosure roof and doors.
To lower the risk of causing accidental
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. fires, DO NOT leave fuel or oil soaked rags
7. Remove the dust caps from the left and right laying around.
side fuel tank environmental drain plugs.
845C-150
A Environmental Drain Plug

B Drain Hose
8. Install the drain hose on the left and right side

fuel tank environmental drain plug.
3.29
845C-260
A Fuel Strainer
12. Remove the fuel tank strainer.

13. Carefully clean the fuel tank strainer.
NOTE: Use caution when cleaning the fuel
tank strainer or damage may occur.
14. Check for a buildup of foreign material where
the strainer screws onto the pipe.
15. Reinstall the fuel tank strainer.
16. Reinstall fuel tank cover plate with O-ring.
CAUTION
S≤15 mg/kg
Do not fill the fuel tank while smoking or
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
near an open flame or FUEL
sparks.
ONLY
36686AUNI R0
If the engine is hot or running, do not fill
the fuel tank.
17. Refuel and check for leaks.
3.30
REFUELLING PROCEDURE
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
860C-001
1. Park the machine on level ground with the 855D-029

A Fuel Fill Cap
3. Turn OFF the engine. 9. Remove fuel fill cap slowly to allow pressure to
escape from the tank.
10. Inspect the fuel fill cap gasket.
11. Inspect fuel tank strainer located under the
fuel fill cap for debris or damage.
7. Clear obstructions from steps and handles
12. Attach a grounding strap to an unpainted
needed to access fuel tank.
metal surface on the machine if the refuelling
8. Clear any debris from around the fuel fill cap. tank or nozzle is so equipped.
CAUTION
S≤15 mg/kg
Do not fill the fuel tank while smoking or
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
near an open flame or FUEL
sparks.
ONLY
36686AUNI R0
If the engine is hot or running, do not fill
the fuel tank.
13. Fill the fuel tank until the fuel level reaches the
fuel tank strainer or the full mark on the fuel
level gauge if equipped.
Do not leave the nozzle unattended or
spillage may occur.
14. Remove the nozzle and the ground strap (if
applicable).
15. Install the fuel fill cap hand tight
17. Close the power roof.
3.31
OPTIONAL BOTTOM REFUELLING
SYSTEM B
The bottom refuelling system is an option that

allows for easy refuelling of the machine with a
fuel supply from an external fuel pump. A C
855D-030
B C
D 845C-267
845C-264
A Fuel Float Switch

B Fuel Tank Venting Valve
C Fuel Shut Off Valve
A On/Off Switch
A float switch, fuel tank venting valve and fuel shut
off valve are part of the bottom refuelling system.
B On/Off Indicator Light
The float switch and fuel tank venting valve are
C Quick Connect Socket
located on top of the fuel tank while the fuel shut
D Quick Connect Plug off valve is located beside the on/off switch. The
fuel tank venting and fuel shut off valves open
The bottom fuelling system uses quick connect when the bottom refuelling system is turned ON.
couplings which can be reached from the ground. The fuel shut off valve allows fuel to enter the fuel
An on/off switch located beside the quick connect tank while the fuel tank venting valve allows air to
socket allows the bottom refuelling system to escape the fuel tank.
be easily turned on or off. Pull the switch out to The fuel tank venting and fuel shut off valves will
turn on system and push in to turn it off. An on/ close when:
off indicator light is used to indicate when the
• The on/off switch is pushed to the OFF
bottom fuel system is on or off. When the bottom
position
refuelling system is on the on/off indicator light will
illuminate. • The fuel level in the fuel tank energizes the
fuel float switch.
3.32
BOTTOM REFUELLING PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT!
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
860C-001 A
855D-032
A On/Off Switch
Do not leave machine unattended while refuelling.
1. Park the machine on level ground with the 10. Pull the on/off switch into the ON position.
11. The on/off indicator light will illuminate when
2. Apply the swing brake. the bottom fuelling system is ON.
3. Turn OFF the engine. NOTE: The bottom refuelling system can be
turned OFF at any time by pushing the on/off
switch.
12. When the fuel tank is full the fuel float switch
6. Install a ground strap (if applicable). will turn OFF the bottom fuelling system.
7. Remove the dust caps from quick connect 13. Turn OFF the external fuel pump.
plug and socket.
14. Disconnect the quick connect plug and socket.
8. Connect the quick connect plug and socket.
15. Install the quick connect plug and socket dust
9. Turn ON the external fuel pump. caps.
16. Remove the ground strap (if applicable).
17. Close the power roof.
18. Regularly inspect and repair all fuel fill system
components to reduce the risk of spillage or
fire.
3.33
OPTIONAL BOTTOM REFUELLING
SYSTEM POWER PORT
A
845C-269
855D-007
A Power Port
The bottom refuelling system has the option for a

remote port to power an external fuel pump. The
remote port is located above the bottom refuelling
system on/off switch.
NOTE: The bottom refuelling system power port
will only be powered if the battery disconnect
switch is in the ON position.
3.34
HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION
HYDRAULIC FILTER INSTRUCTIONS
SERVICING GUIDELINES Releasing hydraulic tank pressure in the event of
a hose breakage may reduce oil loss. To release
pressure from the hydraulic tank:
IMPORTANT! Wearing eye protection, release air from the
hydraulic tank by opening the air vent valve. Pull
NEVER PRE-FILL valve handle down 90° to open. Push valve handle
HYDRAULIC FILTERS up to close.
Tigercat does not recommend the pre- NOTE: Expelled air from vent valve will blow
filling of spin-on filters due to the risk of accumulated loose debris in the enclosure.
damage to the hydraulic system caused by
unfiltered oil. Unfiltered oil used to pre-fill FILTER/ AIR VENT VALVE PRESSURE
BREATHER HANDLE (SHOWN GAUGE. MAX
filters enters directly into the hydraulic IN UP POSITION) 34.5 KPA (5
UP = CLOSED PSI)
circuit. Contaminants in unfiltered oil can DOWN = OPEN
cause significant and costly damage to
hydraulic valves, pumps and motors. The
cleanliness of hydraulic oil cannot be
guaranteed unless it is always pre-filtered
before use.
IMPORTANT!
Filters must be replaced at the recommended
time intervals, Refer to scheduled maintenance
in this section.
Use of hydraulic oil filters other than the Tigercat SCHRADER VALVE -
brand could lead to severe wear and rapid ADD 34.5 KPA (5 PSI)
AIR PRESSURE TO
failure of hydraulic system components. PRESSURIZE TANK
AFTER SERVICE IS
COMPLETED
H845C-59
WARNING IMPORTANT!
Air vent valve must be opened before changing
hydraulic filters and strainers or performing any
other service on hydraulic circuits. Do not operate
machine with the air vent valve in the open
position.
During a filter change or return hose replacement,
air is able to enter the return hydraulic circuit. It is
important to bleed as much of this air as possible
Warning, HOT hydraulic oil and hot out prior to restarting the machine. Refer to
machine surfaces can cause serious HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTERS – FILTER
burns! CHANGE PROCEDURE in THIS SECTION for
instructions on bleeding air from return circuit. Air
• Before servicing the machine, allow
bubbles in the hydraulic system will damage
the hydraulic system and machine
the pumps.
surfaces to cool down.
• Use a thermometer to check surface After service is completed, close air vent valve
and system temperatures to ensure it and add air pressure from a clean air source to the
is safe to begin service work. hydraulic tank using the Schrader valve. Do not
exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi).
• Do not begin service work until the
surface or system temperature has
cooled down to below 38°C (100°F).
3.35
Check to ensure the hydraulic oil type selected in 845C-111
the computer program matches the oil type being

used. Adjust oil type if needed. This will allow the OPEN FITTINGS TO
VENT AIR FROM
program to optimize the cooling and warnings SYSTEM
functions to best suit the oil being used. Refer to
OIL GRADE SELECTION in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR’S MANUAL or SECTION 6 of the
SERVICE MANUAL, for selecting hydraulic oil type
setting procedure.
It is strongly recommended that a program of
regular oil testing be used. Oil change intervals
can be established from oil test results.
VENTING AIR FROM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
REFILLING THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
VENT AIR FROM FITTING
NOTE: Changing strainers, filters and replacing
the hydraulic oil tends to aerate the oil. For
maximum pump life, the machine should sit for
one hour after servicing to allow entrained air
to escape from the oil prior to applying working
pressures to the pumps.
NOTE: When refilling the hydraulic system, vent
pumps, motors and valves of air by opening a
plug or hose fitting located near or on top of the
pumps, motors and valves until oil free of air is
seen flowing out of the plug or hose fitting. Failure
to vent air from the hydraulic system could cause H845C-56 COOLING FAN MOTOR
serious damage to hydraulic components. Tighten
plugs or fittings and clean up any spilled oil when VALVE PLUGS
completed.
NOTE: Check all hydraulic system components
especially cooling fan for proper operation after
hydraulic oil has been replaced.
H845C-57 FAN DRIVE CONTROL VALVE

OPEN FITTING
TO VENT AIR
FROM SYSTEM
845C-098 FAN DRIVE PUMP
3.36
HYDRAULIC FILL PUMP – HAND
TO TANK THROUGH THE

RETURN FILTERS
SUCTION HOSE
SHUT-OFF
VALVE IN OFF
HAND FILL POSITION
PUMP
845C-063 HYDRAULIC HAND FILL PUMP
To add oil to the hydraulic tank, thoroughly clean

the outside surface of the suction tube and remove
the plug. Open the oil fill shut-off valve, insert end
of suction hose into supply drum and operate the
pump. The oil is pumped directly into the hydraulic
tank through the return filters. The pump should
always be operated at a medium speed with
steady motion. Pumping too fast may cause oil to
bypass oil filter.
IMPORTANT!
Close shut-off valve, replace cap on suction tube,
wipe dry, and store after filling. Failure to keep the
suction tube clean will significantly reduce the life
of the filter elements.
3.37
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTERS If the FILTER BYPASS icon displays RED
between scheduled maintenance intervals, STOP
2
THE MACHINE and change these filter elements.
If the icon continues to display RED after the filters
have been changed, the return diffusers/strainers
attached to the base of the return tubes in the
hydraulic tank should be examined for possible
obstruction.
Refer to HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN DIFFUSERS/
STRAINERS – CHANGING OR CLEANING in
THIS SECTION.
NOTE: The FILTER BYPASS icon will
display YELLOW until the oil is brought up to
temperature after cold start ups. This is due to
the system temporarily interpreting the thick oil
1 as a restriction. Allow oil to warm to operating
temperature and the icon should change in colour
to GREY. Refer to MACHINE PREPARATION in
845C-062 HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTERS
There are six replaceable filters (1) mounted on

three filter heads beside the hydraulic tank (2).
The filters should be checked/changed at
the intervals specified in the FILTER AND
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE in THIS SECTION.
845C-085
DIFFUSERS/
STRAINERS
RETURN TUBE DIFFUSERS/STRAINERS
There are three mesh type reusable diffusers/

strainers, one on the end of each return tube in the
hydraulic tank.
IMPORTANT!
Inspecting, changing or cleaning the strainers
should only be performed in the event of a pump
or motor catastrophic failure or hydraulic oil
contamination.
3.38
FILTER RESTRICTION PRESSURE FILTER CHANGE PROCEDURE:
SWITCH
IMPORTANT!
855C-035
There is a bypass valve built into each filter head,

preset at 1.7 bar (25 psi) which will open in the 845C-097
845C-001
B
event the elements become restricted. Before this
valve is activated, a 1.4 bar (20 psi) filter restriction Before servicing the hydraulic system, open the
pressure switch installed in the return manifold, will air vent valve (A) to release air pressure from
send a signal to the computer control system when the hydraulic oil tank.
pressure of 1.4 bar (20 psi) is encountered at the Air vent valve is open when handle is parallel to
return filters. This pressure switch closes and the valve.
hydraulic oil filter bypass icon displays RED on
the MD3 computer. The master alarm and alarm Air vent valve is closed when handle is
light will sound and flash. perpendicular to valve (shown).
IMPORTANT! After service is complete, close the air vent

Do not use these warnings as a substitute for valve and add air pressure to the hydraulic tank
checking the oil level at regular intervals as per the using the Schrader valve (B). Make sure the air
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE program in THIS is clean and dry. Do not exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi).
SECTION. Refer to HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION
INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 3 for details.
This information is assuming that operating
conditions and running temperatures are STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
NORMAL.
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
860C-001

NOTE: Leveling machines are equipped with
a service ladder, which should be utilized for
service access to the left side of the enclosure.
3.39
7. Wearing eye protection, release air from the  O-RING GASKET
hydraulic tank by opening the air vent valve.
FILTR_SEALS 2
Pull handle DOWN 90° to open valve. FILTER
HEAD
NOTE: Air pressure expelling from the vent
valve will blow accumulated loose debris in the
compartment. GASKET
8. Wipe the area around the filter and head

FILTER
clean. ELEMENT
9. Wearing eye and face protection (in case of an

oil spray), unscrew the old filter. O-RING GASKET INSTALLATION
10. Dispose of old filter and any oil properly. Remove used gasket and clean gasket seat in
head.
11. The new Tigercat filter is supplied with two
gaskets, examine the filter head closely to Apply clean oil to new gasket surfaces.
determine which gasket should be used Install new gasket on inside lip of filter.
and follow the instructions to ensure proper
installation. Screw on new filter until gasket makes
contact.
 SQUARE SECTION GASKET
Tighten filter until top edge makes metal to
FILTR_SEALS 2
FILTER metal contact with filter head.
HEAD
(Approximately 1½ additional turns after
gasket contact).
GASKET 12. Close the air vent valve, push handle UP.
FILTER
ELEMENT
SQUARE SECTION GASKET INSTALLATION
RETURN
Remove used gasket and clean groove in MANIFOLD
head.
Apply clean oil to new gasket surfaces. COUPLER
CONNECTION
Install new gasket into groove in filter head.
BLEED
Screw on new filter until gasket makes HOSE
contact. WASTE OIL

CONTAINER
Tighten filter an additional ¾ turn. BLEEDING AIR FROM
S855C-004
HYDRAULIC RETURN CIRCUIT
13. Attach bleed hose (located in the breather

cabinet behind the cab and above the
hydraulic tank) to the coupler on the return
manifold.
14. Route hose to a waste oil container.
3.40
15. Use fill pump to raise hydraulic oil level up to
the FULL line, replacing oil lost during filter
change.
16. As oil is being pumped into the hydraulic tank,
purge air out the bleed hose from the return
manifold until a steady stream of oil is coming
from the bleed hose.
17. Disconnect bleed hose from the coupling at
the return manifold.
18. Clean up any spilled oil.
19. If oil level reaches full mark before air is
completely bled, pressure can be added to
the hydraulic tank using the Schrader valve
from a clean air source (ie: compressed
air from service truck or shop). Monitor the
hydraulic tank pressure gauge when adding
air pressure. Do not exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi).
20. Start the engine and check for leaks.
21. Run engine at IDLE speed for at least five
minutes to purge any remaining air from the
filter system. Then STOP the engine for
15 minutes to allow air bubbles in the hydraulic
tank to rise.
22. Re-check hydraulic oil level – top-up as
needed.
3.41
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN DIFFUSERS/ CHANGING OR CLEANING THE
STRAINERS DIFFUSERS/STRAINERS
IMPORTANT!
IMPORTANT! Inspecting, changing or cleaning the diffusers/
strainers should only be performed in the event of
PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK a pump or motor catastrophic failure or hydraulic
oil contamination.
A
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
845C-097 B 860C-001
845C-001
Before servicing the hydraulic system, open the 1. Park the machine on level ground with the
air vent valve (A) to release air pressure from attachment resting firmly on the ground.
the hydraulic oil tank.
Air vent valve is open when handle is parallel to
valve. 3. Turn OFF the engine.
Air vent valve is closed when handle is 4. Remove the ignition key.
perpendicular to valve (shown). 5. Open engine enclosure roof and doors.
After service is complete, close the air vent 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
valve and add air pressure to the hydraulic tank
using the Schrader valve (B). Make sure the air NOTE: Leveling machines are equipped with
is clean and dry. Do not exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi). a service ladder, which should be utilized for
Refer to HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION service access to the left side of the enclosure.
INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 3 for details. 7. Wearing eye protection, release air from the
845C-085 hydraulic tank by opening the air vent valve.
Pull handle DOWN 90° to open valve.
DIFFUSERS/
STRAINERS
RETURN TUBE DIFFUSERS/STRAINERS
There are three reusable diffusers/strainers on

the return tubes. The diffusers/strainers should be
inspected whenever the hydraulic tank is drained.
See SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE in THIS
SECTION.
3.42
18. Continue filling hydraulic tank using fill pump.
Tighten case drain hose fittings to pumps
when oil is seen coming from the pump
case drain ports. It is important that all air is
evacuated from the pumps.
1
19. Fill hydraulic tank up to FULL mark on the
sight gauge.
20. Recheck oil level and add hydraulic oil up to
FULL mark using fill pump.
NOTE: Changing diffusers/strainers and filters and
replacing the hydraulic oil tends to aerate the oil.
For maximum pump life, the machine should sit for
HYDRAULIC TANK one hour after servicing to allow any air bubbles
845C-062 CLEAN-OUT COVER to escape from the oil prior to applying working
pressures to the pumps.
8. Drain the hydraulic tank using the drain plug in
the bottom of the hydraulic tank.
9. Remove the round access cover (1) and
O-ring.
10. Before removing the diffusers/strainers, clean
any debris from the bottom of the hydraulic
tank and wipe it clean.
11. Remove the three hydraulic oil return diffusers/
strainers using the hex on the end of strainer.
Carefully clean the diffusers/strainers (they
may be damaged by rough handling).
12. Check for a buildup of foreign materials where
the diffusers/strainers screw onto the pipes
and cover plate.
13. Re-install the diffusers/strainers using the hex
on end.
14. Re-install the access cover plate with a NEW
O-rings.
15. Add hydraulic oil to tank using fill pump.
16. Close air vent valve (push handle up). Add
air pressure to the hydraulic tank using the
Schrader valve from a clean air source. Do not
17. Bleed air from the main, attachment and fan
pumps by loosening the case drain hose
fittings at each pump connection.
3.43
HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER CASE DRAIN STRAINERS
Two case drain strainer elements are located on
the machine.
IMPORTANT!
Only in the event of a pump or motor major
failure or hydraulic oil contamination should these
elements be serviced. Always use the correct
replacement element.
H845C-59 HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER
The hydraulic tank breather is located in the

compartment at the rear of the operator cab. This 845C-111 CASE DRAIN STRAINER
breather should be replaced every 2000 hours.
One element is located in the pump compartment
and services most pump case drains.
IMPORTANT!
845C-097 B
845C-001
Before servicing the hydraulic system, open the

air vent valve (A) to release air pressure from
the hydraulic oil tank.
Air vent valve is open when handle is parallel to
valve.
H845C-60 CASE DRAIN STRAINERS
Air vent valve is closed when handle is
perpendicular to valve (shown). The other strainer element is located beside the
pilot manifold in the valve compartment. This
After service is complete, close the air vent
element is dedicated to case returns from the
valve and add air pressure to the hydraulic tank
attachment head.
using the Schrader valve (B). Make sure the air
is clean and dry. Do not exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi).
Refer to HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION
3.44
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM The engine air precleaner cleans engine air
before it reaches the air cleaner filter elements.
It removes contaminants such as dust, powder,
insects, rain and snow. This precleaner is self
powered and self cleaning requiring virtually no
maintenance. However, it should be checked
daily to make sure that foreign materials have not
plugged the intake area or the exhaust port area of
the precleaner.
845C-067 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
ENGINE AIR PRECLEANER
845C-070 PRECLEANER OPERATION
How it works
1. Air enters the underside of the dome through
screened louvers, which prevents clogging by
blocking any particles larger than the ejection
slot from entering the unit.
2. Curved particle accelerator blades slam air
and dirt up against the sidewall.
3. Strakes along the interior surface move
heavier-than-air debris towards the ejection
slot.
4. Clean air continues to swirl down into the
engine air inlet pipe.
3.45
AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT STEPS TO FOLLOW WHEN
CHANGING FILTER ELEMENTS
1. Release the cover latch gently to reduce
the amount of dust dislodged.
2. Avoid dislodging dust from filter element(s)
by gently pulling the element off the outlet
tube.
SAFETY
ELEMENT
3. Always clean the sealing surface of the
outlet tube before inserting a new filter
element.
4. Always clean the inside of the outlet tube.
5. Check your old filter. It can help you detect
foreign material on the sealing surface that
is causing leakage.
UNLOADER
PRIMARY VALVE NOTE: Filter elements should never be
ELEMENT
cleaned and reused. Cleaning causes dust to
AIR CLEANER AIR FILTER ELEMENTS bypass the filter and be deposited on the inner
surface of the filter media. The dust is then
drawn directly into the engine.
The air cleaner on this machine uses TWO filter
elements, a primary element and a safety element. 6. Inspect the new filter for damage.
To ensure maximum engine protection, it is 7. Insert the new filter properly. Apply
important the elements be serviced correctly and pressure to the outer rim of the filter not
at proper servicing intervals. the flexible centre.
In addition to the LUBRICATION AND 8. Inspect connections and ducts for air
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE outlined in THIS tight fit. Ensure that all clamps, bolts
SECTION, the following instructions should also and connections are tight. Check rubber
be noted: elbows for splits or wear points and
replace as needed. Leaks in these
The most common and most damaging air intake locations send dust directly to the engine.
servicing problems are:
OVER SERVICING
Filter elements increase in dust cleaning efficiency
as dust builds up on the media. Looks can be
deceiving. A filter that looks dirty is actually more
efficient than one that is clean. A filter with dust
build up on the media reaches nearly 100% dust
cleaning efficiency. Only when a filter is so clogged
with dirt that air restriction goes beyond engine
manufacturer's guidelines, should a filter be
replaced.
NOTE: This does not apply to hydraulic oil or
diesel engine filters.
IMPROPER SERVICING
Engine exposure to dust during servicing is the
largest single reason for engine damage due to
dust.
Abrasive dust can easily enter the intake system
once the air cleaner cover and protective filter
element is removed for replacement. The safety
element does reduce this risk but it should also be
replaced at every third primary element change.
3.46
AIR CLEANER UNLOADER VALVE FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR
FILTER FILTER
RESTRICTION RESTRICTION
INDICATOR SENSOR
860C-019
H845C-44
H845C-46
A filter restriction indicator is connected to the
This rubber valve on the tube of the air cleaner outlet side of the air filter. Service to the air filter
housing should be checked before every shift (8 is required when the indicator shows RED. This
hours). If this valve is missing, damaged or has indicator provides a continuous reading whether
turned hard, it will cause the air cleaner to become the engine is running or is shut down. After
ineffective. The valve should be replaced every servicing the filter, reset the indicator by pressing
1500 hours. the reset button on the end of the indicator.
Remove the unloader valve from the tube of the air
ENGINE AIR INTAKE
cleaner housing. A good valve is soft and flexible. PRESSURE ICON
Check and clean the valve. If it was plugged, then
check the filter elements as they may need to be
replaced as well. Reattach the valve to the tube.
The valve should suck closed at about ⅓ of full
throttle. When operating in high dust conditions
this valve should be checked and squeezed
frequently to release dust buildup.
The machine is also equipped with an engine

air filter restriction sensor which sends a signal
to the computer control system in the event of
filter restriction. The engine air intake pressure
icon turns YELLOW when service to the filter is
required and turns RED, along with an ALERT
message, when service to the air filter has
reached a critical state.
Refer to AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE, OVER
SERVICING and IMPROPER SERVICING in THIS
SECTION.
3.47
AIR INTAKE BY-PASS INTAKE TUBING AND JOINTS
AIR INTAKE
RUBBER
COMPONENTS
H845C-45
845C-067 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
During cold weather operation the air intake Check all air intake system components, rubber
by-pass cover can be removed to introduce warm elbows, connector hoses, tubes and clamps for
engine compartment air into the engine air intake. damage, hardening, wear, cracks, leaks, loose
Remove the two bolts and cover to open the clamps or loose hanger bracket hardware and
by-pass. repair or replace immediately.
Replace all air intake rubber components such as
elbows and connectors every 2000 hours. High
temperatures in this area can cause the rubber to
harden.
NOTE: High-temperature silicone connectors do
not need to be replaced unless they are damaged.
During warm weather operation reinstall the cover

and bolts to block the by-pass.
3.48
Alternate turning directions.
If you're always turning in the same direction, the
undercarriage components on one side of the
machine will wear at a different rate than those on
the other side. To ensure even wear, pay attention
to the way you're turning and change directions
whenever possible.
Make gradual turns instead of counter-
rotations.
Counter-rotating accelerates wear on the tracks
PROTECTING STEEL TRACKS and other undercarriage components. Don't use
Steel tracks are designed to perform in tough that technique unless job conditions demand it.
underfoot conditions. Take these steps to maximize Instead, turn the machine gradually while slowly
service life and reduce operating costs. moving forward or reverse. Gradual turns minimize
excessive wear in the undercarriage. They also
Start every shift with a clean undercarriage.
reduce damage to soft or sensitive work surfaces.
When mud and debris build up on the lower part of
In the event a counter rotation is required some
your machine, components wear at a faster rate.
machine operators will carefully push the boom
Do not begin work until the undercarriage area is
and saw head down against a suitable obstacle
clean.
and lift the forward or rear sections of the track off
Inspect the undercarriage before you start the ground. The operator will then counter rotate
working. the tracks while swinging the upper structure.
In addition to ensuring the undercarriage is clean, This will disengage most of the track length from
spend a couple of minutes on a visual inspection. the ground during the counter rotation resulting in
Check for loose bolts, leaky seals and abnormal less site damage and potentially less track wear.
wear patterns. When you spot potential problems This is a complex maneuver and should only be
early, you can often prevent them from turning completed with fully trained and experienced
into bigger issues that reduce component life operators working in stable ground conditions.
significantly or cause expensive unscheduled
Work up or down a slope whenever possible.
downtime.
Don't spin the tracks.
Track spinning, reduces production, it increases
fuel consumption, without a corresponding
increase in productivity. And it accelerates
undercarriage wear, so your costs escalate.
Grouser bars are especially prone to wear
problems associated with track slippage.
Watch your speed.
There are times when a job requires higher speed
operation, but the fact is, wear accelerates as
speed increases. Links, rollers and idlers are
particularly vulnerable. Keep them working longer
by controlling your speed.
Avoid unnecessary reverse operation.
Operating in reverse even at slow speeds Working across a slope can shorten undercarriage
compounds bushing and sprocket wear as the component life, so try to structure the job with
track tension loads are applied to the top side minimal cross-slope activity.
of the chain. So avoid an unproductive reverse
operation.
3.49
Watch transition areas.

Try to minimize travel over transition obstacles
as this accelerates undercarriage wear. If you
must go across a transition, position the machine
90° to the transition. Without ground support, the
undercarriage is subjected to side stresses that
can result in rapid, excessive wear.
Other factors:
Configuration refers to the way your machine
is equipped and is therefore something you
can control. To minimize undercarriage wear on
steel-track machines, always use the narrowest
track shoe possible that meets your flotation
requirements. If you work in very sticky materials,
consider using center-punched track shoes to
reduce material packing in the undercarriage area.
Maintenance discipline plays a big role in
undercarriage component life. One of the most
critical maintenance practices is track adjustment.
Tight track is the number-one "track killer." But
whether your track is too loose or too tight,
improper adjustment accelerates wear which
can increase downtime and repair costs. Follow
Application refers to the type of work you do.
the manufacturer's recommendations for track
Bunching, loading, grading, digging and trenching
adjustment, and always perform the adjustment
are a few examples. This factor is largely beyond
in the machine's working environment. A second
your control, but generally speaking, the more you
important maintenance process is cleaning the
work in high horsepower, high-torque applications,
undercarriage. To maximize wear life, remove
the faster your undercarriage will wear.
mud and debris at the end of every shift, or more
Material type is another key contributor to frequently if necessary.
undercarriage wear that is outside your control,
Talk to the experts:
the more abrasive the material, the more rapid the
Undercarriage components are expensive!
wear rate.
To get long life and maximum value from your
Terrain, a third uncontrollable factor, describes investment, consult with a dealer or factory rep that
the contours and slopes at your job site. The more really knows the undercarriage business. Ask for
time you spend in rugged, sloped areas, the faster advice on operating techniques. Explore relevant
your undercarriage will wear out. application, material and terrain issues. Fine-tune
your maintenance processes. Working together
with an undercarriage expert, you can manage
your equipment investment over the long term.
3.50
CONTROLLABLE WEAR FACTORS TRACK SAG ADJUSTMENT

TRACK CHAIN SAG Filling procedures for track sag adjustment will
depend on which undercarriage your vehicle is
Too tight track chains significantly shortens
equipped with.
bushing Wear life
MEASURING TRACK SAG FILL
VALVE
845-012A1 LIFT LEFT TRACK
1. Position saw head in vertical position and

swing boom to side of machine.
2. Place saw head on the ground and force
down with boom controls, lift track clear of the
ground. 880-303 TRACK SAG FILL VALVE
3. Rotate track in forward and reverse several
times. Stop the track while in reverse. Do not
clean the track.
4. Stop engine.
845C-002
TRACK SAG ADJUSTMENT

To tighten the track, use a grease gun and add
SAG
UNDERSIDE OF DIMENSION grease at the fill valve. Add grease until the track
TRACK GUARD
sag dimension is within recommended limits. Refer
to MEASURING TRACK SAG in THIS SECTION
UPPER SURFACE
for recommended limits.
OF TRACK SHOE
To loosen the track, slowly loosen the fill valve until
853ILL8 MEASURING SAG DIMENSION grease begins to escape through the vent passage
in the valve body housing. Grease will vent around
5. Measure distance between upper surface of the valve body threads. Remove grease until
track shoe at centre of lower surface of track the track sag dimension is within recommended
guard. limits. Refer to MEASURING TRACK SAG in THIS
6. This dimension should be between SECTION for recommended limits.
102 – 152 mm (4 – 6 in) for normal operations. NOTE: The track sag fill valve is mechanically
NOTE: If track sag is less than specified, track restricted from being removed completely.
chain wear will be accelerated. If track sag is
excessive, it is possible for the track to jump off the
sprocket.
3.51
VALVE
COUPLER
FILL VALVE
860C-320
880-303 TRACK SAG FILL VALVE
TORQUE PROCEDURE
845C-003

To tighten the track, attach the coupler onto the fill
valve. Connect a grease gun to the grease fitting
on the coupler. Add grease until the track sag
dimension is within recommended limits. Refer TORQUE PROCEDURE
860C-333
for recommended limits. Remove the coupler and • Incorrect bolt torque is the leading cause of
store in a safe place. shoe loosening
• Torque + turn is the shoe bolts assembly
WARNING method.
The grease is under very high pressure. • Provides controlled stretch of the bolt,
Removing the fill valve completely may about 0.3 mm (0.01 in). It is the stretch that
cause the valve to blow out and cause prevents the bolt from coming loose.
bodily harm. • Provides up to 25% more clamp load than
straight torque.
To loosen the track, slowly loosen the fill valve until • It is not influenced by friction/condition of
grease begins to escape through the vent passage mating components.
the valve body threads. Remove grease until • The method is also used on other critical joints,
the track sag dimension is within recommended such as sprocket, master sections and final
limits. Refer to MEASURING TRACK SAG in THIS drives. Refer to TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS in
SECTION for recommended limits. SECTION 11 of the SERVICE MANUAL.
NOTE: The track sag fill valve is not mechanically

restricted from being removed completely.
3.52
TORQUE CHART
LOCATION THREAD TORQUE (LUBRICATED)
DIAMETER lbf-ft Nm
Cylinder, Tilt, 120 mm (6337B)
Piston nut M52 x 2 3522 4775
Cylinder gland bolts M16 197 267
Cylinder, Tilt, 120 mm (56174B)
Piston nut M62 3186 4320
Cylinders, Leveler, 7" ID (46067B)
Piston nut M75 Note 1 Note 1
Cylinder end cap bolts M14 150 203
Cylinder, Hoist Boom, 140 mm ID, (44882B)
Cylinder, Stick Boom, 110 mm ID, L.H. & R.H. (6338B)
Cylinders, Roof, 2" ID (5475B)
Piston nut 3/4" UNF 110 149
Swing bearing
Swing bearing bolts 7/8" UNC 455-500 617-678
Swing gearbox mounting bolts M20 400 542
Engine mounting
Rear bracket to chassis M24 x 3 675 925
Rear mounting brackets to engine M12 x 1.75 40 54
Front bracket to chassis M24 x 3 675 925
Front mounting bracket to engine M12 x 1.75 40 54
Pump drive
Drive plate to flywheel 3/8" UNC 30 41
Mounting plate to bell housing M10 x 1.5 25 34
Undercarriage
Track shoe bolts (D6) 3/4" UNF T/T* T/T*
Track shoe bolts (FH400) M24 X 12.9 T/T* T/T*
Track shoe bolt (F8) M20 X 12.9 T/T* T/T*
Roller mounting bolts 7/8" UNC 450 610
Sprocket bolts M20 380 515
Gearbox mounting bolts M20 380 515
Drive motor mounting bolts M12 95 130
M20 380 515
Leveler,forward/backward pivot shaft and housing bolts M24 675 915
*T/T represents Torque-turn, this is a method of torquing the track shoe bolts which is fully described in
SECTION 11 of the Tigercat SERVICE MANUAL.
Note 1: Apply black grease to face of piston. Apply blue Loctite to nut and threads and hand torque to 600
lbf-ft (814 Nm). Mark line on nut and rod and rotate nut through 70°.
Torque values pertaining to the engine and attachment are provided in the service manuals
applicable to those major components.
845C TORQUECHART R2
3.53
GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

The torque values listed below are for general use only.
Do not use these values if a different torque value or
IMPERIAL tightening procedure is shown for a specific application.
GRADE 8 BOLTS GRADE 5 BOLTS
IMPERIAL BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

GRADE 8 BOLTS GRADE 5 BOLTS
COARSE DRY LUBRICATED COARSE DRY LUBRICATED
THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm
1/4" - 20 11 - 12 15 - 16 8 - 10 11 - 13 1/4" - 20 7- 8 10 - 11 8 - 10 11 - 13
5/16" - 18 26 - 30 35 - 40 20 - 28 27 - 38 5/16" - 18 14 - 18 19 - 24 10 - 15 13 - 20
3/8" - 16 44 -48 60 - 65 33 - 36 45 - 49 3/8" - 16 31 - 34 42 - 46 23 - 25 31 - 34
7/16" - 14 70 - 77 95 - 104 52 - 57 71 - 77 7/16" - 14 49 - 54 66 - 73 37 - 41 50 - 55
1/2" - 13 106 - 117 144 - 158 80 - 88 109 - 119 1/2" - 13 75 - 83 102 - 112 57 - 63 77 - 85
9/16" - 12 153 - 168 208 - 228 115 - 127 156 - 172 9/16" - 12 109 - 120 148 - 162 82 - 90 111 - 122
5/8" - 11 212 - 233 288 - 316 159 - 175 216 - 237 5/8" - 11 150 - 165 204 - 223 113 - 124 152 - 168
3/4" - 10 376 - 414 510 - 561 282 - 310 393 - 420 3/4" - 10 266 - 293 360 - 397 200 - 220 271 - 298
7/8" - 9 606 - 667 822 - 904 455 - 501 617 - 679 7/8" - 9 394 - 433 535 - 586 296 - 326 402 - 441
1" - 8 909 - 1000 1233 - 1355 682 - 750 925 - 1016 1" - 8 591 - 649 802 - 879 443 - 489 601 - 663
1 1/8" - 7 1288 - 1417 1746 - 1921 966 - 1062 1310 - 1441 1 1/8" - 7 794 - 873 1077 - 1183 596 - 656 808 - 889
1 1/4" - 7 1817 - 1999 2464 - 2710 1360 - 1496 1844 - 2027 1 1/4" - 7 1120 - 1232 1519 - 1670 840 - 924 1139 - 1252
FINE DRY LUBRICATED FINE DRY LUBRICATED
THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm THREAD lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm
1/4" - 28 13 - 14 18 - 19 10 - 13 14 - 17 1/4" - 28 9 - 10 12 - 13 9 - 10 12 - 13
5/16" - 24 23 - 28 31 - 38 18 - 25 25 - 33 5/16" - 24 17 - 22 23 - 29 16 - 20 21 - 27
3/8" - 24 49 - 54 67 - 73 37 - 41 50 - 55 3/8" - 24 35 - 39 48 - 53 26 - 29 35 - 39
7/16" - 20 78 - 86 106 - 116 58 - 64 79 - 86 7/16" - 20 55 - 61 75 - 83 41 - 45 56 - 61
1/2" - 20 120 - 132 163 - 179 90 - 99 122 - 134 1/2" - 20 85 - 94 116 - 127 64 - 70 87 - 95
9/16" - 18 171 - 188 232 - 255 128 - 141 174 - 191 9/16" - 18 121 - 133 164 - 180 91 - 100 124 - 135
5/8" - 18 240 - 264 326 - 358 180 - 198 244 - 268 5/8" - 18 170 - 187 231 - 253 128 - 141 174 - 191
3/4" - 16 420 - 462 570 - 626 315 - 347 427 - 470 3/4" - 16 297 - 327 403 - 443 223 - 245 303 - 332
7/8" - 14 668 - 735 906 - 996 501 - 550 679 - 745 7/8" - 14 434 - 477 589 - 646 326 - 359 442 - 486
1" - 14 995 - 1096 1359 - 1486 746 - 821 1012 - 1113 1" - 12 646 - 711 876 - 965 484 - 534 657 - 724
1 1/8" - 12 1445 - 1590 1960 - 2155 1083 - 1191 1469 - 1613 1 1/8" - 12 891 - 980 1208 - 1328 668 - 735 906 - 996
1 1/4" - 12 2012 - 2213 2728 - 2997 1509 - 1660 2046 - 2250 1 1/4" - 12 1240 - 1364 1682 - 1849 931 - 1024 1262 - 1387
METRIC 4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9
12.9
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
5 10 10 12
10
10
12
5
5 10 10 12
METRIC BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

CLASS 4.8 CLASS 8.8 OR 9.9 CLASS 10.9 CLASS 12.9
SIZE LUBRICATED DRY LUBRICATED DRY LUBRICATED DRY LUBRICATED DRY
Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft Nm lbf-ft
M6 4.8 3.5 6.0 4.5 9.0 6.5 11.0 8.5 13.0 9.5 17.0 12.0 15.0 11.5 19.0 14.5
M8 12.0 8.5 15.0 11.0 22.0 16.0 28.0 20.0 32.0 24.0 40.0 30.0 37.0 28.0 47.0 35.0
M10 23.0 17.0 29.0 21.0 43.0 32.0 55.0 40.0 63.0 47.0 80.0 60.0 75.0 55.0 95.0 70.0
M12 40.0 29.0 50.0 37.0 75.0 55.0 95.0 70.0 110.0 80.0 140.0 105.0 130.0 95.0 165.0 120.0
M14 63.0 47.0 80.0 60.0 120.0 88.0 150.0 110.0 175.0 130.0 225.0 165.0 205.0 150.0 260.0 190.0
M16 100.0 73.0 125.0 92.0 190.0 140.0 240.0 175.0 275.0 200.0 350.0 225.0 320.0 240.0 400.0 300.0
M18 135.0 100.0 175.0 125.0 260.0 195.0 330.0 250.0 375.0 275.0 475.0 350.0 440.0 325.0 560.0 410.0
M20 190.0 140.0 240.0 180.0 375.0 275.0 475.0 350.0 530.0 400.0 675.0 500.0 625.0 460.0 800.0 580.0
M22 260.0 190.0 330.0 250.0 510.0 375.0 650.0 475.0 725.0 540.0 925.0 675.0 850.0 625.0 1,075.0 800.0
M24 330.0 250.0 425.0 310.0 650.0 475.0 825.0 600.0 925.0 675.0 1,150.0 850.0 1,075.0 800.0 1,350.0 1,000.0
M27 490.0 360.0 625.0 450.0 950.0 700.0 1,200.0 875.0 1,350.0 1,000.0 1,700.0 1,250.0 1,600.0 1,150.0 2,000.0 1,500.0
M30 675.0 490.0 850.0 625.0 1,300.0 950.0 1,650.0 1,200.0 1,850.0 1,350.0 2,300.0 1,700.0 2,150.0 1,600.0 2,700.0 2,000.0
M33 900.0 675.0 1,150.0 850.0 1,750.0 1,300.0 2,200.0 1,650.0 2,500.0 1,850.0 3,150.0 2,350.0 2,900.0 2,150.0 3,700.0 2,750.0
M36 1,150.0 850.0 1,450.0 1,075.0 2,250.0 1,650.0 2,850.0 2,100.0 3,200.0 2,350.0 4,050.0 3,000.0 3,750.0 2,750.0 4,750.0 3,500.0
3.54
EATON Aeroquip Assembly Torque

Eaton recommends that a Torque wrench be used to assure
Recommended proper fitting assembly of these connections.
Parallel
The values listed are for steel connections. Contact Teaton for
Connection torque values for other materials.
Assembly torque
Straight Thread O-Ring Boss Low Pressure with Straight Thread O-Ring Boss High Pressure with
37º (SAEJ514) ORS (J1453)
Jam Nut or Jam Nut or Jam Nut or Jam Nut or
Thread Straight Straight Thread Straight Straight
Dash Size Fitting Torque Fitting Torque Dash Size Fitting Torque Fitting Torque
Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters
-03 3/8-24 8-9 12-13 -03 3/8-24 8-10 11-16
-04 7/16-20 13-15 18-20 -04 7/16-20 14-16 20-22
-05 1/2-20 14-15 19-21 -05 1/2-20 18-20 24-27
-06 9/16-18 23-24 32-33 -06 9/16-18 24-26 33-35
-08 3/4-16 40-43 55-57 -08 3/4-16 50-60 68-78
-10 7/8-14 43-48 59-64 -10 7/8-14 72-80 98-110
-12 1 1/16-12 68-75 93-101 -12 1 1/16-12 125-135 170-183
-14 1 3/16-12 83-90 113-122 -14 1 3/16-12 160-180 215-245
-16 1 5/16-12 112-123 152-166 -16 1 5/16-12 200-220 270-300
-20 1 5/8-12 146-161 198-218 -20 1 5/8-12 210-280 285-380
-24 1 7/8-12 154-170 209-230 -24 1 7/8-12 270-360 370-490
-32 2 1/2-12 218-240 296-325
ORS SAE 37º (JIC)

Swivel Swivel Swivel Swivel
Thread Nut Nut Thread Nut Nut
Dash Size Torque Torque Dash Size Torque Torque
Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters Size (inches) lb.-ft. Newton Meters
-04 9/16-18 10-12 14-16 -04 7/16-20 11-12 15-16
-06 11/16-20 18-20 24-27 -05 1/2-20 15-16 20-22
-08 13/16-16 32-35 43-47 -06 9/16-18 18-20 24-28
-10 1-14 46-50 62-68 -08 3/4-16 38-42 52-58
-12 1 3/16-12 65-70 88-95 -10 7/8-14 57-62 77-85
-16 1 7/16-12 92-100 125-136 -12 1 1/16-12 79-87 108-119
-20 1 11/16-12 125-140 170-190 -16 1 5/16-12 108-113 148-154
-24 2-12 150-165 204-224 -20 1 5/8-12 127-133 173-182
-24 1 7/8-12 158-167 216-227
-32 2 1/2-12 245-258 334-352
Metric BSPP
Thread Size Straight Adapter or Locknut Torque Nominal
mm lb.-ft. Newton Meters Thread Size Straight Adapter or Locknut Torque
M10x1 13-15 18-20 inches** lb.-ft. Newton Meters
M12x1.5 15-19 20-25 G1/8-28 13-15 18-20
M14x1.5 19-23 25-30 G1/4-19 19-23 25-30
M16x1.5 33-40 45-55 G3/8-19 33-40 45-55
M18x1.5 37-44 50-60 G1/2-14 55-70 75-95
M20x1.5 52-66 70-90 G3/4-14 103-118 140-160
M22x1.5 55-70 75-95 G1-11 162-184 220-250
M26x1.5 81-96 110-130 G1 1/4-11 170-192 230-260
M27x2 96-111 130-150 G1 1/2-11 258-347 350-470
M33x2 162-184 220-250 ** "G" denotes parallel threads, other than ISO 6149
M42x2 170-192 230-260 (Port connection only)
M48x2 258-347 350-470
Eaton Aeroquip Fluid Conveyance Products A-HOOV-MC001-E January 2005
3.55
Parker Assembly Torque

The 4-Bolt Split Flange consists of four main The four-bolt port is simply a circular opening (flow
components: passage) surrounded by four tapped holes in a certain
• A body (flange head) pattern for acceptance of the flange clamping bolts. The
• An O-ring flat surface of the port compresses the O-ring contained
• One “captive” or two “split” flange clamps in the groove in the flange head when the clamp bolts
• Four bolts and washer are torqued. In some instances, the groove is in the
port and not in the flange head. The bolts, through the
clamp halves, clamp down the flange head on to the flat
surface of the port compressing and trapping the O-ring
WASHERS in the groove and leaving no gap for it to extrude under
pressure. The hydraulic pressure is thus sealed by the
BOLTS compressed O-ring as long as the bolts are tightened
enough to maintain solid metal to metal contact between
FLANGE the flange head at the outside diameter of the O-ring and
CLAMP
the top of the port.
Flange Port Assembly
The steps to properly assemble the flange port clamping
bolts are:
FLANGE
1. Make sure sealing surfaces are free of burrs,
HEAD nicks, scratches or any foreign particles.
2. Lubricate the O-ring.
O-RING
3. Position flange and clamp halves.
TAPPED
4. Place lock washers on bolts and insert through
HOLES clamp halves.
5. Hand tighten bolts.
6. Torque bolts in diagonal sequence
(see Fig. T9) in small increments to the
appropriate torque level listed in Table T6 or
Table T7 on this page.
FLANGE.TIFF
Fig. T8 - 4 Bolt Split Flange Components
FLANGE2.TIFF
Fig. T9 - Flange Bolt Tightening Sequence
Dash Flange Inch Bolt Torque Metric Bolt Torque

Size Size (J518) lbf-ft (ISO 6162) Nm
Dash Flange Inch Bolt Torque Metric Bolt Torque
8 1/2 5/16-18 17 +/- 2 M8 25 Size Size (J518) lbf-ft (ISO 6162) N-m
12 3/4 3/8-16 25 +/- 3.5 M10 49
16 1 3/8-16 31 +/- 4.5 M10 49 8 1/2 5/16-18 17 +/- 2 M8 25
20 1-1/4 7/16-14 41 +/- 5 M12 85 12 3/4 3/8-16 30 +/- 4.5 M10 49
16 1 7/16-14 46 +/- 4.5 M12 85
24 1-1/2 1/2-13 52 +/- 6 M12 85
20 1 1/4 1/2-13 69 +/- 6 M14 135
32 2 1/2-13 60 +/- 6 M12 135
24 1 1/2 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 210
40 2-1/2 1/2-13 85 +/- 9 M12 95
32 2 3/4-10 208 +/- 20 M20 425
48 3 5/8-11 144 +/- 15 M16 220
56 3-1/2 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 220 * Does not meet ISO 6162 specification.
64 4 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 220 Table T7 - Code 62 Flange Recommended Bolt Torque
80 5 5/8-11 125 +/- 8 M16 220
* Does not meet ISO 6162 specification.

Table T6 - Code 61 Flange Recommended Bolt Torque
3.56
Parker Assembly Torque

JIC 37 Degree Flare NPTF
Tube Connection Swivel or Hose Tube Connection Swivel or Hose
SAE Dash Size Thread Size FFWR Connection FFWR SAE Dash Size Thread Size TFFT Connection TFFT
-2 5/16-24 NA NA -2 1/8-27 2-3 2-3
-3 3/8-24 NA NA -3 NA NA NA
-4 7/16-20 2 2 -4 1/4-18 2-3 2-3
-5 1/2-20 2 2 -5 NA NA NA
-6 9/16-18 1 1/2 1 1/4 -6 3/8-18 2-3 2-3
-8 3/4-16 1 1/2 1 -8 1/2-14 2-3 2-3
-10 7/8-14 1 1/2 1 -10 7/8-14 NA NA
-12 1 1/16-12 1 1/4 1 -12 3/4-14 2-3 2-3
-14 1 3/16-12 1 1 -14 NA NA NA
-16 1 5/16-12 1 1 -16 1-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-20 1 5/8-12 1 1 -20 1 1/4-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-24 1 7/8-12 1 1 -24 1 1/2-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-32 2 1/2-12 1 1 -32 2-11 1/2 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-40 3-12 1 1 -40 NA NA NA
F.F.W.R : Flats From Wrench Resistance T.F.F.T. : Turns from finger tight
All values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass All pipe values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass
O'ring Face Seal / Seal-Lok BSPT

Tube Connection Swivel or Hose Tube Connection Swivel or Hose
SAE Dash Size Thread Size FFWR Connection FFWR SAE Dash Size Thread Size TFFT Connection TFFT
-2 NA NA NA -2 1/8-28 2-3 2-3
-3 NA NA NA -3 NA NA NA
-4 9/16-18 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -4 1/4-19 2-3 2-3
-6 11/16-16 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -6 3/8-19 2-3 2-3
-8 13/16-16 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -8 1/2-14 2-3 2-3
-10 1-14 1/4 TO 1/2 1/2 TO 3/4 -10 NA NA NA
-12 1 3/16-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -12 3/4-14 2-3 2-3
-16 1 7/16-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -16 1-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-20 1 11/16-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -20 1 1/4-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-24 2-12 1/4 TO 1/2 1/3 TO 1/2 -24 1 1/2-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
-32 NA NA NA -32 2-11 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5
F.F.W.R : Flats From Wrench Resistance T.F.F.T. : Turns from finger tight
All values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass All pipe values are for Steel, Stainless Steel and Brass
SAE J1926 Straight Thread Port Assembly Torques
ASSEMBLY TORQUE = 10 % -0
NON-ADJUSTABLE ADJUSTABLE PLUGS
SAE
THREAD TRIPLE-LOK TRIPLE-LOK HOLLOW HEX HEX HEAD
DASH
SIZE SEAL-LOK FERULOK PIPE SEAL-LOK FERULOK PIPE
SIZE HP5ON-S P5ON-S
FITTINGS FITTINGS
lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft lbf-ft
(lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm (lbf-in) Nm
2 5/16-24 (310) 20 (85) 10 (310) 20 (60) 7 (30) 3.5 (85) 10
3 3/8-24 (310) 20 (155) 18 (310) 20 (100) 11 (55) 6 (155) 18
4 7/16-20 (310) 20 (260) 29 (310) 20 (180) 20 (120) 13.5 (260) 29
5 1/2-20 (360) 40 (280) 32 (360) 40 (250) 28 (170) 19 (280) 32
6 9/16-18 (420) 46 (350) 40 (420) 46 (350) 40 (410) 46 (350) 40
8 3/4-16 60 80 (620) 70 60 80 (620) 70 60 80 (620) 70
10 7/8-14 100 135 85 115 100 135 85 115 100 135 85 115
12 1 1/16-12 135 185 135 183 135 185 135 183 135 185 135 183
14 1 3/16-12 175 235 175 237 175 235 175 237 175 235 175 237
16 1 5/16-12 200 270 200 271 200 270 200 271 200 270 200 271
20 1 5/8-12 250 340 250 339 250 340 250 339 250 340 250 339
24 1 7/8-12 305 415 305 414 305 415 305 414 305 415 305 414
32 2 1/2-12 375 510 375 509 375 510 375 509 375 510 375 509
3.57
WIRE COLOUR CODE CHART
TIGERCAT WIRE COLOUR CODE CHART APPLICABLE TO ALL PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY
TIGERCAT INDUSTRIES INC.
COLOUR FUNCTION EXAMPLE
Red Power (fused and unfused)
Black Ground
White Engine Control (fuel shut-off, start aid)
Blue Propulsion Control (transmission/reverser solenoids)
Purple Monitor, electrical and Mechanical systems (air cleaner, alternator, wheel speed, engine speed)
(park brake, alternator excitation)
Tan Electrical and electromechanical control
(power door motor, backup alarm)
Yellow Monitors (flow, pressure, temperature, level)
Grey Standard Monitor System (logic module to monitor)
Brown Lights
Green Electro-Hydraulic Control (pilot solenoids)
Orange Accessories (horn, A/C, heater)
COMMON CONVERSIONS
TO CONVERT... INTO... MULTIPLY BY TO CONVERT... INTO... MULTIPLY BY
bar psi 14.5 in3 cm3 16.39
cm3 in3 0.06102 °F °C (°F - 32) / 1.8
°C °F (°C x 9/5) + 32 US gal L 3.785
kg lb 2.205 hp kW 0.7457
kW hp 1.341 in mm 25.4
L US gal 0.2642 lb kg 0.4535
mm in 0.03937 lbf•ft N•m 1.356
N•m lbf•ft 0.7375 psi bar 0.06896
N lbf 0.22481 in Hg psi 0.4912
in H2O psi 0.03613
lb N 4.4482
3.58
Weights of Commercial Wood
Species kg/m3 lb/ft3 Species kg/m3 lb/ft3
Alder, Red 737 46 Maple, Big Leaf 753 47

Ash, White 769 48 Maple, Black 865 54
Aspen, Quaking 689 43 Maple, Red 801 50
Bald Cypress 817 51 Maple, Silver 721 45
Basswood, American 673 42 Maple, Sugar 897 56
Beech, American 865 54 Oak, Black 1009 63
Birch, Paper 801 50 Oak, Chestnut 977 61
Birch, Yellow 929 58 Oak, Red 1009 63
Cedar, Alaska 577 36 Oak, Red, Swamp 1073 67
Cedar, Incense 721 45 Oak, Swamp Chestnut 1041 65
Cedar, Northern White 449 28 Oak, White 993 62
Cedar, Port-Orford 897 56 Oak, White, Swamp 1105 69
Cedar, Western Red 433 27 Pine, Jack 801 50
Cherry, Black 721 45 Pine, Loblolly 993 62
Cottonwood, Eastern 785 49 Pine, Lodgepole 625 39
Douglas Fir, Coast 881 55 Pine, Long Leaf 993 62
Douglas Fir, Inland North 577 36 Pine, Norway, Red 673 42
Elm, American 865 54 Pine, Short Leaf 993 62
Fir, Alpine 449 28 Pine, Slash 993 62
Fir, Balsam 721 45 Pine, Sugar 817 51
Fir, Nobel 481 30 Pine, Western Yellow 721 45
Fir, Red 769 48 Pine, White-Western 561 35
Fir, Silver 577 36 Pine, White-Eastern 577 36
Fir, White 753 47 Poplar, Yellow 609 38
Gum, Black 721 45 Redwood 801 50
Gum, Blue 1121 70 Spruce, Black 513 32
Gum, Red 801 50 Spruce, Engleman 625 39
Gum, Tupelo 897 56 Spruce, Red 545 34
Hemlock, Eastern 801 50 Spruce, Sitka 529 33
Hemlock, Western 657 41 Spruce, White 545 34
Hickory, Pecan 993 62 Sweetgum 801 50
Hickory, True 1009 63 Sycamore, American 833 52
Larch, Western 769 48 Tamarack 753 47
Locust, Black 929 58 Walnut, Black 929 58
Magnolia, Cucumber 785 49 Willow, Black 801 50
Note: The values shown here are green weights.

3.59
Industries Inc. FAR10092
PRESSURE/SPEED SETTINGS 845C/L845C
REV No. DATE ECN No. ENGINEERING CHANGE DESCRIPTION ENG.
7 3/11/2015 A29207 SEE ECN JHS
PART No.
JOB No. PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS
EMPLOYEE No. COMMENTS
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE (Check appropriate box)

Mult-Weight Oil 60° C (140° F) Summer Oil 60° C (140° F) Winter Oil 43° (110° F)
Specification RPM
ENGINE RPM - CUMMINS
High Idle, no load maximum 2250 rpm High
Low idle, no load 950 rpm Low
Rated working 2200 rpm
PILOT SUPPLY
Pilot supply pressure; low idle, no function 34 bar (500 psi) Low
Pilot supply pressure; high idle, no function 34 bar (500 psi) High
Pilot supply pressure; high idle, swing with brake on 34 bar (500 psi) High
MAIN PUMP
Anti-Stall set Point 130 rpm below engine rpm High
Stand-by Pressure, Max with Pilot OFF Non-Adjustable 34 bar (500 psi) Low
Margin pressure 20 bar (290 psi) High
To set Margin pressure: Set Head Tilt Cylinder Back speed as below, set Head Tilt
Back to 2,400psi, adjust Margin Pressure while holding Head Tilt Backwards lever.
Re-check/re-adjust Head Tilt Cylinder speed as required to settings listed below.
MAIN VALVE
Main Relief Non - Adjustable
Load sense relief (measured at 'P' port) 314 bar (4550 psi) High
Boom port reliefs Cracking Pressure @ 'P' port 338 bar (4900 psi) Low
Stick port reliefs Cracking Pressure @ 'P' port 338 bar (4900 psi) Low
Tilt port reliefs Cracking Pressure @ 'P' port 338 bar (4900 psi) Low
Tilt restrictor (pump pressure) 55-69 bar (800-1000 psi) Low
Wrist port reliefs Standard Torque (if applicable) Full Flow @ 'P' port 228 bar (3000 psi) High
Wrist port reliefs High Torque (if applicable) Full Flow @ 'P' port 248 bar (3600 psi) High
Shear port reliefs (if applicable) Cracking Pressure @ 'P' port 338 bar (4900 psi) Low
SWING
Speed **Set speed before pressures** 7.0 rpm High
Swing Plate relief (measured at 'LS' port) 207 bar (3000 psi) High
Crossline reliefs - Motor Full Flow @ 'LS' port 248 bar (3600 psi) High
Page3.60
1 of 5
7 3/11/2015 A29207 SEE ECN JHS

PART No.
JOB No. PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGSEMPLOYEE
continued
No. COMMENTS
FINAL DRIVE
Left Final Drive
Crossline relief (Rexroth Only) 345 bar (5000 psi) Low
Motor Start of regulation Rexroth - 248 bar (3600 psi) @ P See Manual Low
OR
Linde - 262 bar (3800 psi) @ P Y1 69 bar (1000 psi) Low
Brake release (pilot pressure) Non-Adjustable 28-35 bar (400 - 500 psi) Low
Speed 845C Low - F8 13 rpm MAX. High

(Rexroth Motors) High - F8 28 rpm MAX. High
845C Low - FH400 13 rpm MAX. High

(Rexroth Motors) High - FH400 28 rpm MAX. High
L845C Low - F8 11 rpm MAX. High

L845C Low - FH400 10 rpm MAX. High

(Linde Motors) High - FH400 25 rpm MAX. High
R.H. Final Drive

Crossline relief (Rexroth Only) 345 bar (5000 psi) Low
Motor Start of regulation Rexroth - 248 bar (3600 psi) @ P See Manual Low
OR
Linde - 262 bar (3800 psi) @ P Y1 69 bar (1000 psi) Low
Brake release (pilot pressure) Non-Adjustable 28-35 bar (400 - 500 psi) Low
Speed 845C Low - F8 13 rpm MAX. High

845C Low - FH400 13 rpm MAX. High

(Rexroth Motors) High - FH400 28 rpm MAX. High
L845C Low - F8 11 rpm MAX. High

L845C Low - FH400 10 rpm MAX. High

(Linde Motors) High - FH400 25 rpm MAX. High
Max. disp. Setting: Turn screw out until off the stroking piston, turn it back in to contact,
then set max disp. by turning screw 1/4 turn in. (track raised off ground running in low)
3.61
Page 2 of 5
7 3/11/2015 A29207 SEE ECN JHS

PART No.
JOB No. PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGSEMPLOYEE
continued
No. COMMENTS
SAW PUMP
Pressure override (Measured @ 'PX") 248 bar (3600 psi) Low
Stand-by Pressure (Measured @ 'PX") 34 bar (500 psi) Low
SAW CONTROL VALVE

Main Relief (FULL FLOW) 297 bar (4300 psi) Low
SAW MOTOR (check appropriate box)

Tigercat DT5003
Start of regulation 221 bar (3200 psi) High
Speed (+/- 25 rpm) 1200 rpm High
Tigercat DT5301
Tigercat ST5401
Tigercat ST5702
ATTACHMENT PUMP
Pressure override (Measured @ 'PX") 207 bar (3000 psi) High
Stand-by Pressure (Measured @ 'PX") 35 bar (500 psi) Low
ATTACHMENT VALVE
Main relief (Measured @ 'PL") 276 bar (4000 psi) High
Clamp arm port reliefs (Measured @ 'PL" - non adjustable) 207 bar (3000 psi) High
Accumulator arms port reliefs (Measured @ 'PL" - non adjustable) 207 bar (3000 psi) High
3.62
Page 3 of 5
Tigercat
7 3/11/2015 A29207 SEE ECN JHS
PART No.
JOB No.
PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGSEMPLOYEE
continued
No. COMMENTS
FAN PUMP
Max pressure 186 bar (2700 psi) High
Stand-by pressure 19 bar (280 psi) Low
DOOR/ROOF PUMP
Main Relief 207 bar (3000 psi)
NOTE: All hydraulic settings to be done with hydraulic oil at operating tempertures as
per oil selection choice at top of sheet.
Comments
3.63
Page 4 of 5
3.64
SECTION 4 – HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
CASE DRAIN STRAINERS...........................................................................................................................................4.7

FILTER/BREATHER - HYDRAULIC OIL TANK.............................................................................................................4.6
FILTERS, HYDRAULIC OIL
FILTER/BREATHER..................................................................................................................................................4.8
FILTER/BREATHER - VACUUM SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)..........................................................................................4.8
RESTRICTION PRESSURE SWITCH, HYDRAULIC OIL.......................................................................................4.10
RETURN, HYDRAULIC OIL....................................................................................................................................4.10
HAND FILL PUMP
ADDING OIL TO THE HYDRAULIC TANK..............................................................................................................4.11
HIGH PRESSURE LIMITING CONTROL VALVE
SET LOAD SENSE RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................................................4.33
HYDRAULIC OIL FILL PUMP - HAND........................................................................................................................4.11
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................................4.6, 4.15
FILTER/BREATHER..................................................................................................................................................4.8
FILTER/BREATHER - VACUUM SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)..........................................................................................4.8
FILTER RESTRICTION PRESSURE SWITCH.......................................................................................................4.10
FILTER/STRAINER SERVICE................................................................................................................................4.10
HYDRAULIC OIL FILL PUMP - HAND....................................................................................................................4.11
HYDRAULIC OIL FILTERS......................................................................................................................................4.10
VACUUM PUMP SWITCH.........................................................................................................................................4.8
HYDRAULIC PUMPS
ATTACHMENT PUMP.................................................................................................. 4.14. SEE ALSO SECTION 18
FAN PUMP................................................................................................................... 4.14. SEE ALSO SECTION 10
MAIN PUMP
MAIN PUMP CONTROLLER.....................................................................................................................4.14, 4.31
MAIN PUMP WEAR TEST..................................................................................................................................4.13
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION
ATTACHMENT CIRCUIT...........................................................................................................................................4.4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................................4.20
COOLING FAN CIRCUIT..........................................................................................................................................4.5
FLOW ON DEMAND AND LOAD COMPENSATION..............................................................................................4.20
HYDRAULIC HAND FILL PUMP
ADDING OIL TO THE HYDRAULIC TANK:......................................................................................................... 4.11
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION
TRACK DRIVE SYSTEM.......................................................................................................................................4.4
MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM....................................................................................................................................4.3
BOOM....................................................................................................................................................................4.3
LEVELING.............................................................................................................................................................4.4
SWING..................................................................................................................................................................4.3
TRACK DRIVE......................................................................................................................................................4.4
MARGIN PRESSURE.............................................................................................................................................4.14
MARGIN PRESSURE, SET....................................................................................................................................4.31
PILOT CIRCUIT.........................................................................................................................................................4.4
LOAD SENSING
BASIC DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................................4.16
BASIC PRINCIPLES...............................................................................................................................................4.15
OPERATING TIPS...................................................................................................................................................4.18
SET LOAD SENSE RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................................................4.33
SET MARGIN PRESSURE.....................................................................................................................................4.31
MAIN CONTROL VALVE/MANIFOLD
CONTROL SPOOL SECTIONS..............................................................................................................................4.22
CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS................................................................................................................................4.23
CONTROL VALVE SPOOL OPERATION................................................................................................................4.25
HIGH PRESSURE LIMITING CONTROL VALVE....................................................................................................4.30
MAIN CONTROL VALVE DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................4.22
PORT RELIEF AND ANTI-CAVITATION VALVE......................................................................................................4.24
ADJUSTING PROCEDURE................................................................................................................................4.24
SWING AND DRIVE MOTOR SPOOL SECTIONS.................................................................................................4.22
4.1
Hydraulic System Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
OIL FILL - HYDRAULIC...............................................................................................................................................4.11

OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAUGES........................................................................................................................................4.9
PILOT AND SERVO HOSE CONNECTIONS - MAIN PUMP LOAD SENSING..........................................................4.18
PUMP - HYDRAULIC OIL FILL - HAND......................................................................................................................4.11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
LOAD SENSING (FLOW ON DEMAND).................................................................................................................4.15
LOAD SENSING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....................................................................................................4.19
MAIN PUMP............................................................................................................................................................4.12
MAIN VALVE WITH HIGH PRESS. LIMITING CONTROL......................................................................................4.22
VACUUM SWITCH, HYDRAULIC OIL TANK................................................................................................................4.8
4.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Hydraulic System
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION The main control valve sections are pressure
and flow compensated. The control valves are
The hydraulic system consists of the following
mounted on a common base manifold. A single
basic circuits:
'P' (pressure) port on the side of the manifold
• Variable displacement main hydraulic circuit receives supply oil from the main pump. Return
with load sensing ('LS') for the boom, swing, oil from the main control valves exits the base
track drive, wrist and tilt functions. Also, when manifold through two return ports, one on the top
applicable, the main pump provides hydraulic and one on the bottom of the base manifold. From
pressure and flow for the leveling functions. there the oil passes through the oil cooler and on
to the return filters and then to the hydraulic tank.
• Variable displacement circuit with 'LS' to
A 1.7 bar (25 psi) bypass valve is incorporated into
activate the pump for the saw motor via the
each return filter head. The top return manifold on
saw valve.
the main valve base manifold also includes a 6.9
• Variable displacement hydraulic pump for the bar (100 psi) bypass valve for the oil to bypass the
saw head clamp/accumulator arms known as oil cooler during cold weather startup and provide
the attachment circuit. a bypass in the event the oil cooler is plugged.
• Variable displacement with electro‑hydraulic BOOM CYLINDERS
pressure control pump for cooling fan The boom hydraulic circuits are incorporated in
hydraulic circuit. the main hydraulic load sensing system. All hoist
• The main pump and saw pump provide oil via and stick cylinders have cushions at both ends.
a pressure reducing valve for the pilot system. All cylinder rods are ground, heat treated, chrome
plated and polished.
THE MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
This is a closed centre circuit utilizing a variable SWING SYSTEM
displacement axial-piston pump with load sensing The swing hydraulic circuit is incorporated in the
and horsepower limiting control. The load sensing main hydraulic load sensing system. It utilizes a
system ensures that the pump will deliver only piston motor incorporating two relief valves and
the amount of oil that is required by an individual anti-cavitation valves. The motor is connected to
boom, swing, track function or a combination of a double reduction planetary gearbox. Refer to
functions. PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS in SECTION
3 of THIS MANUAL. A rotary manifold facilitates
This feature improves fuel economy and reduces the hydraulic connection to the undercarriage of
heat generation because power is not wasted on the vehicle and permits continuous 360° swing.
excessive pump flow that is not being used. Refer The swing drive motor incorporates a wet, multi-
to LOAD SENSING in THIS SECTION. disc brake. The swing brake is controlled by a
The horsepower limiting control ensures that the switch on the instrument panel. The brake is
engine will not lug down below a predetermined spring-applied, hydraulicly-released and will
rpm by reducing the output from the main automatically apply whenever the pilot oil supply is
hydraulic pump. For a detailed description of shut off. For a detailed description of the SWING
ENGINE ANTI-STALL, refer to SECTION 7 of system, refer to SECTION 15 of THIS MANUAL.
THIS MANUAL.
4.3
TRACK DRIVE SYSTEM SAW CIRCUIT
The track drive hydraulic circuit is incorporated This is a closed-centre circuit with a variable-
in the main hydraulic load sensing system and displacement, load sensing ('LS'), pressure-
utilizes high-torque, axial-piston or bent-axis compensated piston pump and a solenoid
hydraulic motors. The motors are mounted to a activated saw motor control valve. The control
three stage planetary drive gearbox and each is valve consists of a steel valve body into which are
completely housed within the width of the track housed a solenoid control valve cartridge, a relief
shoes. The gearboxes include wet, multiple-disc, valve cartridge and a pilot operated check valve.
spring-applied, hydraulicly-released brakes which The valve controls the flow of oil from the saw
automatically release when driving and apply pump to the saw motor. The 'LS' controlled pump
when stationary. Independent control of each track provides only the amount of oil that is required to
permits counter rotation. For a detailed description the saw motor via the saw valve. The return oil
of the Track drive SYSTEM, refer to SECTION 11 from this circuit is returned to tank via the return
of this manual. filters.
LEVELING SYSTEM (L845C ONLY) For a full description of the SAW circuit, refer to
Two leveling cylinders are used to operate the SECTION 17 of THIS MANUAL.
leveling function. Each cylinder is equipped with a
PILOT CIRCUIT
counterbalance valve or pilot operated check valve
for load holding. Pilot oil is provided by the main pump and saw
pump. The oil pressure is controlled by a remote
Electro-hydraulically operated leveling control pilot pressure reducing valve located between the
valves are operated by the IQAN control system. main pump outlet port flange block and the pilot
For a detailed description of the leveling system manifold 'P' port. This pressure reducing/relieving
refer to SECTION 13 of THIS MANUAL. valve controls and provides pilot oil at 34.5 bar
(500 psi) to the 'P' port of the pilot manifold.
The pilot manifold is a distribution centre, directing
pilot oil to pilot operated functions on the machine.
A pilot shut-off valve installed in the pilot manifold
controls the flow of pilot oil into the manifold.
When this pilot shut-off valve is energized, pilot
oil is made available to outlet pressure ports (P1–
P4) and eight solenoid valves (TS1–TS8). When
the pilot shut-off valve is de-energized, pilot oil
from the pilot supply valve is blocked, preventing
pilot oil from entering the manifold, thereby
rendering these pilot functions inactive. Refer to
PILOT SYSTEM RESET in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
For a full description of the PILOT MANIFOLD and
the PILOT CIRCUIT, refer to SECTION 5 of THIS
MANUAL.
4.4
COOLING FAN CIRCUIT The fan operation is controlled by the cooling fan
The circuit consists of the following switch, fan service mode and the MD3 computer.
components: For a full description of the COOLING FAN
circuit operation refer to SECTION 2 of the
• Fan variable displacement Pump, MD3
OPERATOR'S MANUAL, and for adjustment
Computer controlled.
procedures, refer to SECTION 10 of THIS
• Fan Motor MANUAL.
• Fan Directional Control Valve
• Fan Pump Case Balance Strainer – on
machines S/N 845*2017 to 845*2500
The fan motor is a fixed displacement gear motor.
The fan is coupled directly to the motor output
shaft.
The fan direction is controlled by the fan
directional control valve.
845C-118
A C
'LS'
'LS'
B
'P'
'P'
'P1'
COMP 'P1'
'G2' D
'P' 'T'
'P' E J
F G
H I 'PT' 'PS'
'P'
'LS'
'X'
LEGEND 'LS'
SUCTION LINE
K 'LS'
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE PILOT 'P'
LINE CAN LINE
WIRE
TO FAN MOTOR
Hydraulic System Pumps And Valves

A Main Control Valve G Saw Pump
B Pilot Distribution Manifold H Attachment Pump
C Attachment Valve I Fan Control Valve
D Pilot Pressure Reducing Valve J Leveling Valve
E Saw Valve K Main Pump
F Fan Pump
4.5
1. HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

2. RETURN FILTERS
3. DIFFUSERS
4
4. FILTER/BREATHER
845C-001 AIR VENT FILTER/BREATHER

845C-097
VALVE HANDLE
SCHRADER
VALVE
MANIFOLD
AIR VENT PRESSURE

EXHAUST GAUGE
3
845C-097
845CH-076 HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Refer to SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S
IMPORTANT!
MANUAL and SECTION 3 for additional
34.5 kPa (5 psi) MAXIMUM
information.
Before servicing the hydraulic system,
Located on the left side of the machine behind the wearing eye protection, release air pressure
cab, the hydraulic tank (1) has a capacity of from the hydraulic oil tank using
190 L (50 US gal). the air vent valve. FILTER/
BREATHER
All return oil entering the tank passes through six AIR VENT
VALVE HANDLE
spin-on hydraulic oil filters (2) and is screened SCHRADER
prior to entering the tank by passing through VALVE
reusable diffusers (3) attached to the ends of the MANIFOLD
return tubes at the bottom of the tank.
IMPORTANT!
Inspecting, changing or cleaning the diffusers
or motor catastrophic failure or hydraulic oil 845C-097
AIR VENT PRESSURE
contamination. 845C-001 EXHAUST GAUGE
Handle perpendicular to valve (shown) = Closed

Handle parallel to valve = Open
After service is completed, close the air vent
valve and add air pressure from a clean air
source to the hydraulic tank using the Schrader
valve. Do not exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi). Refer
to HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION
4.6
CASE DRAIN STRAINERS
IMPORTANT!
Only in the event of a pump or motor major failure
should these elements be serviced. Always use
the correct replacement element.
Case drain return oil from the pumps and motors
passes through two spin-on hydraulic strainer
elements and returns to tank.
845C-133 CASE DRAIN STRAINER
The other strainer element is located beside the

pilot manifold in the valve compartment. This
element is dedicated to case returns from the saw
845C-114 CASE DRAIN STRAINER head.
One element is located in the pump compartment

and services all pump case drains.
4.7
FILTER/BREATHER, HYDRAULIC TANK NOTE: If the machine is running (key in the
RUN position), the vacuum system will not
be energized if the vacuum switch is engaged.
FILTER/
BREATHER Conversely, the machine cannot be started if the
AIR VENT
vacuum switch is already engaged.
VALVE
HANDLE NOTE: The vacuum pump will not be powered
if the battery disconnect switch is in the OFF
position.
HYDRAULIC
TANK When changing filters use only the ball valve (Air
Vent Valve) to release pressure from the hydraulic
tank. Use of the vacuum system while changing
filters creates the risk of introducing much more air
into the hydraulic tank. It is OK to run the vacuum
system when replacing the case drain strainers.
H845C-82 REAR VIEW OF HYDRAULIC TANK
The air space in the top of the hydraulic tank is

vented to atmosphere via a spin-on filter located in
FILTER/
the top storage compartment behind the cab. This BREATHER
breather should be replaced every 2000 hours.
During the inhalation cycle, the filter media blocks
the water vapour from entering the hydraulic tank.
During the exhalation cycle, the media allows the
moisture in the hydraulic tank air to exit.
HYDRAULIC TANK VACUUM SWITCH –
FILTER/BREATHER (OPTIONAL) AIR VENT VALVE
HANDLE
VACUUM PUMP
SWITCH
FILTER/BREATHER -
845C-063 VACUUM SYSTEM
845CH-084
IMPORTANT!
Some machines may be equipped with a vacuum If the case drain system is serviced with the
pump to 'hold' the oil in the hydraulic tank when use of the vacuum system, all pump and motor
work is being done on the hydraulic system. cases must be bled. Refer to HYDRAULIC TANK
This eliminates the need to drain the hydraulic PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION
tank before servicing pumps and other hydraulic 3 of THIS MANUAL prior to engine start-up in
components. Use of the vacuum system minimizes order to prevent damage to pumps and motors.
the volume of oil spilled on the machine and on the
ground.
4.8
OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAUGES RETURN DIFFUSERS
There are three return diffusers located inside
the hydraulic tank that act as a final backup for
preventing foreign material from entering and
contaminating the hydraulic system.
1
845C-062
Two sight gauges (1) are used to indicate the level

of the hydraulic oil in the tank with HIGH and LOW
level limits. Also incorporated into the sight gauges RETURN
are level switches. These gauges are accessible FILTERS
through the left side door. Refer to SECTION
2 of the OPERATOR'S MANUAL for additional CLEAN OUT
information. COVER
IMPORTANT!
Always keep the hydraulic oil level up to within
5 cm (2 in) of the HIGH mark. A low hydraulic oil
level will result in severe damage to pumps.
DIFFUSERS
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK AND
845C-079 DIFFUSERS
IMPORTANT!
Inspecting, changing or cleaning the diffusers
or motor catastrophic failure or hydraulic oil
contamination.
For instructions on changing these diffusers, refer
to HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN DIFFUSERS in
SECTION 3 of this MANUAL.
4.9
RETURN FILTERS - HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER RESTRICTION PRESSURE
SWITCH
FILTER
HEAD
RETURN
FILTERS
RETURN
MANIFOLD
855C-035
855C-035 HYDRAULIC OIL FILTERS
The bypass valves built into each filter head,
The return oil entering the hydraulic tank passes preset at 1.7 bar (25 psi) will open in the event the
through six replaceable filters mounted on filter elements become restricted. Before these valves
heads beside the tank and three mesh type are activated, a 1.4 bar (20 psi) filter restriction
reusable diffusers, one on the end of each return pressure switch installed in the return manifold,
tube in the hydraulic tank. will send a signal to the computer control system
when an oil pressure in excess of 1.7 bar (25 psi)
is encountered at the return filters. This pressure
IMPORTANT! switch closes and the hydraulic oil filter bypass
icon displays RED on the MD3 computer. The
NEVER PRE-FILL master alarm and alarm light will sound and flash.
HYDRAULIC FILTERS IMPORTANT!
Tigercat does not recommend the prefilling DO NOT use these warnings as a substitute for
of spin-on filters due to the risk of damage checking the oil level or replacing filters at regular
to the hydraulic system caused by unfiltered intervals. Refer to SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
oil. Unfiltered oil used to pre-fill filters enters in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
directly into the hydraulic circuit. Contaminants
in unfiltered oil can cause significant and This information is assuming that operating
costly damage to hydraulic valves, pumps and conditions and running temperatures are normal.
motors. The cleanliness of hydraulic oil cannot FILTER/DIFFUSER SERVICE NOTE:
be guaranteed unless it is always prefiltered The filters should be checked/changed when the
before use. oil filter bypass icon displays RED on the MD3
computer. If the icon continues to display RED
after the filters have been changed, the return
diffusers attached to the base of the return tubes
in the hydraulic tank should be examined for
possible obstruction.
IMPORTANT!
Contaminated hydraulic fluid can lead to premature failure of hydraulic components and costly repairs.
Filters must be replaced at the recommended time intervals, See SECTION 3 in THIS MANUAL.
Use of filters other than genuine Tigercat replacement filters is not recommended.
4.10
HYDRAULIC HAND FILL PUMP 8. When the oil in the oil level gauge is between
fluid level low and fluid level high stop
TO TANK THROUGH THE
RETURN FILTERS
pumping. Return the handle to the upright
position.
9. Allow the hose to drain.
10. Install the suction tube plug.
11. Return the suction tube to the stored position.
12. Close the hand fill pump shut-off valve.
SHUT-OFF
VALVE IN OFF
HAND FILL POSITION
PUMP WARNING
SUCTION TUBE
HOT HYDRAULIC OIL AND HOT

845C-063 HYDRAULIC HAND FILL PUMP MACHINE SURFACES CAN CAUSE
SERIOUS BURNS!
The hydraulic hand fill pump is used to add
hydraulic oil to the hydraulic tank. It is located • Before servicing the machine, allow the
inside the hydraulic tank and filter service hydraulic system and machine surfaces to
compartment behind the cab on the left side of cool down.
the machine. It can be accessed by opening the • Use a thermometer to check surface and
service compartment door. system temperatures to ensure it is safe to
Adding oil to the hydraulic tank: begin service work.
1. Release air pressure from the tank using the • DO NOT begin service work until the surface
air vent valve. or system temperature has cooled down to
Refer to HYDRAULIC TANK below 38°C (100°F).
PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS in
2. Open the hand fill pump shut-off valve.
3. Remove the suction tube from the stored
position.
4. Thoroughly clean the outside surface of the
suction tube.
5. Remove the suction tube plug from the suction
tube.
6. Insert the suction tube into a storage tank,pail
or barrel.
NOTE: The storage tank, pail or barrel should
be anchored to prevent tipping in both the full
and empty conditions.
7. Operate the hand fill pump by pushing and
pulling the handle.
NOTE: The pump should always be operated
at a medium speed with steady motion.
Pumping too fast may cause oil to bypass the
oil filter.
4.11
MAIN PUMP SAW PUMP ATTACHMENT PUMP

(CLAMP & ACCUMULATOR
ARMS)
FAN PUMP
845C-127
845C-114 HYDRAULIC PUMPS
HYDRAULIC PUMPS When all of the control valves on the main valve
are in the neutral position the pump is destroked
All hydraulic functions are powered by four pumps.
and the output is just sufficient to maintain a
Three are mounted one behind the other on the
standby pressure of approximately 14 – 41.4 bar
flywheel housing of the engine and the fourth is
(200 – 600 psi) in the pump output line.
mounted on the engine.
The first pump, the main pump, is a piston pump
with load sensing and horsepower limiting controls
used for the main hydraulic circuit (travel, swing,
boom, wrist, tilt and if equipped leveling).
Driven off the power take-off (PTO) of the main
pump is the saw pump. It is an axial-piston,
variable displacement, pressure compensated
pump.
Driven off the PTO of the saw pump is the
attachment (clamp and accumulator arms)
pump. It is a variable displacement, pressure
compensated piston pump.
Mounted on the engine is the fan pump. It is a
variable displacement with electro‑hydraulic flow
control piston pump for the cooling fan hydraulic
circuit.
MAIN PUMP
The main pump is an axial-piston, variable- MAIN PUMP
displacement pump with load sensing, and 845CH-077 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
horsepower limiting controls.
4.12
MAIN PUMP WEAR TEST 7. Plumb a flow measuring device to the line
1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating connecting the main pump case drain to tank.
temperature. 8. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED 9. Check that all personnel are clear of the
machine before starting engine.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run
position.
TIP OF STICK 11. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
start-up
860C-001
12. Start engine and set engine speed to high idle
.
2. Park machine on level ground with the 13. Close and latch the front door.
CAUTION WARNING
Be aware of other personnel in the area. The swing brake must be applied at all
Operator is responsible for the safe times during this procedure.
operation of the machine.
14. Hold the left hand joystick in the stick out
position and the left hand joystick in the full
CAUTION swing right or left position.
15. Have an assistant record the hydraulic oil flow
Use caution when in the cab as a slight
coming out of the main pump case drain.
touch of the controls can cause sudden
rotation of the upper structure and boom Normal/acceptable case drain leakage rates for
assembly the main pump under the above conditions is 19
– 30 L/min (5 – 8 gpm). With case drain leakage
rates greater than 34 L (9 gpm), the pump will
WARNING still operate properly but should be considered for
replacement.
Ensure that no one is standing near the
attachment during this procedure.
3. Apply the swing brake. 18. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
4. Turn OFF the engine. 19. Remove the flow measuring device.
4.13
MARGIN PRESSURE At this point the 'LS' control valve spool shifts
back to its previous condition and the swashplate
LOAD SENSE control piston will be balanced with the pump
PRESSURE
MARGIN PRESSURE
output remaining constant until the pressure at
ADJUSTING SCREW the 'LS' port changes. This is a dynamic condition
(TURN OUT TO
DECREASE MARGIN with the swashplate angle changing constantly
PRESSURE)
in response to the load fluctuations. The 'LS'
pressure is always equal to the highest work port
'POR' pressure.
ADJUSTING
SCREW (TURN NOTE: If the machine controls are not responding
OUT TO
DECREASE as they should, i.e. boom is jerky or sluggish, the
PRESSURE)
margin pressure setting may be out of adjustment.
Refer to ENGINE ANTI-STALL in section 7 of THIS
H845C-83 MAIN PUMP CONTROL VALVE MANUAL.
845C-110
When a function control lever is moved, for
SYSTEM OVER MAIN
example a joystick, to activate a boom or swing PRESSURE VALVE
function, load sense ('LS') pressure increases CONTROL
RELIEF
MANIFOLD
to the point where it is equal to the work port 'P'
pressure and it shifts the 'LS' control valve spool in PRESSURE
PORT
the main pump controller.
'LS' PRESSURE
'XLS' 'XP' CONTROL
'LS' PORT TEST
TEST RELIEF
PORT PORT
MAIN CONTROL VALVE
The pump is protected by a system over pressure
control relief and an 'LS' pressure relief that
'POR' ADJUSTING
SCREW (TURN OUT ENGINE
provide high pressure limiting control. The relief
TO DECREASE ANTI-STALL valves are installed in the bottom of the main
PRESSURE) SOLENOID
VALVE control valve manifold. Refer to high pressure
MARGIN PRESSURE
ADJUSTING SCREW LOAD SENSE limiting control in THIS SECTION.
(TURN OUT TO PRESSURE. PORT
DECREASE MARGIN (UNDERSIDE OF
BLOCK)
SAW PUMP & ATTACHMENT PUMP
PRESSURE)
MAIN PUMP CONTROLLER The saw and attachment pumps are variable
H845C-013 ('LS' CONTROL) displacement piston pumps driven off the back of
the main pump. For information on these pumps,
The pump then adjusts its output volume until the refer to SECTION 18 of THIS MANUAL.
pump output pressure exceeds the 'LS' pressure
by a small amount. This difference is known as FAN PUMP
margin pressure (differential pressure or Delta P). For the operation and adjustments of this pump
Refer to SET MARGIN PRESSURE in THIS refer to SECTION 10 of THIS MANUAL.
SECTION.
4.14
LOAD SENSING
BASIC PRINCIPLES
Figures 1 and 2 – Early hydraulic systems
used a fixed displacement pump, with valves
to control or adjust flow rates or speeds. This
throttling or restricting pump flow to achieve
control over the functions causes excess oil
WASTED
to flow over the relief valve. This results in
wasting power and at the same time creates
FLOW
853SM18
heat. See Figs. 1 and 2.
Figures 3 and 4 – In an attempt to recover W
some of the wasted energy, variable USED
displacement pumps evolved. These FIG. 1 PRESSURE

pumps are power regulated or horsepower FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP FIG. 2 853SM16
controlled and since they reduce the pumps
output to maintain a constant system hp, oil
flow over the relief valve is less, therefore
reducing the wasted power losses and heat
generation. See Figs. 3 & 4.
HP
=CO
The power wasted in the horsepower control
system is still considerable and still requires
NST
constant "throttling" by the operator if he
ANT
wants the speeds to remain as selected.
Figures 5 and 6 – The load control system
was developed to address the problems
outlined above.
FLOW
WASTED
This system combines the energy saving

benefits of flow on demand with load W
compensation at each work port. The USED
compensator eliminates the need for 853SM19 PRESSURE

operator flow adjustments (throttling). See FIG. 3 HP REGULATED PUMP FIG. 4 853SM16
Figs 5 and 6.
HP
=CO
NS
TAN
T
FLOW
∆p LS
W
USED
PRESSURE
853SM17
FIG.5 LOAD SENSING (FLOW ON DEMAND) FIG.6 853SM16
4.15
LOAD SENSING BASIC DESCRIPTION
OPEN CENTRE VS. CLOSE CENTRE
Open centre system:
853SM21
853SM20
If the oil flowing to the motor or cylinder meets
variable loads, this will upset the balance of oil
With the control valve in neutral all of the oil going to the tank and the load. This causes the
from the pump “bypasses” through the open speed of the function to change with load changes.
centre passage directly to tank. There is no back
pressure created by the control valve to force oil
into the work port (the work port is actually blocked
off when the spool is in neutral, and unblocked
when the spool begins to move).
853SM20 853SM21
When the control valve lever is moved to actuate This type of system exhibits the following
a cylinder or motor, the open centre passage is characteristics;
blocked off in proportion to the amount the lever is
moved. This creates back pressure forcing oil into 1. If the load against the cylinder or motor
the valve work port to move the load. changes, the speed of the function will
change.
2. If the load increases on a boom cylinder,
the boom will slow or stop. Moving the lever
further will increase the pressure against the
load, and when high enough, the load will
begin to move again.
3. The maximum speed of the function is
determined by the maximum flow of the pump.
853SM20
When the control valve lever is fully shifted to the

maximum flow position the open centre passage
is completely blocked, and all of the pump flow is
forced against the load.
4.16
Closed centre system: Changing the control valve lever changes the size
Load sensing systems use variable flow pumps of the opening in the valve and upsets the balance
and only flow oil when required. Unlike the open of the stroking piston. The stroking piston then
centre system, the control valve does not have adjusts the flow of the pump to find a new balance
an open centre passage. When in neutral, no point. The stroking piston will change the pump’s
oil flows through the control valve to tank and flow until pump pressure is 17.2 bar (250 psi)
the pump output flow is zero. The pump’s output higher than load pressure.
flow is controlled by a “stroking piston” which is In the figures below, note that even though the
connected to the pump output, and to the valve’s load pressure may change, (as illustrated by the
work port or “load”. This sense line to the actual extra restriction) the flow remains constant. This is
working load defines the system as load sensing. because the difference in pressure, or differential
The key component in the system below is the pressure, between the pump and load pressures
spring in the stroking piston. The pump’s output can be maintained by the stroking piston
pressure must be 17.2 bar (250 psi) higher than regardless of load. It is important to remember
the load pressure to compress the spring and the pump is really responding to the pressure
reduce the flow of the pump. This 17.2 bar differential resulting from flow through the valve,
(250 psi) is the differential or margin pressure. not the actual load pressure level.
853SM22
853SM22
853SM22
In the figure above the valve is closed blocking
the pump from the load. With the load at zero the
pump will maintain 34.5 bar (500 psi) of standby
pressure and pump flow is zero.
The following are key differences from open centre

systems;
1. The load sensing valve’s maximum flow is not
equal to the pumps maximum flow as with the
open centre system. The valves maximum
853SM22
flow is determined by the maximum size of
When the control valve lever is moved to actuate opening or “orifice” it provides.
a cylinder or motor, the control valve opens the 2. The speed of the load does change as the
pump to the load. In this case the load is zero and load changes. If the load increases on a boom
the pump output pressure falls as the oil escapes cylinder the pump pressure will increase
through the valve. The 17.2 bar (250 psi) that automatically to maintain the load’s original
was holding the spring in the compressed state speed. If the load stops, it is because the load
is reduced and the spring moves the pump to is too heavy for the boom to lift. Moving the
increase flow. Flow will increase to a level that lever further will not increase the lifting force.
requires 500 psi. to force the oil through the valve
opening. At this point the load pressure combined 3. A load sensing system provides the speed
with the spring force will be high enough to oppose the operator selects with the lever, and
the pump output pressure, and the stroking piston automatically adjusts the pressure to match
will stop moving. the load. The open centre system requires the
operator to adjust the pressure to match the
load and the speed is determined by the load.
4.17
OPERATING TIPS Refer to SET MARGIN PRESSURE in THIS
When using the controls on a load sensing system SECTION.
think of what the system is trying to do for you. Another feature of this system is that the maximum
If you move the lever 20% of its total angle, the flow of each function, in each direction, can
system will provide whatever pressure it takes (up be tuned to your requirements. This is easily
to its maximum capacity if needed) to meet this done by changing the flow adjusting screws on
speed requirement. If you move the lever past the each control valve. Take the time to set up your
point needed in an attempt to speed up the boom machine, as this greatly reduces operator fatigue.
movement, you will only overshoot the speed you
wanted. Relax and try to use the least amount of Refer to SET FLOW (FUNCTION SPEED) RATE
lever action you can. in appropriate BOOM or SWING sections of THIS
MANUAL.
Load sensing systems respond to rough operation
by amplifying these movements. If you find the When operating the swing function move the lever
boom is jerky or always giving “feedback”, you’re slowly. Operating the swing harshly or quickly
probably too active on the controls. If slowing reversing direction wastes power and generates
down doesn’t eliminate the roughness, the margin excessive heat, as oil is dumped over the crossline
pressure setting may be too high and can be reliefs.
reduced to calm down the machine’s response.
LEGEND
SUPPLY TO PILOT FROM SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE TO PILOT SAW PRESSURE LINE
REDUCING VALVE MANIFOLD VALVE DRAIN LINE
'G2' PORT PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE
SERVO PILOT PRESSURE

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
FOR PUMP
CONTROLLER
TO CASE DRAIN
STRAINER
PILOT SUPPLY TO
ANTI-STALL CONTROLLER
'LS' FROM LEVELING VALVE
(IF EQUIPED)
'LS' FROM MAIN CONTROL

VALVE
845C-117 MAIN PUMP LOAD SENSING, PILOT AND SERVO HOSE CONNECTIONS
4.18
MAIN
CONTROL
VALVE
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
'XP'
'XLS' TEST
TEST PORT
PORT
MAIN
CONTROL
VALVE
'LS'
'P' 'LS'
PRESSURE
PORT
'P'
MAIN
PUMP
(PRESSURE SAW
COMPENSATED) VALVE
'COMP'
ATTACHMENT
'A' IN VALVE
ATTACHMENT
PUMP
'LS' SIGNAL TO 'LS'

MAIN PUMP
SAW 'LS'
'LS' ('PL')
TEST 'P' PUMP
PORT TEST
PORT
845C-122 LOAD SENSING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

4.19
MAIN HYDRAULIC (LOAD SENSING) FLOW ON DEMAND AND LOAD
CIRCUIT COMPENSATION
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The combination of control valves and pump used
in this system provides flow on demand and load
The main hydraulic circuit includes the
compensation. Flow on demand means that only
components for the stick and hoist booms, wrist,
the required quantity of oil will be delivered to a
tilt, swing and travel functions.
function by the pump. This will save energy and
The main pump, an axial piston, swashplate reduce heat generation in the hydraulic system.
controlled pump supplies oil for the main hydraulic Load compensation means that all functions will
system. A load sensing ('LS') signal is sent back continue to receive oil regardless of their pressure
from the control valve manifold ('LS' port) to the and without further movement of the control levers.
main pump regulator ('LS' port) to control the pump
Without this system, an operator moving control
output pressure.
levers halfway on the boom up and stick out
Oil flow for each function is supplied by its own controls would find that the lowest pressure
control valve section on the manifold. When the function would move and the other would not
control valves are in neutral, there is no flow move. To make both functions move the operator
through the valves, therefore the system is closed- would have to move the high load lever much
center. When all control valves are in neutral, the more than the low load lever. In other words, the
pump will only supply enough oil to make-up for operator would have to restrict oil flow to one
leakage in the system and the pressure remains at function while opening up the valve fully to the
a low level (approx. 14 – 41.4 bar / 200 – 600 psi). other. This is what the load compensation system
The control valve sections trap oil in their circuits does automatically as will be explained further
when the spools are in neutral. below.
Oil returning to the hydraulic tank from the control With the load compensation on this unit the
valve sections must open back pressure check operator does not need to continually adjust
valves in the control valve manifold before flowing the control lever to move two or more functions
to the hydraulic tank via the oil cooler. This creates because of pressure differences.
a small positive pressure in the manifold to prevent
Valves inside of the main control valve spools will
cavitation in the cylinders. All oil returning to the
automatically adjust flow according to the pilot
hydraulic tank is filtered.
pressure applied to the spool to move functions
The leveling control valve (if equipped) is also independent of load pressure.
supplied by the main pump. A load sensing
signal is sent back from the leveling control valve
('LS' port) to the main pump regulator ('LS' port)
to control the pump output pressure. Refer to
SECTION 13 for more complete information about
the leveling circuit.
4.20
'LS' Pressure
55309B01 TO
Control Relief
NOTE: ON MACHINES 845*1861 TO LS XLS XP
845*2013.
LHD STICK HOIST RHD

BOTTOM VIEW
PC1 A
C
B B B
B
PILOT
TILT WRIST
A A A
SWING A
REAR VIEW TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW
845C-123 MAIN CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
'LS' Pressure
TO
Control Relief
59517B01 LS XLS XP
NOTE: ON MACHINES 845*2014 TO
845*2500.
RHD
LHD STICK HOIST
ADAPTER BOTTOM VIEW
PC1 G PLATE
PC1
C
A
B B B
B
PILOT
TILT WRIST
A A A
SWING A
REAR VIEW TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW
845C-101 MAIN CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
4.21
FRONT VIEW BOTTOM VIEW
845C-102 MAIN CONTROL VALVE – FRONT AND BOTTOM VIEW 845C-110
MAIN CONTROL VALVE DESCRIPTION The spools are pilot actuated and returned to
neutral by centering springs. An air bleed plug
The main control valve consists of seven individual
is provided on the top pilot cap. If a hesitation is
valve sections (eight sections on telescopic boom
noticed when actuating a function, air should be
machines), a high pressure limiting relief valve and
bled from the pilot caps. Spool travel stop screws
a non-adjustable safety relief. The relief valves
are fitted in the pilot end caps and are used to limit
are installed in ports in the manifold and the valve
the spool travel so that maximum speed can be
sections are fastened to the front and rear of the
adjusted for each individual function. The screws
control valve manifold. The manifold contains five
can also be turned in to lower the boom or stick
common passages for all valves.
when the engine or pump will not operate.
The five passages are (refer to fig. below):
The swing and drive spools have return pilot
1. Centre passage for pump pressure. checks in the end caps which allow pilot oil
to enter quickly, but restrict the flow out, thus
2. Two return passages (connected internally).
dampening the movement of the control spool for
3. Two for load sense (connected internally). smoother control of the function.
CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS SWING AND DRIVE MOTOR SPOOL SECTIONS
The swing and drive valve sections have make-up
valves for anti-cavitation. See FIG. 90919.
HOIST BOOM, STICK BOOM AND WRIST
ROTATE SPOOL SECTIONS
These functions have relief and anti-cavitation
valves. See FIG. 90744 with spool in no-flow
psi position and FIG. 90744-2 with spool in FLOW
position.
2
MANIFOLD/VALVE SECTION
855C-030
SCHEMATIC WITH RELIEF
4.22
MAKE UP WORK MAKE UP
OR ANTI- PORTS OR ANTI-
CAVITATION CAVITATION
VALVE VALVE
PILOT
CHECK
PILOT
END CAP SPOOL
TRAVEL STOP
AIR (ADJUSTABLE)
BLEED
PLUG
LOAD COMPENSATOR
BALL AND VALVE LOAD
SPRING SENSING 'LS'
RETURN 'T' PUMP 'P' RETURN 'T' SENSING
'LS'
CONTROL VALVE SECTION –
90919 TYPICAL FOR MOTOR OPERATED SWING AND DRIVE FUNCTIONS
ANTI- WORK ANTI-

CAVITATION PORTS CAVITATION
RELIEF RELIEF
VALVE VALVE
MAX. FLOW
ADJUSTING
SCREW
MAIN CONTROL SPOOL

COMPENSATOR
RETURN 'T' PUMP 'P' RETURN 'T'
CONTROL VALVE SECTION – TYPICAL FOR CYLINDER OPERATED FUNCTIONS

90744 (SHOWN IN NO-FLOW POSITION)
CONTROL VALVE SECTION – TYPICAL FOR CYLINDER OPERATED FUNCTIONS

90744-2
(SHOWN IN FLOW POSITION)
4.23
PORT RELIEF AND ANTI-CAVITATION VALVE MEDIUM RELIEF AND HOLLOW PILOT
OPERATION SYSTEM
PRESSURE
ANTICAVITATION
POPPET 'B'
PISTON 'C' POPPET 'D'
During normal operation, oil pressure in the work

circuit is less than the circuit relief valve setting
and the circuit relief valve remains closed.
During relief operation, the relief valve will open WORK
PORT
in three steps.
(Step 1) The pilot poppet 'D' is opened; Flow
restriction through the hollow piston 'C' causes the
pressure in the cavity behind the main poppet 'B' ORIFICE 'A' RETURN
to decrease. 90744-4A NORMAL OPERATION

(Step 2) The piston seats against the poppet. This
HIGHEST MEDIUM
further reduces oil flow into the cavity and greatly SYSTEM SYSTEM
decreases the pressure against the back side of PRESSURE PRESSURE
the main poppet.

(Step 3) The main poppet 'B' opens.
When the relief valve again closes, the piston WORK
and the pilot poppet move together until the pilot PORT
poppet is seated. Oil flows into the cavity through

the clearance between the piston and the main
poppet to move the piston away from the pilot RETURN
poppet. This permits flow into the cavity through
RELIEF OPERATION
the piston to seat the main poppet. 90744-6A
During anticavitation operation the main poppet LOW WORK

'B' will retract to allow oil to flow from the return PORT
PRESSURE
passage into the work circuit.
ADJUSTING PROCEDURE
1. Loosen locknut.
WORK
2. Turn the adjusting screw to obtain desired PORT
pressure reading on gauge.
3. Tighten locknut on adjusting screw making
sure adjusting screw does not turn. RETURN
4. Re-check pressure gauge reading. 90744-5A ANTICAVITATION OPERATION

5. Refer to SET MAIN BOOM, STICK AND PORT
RELIEF VALVES in SECTION 12 of THIS PORT RELIEF LOCKNUT • 17MM
MANUAL for more complete details. VALVE WRENCH
MAIN
VALVE ADJUSTING SCREW
BODY • 5MM ALLEN KEY
90744-4 MAIN VALVE PORT RELIEF VALVE
4.24
CONTROL VALVE SPOOL OPERATION
To achieve load sensing compensation, each control spool has two compensator valves and two 'LS'
check valves. These compensator valves can be either in the form of a shuttle valve or a ball, depending
on the function being controlled.
PILOT END SHUTTLE COMPENSATOR CONTROL COMPENSATOR SHUTTLE PILOT END
CAP VALVE VALVE SPOOL VALVE VALVE CAP
CENTERING LOAD SENSING WORK WORK LOAD SENSING CENTERING

SPRING PASSAGE 'LS' PORT 'A' PORT 'B' PASSAGE 'LS' SPRING
RETURN SUPPLY RETURN
PASSAGE 'T' PASSAGE 'P' PASSAGE 'T'
853SM25 (A) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – IN NEUTRAL
(A) Each work port ('A' & 'B') has a compensator valve and shuttle valve. Each valve section also has
two return passages ('T') and two load sensing ('LS') passages. Each valve section has only one supply
passage ('P').
With the control valve spool held in neutral by the centering springs in both pilot caps, the pump discharge
is blocked. Therefore, the control valves are closed center. Pump discharge, work port, return, and load
sensing passages are all blocked by the spool. Oil in the work ports is trapped.
With all control valve spools in neutral, pump discharge or "standby" oil pressure is approximately
28 – 41 bar (400 – 600 psi).
PILOT LS SHUTTLE CONTROL

OIL PORT VALVE SPOOL
JUST
OPENED
(B) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL STARTING TO MOVE TO RIGHT

• LS PORT JUST OPENED
853SM26 • ONLY SPOOL ACTUATED
(B) Whenever a single function is operated, pilot oil flows to a control valve end cap. Pilot oil will start to
move the spool against the centering spring on the opposite end of the spool. The load sensing ('LS') port
is the first port to open. When the 'LS' port is opened, the shuttle cavity is at 'LS' pressure. Since this is
the first function being operated, there is no 'LS' pressure in the manifold and the shuttle does not move.
4.25
PILOT SHUTTLE COMPENSATOR CONTROL

OIL VALVE VALVE SPOOL
WORK PORT 'A'

JUST OPENED
(C) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL CONTINUES TO MOVE TO RIGHT

• WORK PORT 'A' JUST OPENED
853SM27 • HIGHEST WORKING PRESSURE
(C) The second port to open is work port 'A' (port 'B' if the control spool moves to the left). The left
compensator valve stays to the right as in the neutral condition and the shuttle valve moves to the left
directing work port pressure to the area behind the compensator valve to hold it shut until it can be
opened by pressure in the ‘P’ port. In this mode, the compensator valve is functioning as a load check
valve would in a conventional valve.
PILOT (5) SHUTTLE (6) COMPENSATOR CONTROL TANK PORT (1) ANGLED
OIL VALVE VALVE MOVES LEFT SPOOL 'T' (RETURN) VENT PORT
OPENS
(4) OIL FLOWS TO (3) PRESSURE PORT (2) WORK PORT 'B' OPENS
'LS' PASSAGE OPENED SLIGHTLY
(D) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL CONTINUES TO MOVE TO RIGHT

• PRESSURE PORT OPENED SLIGHTLY

853SM28
• HIGHEST WORKING PRESSURE
(D) The next port to open is the angled vent port (1) on the right side of the control spool which connects
to the tank port, 'T'. This connects all passages in the compensator spool to return pressure. There is no
movement at this time but as soon as the work port 'B' opens (2) and oil flows, the returning oil will push
the compensator valve to the right and connect ‘B’ to 'T'.
The pressure port in the control spool is the last port to open (3). When it opens, pump discharge
pressure flows through the passage in the compensator spool and through the shuttle cavity to the load
sense passage (4).
The load sensing pressure increases causing the pump to increase its displacement and further increase
the pressure. The compensator valve keeps the work port passage closed until the pump discharge
pressure is higher than the work port pressure (load check feature).
Once the pump discharge pressure is higher, the shuttle valve moves to the right (5) and connects load
sensing pressure to the cavity behind the compensator valve. The compensator valve moves to the
left (6) allowing oil to flow to the work port. With the compensator valve open, the cavity to the right of
the compensator valve assumes approximate work port pressure and this pressure flows through the
passage to the shuttle cavity allowing work port pressure to control load sensing pressure. As the control
spool moves further, in response to pilot pressure, the compensator valve and shuttle valve positions
remain the same.
4.26
PILOT (1) COMPENSATOR SHUTTLE CONTROL SPOOL FULLY
OIL VALVE VALVE SHIFTED TO RIGHT
LOAD SENSING WORK WORK LOAD SENSING

PASSAGE 'LS' PORT 'A' PORT 'B' PASSAGE 'LS'
RETURN SUPPLY PASSAGE 'P' RETURN
PASSAGE 'T' (PUMP DISCHARGE) PASSAGE 'T'
(E) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL FULLY SHIFTED TO RIGHT

853SM29
• HIGHEST WORKING PRESSURE
(E) In this figure, pump discharge pressure is slightly higher than work port pressure because the
compensator valve (1) is open. When using just one function both the compensator valve and the shuttle
valve are moved to the end of their bores.
The load sensing pressure is always the same as the highest work port pressure and as a result is
always lower than pump discharge pressure. There are two factors that establish this pressure difference
between pump discharge and work port pressure, the load sensing valve and the orifice effect of the
passages in the control valve between the pump discharge port and the work port. There are three
openings the pump discharge oil must flow through to get to the work port. Each time the oil flows through
a passage there is a pressure drop, that is, there is an orifice at each passage. The smaller the opening
the smaller the oil flow due to the constant load sensing pressure. There is a passage from the work port
to the load sensing passage and this is the pressure sensed at the pump regulator; since the flow is very
small there is virtually no pressure drop from the work port to the 'LS' port on the pump.
Load sensing pressure is the same at both ends of all the control spools because the two passages in the
control valve manifold are joined together in the manifold.
LOAD SENSING – TWO OR MORE FUNCTIONS IN USE
Load compensation comes into effect whenever two or more functions are actuated at the same time. The
following is an explanation of the function of the valve components whenever a spool with a lower working
pressure is activated when a higher working pressure spool is fully shifted.
PILOT 'LS' COMPENSATOR (2) SHUTTLE (1) CONTROL SPOOL CENTERING

OIL PORT VALVE VALVE MOVES TO STARTS TO MOVE SPRING
JUST RIGHT
OPENED
(F) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL STARTING TO MOVE TO RIGHT

853SM30 • LS PORT JUST OPENED
• LOWER WORKING PRESSURE
(F) Pilot oil will start to move the control spool against the centering spring on the opposite end of the
spool. The 'LS' port is the first to open and load sensing pressure is applied to the shuttle valve. The
shuttle valve moves to the right to the end of its bore and then 'LS' pressure flows into the cavity at the left
end of the compensator valve.
4.27
PILOT SHUTTLE COMPENSATOR CONTROL

OIL VALVE VALVE SPOOL
WORK PORT 'A'

JUST OPENED
(G) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL CONTINUES TO MOVE TO RIGHT

853SM31 • WORK PORT 'A' JUST OPENED
• LOWER WORK PORT PRESSURE
(G) As the control spool continues to move, the work port is the next to open. The work port oil pressure
passes through compensator valve port and is applied to the end of the shuttle valve but since this work
port pressure is lower than 'LS', the shuttle does not move.
PILOT SHUTTLE (4) COMPENSATOR CONTROL TANK PORT (1) ANGLED

OIL VALVE VALVE MOVES SPOOL 'T' (RETURN) VENT PORT
LEFT THEN RIGHT OPENS
(5)
OIL FLOWS TO (3) PRESSURE PORT (2) WORK PORT 'B' OPENS
'LS' PASSAGE OPENED SLIGHTLY
(H) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL CONTINUES TO MOVE TO RIGHT
• PRESSURE PORT OPENED SLIGHTLY
853SM32
(H) As the control spool continues to move, the angled vent port opens (1), then work port 'B' opens (2)
allowing oil to flow and shift the right side compensator valve connecting port 'B' to 'T'. The pressure port
'P' is next to open (3) and supply pressure passes into the cavity to the right of the compensator valve
causing it to shift to the left (4) since the supply pressure is somewhat greater than 'LS' pressure. As it
shifts to the left (4) oil can travel into work port 'A' and in doing so it causes pressure in the cavity to drop
which results in 'LS' pressure pushing the compensator valve back to the right (5). The compensator finds
a position where the pressures are balanced and some oil flows into work port 'A'.
4.28
PILOT (2) COMPENSATOR VALVE (1) CONTROL SPOOL
OIL SETTLES IN A BALANCE FULLY SHIFTED TO RIGHT
POSITION
LOAD SENSING WORK WORK LOAD SENSING

PASSAGE 'LS' PORT 'A' PORT 'B' PASSAGE 'LS'
RETURN SUPPLY PASSAGE 'P' RETURN
PASSAGE 'T' (PUMP DISCHARGE) PASSAGE 'T'
(I) CONTROL VALVE SECTION – • CONTROL SPOOL FULLY SHIFTED TO RIGHT

853SM33
(I) As the control spool continues to move (1), the compensator spool continues to move in response to
the pressure variations and it settles in a position of balance (2) as shown in the figure with the spool fully
shifted. As the loads vary in the work ports, the valve components continue to modulate and compensate
for the load variations and maintain movement of the selected functions.
This valve system performs the functions automatically that are performed by an operator using a
conventional system as explained in the third paragraph above.
If the second valve being operated had a higher work port pressure than the one already selected, the
operation would be the same up to the point where the work port was opened. At this point the 'LS'
would change to the new higher work port pressure and the new valve would act in the same way as
the first valve selected and described above. The first valve selected would then have the internal spool
components take the same positions as the lower work port pressure valve described above.
4.29
HIGH PRESSURE LIMITING ('HPL') 845C-110
CONTROL VALVE
SYSTEM OVER MAIN
The main pump is protected by two relief valves PRESSURE VALVE
CONTROL MANIFOLD
that are installed in the bottom of the main control RELIEF
valve. These two valves provide High Pressure 'P'
PRESSURE
Limiting Control for the main pump in the following PORT
form:
The first relief valve limits 'LS' pressure to
approximately 296 bar (4300 psi). (gauge at 'LS'
test port) which in turn limits the pump output
pressure to 314 bar (4550 psi) (gauge at 'P' test
port). The 17 bar (250 psi) differential is known as
margin pressure. See SET MARGIN PRESSURE
'LS' PRESSURE
in THIS SECTION. 'LS' PORT 'XLS' 'XP' CONTROL
TEST TEST RELIEF
Margin pressure is the difference between 'P' port PORT PORT
pressure and 'LS' port pressure, observed while a

MAIN CONTROL VALVE
function is operating.
The second relief is a system relief valve (over
pressure control) which limits the pump output
pressure to 60 bar (870 psi) above 'LS' pressure,
this relief is non-adjustable.
855C-030
psi
1. CENTRE PASSAGE FOR PUMP

PRESSURE SUPPLY.
2. TWO RETURN PASSAGES
(CONNECTED INTERNALLY).
3. 'LS' SIGNAL PRESSURE.
MAIN CONTROL VALVE
4.30
SET MARGIN PRESSURE 3. Apply the swing brake.
Refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTING and 4. Turn OFF the engine.
HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATING RANGE chart
in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for specific 5. Remove the ignition key.
pressure and speed values. 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
IMPORTANT
845C-110
Margin pressure is set at the factory to 20 bar
(290 psi). The margin pressure can be adjusted
from 17.2 - 20.7 bar (250 - 300 psi), however the
flow stops on the valves must be reset in order to
maintain the same speed of the functions.
1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature.
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
'XLS' 'XP'
TEST TEST
PORT PORT
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY MAIN CONTROL VALVE
SUPPORTED
860C-001 845C-105
‘P’
TEST
PORT
2. Park machine on level ground with the
CAUTION

‘LS’
TEST
PORT
rotation of the upper structure and boom
assembly MAIN PUMP 'LS' AND 'P' TEST PORTS
7. Connect one side of the differential pressure

CAUTION gauge to the 'LS' gauge port and the other
side of the gauge to the pressure 'P' gauge
Be aware of other personnel in the area. test port.
Operator is responsible for the safe
NOTE: Margin pressure can be measured at
the gauge ports on the main control valve or
the main pump.
WARNING

WARNING
The swing brake must be applied at all

times during this procedure.
4.31
8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. 17. Allow a short time for pressure reading to
stabilize then tighten locknut on adjusting
9. Check that all personnel are clear of the
screw. Repeat above procedure to verify the
differential pressure setting is still correct.
18. Apply swing brake if not already applied.
position.
11. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine
start-up 20. Remove the ignition key.
12. Start engine and set engine speed to high idle 21. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
.
22. Remove pressure gauges.
13. Close and latch the front door.
14. Pull and hold the left or right trigger switch to
rotate the wrist.
'POR' ADJUSTING
SCREW (TURN OUT ENGINE
TO DECREASE ANTI-STALL
PRESSURE) SOLENOID
VALVE
MARGIN PRESSURE
ADJUSTING SCREW LOAD SENSE
(TURN OUT TO DECREASE PRESSURE
MARGIN PRESSURE) PORT
845C-036 MAIN PUMP CONTROLLER
15. Loosen the margin pressure adjusting screw

locknut on main pump controller.
16. Adjust the margin pressure adjusting screw
until the pressure gauge reading on the
differential pressure gauge meets margin
pressure specifications.
NOTE: This is a sensitive adjustment,
significant changes in pressure will be noticed
with only a small movement of the adjusting
screw.
4.32
SET LOAD SENSE RELIEF VALVE 3. Apply the swing brake.
845C-110
temperature.
STICK CYLINDERS SYSTEM OVER MAIN
FULLY EXTENDED PRESSURE VALVE
CONTROL MANIFOLD
RELIEF
'P'
PRESSURE
PORT
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
860C-001

'LS' PRESSURE
'XLS' 'XP' CONTROL
'LS' PORT TEST
TEST RELIEF
CAUTION PORT PORT
Use caution when in the cab as a slight MAIN CONTROL VALVE

7. Connect a 0–350 bar (0–5000 psi) gauge to 'P'
gauge test port on main control valve.
assembly
8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
CAUTION 9. Check that all personnel are clear of the

Be aware of other personnel in the area. 10. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run
Operator is responsible for the safe position.
start-up
WARNING 12. Start engine and set engine speed to high idle
.
14. Place the anti-stall switch in the OFF position.
WARNING

4.33
15. Use the MD3 computer to set fan service

mode to ON. Refer to COMPUTER -
ADJUSTMENT MENU - COOLING FAN
SERVICE MODE in SECTION 6 of THIS
MANUAL.
16. Have an assistant hold the left joystick lever in
the stick out position
17. Loosen the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting
screw locknut.
18. Adjust the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting
screw until the pressure gauge reading
on the 'P' meets 'LS' pressure relief valve
specifications.
19. Tighten the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting
screw locknut.
4.34
SECTION 5 – PILOT SYSTEM
CONTENTS - SECTION 5 ISSUE 1.0, APRIL 2016
A
ACCUMULATOR (IF EQUIPPED).............................................................................................................. 5.4

CHARGING.............................................................................................................................................5.4
CHECKING THE PRE-CHARGE PRESSURE....................................................................................... 5.4
C
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION, HYDRAULIC................................................................................................... 5.10

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM, HYDRAULIC.......................................................................................................... 5.13
E
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS - PILOT SYSTEM...................................................................................... 5.8, 5.9

H
HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS
PILOT SUPPLY....................................................................................................................................... 5.2
PILOT SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................... 5.13
P
PILOT MANIFOLD HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC.......................................................................................... 5.5

PILOT PRESSURE TESTING/SETTING
PILOT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE - SETTING............................................................................ 5.11
PILOT SYSTEM CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 5.10
PILOT SYSTEM COMPONENTS
ACCUMULATOR.................................................................................................................................... 5.4
CHARGING......................................................................................................................................... 5.4
CHECKING THE PRE-CHARGE PRESSURE................................................................................... 5.4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................... 5.2
JOYSTICKS AND FOOT PEDALS......................................................................................................... 5.6
OPERATING DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................. 5.6
PILOT CIRCUIT SUPPLY....................................................................................................................... 5.2
PILOT MANIFOLD.................................................................................................................................. 5.3
PILOT MANIFOLD SCHEMATIC............................................................................................................ 5.5
PILOT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE................................................................................................ 5.2
PILOT SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................................... 5.3
PILOT SYSTEM ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS............................................................... 5.7, 5.8, 5.9
PILOT SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT.................................................................................................. 5.13
PILOT SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC............................................................................................ 5.14
S
SCHEMATICS
PILOT MANIFOLD, HYDRAULIC........................................................................................................... 5.5
PILOT SYSTEM, ELECTRICAL, IQAN COMPUTER MODULES.................................................. 5.8, 5.9
PILOT SYSTEM, HYDRAULIC............................................................................................................. 5.14
PILOT SYSTEM ON/OFF ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS.............................................................................. 5.7
5.1
Pilot System Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
PILOT
MANIFOLD
SAW VALVE 10 MICRON

FILTER
SYSTEM
PRESSURE
PILOT PILOT
PRESSURE PRESSURE
REDUCING
VALVE
SAW PUMP
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
MAIN DRAIN LINE
PUMP PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE
845C-125 PILOT CIRCUIT SUPPLY
PILOT SYSTEM COMPONENTS

10 MICRON
GENERAL DESCRIPTION HIGH PRESSURE
FILTER
Pilot system oil is supplied by the main pump and
saw pump. The pressure reducing valve receives
this oil directly from the main pump and via the
'G2' port on the saw valve. The pilot pressure
reducing valve reduces and maintains the
pressure of the oil at 34.5 bar (500 psi) for the pilot
PILOT
system. The pilot oil at 34.5 bar PRESSURE
(500 psi) is then supplied to the pilot manifold. REDUCING
845CH-208 VALVE
Pilot oil is distributed by the pilot manifold to the
various pilot actuated functions of the machine. PILOT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
Solenoid valves, on the pilot manifold, control the
The pilot pressure reducing valve is located in the
flow of pilot oil to various valve sections on the
pump compartment mounted below and to the rear
main control valve. Joysticks and foot pedals also
of the saw valve. The reducing valve is adjustable
distribute oil to shift spools in their corresponding
and is set at 34.5 bar (500 psi).
valve sections on the main control valve.
There is a 10 micron high pressure pilot filter
located on the inlet of the pilot pressure reducing
valve to filter the oil before it enters the pilot
system. The pilot filter has to be removed and
reverse flushed every 1000 hours as part of
scheduled maintenance.
5.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Pilot System
PILOT MANIFOLD PILOT SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE
845C-126
SV1 PILOT SOLENOID
SHUT-OFF VALVES
SOLENOID TS1 TO TS8
VALVE
T4 T3 T2 T1
P4 P3 P2 P1
C4 C3 C2 C1
C8 C7 C6 C5 'SV1' PILOT
xxxxx SHUT-OFF
SOLENOID
ACCUMULATOR VALVE
PILOT MANIFOLD - BOTTOM VIEW

H845C-210 PILOT MANIFOLD
The pilot manifold is located in the valve service
compartment beside the hydraulic oil tank directly The pilot shut-off solenoid valve is mounted on the
behind the cab. Pilot oil enters the manifold at the pilot manifold. All pilot oil must flow through this
inlet port 'P' and is then distributed to the various valve before reaching any other solenoid valve.
pilot functions of the machine.
When the pilot shut-off solenoid valve SV1 is
The manifold distributes oil to the following circuits energized (front door closed and latched and pilot
through the ports listed below: reset 'ON' switch momentarily pressed), pilot oil is
supplied to the outlet pressure ports P1 to P4, the
• P1 – 'LS' Port on Bottom of Main Control Valve
solenoid valves and the accumulator.
and supplies the Attachment Valve
The swing brake will be applied if the swing brake
• P2 – Right Joystick Pressure
switch in the cab has been left in the ON position.
• P3 – Left Joystick Pressure The swing brake will be released when the switch
• P4 – To Track Speed Control Valve is in the OFF position.
Tank ports T1 to T4 drain oil to the tank. When the pilot shut-off valve is de-energized by
either opening front door or momentarily pressing
Solenoids TS1 to TS8 control oil flow to ports the pilot OFF switch, all pilot actuated functions
C1 to C8 respectively. They operate the following (electrical and hydraulic) are disabled. The swing
functions: brake is also applied at this time due to the lack of
• C1 – Wrist Rotate (CCW) pilot pressure. The accumulator is drained at this
time.
• C2 – Wrist Rotate (CW)
• C3 – Not Used
• C4 – Not Used
• C5 – Swing Brake
• C6 – Track Low Left
• C7 – Track Low Right
• C8 – Track Brake Release
5.3
ACCUMULATOR (IF EQUIPPED) CHARGING THE ACCUMULATOR
The accumulator can be charged with the proper
charging and testing device. A detailed instruction
sheet is provided with the charging and testing
ACCUMULATOR
device.
WARNING
Hydraulic circuits with accumulators store

hydraulic oil under pressure and may
remain pressurized after the engine is
turned off.
845CH-203
WARNING
There is one accumulator used on this machine The accumulator must not be altered
for the pilot system. It is a diaphragm type and is in any way. Do not weld or machine the
installed pre-charged with nitrogen gas to pressure vessel. Use only NITROGEN for
22.4 bar (325 psi). charging accumulators, never use oxygen
The accumulator in the pilot system makes sure or air due to risk of explosion.
that controls remain responsive by maintaining
optimum pilot pressure. This also prevents CHECKING THE PRE-CHARGE PRESSURE
the pilot pressure from dropping when several After the accumulator has been put in service, the
functions are activated at the same time. pre-charge pressure should be checked every
2000 hours with the proper accumulator charging
GAS and testing device. A detailed instruction sheet is
VALVE
GUARD GAS VALVE provided with the charging and testing device.
If the gas pre-charge pressure is low, investigate
BODY the cause and correct it. Possible causes of lost
pre-charge pressure are a leaking or damaged gas
valve, or a damaged diaphragm.
IMPORTANT!
Accumulators cannot be shipped by air when
DIAPHRAGM pre-charged. When installing a new accumulator,
do not assume that it is charged. Always check the
VALVE GUARD pre-charge pressure before installation.
POPPET (SEATS
HYDRAULIC AGAINST OIL
CONNECTION PORT AFTER OIL
EVACUATION)
875-011 ACCUMULATOR
5.4
SWING TRACK BRAKE TRACK WRIST WRIST

BRAKE LOW R.H. RELEASE LOW L.H. CCW CW
C5 C7 C8 C6 C1 C2 C3 C4 G1 G
TS7 TS6 TS2 TS4 69 bar

(1000 psi)
P
TS5 TS8 TS1 TS3
T
P1 T1 P2 T2 P3 T3 P4 T4
22.4 bar
(325 psi) P4 - TO TRACK SPEED
CONTROL VALVE
ACCUMULATOR
P3 - LEFT JOYSTICK PRESSURE
P2 - RIGHT JOYSTICK PRESSURE
P1 - ATTACHMENT VALVE AND ‘LS’ PORT ON BOTTOM OF MAIN CONTROL VALVE
845C-127 PILOT MANIFOLD HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

5.5
JOYSTICKS AND FOOT PEDALS OPERATING DESCRIPTION
These pilot valves are manually operated, The joysticks and foot pedals operate on pilot
directional control valves and operate on the same pressure oil, 34 bar (500 psi), supplied from the
principle as a direct operating pressure reducing pilot control valve. The joysticks have four valves
valve. Both the joystick and foot control valves paired together and operate two functions of the
(pedals) use similar spool arrangements. main boom each.
When moving the right joystick in the forward
1 and reverse directions the hoist boom will move
down and up respectively. When moving the right
joystick left and right the head will tilt forward or
backward respectively.
When moving the left joystick in the forward and
reverse directions the stick boom will move out
and in respectively. When moving the left joystick
left and right the upper structure will rotate left or
right respectively.
5
Each of the four valves in the joystick work the
4 same way. When a joystick direction is activated
3 the handle (1) presses down on one of the four
plungers (5). The valve moves against the return
2
(4) and regulating springs (3) and opens the valve
(2) which allows pilot oil to move through it. The oil
is directed to that hydraulic function’s valve section
on the main hydraulic control valve. The pilot oil
acts on one end of the function’s spool valve which
RR-14 JOYSTICK PILOT VALVE in turn moves and allows main oil to flow from the
main valve section to the actuator (a cylinder or
Operated by hand or foot these valves direct pilot motor).
oil to the main control valve sections end caps and As an example:
acts to move the spool from its centre position.
When the left joystick is moved to the right the
operator wants the upper structure to rotate to the
1
right. Valve four in the joystick opens and sends
5 pilot oil to an end cap on the swing section valve of
the main hydraulic control valve. The oil in the end
cap forces the spool in the swing section to move
which in turn allows main function oil, up to
4 310 bar (4500 psi), to flow through the swing
section valve and out to the swing drive motor.
3
The foot pedals operate in the same manner
2
except they only work one function. The foot
pedals also run on pilot oil pressure
34 bar (500 psi). The left foot pedal operates the
left track and the right foot pedal operates the right
track. The foot pedals have only two valves.
'P' PORT WORK PORTS 1, 2, 3 OR 4

As an example:
When the forward direction on the left foot pedal
AU013-1
AU013-2 SPOOL ARRANGEMENT is selected, valve one is opened by the pedal
allowing pilot oil to flow through it and out to the
main control valve section for the left track drive
motor. The pilot oil acts on the section valve spool
which moves to allow main hydraulic oil, up to
310 bar (4500 psi), to flow to the left track motor.
5.6
PILOT SYSTEM ELECTRICAL Whenever the front door is opened the door
CIRCUITS limit switch opens interrupting the voltage to the
function lockout relay coil, this opens the contacts
With the engine running, the pilot shut-off solenoid
of the function lockout relay and de-energizes the
valve is not energized until the front door is closed
pilot shut-off solenoid valve and shuts down the
and latched and the pilot ON reset switch
pilot system. This prevents pilot oil from reaching
(green button) is momentarily pressed.
the controls. The pilot ON icon will change to
When the pilot reset switch is pressed, the coil on YELLOW on the MD3 display.
the function lock-out relay is energized closing the
A second pilot shut-off switch is in the same circuit
circuit between wires RED 489 and
as the front door switch. If an emergency situation
TAN 105B. Wire TAN 105B connects to the front
should arise, pressing the pilot OFF switch
door switch. When this switch is closed (door
(RED button) located in the cab will have the
closed) current flows through wires TAN 107 and
same effect as opening the front door.
GRN 11 to energize the coil on the pilot shut-off
solenoid valve which opens and supplies oil to
the pilot circuit via the pilot manifold. The pilot ON
icon will be activated (GREEN) on the MD3
display. At the same time current flows through
wire GRN 11A back to the function lock-out relay
coil and latches the function lock out relay in the
energized position and remains energized after
the pilot reset switch has been released.
CIRCUIT "ON"
FROM ‘RUN’ TO ‘START’
RELAY RELAY
TAN
490 GRN PILOT ON
IQAN XS2
GRN 11C SIGNAL
RED 11A
02 PILOT
RESET PILOT OFF
TAN TAN GRN GRN BLK PILOT ON/OFF
105 107 11F 11 ON G11 SOLENOID
RED 87a PILOT
489 DOOR
RED SWITCH PILOT
489 30 TAN
5A SHUT-OFF
87 105B TO
BLK VALVE
G11A SAW
86 85
SWITCH
FUNCTION LOCK
OUT RELAY
CIRCUIT "OFF"
FROM ‘RUN’ TO ‘START’

RELAY RELAY
TAN
490 GRN PILOT ON
IQAN XS2
GRN 11C SIGNAL
RED 11A
02 PILOT
RESET PILOT OFF
TAN TAN GRN GRN BLK PILOT ON/OFF
105 107 11F 11 G11 SOLENOID
ON
RED 87a PILOT
489 DOOR
RED SWITCH PILOT
489 30 TAN
5A SHUT-OFF
87 105B TO
BLK VALVE
G11A SAW
86 85
SWITCH
FUNCTION LOCK
OUT RELAY
845C-128
845C-129 PILOT SYSTEM ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
5.7
ACCESSORY RELAY
RED
SHEET 1
BATTERY POWER
IQAN MD3
20 SHEET 1
RED
351C BLK G283 C1-1 -BAT VIN-A C2-1 GRN 443 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
TO IQAN XS2 PIN 40, SHEET 9 BLK 285 C1-2 CAN-A-L VIN-B C2-2 GRN 258 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
TO SHEET 2 J1939 BLK 399 C1-3 CAN-B-L VIN-C C2-3 GRN 257 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
2A
N/U C1-4 CAN-C-L VIN-D C2-4 GRN 446 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
N/U RS232 -VREF BLK

RED C1-5 DATA IN C2-5
648
N/U C1-6 RESERVED USB D- C2-6 WHT
620 ohm
RED 647 C1-7 +RTC USB D+ C2-7 GRN
RS232 +VREF RED 612
N/U C1-8 DATA OUT C2-8 N/U
N/U C1-9 CAN-C-H VIN-E C2-9 GRN 383 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
TO SHEET 2 J1939 RED 398 C1-10 CAN-B-H VIN-F C2-10 GRN 382 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
TO IQAN XS2 PIN 26, SHEET 9 RED 284 C1-11 CAN-A-H VIN-G C2-11 GRN 252 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
RED 283 C1-12 +BAT DOUT-A C2-12 TAN 50

3A
XS2 MODULE
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 442 10 VIN A DOUT A 8 TAN 673 SPARE
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 256 11 VIN B DOUT B 9 TAN 609 IQAN SHUTDOWN CONTROL (SHEET 1)
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 253 12 VIN C DOUT C 22 -- N/U
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 445 13 VIN D DOUT D 23 TAN 175 A/C OFF RELAY (SHEET 6)
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 381 24 VIN E DOUT E 36 TAN 610 RED WARNING LIGHT (SHEET 10)
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 380 25 VIN F DOUT F 37 -- N/U
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 251 38 VIN G
DOUT L 7 TAN 672 SPARE
ANTI STALL, SHEET 3 GRN 364 39 VIN H
DIN T 35 YEL 650 LEFT TRACK PEDAL PRESSURE SWITCH (SHEET 10)
TO JOYSTICKS, SHEET 7 RED 614 42 +VREF
DIN S 21 YEL 651 RIGHT TRACK PEDAL PRESSURE SWITCH (SHEET 10)
BLK 615 29 -VREF
DOUT K 6 TAN 671 SPARE
DIN R 34 TAN 16B KEY, START SIGNAL (SHEET 1)
DIN Q 20 RED 354B KEY, "ON" SIGNAL (SHEET 1)
DOUT J 5 TAN 670 SPARE
DIN P 33 GRN 11C PILOT ON (SHEET 1)
DIN O 19 GRN 21 TRACK LOW (SHEET 3)
DOUT I 4 -- N/U
DIN N 32 TAN 254 FAN CLEAN (SHEET 6)
DIN M 18 TAN 384 FAN FULL ON (SHEET 6)

TO IQAN XA2 #1 SHHET 11 BLK 401 41 CAN-L
CAN-H DOUT H 3 TAN 654 DEFROST RELAY (SHEET 6)

TO IQAN XA2 #1 SHEET 11 RED 400 27
DIN L 31 GRN 617 DEFROST "ON" (SHEET 6)
DIN K 17 ORG 30A A/C "ON" (SHEET 6)

TO IQAN MD3 SHEET 8 BLK 285 40 CAN-L
TO IQAN MD3 SHEET 8 RED 284 26 CAN-H DOUT G 2 -- N/U
DIN J 30 GRN 35A SAW ON/PUMP 1 (SHEET 1)

RUN RELAY
SHEET 1 DIN I 16 TAN 439 N/U
10A
RED +BAT
RED 240 28 1
02 ADDRESS 0
BLK G240 15 -BAT TAG 14
845CH-212 PILOT SYSTEM ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

5.8
XA2 #1 MODULE (XA2-A0)

TO IQAN XA2 #2, SHEET 13 BLK 453 41 CAN-L
TO IQAN XA2 #2, SHEET 13 RED 454 27 CAN-H
TO IQAN XS2, SHEET 9 BLK 401 40 CAN-L
TO IQAN XS2, SHEET 9 RED 400 26 CAN-H

N/U YEL 784 10 VIN A DOUT A 8 GRN 721 TRACK LOW LH (SHEET 10)
SAW/HARVESTER PRESSURE (SHEET 10) YEL 630 11 VIN B DOUT B 9 GRN 722 TRACK LOW RH (SHEET 10)
AIR INTAKE RESTRICTION (SHEET 10) YEL 602 12 VIN C DOUT C 22 GRN 725 TRACK BRAKE RELEASE (SHEET 10)
AUXILARY SENSOR 1 (SHEET 10) YEL 580 13 VIN D DOUT D 23 GRN 719 COOLER BYPASS (SHEET 12)
N/U YEL 579 24 VIN E DOUT E 36 TAN 48 MOTION ALARM, SHEET 4
N/U YEL 544 25 VIN F DOUT F 37 823 N/U
ENGINE RED STOP (SHEET 5) YEL 709 38 D IN G
D OUT 7 822 N/U
AUXILARY SENSOR 2 (SHEET 10) YEL 785 39 VIN H
D IN 35 TAN 102 ENGINE RPM UP (SHEET 5)
TO SHEET 10 RED 631 42 +VREF
D IN 21 TAN 103 ENGINE RPM DOWN (SHEET 5)
TO SHEET 10 BLK 632 29 -VREF
COUT E 6 788 TO SHEET 12
CRET E- 34 786 WARM UP / WRIST CCW (SHEET 12)
CRET E+ 20 787 PUMP 2 / WRIST CW (SHEET 12)
COUT D 5 791 TO SHEET 12
CRET D- 33 789 TELESCOPIC IN (SHEET 12)
CRET D+ 19 790 TELESCOPIC OUT (SHEET 12)
COUT C 4 652 TO SHEET 12
CRET C- 32 - N/U
CRET C+ 18 653 TRAVEL SPEED CONTROL (SHEET 12)
COUT B 3 TAN 634 TO SHEET 12
TO IQAN XA2 #1, SHEET 11 BLK 453 CAN-L CRET B- 31 GRN 274 LEVEL, LEFT CYLINDER - (SHEET 12)
41
TO IQAN XA2 #1, SHEET 11 RED 454 CAN-H CRET B+ 17 GRN 275 LEVEL, LEFT CYLINDER + (SHEET 12)
27
COUT A 2 TAN 633 TO SHEET 12
ACCESSORY RELAY N/U 40 CAN-L CRET A- 30 GRN 277 LEVEL, RIGHT CYLINDER - (SHEET 12)
SHEET 1
N/U 26 CAN-H CRET A+ 16 GRN 278 LEVEL, RIGHT CYLINDER + (SHEET 12)
RED
20
15A
+BAT 1
RED 450 28 ADDRESS 1T
TAG 14
BLK G450 15 -BAT
845CH-209 PILOT SYSTEM ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CONTINUED

5.9
PILOT SYSTEM CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 845CH-205
'SV1' PILOT SHUT-OFF 'G' TEST PORT
SOLENOID VALVE
The pilot manifold is a distribution centre, directing
pilot oil to pilot operated functions on the machine.
A pilot shut-off solenoid valve installed on the
manifold controls the flow of pilot oil into the
manifold.
When the pilot shut-off solenoid valve is
energized, pilot oil is made available to outlet
pressure ports and eight solenoid valves. When
'ACC'
the pilot shut-off solenoid valve is de-energized,
pilot oil from the pilot pressure reducing valve 'G1' TEST PORT SOLENOID
VALVES
is blocked, preventing pilot oil from entering the
manifold, thereby rendering these pilot functions
inactive. Refer to PILOT SYSTEM RESET in
section 2 of the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
ACCUMULATOR
The accumulator 'ACC' outlet pressure port is
connected to the pilot accumulator that maintains
a constant pressure source of 34.5 bar (500 psi),
ensuring that the controls remain responsive PILOT MANIFOLD - FRONT VIEW
during heavy duty cycles.
Movement of the joystick levers or the foot pedals
will direct pilot oil to the pilot end caps of the main
control valve sections to operate the various
machine functions such as lifting the boom or
driving the machine.
A gauge test port 'G' located on the pilot manifold
is provided for use when testing the pilot system
pressure.
NOTE: The manifold has test ports before,
test port 'G' and after test port 'G1', the shut-off
solenoid valve. A secondary relief is also added as
a safety precaution.
5.10
PILOT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE – 845CH-213
SETTING 'G' TEST PORT
Refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTING and

in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for specific
pressure and speed values.
temperature.
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
'SV1' PILOT
SHUT-OFF
SOLENOID
VALVE
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY ACCUMULATOR
SUPPORTED
860C-001
2. Park machine on level ground with the PILOT MANIFOLD - FRONT VIEW
7. Connect a 0-70 bar (0-1000 psi) pressure
gauge on 'G' test port on the pilot distribution
CAUTION manifold.
Use caution when in the cab as a slight 8. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.
touch of the controls can cause sudden 9. Check that all personnel are clear of the
rotation of the upper structure and boom machine before starting engine.
assembly
position.
CAUTION 11. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine
start-up
Be aware of other personnel in the area.
Operator is responsible for the safe 12. With the aid of an assistant, start the engine
operation of the machine. and set throttle to idle position .
WARNING NOTE: If required refer to SET LOAD SENSE
RELIEF VALVE in SECTION 4 of THIS
Ensure that no one is standing near the MANUAL for setting and testing main pump
attachment during this procedure. pressure.

5.11
845CH-208
PRESSURE
ADJUSTING
SCREW
PILOT
PRESSURE
REDUCING
VALVE
PILOT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
14. Loosen the pilot pressure reducing valve

adjusting screw locknut.
15. Turn the adjusting screw until the pressure
gauge reading at 'G' meets pilot supply
pressure specifications.
16. Tighten the pilot pressure reducing valve
adjusting screw locknut taking care not to turn
the adjusting screw at the same time.
5.12
'Y3'
G
'Y1' 'Y4' LEFT RIGHT
PC1
JOYSTICK JOYSTICK
C
TILT SWING WRIST

MAIN
CONTROL
VALVE
'X3' 'X1' 'X4'
LEFT FOOT RIGHT FOOT

PEDAL PEDAL
FOOT PEDAL
3 PRESSURE CONTROL
VALVE
2 1
'Y2' 'Y6'
PILOT 'Y7' 'Y8'

MANIFOLD
HOIST STICK LHD
RHD
T4 T3 T2 T1
P4 P3 P2 P1
C4 C3 C2 C1
C8 C7 C6 C5
'X8' 'X6'
X2
xxxxx
MAIN CONTROL 'LS'
VALVE 'X7'
'T2' TO
TO TANK
TANK
LEGEND PILOT 'P1'
PRESSURE
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
REDUCING
DRAIN LINE VALVE 'TP' 'PS'
PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE 'P'
'P1'
SAW
VALVE
'P1' ATTACHMENT
VALVE
'T'
LEVELING
VALVE
SAW
PUMP
ATTACHMENT 'T1'
PUMP
'PSV' 'P' 'PS'
'X'
MAIN
FAN PUMP
PUMP FAN CONTROL
VALVE
845C-130 PILOT SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

5.13
JOYSTICK , L.H. JOYSTICK, R.H.
REV. FWD. REV. FWD.
LEFT RIGHT
FOOT PILOT VALVE FOOT PILOT VALVE
SWING TRACK BRAKE TRACK WRIST WRIST

BRAKE LOW R.H. RELEASE LOW L.H. CCW CW
TRACK
C5 C7 C8 C6 C1 C2 C3 C4 SPEED
TS7 TS6 TS2 TS4
TS5 TS8 TS1 TS3
(1000 psi)
P1 T1 P2 T2 P3 T3 P4 T4
PILOT MANIFOLD
22.4 bar
(325 psi)
ACCUMULATOR
G2
SAW VALVE
MAIN PUMP P
MAX DISPL. 200 CC/REV
STANDBY
PRESSURE STANDBY
200-600 psi PRESSURE
300 psi
MARGIN SAW PUMP
PRESSURE 3600 psi
290 psi
ENGINE
SAW PUMP
RETURN
MANIFOLD
IN OUT
INLINE FILTER HYDRAULIC

TANK
PILOT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
RETURN STRAINER
845C-133 PILOT SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

5.14
SECTION 6 – ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERS
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
ACCUMULATOR ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................................ 6.49
ACCUMULATOR DEFAULT SETTINGS ............................................................................................. 6.52
ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLE .................................................................................................................. 6.39
CLAMP ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................................... 6.45
CLAMP DEFAULT SETTINGS ............................................................................................................ 6.48
LEVELER ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................................................... 6.53
WRIST ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................................... 6.40
WRIST DEFAULT SETTINGS ............................................................................................................. 6.44
BATTERY BOOSTER JUMPER PLUG .................................................................................................... 6.7
BATTERY COMPARTMENT ..................................................................................................................... 6.7
BATTERY COMPARTMENT, DISCONNECT RELAY ............................................................................... 6.7
CAB ELECTRICAL PANEL ....................................................................................................................... 6.9
CAB FUSE AND RELAY PANEL .............................................................................................................. 6.8
COMPUTER ...........................................................................................................................................6.23
ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLE .................................................................................................................. 6.39
ADJUSTMENT MENU ........................................................................................................................ 6.28
COOLING FAN SERVICE MODE ................................................................................................... 6.29
OIL GRADE SELECTION ............................................................................................................... 6.29
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................ 6.40
ACCUMULATOR ............................................................................................................................. 6.49
AUTO ACCUMULATION MODE STATUS ....................................................................................... 6.30
CLAMP ............................................................................................................................................6.45
LEVELER ........................................................................................................................................6.53
WRIST .............................................................................................................................................6.40
ADJUST MENU .................................................................................................................................. 6.33
MACHINE PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................. 6.34
TIMED PURGE INTERVAL ..................................................................................................................6.34
ALERT MESSAGES ........................................................................................................................... 6.84
CLAMP EXAMPLE .............................................................................................................................. 6.39
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 6.13
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS .......................................................................... 6.13
DATE/TIME ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................................................ 6.64
DEFAULT SETTINGS TABLE ............................................................................................................. 6.44
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................................... 6.63
ELECTRONIC SETTINGS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 6.38
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE .................................................................................. 6.26
ENGINE MENU ................................................................................................................................... 6.25
UNITS OF MEASURE ..................................................................................................................... 6.25
ENGINE MENU - ENGINE FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ 6.26
BATTERY VOLTAGE ....................................................................................................................... 6.26
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE ...................................................................................................... 6.26
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE ............................................................................................ 6.26
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE .............................................................................. 6.26
ENGINE LOAD % ........................................................................................................................... 6.26
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ............................................................................................................... 6.26
ENGINE SPEED ............................................................................................................................. 6.26
FUEL RATE ..................................................................................................................................... 6.26
TURBOCHARGER BOOST PRESSURE ....................................................................................... 6.26
6.1
Electrical and Computers Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
ENGINE TACHOMETER GAUGE ...................................................................................................... 6.26
FUEL GAUGE ..................................................................................................................................... 6.27
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE ....................................................................................... 6.32
HYDRAULICS ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS REFERENCE CHART .......................................... 6.44, 6.61
INFORMATION MESSAGES .............................................................................................................. 6.93
INFORMATION MODE ....................................................................................................................... 6.31
INFORMATION MODE MENU
ENGINE HOURS ............................................................................................................................. 6.31
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL % ............................................................................................................. 6.31
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE ................................................................................................. 6.31
MACHINE HOURS .......................................................................................................................... 6.31
MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMP LOAD SENSE PRESSURE ................................................................. 6.31
TOTAL FUEL USED ........................................................................................................................ 6.31
TRIP FUEL FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................ 6.31
MAIN MENU .......................................................................................................................................6.24
MAIN MENU PAGE - ADJUST MENU
AUTO-ACCUMULATE ..................................................................................................................... 6.33
HYDRAULICS
HYDRAULICS ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS REFERENCE CHART ............................................ 6.44, 6.61
LEVELING .......................................................................................................................................6.36
MACHINE PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................. 6.34
MAIN MENU PAGE - PREFERENCES MENU
LANGUAGE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................................... 6.66
MAIN MENU SCREEN ....................................................................................................................... 6.33
MD3 COMPUTER, ELECTRONIC CONTROL AND MAIN DISPLAY ................................................. 6.23
MD3 MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................... 6.69
MEASURE MENU ............................................................................................................................... 6.62
MESSAGES ........................................................................................................................................ 6.69
ALERT MESSAGES (YELLOW) ..................................................................................................... 6.84
CRITICAL MESSAGES (RED) ........................................................................................................ 6.70
ERROR MESSAGES (RED) ........................................................................................................... 6.76
INFORMATION MESSAGES (BLUE) ............................................................................................. 6.93
MESSAGES - ALERT
ENGINE VOLTAGE HIGH ............................................................................................................... 6.89
ENGINE VOLTAGE LOW ................................................................................................................ 6.89
HARDWARE FAILURE - COUT ...................................................................................................... 6.88
HARDWARE FAILURE - DIN .......................................................................................................... 6.88
HARDWARE FAILURE - DOUT ...................................................................................................... 6.88
HARDWARE FAILURE - VIN .......................................................................................................... 6.88
HARDWARE FAULT - MD3 ............................................................................................................. 6.87
HARDWARE FAULT - XA2 .............................................................................................................. 6.87
HARDWARE FAULT - XS2 .............................................................................................................. 6.87
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL LOW ........................................................................................................ 6.86
MODULE HIGH SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT ................................................................................ 6.91
MODULE HIGH TEMPERATURE - ALERT ..................................................................................... 6.90
MODULE LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT ................................................................................. 6.92
MESSAGES - CRITICAL .................................................................................................................... 6.70
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL LOW ................................................................................................... 6.74
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH .................................................................................. 6.74
ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - CRITICAL ........................................................................... 6.75
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW ...................................................................................................... 6.75
ENGINE STOP ................................................................................................................................ 6.71
HARDWARE FAULT - ENGINE ....................................................................................................... 6.73
HARDWARE FAULT - MD3 ............................................................................................................. 6.73
HARDWARE FAULT - XA2 .............................................................................................................. 6.73
HARDWARE FAULT - XS2 .............................................................................................................. 6.73
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL EXTREMELY LOW ................................................................................. 6.71
6.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Electrical and Computers
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH ....................................................................................... 6.72
INTAKE MANIFOLD TEMPERATURE HIGH .................................................................................. 6.75
MESSAGES - ERROR
CURRENT OUTPUT ERROR (COUT) ........................................................................................... 6.78
DIGITAL INPUT ERROR (DIN) ....................................................................................................... 6.78
DIGITAL OUTPUT ERROR (DOUT) ............................................................................................... 6.78
MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR .................................................................................................. 6.79
MD3 MODULE BLANK SCREEN ........................................................................................................6.80
XA2 MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR ..............................................................................................6.82
XS2 MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR ..............................................................................................6.81
MODULE VREF ERROR ................................................................................................................ 6.77
VOLTAGE INPUT ERROR (VIN) ..................................................................................................... 6.78
MESSAGES - INFORMATION
FAN FULL ON ................................................................................................................................. 6.94
PREFERENCES MENU ..................................................................................................................... 6.63
SCREEN SAVER ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 6.64
SELF WARMUP MODE ...................................................................................................................... 6.28
WARMUP MODE ................................................................................................................................ 6.28
COMPUTER MODULES
XA2 MODULES .................................................................................................................................. 6.19
XA2 MODULE LED INDICATORS .................................................................................................. 6.19
XA2 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................... 6.19
XS2 MODULE ..................................................................................................................................... 6.17
XS2 MODULE LED INDICATORS .................................................................................................. 6.17
XS2 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................... 6.17
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2 ...................................................................................... 6.101
DEFAULT SETTINGS TABLE ................................................................................................................. 6.44
DOWNLOADING APPLICATIONS FROM DEALER WEBSITE ............................................................. 6.98
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LOCATIONS ............................................................................................ 6.12
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION - CAB ..................................................................................................... 6.11
ELECTRICAL KIT - SERVICE AND DIAGNOSTICS .............................................................................. 6.95
ELECTRICAL PANEL - CAB .................................................................................................................... 6.9
ELECTRICAL PANEL - REAR COMPARTMENT ................................................................................... 6.10
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................6.111
ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE, LEVELING CYLINDERS
LEVELER DEFAULT SETTINGS ........................................................................................................ 6.35
ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - CRITICAL .................................................................................. 6.75
FUSE AND RELAY REAR PANEL ............................................................................................................ 6.5
FUSES AND RELAYS, CAB ..................................................................................................................... 6.8
HYDRAULICS ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS REFERENCE CHART .............................................. 6.44, 6.61
ID-TAG ....................................................................................................................................................6.22
ADDRESSING .................................................................................................................................... 6.22
TERMINATING ................................................................................................................................ 6.22
ASSEMBLING OF THE ID–TAG ......................................................................................................... 6.22
SELECTING APPROPRIATE ID-TAG ................................................................................................ 6.22
IQANRUN 2 ............................................................................................................................................6.99
ADJUST ............................................................................................................................................6.107
6.3
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2 ................................................................................... 6.101
IQANRUN 2 QUICK SUMMARY ......................................................................................................... 6.99
ADJUST ........................................................................................................................................6.100
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2 ................................................................................. 6.99
GET CLONE .................................................................................................................................... 6.99
GET SETTINGS .............................................................................................................................. 6.99
LOGIN .............................................................................................................................................6.99
LOGS ............................................................................................................................................6.100
MEASURE (GRAPH) .................................................................................................................... 6.100
SEND CLONE ................................................................................................................................. 6.99
SEND SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................... 6.99
SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................ 6.100
UPDATE .......................................................................................................................................... 6.99
LOGIN ...............................................................................................................................................6.102
LOGS ................................................................................................................................................6.109
MEASURE/GRAPH .......................................................................................................................... 6.108
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT AND INFORMATION ................................................................................ 6.99
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2 ......................................................................................... 6.99
SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................... 6.110
UPDATE APPLICATION ................................................................................................................... 6.103
GET CLONE FILE ......................................................................................................................... 6.103
GET SETTINGS FILE ................................................................................................................... 6.104
UPDATE APPLICATION TO MD3 ................................................................................................. 6.105
IQAN SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................................. 6.97
APPLICATION PROGRAM UPDATES
FOR PRODUCT SERVICE BULLETINS ........................................................................................ 6.98
DOWNLOADING APPLICATIONS FROM DEALER WEBSITE ......................................................... 6.98
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2 ......................................................................................... 6.99
MD3 COMPUTER .................................................................................................................................. 6.23
MD3 COMPUTER, ELECTRONIC CONTROL AND MAIN DISPLAY .................................................... 6.23
MD3 COMPUTER MAIN DISPLAY ........................................................................................................ 6.24
MD3 DISPLAY MODULE SCHEMATIC .................................................................................................. 6.16
MD3 MAIN DISPLAY .............................................................................................................................. 6.23
MODULES
MD3 COMPUTER AND DISPLAY ...................................................................................................... 6.15
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC ............................................................................................................ 6.16
XA2 MODULES
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................ 6.20, 6.21
XS2 MODULE
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC ............................................................................................................ 6.18
OIL GRADE SELECTION ....................................................................................................................... 6.29
REAR COMPARTMENT ELECTRICAL PANEL ..................................................................................... 6.10
RELAYS AND FUSES, CAB ..................................................................................................................... 6.8
SCREEN SAVER ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................................... 6.64
SELF WARMUP MODE .......................................................................................................................... 6.28
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2 ............................................................................................ 6.99
SWITCH AND SENSOR LOCATIONS ................................................................................................... 6.12
UPDATE APPLICATION ....................................................................................................................... 6.103
XA2-A0 ENGINE FRAME MODULE SCHEMATIC ................................................................................ 6.20
XA2-A1 ENGINE FRAME MODULE SCHEMATIC ................................................................................ 6.21
XS2-A0 CAB MODULE SCHEMATIC .................................................................................................... 6.18
6.4
MAIN FUSE AND ELECTRICAL BOX The fuses in the main fuse and relay electrical box
protect the following circuits:
The main fuse and relay electrical box is located
in the upper enclosure on the left side of the • Start relay (40 A)
machine. Installed in the main fuse and relay • Key switch run/accessories (60 A)
electrical box are three 60 amp (A), one 40 A and
two 125 A fuses. The fuses prevent major damage • Cab power (60 A)
to the electrical systems of the machine in the • Work lights (60 A)
event of a short circuit in any of the main battery
feed lines. • Roof pump (125 A)
• Grid heater (125 A)
54545BENG
FUSES
REPLACE FUSES WITH SAME
VALUES AS INDICATED
1. ROOF SERVICE LIGHTS
2. PUMP AREA SERVICE LIGHTS GRID
3. SPARE HEATER
STARTER FUEL
4. SPARE LOCKOUT HEATER RELAY
5. ENGINE PRE-HEAT RELAY RELAY
(OPTIONAL) POWER
6. SPARE ROOF
7. BATTERY DISCONNECT
RELAY
1. 15A 8. 20A
8. FUEL HEATER SERVICE
WORK START
LIGHT
9. WORK LIGHT RELAY 2. 7.5A LIGHT 9. 30A
RELAY RELAY
RELAY
10. ENGINE STOP LAMP FUSE 3. 10. 2A
11. PUMP AREA COVER HID LIGHT
4. 11. 10A
12. PUMP AREA COVER HID LIGHT
13. ROOF HALOGEN WORK LIGHTS 5. 20A 12. 10A
ENGINE
14. ENGINE ECM 6. ECM 13. 15A 15. 5.1K
15. ENGINE STOP LAMP RESISTOR RELAY
7. 10A 14. 30A
16. STARTER RELAY 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
17. POWER ROOF RELAY

18. KEY SWITCH RUN/ACC POWER
19. CAB SWITCHED BATTERY
A
A
60A
60A
60A
16.
125
125
POWER 40A
20. CAB WORK LIGHT POWER
21. GRID HEATER RELAY
C A B A
H860C-409
Fuse and Relay Panel – Engine Compartment

A 125 amp Fuse C 40 amp Fuse
B 60 amp Fuse
6.5
Each circuit on the machine is further protected
against current overload by individual circuit
fuses. The circuit fuses in the fuse, relay and
electrical panel in the cab protect the cab electrical
components. If a fuse blows (silver coloured band
inside the fuse is broken or melted) it should be
replaced with a fuse of the same amperage rating.
If the fuse blows again, the circuit in question must
be inspected for a possible short circuit.
6.6
A battery booster jumper plug is located in the
IMPORTANT battery compartment. This jumper connector
24 VOLT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM is used in conjunction with jumper cables with
matching ends. If standard jumper cables are used
BATTERY COMPARTMENT the negative connection can be made anywhere
on the upper structure as close to the batteries as
Two 12 volt batteries with 950 cold cranking possible on bare metal.
amps are connected in series to provide a 24 volt
electrical power supply. BATTERY BOOSTER JUMPER PLUG
A 60 amp fuse located in the battery compartment A battery booster jumper plug is located in the
provides unswitched power for battery compartment. This special JUMPER
CONNECTOR is used in conjunction with jumper
• Service lights cables with matching ends. Cables with matching
• MD3 computer real time clock (RTC) ends are available through your Tigercat Dealer
Parts Department. If standard jumper cables are
• Webasto used the NEGATIVE connection can be made
• Battery disconnect relay anywhere on the upper structure, as close to the
batteries as possible on bare metal.
When an AMEREX fire suppression system is
installed, a 10 amp in-line fuse is used to protect
the suppression system. The fuse is located in the
fire suppression power lead from the battery.
BATTERY
DISCONNECT
RELAY
10A
60A MAIN FSS
ELECTRICAL FUSE
FUSE
TOP VIEW OF BATTERIES
BATTERIES
BOOSTER
JUMPER
PLUG
860C-225A
860C-225B BATTERY COMPARTMENT
6.7
FUSES AND RELAYS, CAB
Cab electrical controls, fuse and relay panel,
located in the cab on the right rear side panel.
MD3 computer fuses are located here.
The engine diagnostics connection is on the
left lower side of the instrument panel. Refer to
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS CONNECTION in THIS
SECTION.
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS
H845C-62 CONNECTION
H845C-137 CAB FUSE AND RELAY PANEL
6.8
XS2 CAB
TERMINAL RAIL MODULE
FUSE AND
TERMINAL RELAY PANEL
BLOCK
CAPACITOR HARNESS
RELAY
845CH-095 CAB ELECTRICAL PANEL

6.9
FUSE AND
RELAY PANEL
RELAY
FUSE
RELAY
HARNESS
FUSE AND
RELAY MODULE
FUSE
845CH-094 REAR COMPARTMENT ELECTRICAL PANEL

6.10
XS2 CAB
TERMINAL MODULE
REAR PANEL
RAIL
SYSTEM FUSE
FIRE AND RELAY PANEL
SUPPRESSION
CONTROL PANEL
STEREO
CONTROL PANELS RADIO
PILOT SHUT-OFF LIMIT ANTENNA

SWITCH ON FRONT DOOR
MD3 COMPUTER
845CH-098 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION – CAB

6.11
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N
AA
Z O
Y
X
P
Q
V R
P
T S
Switch, Sensor And Electrical Component Locations

A Roof Pump O Fuel Shut Off Valve
B 24v Relay P Light
C Horn Q Fluid Level Sender
D Leveller Valve R Positive and Negative Cable
E Power Roof Manifold S Main Valve Sensor
F Pilot Supply Valve T Module
G Saw Valve U Oil Heater
H Filter Pressure Switch V Fluid Level Warning Switch
I Limit Switch W Temperature Sensor
J Starter X Fuse and Relay Panel
K Air Filter Sensor Y Vacuum Pump
L Alternator Z Fuel Shut Off Valve
M Sensor AA Solenoid Valve
N Motion Alarm
6.12
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM The ECM provides electronic information to the
MD3 computer via J1939 CAN BUS links. This
The MD3 computer control system is part of a
information is displayed on the MD3 computer
network of components. The system is made up of
display.
the following components:
NOTE: The MD3 computer control system is
• MD3 Computer and Display Module
software-based. This software may be updated
• XS2-A0 Module (Cab) after the machine is in service as a part of on-
going product improvement programs and
• XA2-A0 Expansion Module (Engine Frame)
service newsletters. The information contained
(Also referred to as XA2 #1 module)
in this manual is accurate at the time of printing.
• XA2-A1 Expansion Module (Engine Frame) Improvements to the machine and/or software
(Also referred to as XA2 #2 module) are on-going and may not be covered. In these
• Engine Electronic Control module (ECM) cases contact your Tigercat dealer for appropriate
information.
• Various controls, switches, sensors and valves
not shown
The MD3 computer is the main controller in
the system. The MD3 computer program is the
operating system for the computer display as
well as the control system for certain machine
functions.
MD3
COMPUTER ENGINE ENGINE
AND DISPLAY CAB XS2-A0 FRAME FRAME
MODULE MODULE XA2-A0 XA2-A1
MODULE MODULE
9 PIN ENGINE ENGINE ELECTRONIC

DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR
880-105 COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
6.13
XA2-A1
XA2-A0
MD3 COMPUTER AND

H845C-55 DISPLAY MODULE
H845C-85 XA2 ENGINE FRAME MODULES
XS2-A0
H845C-137 XS2-A0 CAB MODULE
6.14
MD3 COMPUTER AND DISPLAY MD3 COMPUTER AND DISPLAY
REPLACEMENT
1 2 3
MD3 COMPUTER AND

H845C-55 DISPLAY MODULE
1. Turn battery disconnect switch OFF.

MD3-BACK
REAR OF MD3 COMPUTER AND DISPLAY

A
The back of the MD3 Module consists of the
following. B
1. Tag with serial number and part number.

2. Connector C2 (VIN inputs, USB
communication and alarm output). D C B
3. Connector C1 (voltage supply, CAN
communication J1939 and expansion A
modules).
MD3 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT A Remove back cover fasteners (QTY 3)
B Remove mounting bracket fasteners (QTY 4)
MD3-WIREASSIGN C MD3 mounting bracket
D MD3 computer
2. Remove back cover from the MD3 computer.
6 7 6 7
3. Disconnect the wiring harness at the module
C1 and C2 connectors.
6
7
6
7
C2 C1
8
5
5
8
1 2 3 4
12 11 10 9
4
9
4. Remove the MD3 from the mounting bracket.

12 11 10
1 2 3
1 12 1 12
1 DIN-A / VIN-A 7 USB-D+ 1 -BAT 7 +RTC 5. Install module in reverse order as removed.
2 DIN-B / VIN-B 8 +VREF 2 CAN-A-L 8 RS232 DATA OUT
3
4
DIN-C / VIN-C
DIN-D / VIN-D
9
10
DIN-E / VIN-E
DIN-F / VIN-F
3
4
CAN-B-L
CAN-C-L/Diag
9
10
CAN-C-H/Diag
CAN-B-H NOTE: Refer to IQANRUN 2 – APPLICATION
5
6
-VREF
USB-D-
11
12
DIN-G / VIN-G
DOUT-A
5
6
RS232 DATA IN
Reserved
11
12
CAN-A-H
+BAT UPDATE in THIS SECTION for procedure to
update the application in an MD3 computer.
NOTE: Refer to the MD3 DISPLAY MODULE When replacing an MD3 computer the machine
SCHEMATIC in THIS SECTION or MACHINE serial number information will need to be reset.
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC for detailed pin and Refer to IQANRUN 2 – SYSTEM for more
wiring assignment. information regarding access and maintenance of
logs using IQANrun 2.
6.15
ACCESSORY RELAY
SHEET 1
RED
20 BATTERY POWER
SHEET 1
RED
351C
2A
RED
648
IQAN MD3
BLK G283 C1-1 -BAT VIN-A C2-1 GRN 443 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
N/U RS232 -VREF BLK

C1-5 DATA IN C2-5

620 ohm
N/U RS232 +VREF RED 612

C1-8 DATA OUT C2-8 N/U

3A
N/U 1-RED
2-WHT
USB
3-GRN PORT
4-BLK
N/U DRAIN
PANEL
HORN BLK
G50
56512BR0S8 MD3 DISPLAY MODULE SCHEMATIC

6.16
XS2 MODULE LED indicator showing different XS2 and XA2 modes
Status Flash
Normal operation (yellow)
B
Error Error Primary Flash (red) Secondary Flash (yellow)
A code Error category Error description
a
1:1 Output error
1:2 Input errora
1:3 Vref errora
2:1 Voltage High/Low errora
2:2 Low/High temperaturea
3:1 CAN error
3:2 Address error
4:1 Memory errorb
FE Fatal error
a. Error groups 1:n and 2:n are controlled by the master, see also on screen warnings.
b. FRAM memory error.
Xs2 Module Led Indicators

A Green, Power ON LED Internal diagnostics in the MD3 computer can
B Yellow/Red, Status LED be used to get more information about the XS2
module. The following values are monitored:
XS2 MODULE LED INDICATORS
• Internal temperature (°C)
If there is an error detected, the MD3 computer
will display a message. The XS2 module also • Power supply (V)
indicates error status through the red blinking LED. • Reference voltage (V)
This gives an immediate diagnosis as to the nature
of the error that has occurred. • CAN address voltage (V)
a. Green, Power ON LED XS2 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT
◦◦ LED with green light ON indicates supply

voltage is ON.
◦◦ LED OFF indicates supply voltage is OFF.
b. Yellow/Red, Status LED
42 29
◦◦ LED yellow flashing light indicates status 28
14
15
1
is correct. 1 ADDR-H 15 -BAT 29 -VREF
2 DOUT-G 16 DIN-I 30 DIN-J
LED flashing red light indicates error status as 3 DOUT-H 17 DIN-K 31 DIN-L
4 DOUT-I 18 DIN-M 32 DIN-N
follows: 5 DOUT-J 19 DIN-O 33 DIN-P
6 DOUT-K 20 DIN-Q 34 DIN-R
1. One red primary flash and one, two or three 7
8
DOUT-L
DOUT-A
21
22
DIN-S
DOUT-C
35
36
DIN-T
DOUT-E
secondary yellow flashes indicates an error 9
10
DOUT-B
VIN-A/DIN-A
23
24
DOUT-D
VIN-E/DIN-E
37
38
DOUT-F
VIN-G/DIN-G
controlled by the MD3 computer. 11
12
VIN-B/DIN-B
VIN-C/DIN-C
25
26
VIN-F/DIN-F
CAN2-H
39
40
VIN-H/DIN-H
CAN2-L
13 VIN-D/DIN-D 27 CAN-H 41 CAN-L
2. Two red primary flashes in a row and one or 14 ADDR-L 28 +BAT(+12V, +24V) 42 +VREF
two yellow secondary flashes indicates an

error controlled by the MD3 computer.
3. Three red primary flashes in a row and one The XS2 module is equipped with eight voltage
yellow secondary flash indicates the fault is inputs (VIN-A to VIN-H) which may be configured
related to the CAN-bus. as digital inputs (DIN-A to DIN-H). The function
4. Three red primary flashes in a row and two of these inputs is determined by the machine
yellow secondary flashes in a row indicates program.
the fault is related to the address. NOTE: Refer to ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
5. Four red primary flashes in a row and one in THIS SECTION for detailed pin and wiring
yellow secondary flash indicates a memory assignment.
error.
6. Continuous red primary flashing indicates a
fatal error.
6.17
XS2 MODULE
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 442 10 VIN A DOUT A 8 TAN 673 SPARE
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 256 11 VIN B DOUT B 9 TAN 609 IQAN SHUTDOWN CONTROL (SHEET 1)
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 253 12 VIN C DOUT C 22 -- N/U
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 445 13 VIN D DOUT D 23 TAN 175 A/C OFF RELAY (SHEET 6)
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 381 24 VIN E DOUT E 36 TAN 610 RED WARNING LIGHT (SHEET 10)
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 380 25 VIN F DOUT F 37 -- N/U
LEFT JS, SHEET 7 GRN 251 38 VIN G
ANTI STALL, SHEET 3 GRN 364 39 VIN H
TO JOYSTICKS, SHEET 7 RED 614 42 +VREF DOUT L 7 TAN 672 SPARE

BLK 615 29 -VREF DIN T 35 YEL 650 LEFT TRACK PEDAL PRESSURE SWITCH (SHEET 10)
DIN S 21 YEL 651 RIGHT TRACK PEDAL PRESSURE SWITCH (SHEET 10)
DOUT K 6 TAN 671 SPARE
DIN R 34 TAN 16B KEY, START SIGNAL (SHEET 1)
DIN Q 20 RED 354B KEY, "ON" SIGNAL (SHEET 1)
DOUT J 5 TAN 670 SPARE
DIN P 33 GRN 11C PILOT ON (SHEET 1)
DIN O 19 GRN 21 TRACK LOW (SHEET 3)
DOUT I 4 -- N/U
DIN N 32 TAN 254 FAN CLEAN (SHEET 6)
DIN M 18 TAN 384 FAN FULL ON (SHEET 6)
DOUT H 3 TAN 654 DEFROST RELAY (SHEET 6)
DIN L 31 GRN 617 DEFROST "ON" (SHEET 6)
DIN K 17 ORG 30A A/C "ON" (SHEET 6)
DOUT G 2 -- N/U
DIN J 30 GRN 35A SAW ON/PUMP 1 (SHEET 1)
DIN I 16 TAN 439 N/U
TO IQAN XA2 #1 SHHET 11 BLK 401 41 CAN-L
TO IQAN XA2 #1 SHEET 11 RED 400 27 CAN-H
TO IQAN MD3 SHEET 8 BLK 285 40 CAN-L
TO IQAN MD3 SHEET 8 RED 284 26 CAN-H
RUN RELAY 1
ADDRESS 0
SHEET 1
TAG 14
10A
RED +BAT
RED 240 28
02
BLK G240 15 -BAT
56512BR0S9 XS2-A0 CAB MODULE SCHEMATIC
6.18
XA2 MODULES LED indicator showing different XS2 and XA2 modes
Status Flash
Normal operation (yellow)
B
Error Error Primary Flash (red) Secondary Flash (yellow)
A code Error category Error description
a
1:1 Output error
1:2 Input errora
1:3 Vref errora
2:1 Voltage High/Low errora
2:2 Low/High temperaturea
3:1 CAN error
3:2 Address error
4:1 Memory errorb
FE Fatal error
a. Error groups 1:n and 2:n are controlled by the master, see also on screen warnings.
Xa2 Module Led Indicators

A Green, Power ON LED Internal diagnostics in the MD3 computer can
B Yellow/Red, Status LED be used to get more information about the XA2
module. The following values are monitored:
XA2 MODULE LED INDICATORS
If there is an error detected, the MD3 computer
will display a message. The XA2 module also • Power supply (V)
indicates error status through the red blinking LED. • Reference voltage (V)
This gives an immediate diagnosis as to the nature
of the error that has occurred. • CAN address voltage (V)
a. Green, Power ON LED XA2 MODULE WIRING PIN ASSIGNMENT
LED with green light ON indicates supply

voltage is ON
LED OFF indicates supply voltage is OFF.
b. Yellow/Red, Status LED 42
28
29
15
14 1
LED yellow flashing light indicates status 1 ADDR-H 15 -BAT 29 -VREF

is correct. 2
3
COUT-A/DOUT-G
COUT-B/DOUT-H
16
17
CRET-A+/DIN-I
CRET-B+/DIN-K
30
31
CRET-A-/DIN-J
CRET-B-/DIN-L
4 COUT-C/DOUT-I 18 CRET-C+/DIN-M 32 CRET-C-DIN-N
LED flashing red light indicates error status as 5 COUT-D/DOUT-J 19 CRET-D+/DIN-O 33 CRET-D-/DIN-P
6 COUT-E/DOUT-K 20 CRET-E+/DIN-Q 34 CRET-E-/DIN-R
follows: 7 COUT-F/DOUT-L 21 CRET-F+/DIN-S 35 CRET-F-/DIN-T
8 DOUT-A 22 DOUT-C 36 DOUT-E
1. One red primary flash and one, two or three 9
10
DOUT-B
VIN-A/DIN-A
23
24
DOUT-D
VIN-E/DIN-E/FIN-A
37
38
DOUT-F
VIN-G/DIN-G/FIN-B
secondary yellow flashes indicates an error 11 VIN-B/DIN-B 25
DFIN-A+
VIN-F/DIN-F/DFIN-A- 39
DFIN-B+
VIN-H/DIN-H/DFIN-B-
controlled by the MD3 computer. 12
13
VIN-C/DIN-C
VIN-D/DIN-D
26
27
CAN2-H
CAN-H
40
41
CAN2-L
CAN-L
14 ADDR-L 28 +BAT(+12V, +24V) 42 +VREF
2. Two red primary flashes in a row and one or
two yellow secondary flashes indicates an XA2-WIREASSIGN
error controlled by the MD3 computer.

The XA2 module is equipped with eight voltage
3. Three red primary flashes in a row and one inputs (VIN-A to VIN-H) which may be configured
yellow secondary flash indicates the fault is as digital inputs (DIN), frequency inputs (FIN)
related to the CAN-bus. or directional frequency inputs (DFIN). The
4. Three red primary flashes in a row and two XA2 module is also equipped with six double
yellow secondary flashes in a row indicates proportional outputs (COUT-A to COUT-F) which
the fault is related to the address. may be configured as digital outputs (DOUT) and
digital inputs (DIN). See wiring pin assignment
5. Four red primary flashes in a row and one diagram above for details. The function of these
yellow secondary flash indicates a memory inputs are determined by the machine program.
error.
NOTE: Refer to ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC in
6. Continuous red primary flashing indicates a THIS SECTION 6 for detailed pin and wiring
fatal error. assignment.
6.19
XA2 #1 MODULE
HYDRAULIC TEMPERATURE (SHEET 10) YEL 389 10 VIN A DOUT A 8 TAN 402 FAN REVERSE (SHEET 6)
N/U YEL 657 11 VIN B DOUT B 9 TAN 622 SAW/PUMP1 (SHEET 12,15)
FUEL LEVEL (SHEET 10) YEL 49 12 VIN C DOUT C 22 701 STARTER / LOCKOUT RELAY (SHEET 1)
LS SENSOR (SHEET 10) YEL 543 13 VIN D DOUT D 23 GRN 739 N/U
ROOF SENSOR (SHEET 10) YEL 478 24 VIN E DOUT E 36 820 N/U
FILTER BYPASS (SHEET 10) YEL 67 25 VIN F DOUT F 37 821 N/U
HYD LOW LEVEL (SHEET 10) YEL 52 38 VIN G
HYD. EXTREMLY LOW LEVEL (SHEET 10) YEL 53 39 VIN H
TO SHEET 10 RED 620 42 +VREF COUT F 7 TAN 586 N/U

TO SHEET 10 BLK 621 29 -VREF CRET F- 35 817 N/U
CRET F+ 21 GRN 585 N/U
COUT E 6 TAN 440
CRET E- 34 -- N/U FAN SPEED, (SHEET 4)
CRET E+ 20 GRN 392
COUT D 5 TAN 390
CRET D- 33 -- N/U ANTI STALL (SHEET 12)
CRET D+ 19 GRN 391
COUT C 4 TAN 629 N/U
CRET C- 32 GRN 395 N/U
CRET C+ 18 GRN 394 N/U
COUT B 3 TAN 628 N/U
CRET B- 31 GRN 397 N/U
CRET B+ 17 GRN 396 N/U
ACCESSORY RELAY
SHEET 1 COUT A 2 TAN 627 N/U
CRET A- 30 GRN 263 N/U
CRET A+ 16 GRN 262 N/U
TO IQAN XS2, SHEET 9 BLK 401 40 CAN-L
TO IQAN XS2, SHEET 9 RED 400 26 CAN-H
RED
20 1
ADDRESS 0
TAG 14
15A
RED 386 28 +BAT
BLK G386 15 -BAT
56512BR0S11 XA2-A0 ENGINE FRAME MODULE SCHEMATIC

6.20

TO SHEET 10 RED 631 42 +VREF D OUT 7 822 N/U

TO SHEET 10 BLK 632 29 -VREF D IN 35 TAN 102 ENGINE RPM UP (SHEET 5)
CRET C- 32 - N/U
CRET B- 31 GRN 274 LEVEL, LEFT CYLINDER - (SHEET 12)
CRET B+ 17 GRN 275 LEVEL, LEFT CYLINDER + (SHEET 12)

CRET A- 30 GRN 277 LEVEL, RIGHT CYLINDER - (SHEET 12)
CRET A+ 16 GRN 278 LEVEL, RIGHT CYLINDER + (SHEET 12)
ACCESSORY RELAY
SHEET 1 N/U 40 CAN-L
N/U 26 CAN-H
RED
20 1
ADDRESS 1T
TAG 14
15A
RED 450 28 +BAT
BLK G450 15 -BAT
56512BR0S13 XA2-A1 ENGINE FRAME MODULE SCHEMATIC
6.21
ID–TAG
ADDRESSING
Each module has a specific address, enabling the
MD3 computer to communicate with it through the
CAN-bus. Practically, the system distinguishes
between different modules through firstly verifying
the module type and then, secondly, through the
modules having a unique addresses
Example
If a system has an XS2 module with address 0, the
system will denote this one as XS2-A0, The letter ADDR-L, POS. 14 ADDR-H, POS. 1
“A” refers to CAN-bus A.
In order to assign any XS2 module a unique CAN-
ID-TAG
address, an Id-Tag will have to be connected to
the positions ADDR-H and ADDR-L. CONNECTING ID-TAG (XS2 OR XA2)
Terminating
To eliminate interference in communication,
through the CAN-bus, the CAN-bus must be
terminated. Because the MD3 computer is located
at the beginning of the bus, it is provided with an
internal termination. If an XA2 module is located at
the end of the CAN-bus then use an Id-tag having
a combined address and terminating function.
This is denoted with a 'T' for terminating, after the
appropriate address such as; 0T, 1T or 2T
SELECTING APPROPRIATE ID-TAG
• Check the address number of the module. ASSEMBLING ID-TAG (XS2 OR XA2)
• If the module is located at the end of the CAN-
bus then select the appropriate Id-Tag denoted
with a “T”.
ASSEMBLING OF THE ID–TAG
MODULE ID – TAG RESISTANCE (Ω)

MD3 No tag –
XS2–A0 0 287
XA2–A0 0 287
XA2–A1 1T 590
The Id-Tag is placed in the connector in order

to address/terminate the module. The Id-Tag is
mounted under the connector casing. Bend the Id-
Tag’s cables towards the opposite side, where the
other cables enter the connector.
6.22
MD3
COMPUTER
COLOUR
DISPLAY
TRACK SPEED
CONTROL
ARROW
(SCROLL) UP
OK (ENTER)
ARROW (SCROLL)
DOWN
F1 F2 F3 F4 ESC (BACK) MENU
845C-092 MD3 COMPUTER, ELECTRONIC CONTROL AND MAIN DISPLAY
MD3 COMPUTER, ELECTRONIC On other screen pages displayed the up and down
CONTROL & MAIN DISPLAY arrow navigation buttons buttons are used
to scroll through selections on a menu page. The
The MD3 computer and display is the operator
buttons are configured by program software to
interface with the electronic control system. The
bring up a display page, bring up an adjustment
MD3 computer is the central unit in the control
group or act as a virtual input.
system which works as both a master controller
and a display unit. It has a 3.5" backlit colour • OK button .
graphic transflective display for reading system Pushing this button equals ‘enter’ and saves
information. the value or confirms the selection you have
The front of the MD3 display consists of a control made.
panel with a display and nine buttons. The buttons • Main Menu button .
are arranged on the bottom and right side of the
display. Always brings up the Main Menu page. It is
not programmable.
• F1 through F4 function buttons, , ,
, . • Esc or BACK button .
Programmed buttons that are configured by Returns you to the previous display page. May
program software to bring up a display page, be configured by program software to bring up
bring up an adjustment group or act as an a display page, bring up an adjustment group
input. or act as a virtual input.
• Up and down arrow buttons .

On this Main Display page the up and down
arrow buttons are used to control track drive
speed, which limits maximum pressure of pilot
oil to the track pedals.
Pressing to returns the system to full
speed.
6.23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24
23
10
22
11
21
20
19
12
13
14 15 16 17 18
845C-093 MAIN DISPLAY
MD3 COMPUTER MAIN DISPLAY 13. ENGINE MENU - Press F1 to select

1. PILOT RESET ON/OFF 14. ADJUSTMENT MENU - Press F2 to select
2. ENGINE ANTI-STALL ON/OFF 15. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
3. TRACK DRIVE LOW SPEED 16. INFORMATION MENU - Press F3 to select
4. ENGINE HOOD/DOOR OPEN 17. FUEL LEVEL GAUGE & ICON
5. COOLING FAN MODE - (AUTO shown) 18. ALARM INDICATORS - Press F4 to select
6. HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER BYPASS 19. TRACK CREEP SPEED ICON
7. HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL 20. TRACK DRIVE SPEED
8. ENGINE AIR INTAKE PRESSURE (Engine Air 21. OIL GRADE INDICATOR
Intake Filter Restricted) 22. TRACK FAST SPEED ICON
9. WATER IN FUEL 23. HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
10. SAW MOTOR PRESSURE 24. TIME AND DATE
11. SAW ATTACHMENT ICON
12. ENGINE TACHOMETER rpm
6.24
ENGINE MENU The engine functions on display are as follows:
Charge Air Temperature °C or °F
Engine Coolant Temperature °C or °F
Engine Speed rpm
Turbocharger Boost Pressure bar or psi
Engine Oil Pressure psi or bar
Engine Load %
Voltage V
Fuel Rate L/h or gph
Press the F1 button to toggle between

From the main menu press the F1 button to select metric or imperial units of measure.
the engine display. Press the back button to return to the
main display.
When selected the engine menu icon is on display

and the engine functions will also be displayed.
6.25
ENGINE FUNCTIONS ENGINE SPEED RPM
Press the back button to return to the Main
Display.
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
(°C OR °F)
This display indicates the charge air cooler
temperature reading.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

(°C OR °F)
This display indicates the current engine coolant
temperature. This display indicates engine speed in rpm.
If temperature rises above 104°C (219°F), alarm NOTE: Engine speed can also be monitored using
will sound, check the following: the engine tachometer gauge shown on the Main
Display and the one on the Engine Menu display.
Plugged debris screens
Refer to THROTTLE SWITCH in THIS SECTION.
Plugged radiator.
DO NOT continue to operate machine TURBOCHARGER BOOST PRESSURE
(BAR OR PSI)
Refer to the COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
This display indicates air intake manifold boost
CRITICAL – ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES -
pressure in bar. This reading is an absolute value
CRITICAL in THIS SECTION for more information.
and includes atmospheric pressure.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE (BAR OR PSI)
This display indicates engine oil pressure.
If oil pressure falls too low, an alarm will sound.
NORMAL
Refer to the COMPUTER – MESSAGES -
OPERATION CRITICAL – ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES -
(WHITE ICON)
CRITICAL in THIS SECTION for more information.
ENGINE LOAD % %
Refer to CLEANING A/C CONDENSER, OIL
The display shows the current load on the engine
COOLER, RADIATOR AND CHARGE AIR
in percentage.
COOLER in THIS SECTION.
NOTE: Coolant temperature can also be BATTERY VOLTAGE (VOLTS)
monitored using the engine coolant temperature This display indicates battery voltage levels.
gauge shown on the Main Display. Normal operating range for the electrical system
is between 27 and 28 volts when the engine is
running.
If engine voltage goes outside the normal range,
an alarm will sound. Refer to COMPUTER -
MESSAGES in THIS SECTION.
OVERHEAT A reading in excess of 30 volts indicates a possible
(RED ICON)
faulty voltage regulator.
A reading less than 22 volts indicates a possible
faulty battery or alternator.
In the event of an engine coolant overheat the
engine coolant temperature icon will illuminate FUEL RATE (L/H OR GPH)
(red) on the main gauge display in addition to the This display indicates the current, instantaneous,
alarm. rate of fuel consumption.
6.26
IMPORTANT
24 VOLT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel level gauge is shown on the Main Display.
ICON FLASHES
YELLOW WHEN
FUEL LEVEL IS
LOW
The fuel level icon will flash yellow when the fuel
level falls below 10% of full.
Refer to FUEL TANK in SECTION 3 of THIS
MANUAL for tank capacities.
ICON ILLUMINATES
YELLOW WHEN
WATER IN FUEL IS
DETECTED
The water in fuel icon illuminates yellow when

water in fuel is detected by the engine computer
system.
Refer to engine MANUFACTURER'S MANUAL for
specific information regarding the engine.
6.27
WARMUP MODE ADJUSTMENT MENU
As the hydraulic oil temperature increases the From the Main Display press the F2 button to
system will automatically allow the engine rpm go to the ADJUSTMENT MENU.
to increase and the MD3 displays an Information
dialogue box that shows the progress of the
Warmup Mode in percentage outstanding. This
dialogue box closes when hydraulic oil has
reached operating temperature.
The warmup mode operates automatically on cold
starts within a hydraulic oil temperature range. The
temperature range will vary based on computer
control system hydraulic oil settings. This feature
functions mainly with straight weight hydraulic oil.
For proper operation the computer control system
hydraulic oil settings should match the type of
hydraulic oil in use.
IMPORTANT!
Allow a cold engine to warm up at LOW IDLE for
at least five minutes before applying any load.
Check all measured values on the MD3 display The adjustment menu screen will be displayed.
terminal often during the warmup period. The adjustment menu icon is on display and all
the adjustment selections are displayed. The
adjustment selections are as follows:
• Fan Service Mode - press F1
• Oil Grade Adjustments - press F2
• Auto Accumulation Mode Status - press
F3
• Press the back button to return to the Main

Display.
6.28
COOLING FAN SERVICE MODE OIL GRADE SELECTION
Press the F1 button to select FAN SERVICE Press F2 button to select OIL GRADE Menu from
MODE Menu from the ADJUSTMENT MENU. The the ADJUSTMENT MENU.
fan service mode menu appears. Two choices are
The oil grade menu will appear.
given, ON or OFF. Press the up or down arrow
buttons to scroll to the desired selection and press • ISO22
the OK button to set the selection. • ISO32
This mode is for when a mechanic has to be in • MULTI
the engine compartment. This mode will run the
fan in the clean direction and will adjust the speed • ISO46
according to the requirements of the cooling • ISO68
system so the mechanic doesn’t get blasted with
hot air. The A/C will be switched off as well. Press the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to the
desired oil grade and press OK when complete.
This information is used by the machine
program to adapt hydraulic oil temperature
messages for the operating range of each
Hydraulic Oil Grade.
Hydraulic oil grade information is shown
on the Main Display below the hydraulic oil
temperature gauge.
Refer to APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS in
SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for hydraulic oil
operating range information.
Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES
- CRITICAL – HYDRAULIC OIL
TEMPERATURE HIGH in THIS SECTION
for more information about the hydraulic oil
temperature message.
Display.
6.29
AUTO ACCUMULATION MODE

STATUS
Press the F3 button to select the accumulator

arms AUTO ACCUMULATION STATUS Menu from
the ADJUSTMENT MENU.
The AUTO ACCUMULATION STATUS menu
appears. Three choices are given, NORMAL,
AUTO ACCUMULATE or SIMULTANEOUS. Refer
to ACCUMULATION MODE FEATURE in THIS
SECTION. Press the up or down arrow buttons to
scroll to the desired selection and press the OK
button to set the selection.
Press the Back button to return to the
adjustment menu. Press the Back button again to
return to the main menu.
6.30
INFORMATION MODE SELECTION
The information menu displays the following

information:
Press the F3 button to access the information
menu. • Main Hydraulic Pump Load Sense Pressure
(bar or psi)
• Engine Hours (h)
• Machine Hours (h)
• Hydraulic Oil Temperature (°C or °F)
• Hydraulic Oil Level %
• Total Fuel Used (L or US gal)
• Trip Fuel Functions (since last reset)
▪▪ Trip Fuel Used (L or US gal)
▪▪ Trip Time (h)
▪▪ Trip Average Fuel Rate (L/h or US gph
Press the F1 button to toggle between metric
or imperial units of measure.
Press the F2 button to reset trip fuel used, trip
time and trip average fuel rate functions.

Display.
6.31
INFORMATION FUNCTIONS NOTE: Hydraulic oil temperature can also be
monitored using the hydraulic oil temperature
MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMP LOAD SENSE gauge shown on the main menu. In addition the
PRESSURE (BAR OR PSI) color of the hydraulic oil temperature icon is an
This display indicates the main pump load sense indicator of hydraulic oil temperature state (cool,
pressure reading. normal, warm or overheat) for the type of hydraulic
oil in use.
ENGINE HOURS (h)
This display indicates the total number of hours The alarm must not be used to monitor the
the engine has run. hydraulic oil. The operator must use the hydraulic
oil temperature gauge on the main menu of the
MACHINE HOURS (h) computer display, together with the operating
This display indicates the total number of hours range chart in SECTION 3 to prevent damage to
the machine has run. the hydraulic system.
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE Hydraulic oil grade information is shown on the
(°C OR °F) main menu below the hydraulic oil temperature
This display indicates the current hydraulic oil gauge.
temperature registered in the main hydraulic tank. Operating outside the recommended operating
If the temperature rises above the recommended range will shorten hydraulic component life.
operating range for the type of hydraulic oil in Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU –
use, alarm will sound, reduce load on engine and HYDRAULIC OIL GRADE in THIS SECTION for
activate the cooling system CLEAN function using hydraulic oil grade selection settings information.
the fan switch. If the temperature does not drop
quickly after the clean cycle, stop engine and
check the following:
• Plugged oil cooler
Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES - CRITICAL
• Malfunction in a hydraulic circuit – HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH in
• Malfunction of hydraulic fan drive system THIS SECTION for more information about the
hydraulic oil temperature message.
• Malfunction of engine Anti-Stall system
TOTAL FUEL USED (L OR US GAL)
• Low hydraulic oil level in tank
This display indicates the total fuel used during the
• Correct Hydraulic Oil Grade Selection life of the machine.
• If hydraulic oil temperature rises above the TRIP FUEL FUNCTIONS (SINCE LAST
recommended operating range DO NOT RESET)
continue to operate the machine.
• Trip Fuel Used (L or US gal)
This display indicates the total fuel used since
last reset.
• Trip Time (h)
This display indicates the time since last reset.
COOL (BLUE) NORMAL (WHITE) • Trip Average Fuel Rate (L/h or US gph)
This display indicates the average fuel
consumption rate for the machine since last
reset.
OVERHEAT (RED)
WARM (YELLOW) ALARM
6.32
MAIN MENU ADJUST MENU
Press the menu button to go to the main From the Main Menu page press the F1 button to
menu. access the Adjust menu.
The Main Menu page displays the following This menu is an alternate method of accessing the
selections: adjustment menu to make machine adjustments.
• Adjust – Select F1 Refer to ADJUSTMENT MENU earlier in this
section for details.
• Measure – Select F2
The Main menu appears and the following menu
• Preferences – Select F3 items can be selected.
• Info – Select F4 • Machine Parameters
• Hydraulics
• Leveling
• AUTO-ACCUMULATE
Use the up or down arrow buttons to select the
Machine Parameters menu item. Press OK to
confirm the selection.
6.33
MACHINE PARAMETERS TIMED PURGE INTERVAL
TIMED PURGE INTERVAL menu item. Press OK
to confirm the selection.
In the Machine Parameters menu the following

items can be selected:
• Oil Grade
Range can be adjusted between 15 to 240
• Auto Accum Status minutes.
• Fan Service Mode This parameter adjusts the frequency of the
• Timed Purge Interval auto clean cycle. Refer to FAN SWITCH in THIS
SECTION for more information.
• Tree Counter State
TREE COUNTER STATE
• TRACK LOW LOGIC
To track the amount of trees harvested,
OIL GRADE the position of either the clamp arms or the
The hydraulic oil grade selection can also be accumulating arms can be set to count in either
MADE from this menu. Refer to COMPUTER – the OPEN or CLOSE position.
ADJUSTMENT MENU – OIL GRADE SELECTION • CLAMP CLOSE
in THIS SECTION. Refer to ACCUMULATION
MODE FEATURE in THIS SECTION. • CLAMP OPEN
AUTO- ACCUM STATUS • ACCUMULATOR CLOSE

This menu allows the choice of three accumulation • ACCUMULATOR OPEN
modes:
• NORMAL
• AUTO-ACCUMULATE
• SIMULTANEOUS
FAN SERVICE MODE
ON or OFF
Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU
– COOLING FAN SERVICE MODE and FAN
SWITCH in THIS SECTION.
6.34
TRACK LOW LOGIC Use the back button to return to the Adjust
Use the up or down arrow buttons to select the Menu.
TRACK LOW LOGIC menu item. Press OK to

Hydraulics menu item. Press OK to confirm the
selection.
This option allows the choice between

INDEPENDENT and BOTH REQUIRED options
with regards to use of the foot pedals in the cab.
The independent option is recommended for travel
on steep slopes providing more hydraulic braking
power which provide better steering capability.
The both required option is recommended
for travelling on level ground providing better
feel/ control of the vehicle.
After using the up or down arrow buttons to select
the option you require press the OK button to
confirm the selection and return to the Machine
Parameters menu.
6.35
HYDRAULICS LEVELING
In the Hydraulics Menu the following Current In the Leveling menu the following functions can
Output (mA) adjustment items can be selected: be adjusted depending on working conditions:
NOTE: These functions in the Hydraulics menu • Leveler Stop Ramp
will vary depending on the attachment and
• Leveler Start Ramp
machine designation.
• Forward Leveling Speed
• Accumulator Open/Close - COUT
• Rear Leveling Speed
• Clamp Open/Close - COUT
• Right Level Cylinder
• Wrist/ROT/Pump2/LVL R(LX) - COUT
• Left Level Cylinder
• Wrist (860/870)
Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to the
• Teles/Grapple/LVL L (LX)
desired selection and the OK button to confirm the
• Fan Speed - COUT - LOCKED selection.
• Pump Horsepower Limiter - COUT
• Track Speed Control - COUT
• Right Level Cylinder - COUT
• Left Level Cylinder - COUT
• Track Brake Release Delay Off - COUT
desired selection and the OK button to set the
selection.
Press the back button to return to the Adjust
menu. Select the Leveling option and press OK to
6.36
AUTO-ACCUMULATE
In the AUTO-ACCUMULATE menu the following

functions can be adjusted as required:
• Accumulator Close Timeout
• Clamp Open Start - Locked
• Clamp Open Duration - Locked
• Accumulator Close Delay
desired selection and the OK button to set the
selection.
Press the back button to return to the adjust
menu. Select the AUTO-ACCUMULATE option
and press OK to confirm the selection.
6.37
ELECTRONIC SETTINGS • Start Slope
DESCRIPTION This is the amount of time in ms that it takes
Adjustments to the attachment control system for the current to get from the Min Current
through the ADJUST MENU of the MD3 value to the Max Current when turning on a
computer control system electronically adjust the function. A higher setting will cause a delay in
performance of the attachment to suit operating the time that it takes the function to reach top
conditions. speed.
Refer to COMPUTER – (ADJUSTMENT) MENU NOTE: If the ms setting is set to 0ms then the
OPERATION in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL. min current setting is negated as the function
will start at max current as soon as it is turned
These settings control the operation of the
on.
electro-hydraulic spool actuators which control
the cylinder tracking and operating speeds by • Stop Slope
regulating the flow of oil from the attachment This is the amount of time in ms that it takes
control valve to the attachment cylinders. for the current to get from the Max Current to
Three types of adjustments can be made to the the Min current when turning off a function. A
attachment control system: higher setting will cause a delay in the time
that it takes for the function to come to a stop
• WRIST – CURRENT OUT
from top speed.
Adjustments to fine tune the operating speed
NOTE: If the ms setting is set at 0 ms then the
and start/stop ramps for the wrist clockwise
min current setting is negated and the function
and counterclockwise rotation functions.
would stop as soon as it is turned off. Below is
• CLAMP ARM – PWM OUT a typical graph showing the four settings.
and start/stop ramps for the clamp arm open
and close functions.
• ACCUMULATING ARM – PWM OUT
and start/stop ramps for the accumulating arm
open and close functions.
Within the three groups (Wrist, Clamp and
Accumulator) that can be adjusted there are four
adjustments that can be made through the MD3 to
customize the operation of each function. The four
adjustments are:
• Min Current
This is the minimum amount of current that
causes the function to just begin to creep.
NOTE: An inaccurate adjustment of the Min
Current renders the start and stop ramps
inaccurate.
• Max Current
This is the current that controls the maximum
speed of the function. A higher setting will
cause the function to move faster.
6.38
CLAMP EXAMPLE (DEFAULT SETTINGS) CLAMP EXAMPLE (SLOPE SETTINGS
Below is a screen shot of the Clamp settings ADJUSTED)
showing the following defaults: Below is a screen shot of the Clamp settings
• Min mA = 300 shown after an adjustment has been made to the
Start and Stop Slopes.
• Max mA = 750
• Min mA = 300
• Start Slope = 0 ms
• Max mA = 750
• Stop Slope = 0 ms
• Start Slope = 500 ms
• Stop Slope = 500 ms
NOTE: The graph reflects the default settings and

as the Start and Stop Slopes are set to 0 ms there
is no ramp up or down showing the clamp will
travel immediately at max. speed once the button
is activated.
NOTE: The graph reflects the adjustments made
to the start and stop slopes. This will affect the
clamp operation in three ways. The overall time
it takes for the clamp to open or close will be
longer. The initial movement of the clamp will be
slower when the button is activated and the final
movement of the clamp will also be slower when
the button is deactivated.
6.39
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE: WRIST ADJUSTMENT
chart in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for specific
values.
For best results ensure hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature before doing any adjustments.
In addition, the function(s) being adjusted
should be operated at a rate similar to normal
operation to ensure the coil is at a typical
operating temperature. Due to the nature of the
electrical components some signals will vary
with temperature and should always be adjusted
at normal operating temperature to improve the
accuracy of adjustments for operating conditions
and operator preference.
2. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run Press the menu button to go to the main
position. menu.

start-up
.
6. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
system.
Press F1 to select the Adjust Menu
6.40
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to Push the F3 button to access the CCW
Hydraulics and push OK. (Counterclockwise) adjust section and press OK.
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to NOTE: When in the CCW Min Adjust menu only
Wrist/ ROT/Pump2/LVL R(LX) and push OK. the Min current will be applied to the wrist when
the function is activated.
Activate and hold the CCW function on the joystick
and at the same time using the up or down arrow
buttons adjust the CCW Wrist Min setting so the
wrist just starts to creep.
inaccurate.
Once the setting has been adjusted press OK.
6.41
NOTE: When in the CCW Max Adjust menu only Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust
the Max current will be applied to the wrist when the CCW Wrist Stop setting. Adjustment of
the function is activated. this setting (along with the CCW Min setting)
Activate and hold the CCW function on the joystick will determine how the wrist stops in the CCW
and at the same time using the up or down arrow direction. Increasing this setting will result in a less
buttons adjust the CCW Wrist Max setting. It may aggressive stop while decreasing the setting will
be necessary to switch between the Wrist CCW result in a more aggressive stop. Once the setting
and CW on the joystick to set this adjustment. has been adjusted press OK. The CCW wrist
Adjustment of this setting will determine the speed adjustment is now complete.
of the Wrist in the CCW direction. Increasing this
setting will speed the wrist up while decreasing
the setting will slow it down. Once the setting has
been adjusted press OK. Refer to SECTION 18 for
information on setting wrist speeds.
Press the F4 button to access the CW (Clockwise)

adjust section and press OK twice.
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the

CCW Wrist Start setting. Adjustment of this
setting (along with the CCW Min setting) will
determine how the Wrist will start in the CCW
direction. Increasing this setting will result in a less
aggressive start while decreasing the setting will
result in a more aggressive start. Once the setting
has been adjusted press OK.
6.42
Adjustment of this setting will determine the speed
of the Wrist in the CW direction. Increasing this
been adjusted press OK.
NOTE: When in the CW Min Adjust menu only the

Min current will be applied to the wrist when the
function is activated.
Activate and hold the CW function on the joystick
buttons adjust the CW Wrist Min setting so the Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the
wrist just starts to creep. CW Wrist Start setting. Adjustment of this setting
will determine how the Wrist will start in the CW
inaccurate.
Once the setting has been adjusted press OK. has been adjusted press OK.
NOTE: When in the CW Max Adjust menu only the Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the
Max current will be applied to the wrist when the CW Wrist Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting
function is activated. (along with the CW Min setting) will determine how
Activate and hold the CW function on the joystick the wrist stops in the CW direction. Increasing
and at the same time using the up or down arrow this setting will result in a less aggressive stop
buttons adjust the CW Wrist Max setting. It may while decreasing the setting will result in a more
be necessary to switch between the Wrist CW and aggressive stop. Once the setting has been
CCW on the joystick to set this adjustment. adjusted press OK. The CW wrist adjustment is
now complete.
6.43
WRIST DEFAULT SETTINGS If during the above adjustment procedure the
factory default settings are required press the F2
Reset button and then select Yes in the pop up
window by pushing F2 again. This will reset the
setting to the factory default.
HYDRAULICS ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS REFERENCE CHART

Default
Adjustments Range (or Choice) Units
Settings
ACCUMULATOR ARMS -OPEN / +CLOSE
-Min current 0 to 750 mA 300
-Max current 0 to 750 mA 700
-Start slope 0 to 1000 ms 0
-Stop slope 0 to 1000 ms 0
+Min current 0 to 750 mA 300
+Max current 0 to 750 mA 700
+Start slope 0 to 1000 ms 0
+Stop slope 0 to 1000 ms 0
CLAMP ARMS -OPEN / +CLOSE
WRIST -CW / +CCW
LEVELER ADJUSTMENT
Leveler Stop Ramp 0 to 2000 mA 350
Leveler Start Ramp 0 to 2000 mA 350
Forward Leveling Speed 0 to 100 % 100
Backward Leveling Speed 0 to 100 % 100
LEFT LEVEL CYLINDER -RETRACT / +EXTEND
RIGHT LEVEL CYLINDER -RETRACT / +EXTEND
TRACK BRAKE RELEASE DELAY OFF
Range 0 to 1000 ms 500
6.44
CLAMP ADJUSTMENT
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to

Press the menu button to go to the main Hydraulics and push OK.
menu.

Press F1 to select the Adjust Menu Clamp Open/Close and push OK.
6.45
Push the F3 button to access the Clamp + (Close) NOTE: When in the Clamp + Max Adjust menu
adjust section and press OK. only the Max current will be applied to the clamp
when the function is activated.
Activate and hold the Clamp Close function on the
joystick and at the same time using the up or down
arrow buttons adjust the Clamp + Max setting.
It may be necessary to switch between Clamp
close and Clamp open on the joystick to set this
adjustment.
Adjustment of this setting will determine the
speed of the Clamp when closing. Increasing this
setting will speed the clamp up while decreasing
been adjusted press OK. Refer to SECTION 18 for
information on setting clamp open/close speeds.
NOTE: When in the Clamp + Min Adjust menu

only the Min current will be applied to the clamp
arrow buttons adjust the Clamp + Min setting so
the Clamp just starts to creep.
inaccurate.
Clamp + Start setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Clamp + Min setting) will determine
how the clamp will begin to close. Increasing
this setting will result in a less aggressive start
while decreasing the setting will result in a more
aggressive start. Once the setting has been
adjusted press OK.
6.46
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the NOTE: When in the Clamp - Min Adjust menu only
Clamp + Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting the Min current will be applied to the clamp when
(along with the Clamp + Min setting) will determine the function is activated.
how the clamp stops when the function is
Activate and hold the Clamp Open function on the
deactivated. Increasing this setting will result in a
less aggressive stop while decreasing the setting
arrow buttons adjust the Clamp - Min setting so
will result in a more aggressive stop. Once the
the Clamp just starts to creep.
setting has been adjusted press OK. The Clamp +
Close adjustment is now complete. NOTE: An inaccurate adjustment of the Min
inaccurate.
Press the F4 button to access the Clamp - (Open)

NOTE: When in the Clamp - Max Adjust menu

only the Max current will be applied to the clamp
arrow buttons adjust the Clamp - Max setting.
open and Clamp close on the joystick to set this
adjustment.
6.47
Adjustment of this setting will determine the CLAMP DEFAULT SETTINGS
speed of the Clamp when opening. Increasing this
If during the above adjustment procedure the

Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the setting to the factory default.
Clamp - Start setting. Adjustment of this setting
will determine how the clamp will begin to
open. Increasing this setting will result in a less

Clamp - Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Clamp - Min setting) will determine
deactivated.
Increasing this setting will result in a less
aggressive stop while decreasing the setting will
result in a more aggressive stop. Once the setting
has been adjusted press OK. The Clamp - Open
adjustment is now complete.
6.48
ACCUMULATOR ADJUSTMENT

Hydraulics and push OK.
Press the menu button to go to the main
menu.

Accum Open/Close and push OK.
6.49
Push the F3 button to access the Accum + (Close) NOTE: When in the Accum + Max Adjust menu
adjust section and press OK. only the Max current will be applied to the
accumulator when the function is activated.
Activate and hold the Accumulator Close function
on the joystick and at the same time using the up
or down arrow buttons adjust the Accum + Max
setting. It may be necessary to switch between
Accumulator close and Accumulator open on the
joystick to set this adjustment.
of the accumulator when closing. Increasing
this setting will speed the accumulator up while
decreasing the setting will slow it down. Once the
setting has been adjusted press OK.
NOTE: When in the Accum + Min Adjust menu

only the Min current will be applied to the
or down arrow buttons adjust the Accum + Min
setting so the accumulator just starts to creep.
inaccurate.
Accum + Start setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Accum + Min setting) will determine
how the accumulator will begin to close. Increasing
adjusted press OK.
6.50
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the NOTE: When in the Accum - Min Adjust menu only
Accum + Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting the Min current will be applied to the accumulator
(along with the Accum + Min setting) will determine when the function is activated.
how the accumulator stops when the function
Activate and hold the Accumulator Open function
is deactivated. Increasing this setting will result
on the joystick and at the same time using the
in a less aggressive stop while decreasing the
up or down arrow buttons adjust the Accum - Min
setting will result in a more aggressive stop. Once
setting so the accumulator just starts to creep.
the setting has been adjusted press OK. The
Accumulator + Close adjustment is now complete. NOTE: An inaccurate adjustment of the Min
inaccurate.
Press the F4 button to access the Accum - (Open)

NOTE: When in the Accum - Max Adjust menu

only the Max current will be applied to the
or down arrow buttons adjust the Accum - Max
6.51
Adjustment of this setting will determine the speed ACCUMULATOR DEFAULT SETTINGS

Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the setting to the factory default.
Accum - Start setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Accum - Min setting ) will determine
how the accumulator will begin to open. Increasing
WARNING
while decreasing the setting will result in a more Using aggressive settings will cause added
aggressive start. Once the setting has been wear and stress to boom components
adjusted press OK.

Accum - Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Accum - Min setting) will determine
Accumulator - Open adjustment is now complete.
6.52
LEVELER ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS START RAMP
These settings (defined below) fine tune the This is the amount of time in ms that it takes for
operating speeds, start/stop ramps and cylinder the current to get from the Min Current value to the
tracking for the leveler functions. Max Current when turning on a function. A higher
setting will cause a delay in the time that it takes
Min = MINIMUM CURRENT (mA)
the function to reach top speed. Note that if the ms
setting is set to 0ms then the min current setting is
A = Current range min current
Current [mA]
negated as the function will start at max current as
soon as it is turned on.
STOP RAMP
This is the amount of time in ms that it takes for
Min current the current to get from the Max Current to the Min
A current when turning off a function. A higher setting
will cause a delay in the time that it takes for the
Lever
position function to come to a stop from top speed. Note
that if the ms setting is set at 0ms then the min
current setting is negated and the function would
Minimum current settings control function start stop as soon as it is turned off.
speed. Coils on hydraulic valves require a certain Below is a typical graph showing the four settings.
amount of current before they begin to operate
Current [mA]
the valve. The Min current value is the current that
will be sent to the hydraulic valve coil when the Max current
function switch is activated.

Min current
The Min current is adjusted to a value that causes
the function to just begin to creep. Start Stop t [ms]
slope slope
NOTE: Use the default setting of 300 mA when
setting the Min Current.
NOTE: The start and stop ramps adjust both the
Max = MAXIMUM CURRENT (mA) left and right cylinders to the same value.
FORWARD LEVELING SPEED
B = Current range max current
Current [mA] This adjusts both the left and right cylinder speeds
proportionally to their respective Max mA+(cylinder
Max current
extend) settings.
B
REAR LEVELING SPEED
Min current
This adjusts the left and right cylinder speeds
proportionally to their respective Max mA-(cylinder
Lever retract) settings.
position
Maximum current settings control the maximum

speed the function will operate at. Increasing this
value will increase the travel speed of the cylinder.
NOTE: The mA +(extend) and mA- (retract)
settings for the left and right cylinders need to be
set separately to avoid one cylinder extending or
retracting faster then the other.
6.53
ADJUSTING CYLINDER TRACKING AND The Adjust Menu appears.
MIN/ MAX SETTINGS.
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the

Press the menu button to go to the main Leveling Menu item. Press OK to confirm the
menu. selection.
Press F1 to access the Adjust menu. Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the
RIGHT LEVEL CYLINDER (CYL OL) menu item
and press OK.
6.54
Press the F3 button to access the Plus + (cylinder Activate and hold the Tilt Left function on the
extend) selection and press OK. joystick and then using the up or down arrow
buttons adjust the Max mA setting.
Increasing or decreasing this value will speed up
or slow down the cylinder speed.
For the level cylinder function this value is typically
about 600 mA, however it will vary slightly from
machine to machine (due to slight differences
in the coils, spool cut on the valve, and various
attachment manufacturers) and of course, the
largest factor in this case is operator preference.
The Min Current default setting is 300 mA and this

should be used.
Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust the
value if required. Once the setting has been
adjusted press OK.
Press the F4 button to access the Minus -

(Retract) menu and then press OK twice.
6.55

should be used. Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the
Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust the LEFT LEVEL CYLINDER (CYL OL) and repeat the
value if required. Once the setting has been procedure to set the Min and Max settings for the
adjusted press OK. RIGHT LEVEL CYLINDER.
The left and right (+extend and -retract) cylinder
speeds have been set and now need to be
checked to ensure the cylinders extend and retract
at the same rate.
To check this activate the Tilt Forward and Tilt
Back functions on the joystick and ensure the cab
tilts forward and back evenly. Both Tilt Forward
and Tilt Back cylinders extend and retract at the
same speed.
If the right cylinder extends faster than the left
cylinder it bottoms out first. Reducing the Right
(+Extend) Max current reduces the speed at which
the right cylinder extends to match the left cylinder
speed and vice versa.
Activate and hold the Tilt Right function on the

joystick and then using the up or down arrow
in the coils ,spool cut on the valve, and various
attachment manufacturers) -and of course, the
The Right Level Cylinder Min and Max settings
have now been set.
6.56
ADJUSTING START AND STOP RAMPS
Adjustment of the start and stop ramps will affect
how the function begins to move once activated
and how it stops once deactivated.
The start ramp is the time (ms) that it takes for the
current to climb from the Min current to the Max
current when a function is activated.
The stop ramp is the time (ms) that it takes for the
current to drop from the Max current to the Min
current when a function is deactivated.
Press F1 to access the Adjust menu.
860C-529
NOTE: The adjustment of the start and stop ramps

will apply to both the left and right cylinders

Leveling Menu item. Press OK to confirm the
selection.

menu.
6.57
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the
LEVELER START RAMP and press OK. LEVELER STOP RAMP and press OK.
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the
LEVELER START RAMP ms setting. Use the LEVELER STOP RAMP ms setting. Use the
Tilt Forward and Tilt Backward functions on the Tilt Forward and Tilt Backward functions on the
joystick and note how the cab begins to tilt when joystick and note how the cab comes to a stop
the function is activated. Increasing this setting will when the function is deactivated. Increasing
result in a less aggressive start while decreasing this setting will result in a less aggressive stop
the setting will result in a more aggressive start. while decreasing the setting will result in a more
Once the setting has been adjusted press OK. aggressive stop. Once the setting has been
adjusted press OK.
6.58
ADJUSTING FORWARD/REAR LEVELING
SPEED (CYLINDER OPERATING SPEED)
Typical Cylinder Cycle Times
Recommended values
Cylinder Cycle Times
Direction Cycle Time
Level – Forward 8 sec. Full Extend
Level – Backward 8 sec. Full Retract
The Forward and Back leveling speed adjustment

is used to adjust the CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES.
The cylinder extend and retract speeds will be
adjusted proportionally to the Max mA settings
described earlier in this section.
NOTE: The side to side speeds will also be a
product of these settings

selection.

menu.

FORWARD LEVELING SPEED and press OK.
6.59
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust
FORWARD LEVELING SPEED to attain the the REAR LEVELING SPEED to attain the
recommended CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES or a recommended CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES or a
preferred speed. To check the CYLINDER CYCLE preferred speed. To check the CYLINDER CYCLE
TIMES refer to CHECKING LEVELING SPEED TIMES refer to CHECKING LEVELING SPEED
earlier in this section. Press OK after adjusting. earlier in this section. Press OK after adjusting.
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to The leveler adjustments are now complete.
REAR LEVELER SPEED and press OK.
NOTE: The default setting for the Forward and
Rear leveling speed is 100% so if the Cylinder
Cycle Time cannot be achieved then further
adjustment of the Max Current of the Left and
Right Level Cyl OL may be required. See the
previous pages for more detail.
6.60
Below is a table showing all the leveler default
settings.

Default
Settings
WRIST -CW / +CCW
LEVELER ADJUSTMENT
6.61
MEASURE MENU
The following menu items can be selected.

From the Main Menu press the F2 button to • Inputs
access the measure menu. • Outputs
• Hydraulics
• Engine Parameters
• IQAN Status
• I/O
• Fault Information
• DM1 (Display Module 1) Information
• BAM Messaging
• DM1 (Display Module 1) Frame
• Sensors
• Anti-stall
menu item. Press OK to confirm the selection.
This menu is used by Tigercat Service technicians
to view measured values on the MD3 display.
Refer to SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANrun
2 – MEASURE/GRAPH in THIS SECTION for
more information about graphing and exporting
measured values for service diagnostics.
6.62
PREFERENCES MENU DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT
After selecting F1 the Display adjustment screen

From the main menu page press the F3 button
opens and the following adjustments can be
(Preferences) and the Preferences menu page is
selected:
displayed.
RETURN TO MAIN MENU – Select F1
BACKLIGHT ADJUSTMENT – Select F2
SCREEN SAVER – Select F3
BACKLIGHT ADJUSTMENT

• Display
• Date/Time
• Language
After selecting F2 the backlight adjustment screen
opens. Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust
the display backlight. The range is 10 to 100. The
default setting is 100.
When the desired setting is selected press the
OK button. A good rule to follow is the lower the
number the longer the life of the display unit. Press
the back button to return to the main menu
screen.
6.63
SCREEN SAVER ADJUSTMENT DATE/TIME ADJUSTMENT
Select F3 to access the screen saver adjustment Press F2 to select the DATE/TIME adjustments in
options. Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the PREFERENCES menu.
through the choices. Three choices are available:
• SCREEN SAVER – Off
• SCREEN SAVER – Dimmed
Timeout – 5 seconds
Dimmed light – 80
• SCREEN SAVER – Black
Timeout – 5 seconds
The DATE/TIME menu screen opens. Two choices

are available for adjustment:
• DATE – select F1
• TIME – select F2
After making a selection press the OK button to

set the selection and press the back button to
return to the Main Menu screen.
6.64
DATE ADJUSTMENT
When the month has been set, the display will

Press F1 to select DATE. Use the up or down highlight the DAY. Use the up or down arrow
arrow buttons to scroll through the YEAR list to buttons to change the day. Press OK to set the
select the year. Press OK to set the year selected. day selected.
When the year has been confirmed the display will The display will return to the DATE TIME menu.
highlight the MONTH. Use the up or down arrow
buttons to change the month. Press OK to set the
month selected.
6.65
TIME ADJUSTMENT LANGUAGE ADJUSTMENT
Select F2 Time adjustment from the DATE/TIME From the preferences menu press the F2 button to
display screen. access language selection screen.
The Time display screen will open. Use the up or The languages available for selection will be
down arrow buttons to change the HOUR. Press shown.
the OK button to set the selection. The display will
Use the up or down arrow buttons to move to the
show the MINUTES highlighted.
preferred language.
Press OK to confirm the selection.
The display will return to the LANGUAGE menu
screen.
Press the back button to return to the
preferences menu.
Use the up or down arrow buttons to change the

minute. Press OK to set the selection. The display
will return to the DATE/TIME menu screen. Press
the back button to return to the Main Menu
screen.
Select F3 to choose your Language preference.
Press OK button to set the selection. Press the
back button to return to the Main Menu screen.
6.66
INFO MENU MODULES
From the main menu page press the F4 button Press F1 to select the modules menu. This menu
(Info) and the Info menu page appears. provides information on the following machine
modules:
• MD3 (Computer Module)
• Cab XS2
• Frame Module 0 XA2
• Frame Module 1 XA2
• Cummins Engine ECM

• Modules – Select F1
• Logs – Select F3
The Machine ID information will be displayed on
the screen along with the part number of the MD3
program installed.
Shown above, the MD3 module has been

selected. Specific information for the MD3 is
displayed on the screen.
This menu is used by Tigercat service technicians.
Press the back button (or F1) to return to the
main menu page.
6.67
LOGS The records are a list of all the fault occurrences in
each log. Records cannot be cleared by operators.
Press F3 from the info menu page to select logs.

This menu will list all system fault occurrences of This menu is used by Tigercat Service technicians
messages the system has encountered and the to view logs on the MD3 display. Refer to
number of records within each log. IQANrun 2 – LOGS in THIS SECTION for more
Use the up or down arrow buttons to select the information regarding access and maintenance of
menu item. Press OK to view the selection and logs using IQANrun 2.
sort the information in a variety of ways. Press the back button (or F1) to return to the
main menu page.
6.68
MD3 MESSAGES
ALARM
LIGHT
MASTER
ALARM
MD3
COMPUTER
H845C-55
The MD3 computer displays messages, activates

the master alarm and alarm light whenever a
system fault occurs. Note the computer control
system will automatically perform a bulb test at
engine start up to ensure that master alarm and
alarm light are functioning.
There are different types of Messages, they all
appear on the screen as a block message.
The types of messages are:
• CRITICAL MESSAGE - Colour RED
• ERROR MESSAGE - Colour RED
• ALERT MESSAGE - Colour YELLOW
• INFORMATION MESSAGE - Colour BLUE
Messages can be hidden or acknowledged by
pressing the F2 button (Hide or OK).
All messages that have been hidden or
acknowledged are stored in the computer.
In some instances it will be necessary to
immediately stop the machine, shut the engine
OFF and repair the problem causing the message.
Active fault messages that have been hidden can
be reviewed by pressing the F4 button. Recalled
BLOCK
messages will be displayed in order starting with MESSAGE
the highest priority first.
IMPORTANT!
When contacting Tigercat Customer service about
any message it is very important to write down
and communicate the whole message (all text
shown on the screen). This will greatly reduce
troubleshooting time.
6.69
CRITICAL MESSAGES (RED)
Critical messages advise the operator that a
critical machine fault is about to occur or a system
fault has occurred.
Critical messages have the highest level of priority
and are used to alert the operator that immediate
action must be taken to prevent damage to
machine or to ensure operator safety.
When a critical message is displayed, the master
alarm and alarm light will sound and flash
continuously. The message remains on the screen A list of CRITICAL MESSAGES is as follows:
until the operator hides it.
• Engine Stop
The message will give brief details of the fault and
advise what action is necessary. • Hydraulic Oil Temperature High
In some instances the machine requires • Hydraulic Oil Level Extremely Low.
immediate action to correct the problem which • Hardware Fault – MD3
requires the operator to STOP machine operation,
SHUT THE ENGINE OFF and service the machine • Hardware Fault – Engine
to correct the problem. • Hardware Fault – XS2
However, if the machine cannot be stopped • Hardware Fault – XA2
immediately for safety reasons, the operator can
hide the message. In this instance the machine • Engine Coolant Temperature High
should only be operated long enough to make the • Engine Coolant Level low
machine safe, then STOP machine operation and
• Engine CAC Temperature High
SHUT THE ENGINE OFF before serious machine
damage can occur! • Engine Oil Pressure Low
Messages can be hidden by pressing the F2 • Engine Fault Code Messages – Critical
button (Hide).
Critical messages flash the critical symbol
above the F4 button when active messages are

hidden. The symbol will continue to flash until the
problem is resolved and the fault becomes
inactive.
Active messages that have been hidden can be
reviewed by pressing the F4 button.
6.70
ENGINE STOP HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL EXTREMELY LOW
Engine Stop Hydraulic Oil

Critical engine fault active - contact service. Level Extremely Low.
This message will be displayed, alarm light will This message will be displayed, alarm light
flash and alarm will sound when the engine stops will flash and alarm will sound when the main
while the ignition switch is in the RUN position hydraulic tank oil level is extremely low.
and/or when critical engine alarms are activated.
Stop the engine immediately when this alarm is
Refer to engine manufacturer's manual for specific activated. Operating machine with a low hydraulic
information regarding the engine. oil level can cause hydraulic pumps to fail.
When this alarm is activated stop the engine and
look for signs of broken hoses or other leaks.
Repair leaks and refill the main hydraulic tank to
FULL mark on the sight gauge. Restart engine and
inspect for leaks.
Note the hydraulic oil level icon illuminates RED
when a hydraulic oil level extremely low critical
message has been activated.
6.71
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU –
OIL GRADE SELECTION in THIS SECTION for
hydraulic oil grade selection settings information.
Hydraulic Oil
Temperature High.
Refer to COMPUTER – INFORMATION MODE
MENU – HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE in
THIS SECTION for hydraulic oil temperature
information display.
This message will be displayed, alarm light

will flash and alarm will sound when the oil
temperature exceeds the recommended operating
range for the type of hydraulic oil in use.
If the temperature rises above the recommended
operating range for the type of hydraulic oil in
use, alarm will sound, reduce load on engine and
activate the cooling system CLEAN function using
the fan switch.
If the temperature does not drop quickly after the
clean cycle, stop engine and check the following:
• Plugged oil cooler
• Malfunction in a hydraulic circuit
• Malfunction of hydraulic fan drive system
• Malfunction of engine Anti-Stall system
• Low hydraulic oil level in tank
• Correct Hydraulic Oil Grade Selection
If hydraulic oil temperature rises above the
recommended operating range DO NOT continue
to operate the machine.
This alarm must not be used to monitor the
hydraulic oil. The operator must use the hydraulic
oil temperature gauge on the main menu, together
with the operating range chart in SECTION 3 to
prevent damage to the hydraulic system.
Hydraulic oil grade information is shown on the
main menu below the hydraulic oil temperature
gauge.
Operating outside the recommended operating
range will shorten hydraulic component life.
6.72
HARDWARE FAULT – MD3 HARDWARE FAULT – XS2
Hardware Fault - MD3 Hardware Fault - XS2

Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and
on to recall active hidden hardware faults. on to recall active hidden hardware faults.
This message will be displayed, alarm light will This message will be displayed, alarm light will
flash and alarm will sound when a critical active flash and alarm will sound when a critical active
hardware fault related to the MD3 Display module hardware fault related to the XS2 Cab module has
has been hidden. been hidden.
To recall the original active fault(s) the operator To recall the original active fault(s) the operator
must turn the key off and on. must turn the key off and on.
A VREF error is an example of the type of A VREF and no contact errors are examples of the
hardware fault which will be the original active fault type of hardware fault which may be the original
which triggers this message. active fault which triggers this message.
HARDWARE FAULT – ENGINE HARDWARE FAULT – XA2
Hardware Fault - Engine Hardware Fault - XA2

This message will be displayed, alarm light will This message will be displayed, alarm light will
flash and alarm will sound when a critical active flash and alarm will sound when a critical active
hardware fault related to the Engine has been hardware fault related to the XA2 Front Chassis
hidden. module has been hidden.
No contact error is an example of the type of A VREF and no contact errors are examples of the
hardware fault which may be the original active type of hardware fault which may be the original
fault which triggers this message. active fault which triggers this message.
6.73
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL LOW
SPN: 110 FMI: 0 SPN: 111 FMI: 1 1 of 1

Engine coolant temperature high - Engine coolant level low -
Below normal, severe. Below normal, severe.
This message will be displayed, alarm light This message will be displayed, alarm light will
will flash and alarm will sound when engine flash and alarm will sound when the coolant level
temperature exceeds recommended engine drops below a safe operating level. The sensor is
temperature. located in the surge tank.
When this alarm is activated check for: If this message is displayed when the engine is
running, stop the engine immediately and correct
• Plugged air intake access panel screens
the fault. With engine running, top up radiator
• Plugged radiator. using correct solution of coolant antifreeze.
DO NOT continue to operate machine. Refer to SERVICE AND LUBRICATION POINTS
Refer to CLEANING A/C CONDENSER, OIL CHART in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
COOLER, RADIATOR AND CHARGE AIR
COOLER in THIS SECTION.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator fill cap when

the engine is hot, release of pressurized
coolant can cause serious burns.
Turn off the engine. Only remove the
engine radiator fill cap when cool enough
to touch with bare hands.
Slowly loosen radiator fill cap to first
stop to relieve pressure before removing
completely.
6.74
INTAKE MANIFOLD TEMPERATURE HIGH ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - CRITICAL
SPN: 105 FMI: 0 1 of 1 SPN: 612 FMI: 2 1 of 1

Intake manifold temperature high - Crankshaft speed/position signal lost -
Above normal, most severe Erratic or intermittent
This message will be displayed, alarm light will Critical engine fault message(s) will be displayed,
flash and alarm will sound when engine charge alarm light will flash and alarm will sound when a
air cooler temperature exceeds recommended critical engine fault message is received from the
temperatures. engine electronic control unit.
When this alarm is activated check for: They provide the SPN code (suspect parameter
number) and the FMI code (fault mode identifier)
• Plugged air intake access panel screens
as well as a message describing the fault (when
• Plugged charge air cooler. available).
DO NOT continue to operate machine. Critical engine fault codes are higher priority
Refer to CLEANING A/C CONDENSER, OIL messages than alert level engine fault code
COOLER, RADIATOR AND CHARGE AIR messages. Critical messages can be hidden but
COOLER in THIS SECTION. immediate action must be taken, STOP machine
operation and service engine immediately to
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW resolve the cause of the fault.
An example of a critical engine fault message is
shown above.
Note that some less common engine fault codes
SPN: 100 FMI: 1 1 of 1 will appear without a message describing the
Engine Oil Pressure Low - fault. Make a note of the SPN and FMI codes and
Below normal, most severe contact service for more information.
Refer to engine MANUFACTURER'S MANUAL for
specific information regarding the engine.
This message will be displayed, alarm light

will flash and alarm will sound when engine oil
pressure falls below 0.7 bar (10 psi).
Stop the engine when this alarm is activated.
Check engine oil levels.
Refer to STARTING ENGINE in THIS SECTION
for more information.
6.75
ERROR MESSAGES (RED)
Error messages advise the operator that a critical
machine fault is about to occur or a system fault
has occurred.
Error messages are computer system generated
and are generally activated by computer system
error and fault related conditions.
Error messages have the second highest level
of priority and are used to alert the operator
that immediate action must be taken to prevent
damage to machine or to ensure operator safety.
A list of some types of ERROR MESSAGES is as
Error messages are activated whenever follows:
a fault such as an electrical connection is
• Module VREF Error
broken/ disconnected. Most error messages are
due to computer system hardware or connection • Voltage Input Error (VIN)
faults. • Digital Input Error (DIN)
When an error message is displayed, the master • Digital Output Error (DOUT)
alarm and alarm light will sound and flash
continuously. The message remains on the screen • Current Output Error (COUT)
until the operator hides it. • Module No Contact Error
The message will give brief details of the fault and NOTE: Not all error messages are shown.
advise what action is necessary.
In some instances the machine requires
immediate action to correct the problem which
requires the operator to STOP machine operation,
SHUT THE ENGINE OFF and service the machine
to correct the problem.
However, if the machine cannot be stopped
immediately for safety reasons, the operator can
hide the message. In this instance the machine
should only be operated long enough to move the
machine to a safe location then STOP machine
operation and SHUT THE ENGINE OFF before
serious machine damage can occur!
Messages are acknowledged by pressing the F2
button (OK). To recall active messages turn key off
and on. On screen messages will indicate to the
operator that an active hardware fault has been
hidden.
Error messages flash the Critical symbol or the
Alert above the F4 button when active
messages are hidden depending on the type of

error message. The symbol will continue to flash
until the problem is resolved and the fault
becomes inactive.
reviewed by pressing the F4 button.
6.76
MODULE VREF ERROR
XS2-A0
MD3
CAB XS2
Display VREF error
VREF error
XA2-A0
The module VREF message will be displayed to
indicate a problem related to the 5 V reference
signal coming from the module. FRAME MODULE 0 XA2
The module is identified on the display screen. VREF error
This message indicates a problem with a sensor,

connecting wires or the 5V reference signal itself.
Once acknowledged this message will be
replaced with a hardware fault message for the
corresponding module when active faults are
recalled to the screen. Refer to COMPUTER – XA2-A1
MESSAGES - CRITICAL – HARDWARE FAULT in
THIS SECTION. FRAME MODULE 1 XA2
VREF error
6.77
VOLTAGE INPUT ERROR (VIN) DIGITAL OUTPUT ERROR (DOUT)
Digital output error messages will be displayed to
Frame XA2-A0
Pin C1:12 indicate a problem with a digital output signal from
a computer system module.
Fuel Level Sensor VIN The module and pin number are identified on the
Low error display screen.
The heading identifies the signal destination and
the text indicates the type of error.
The display is similar to the voltage input error
message shown above.
Voltage input error messages will be displayed to CURRENT OUTPUT ERROR (COUT)
indicate a problem with a voltage input signal to a Current output error messages will be displayed
computer system module. to indicate a problem with a current output signal
from a computer system module.
The module and pin number are identified on the
display screen. The module and pin number are identified on the
display screen.
The heading identifies the signal source and the
text indicates the type of error. The heading identifies the signal destination and
the text indicates the type of error.
An example of a voltage input error message is
shown above. The display is similar to the voltage input error
DIGITAL INPUT ERROR (DIN)
Digital input error messages will be displayed to Once acknowledged these message will be
indicate a problem with a digital input signal to a replaced with a hardware failure message for
computer system module. the corresponding module when active faults
recalled to the screen. Refer to COMPUTER –
The module and pin number are identified on the MESSAGES - ALERT – HARDWARE FAILURE in
display screen. THIS SECTION.
The heading identifies the signal source and the
text indicates the type of error.
The display is similar to the voltage input error
6.78
MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR
J1939-B0
XS2-A0
CUMMINS QSL 9.0
Cab Module No contact
No contact
XA2-A0
The module no contact error message will be
displayed to indicate a loss of communication with
or power to a module. The module is identified on FRAME MODULE 0 XA2
the display screen. No contact
When a module goes loses contact all machine
functions controlled by that module cease and
all messages associated with that module are
activated. If the problem is with the CAN wires all
modules beyond the problem module will also be
affected.
XA2-A1
Note that if the MD3 display module has a loss
of power or other malfunction the screen may go
blank and all machine functions controlled by the
FRAME MODULE 1 XA2
computer system will be affected. No contact
MESSAGES - CRITICAL – HARDWARE FAULT in
THIS SECTION.
6.79
MD3 MODULE BLANK SCREEN

The MD3 module is the central unit in the control
system, which works as both a master and a
display unit. Faults or failure in this unit will affect
all other components.
Likely causes are:
• Power - Fuse (MD3 module)
• Ground
• LCD display settings too light to read
• Faulty MD3 module
6.80
XS2 MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR
B
A
XS2-A0
CAB XS2
No contact
XS2 MODULE LED INDICATORS
2. Check module status indicators
Expect all machine functions controlled by this The XS2 module also indicates error status
module to cease and all alarms associated with through the yellow/red blinking LED. This
this module to be activated. gives an immediate diagnosis as to the nature
of the error that has occurred.
1. Check for other error/alarm messages on
screen (A) Supply Voltage LED (green).
Press OK to acknowledge each error LED with green light ON indicates supply
message. Note that module no contact errors voltage is ON.
will be followed by other alarm messages LED OFF indicates supply voltage is OFF.
associated with the module(s) which is (are)
(B) Status indicator LED (yellow/red).
out of contact.
LED yellow flashing light indicates status is
If XS2-A0 MODULE NO CONTACT is the only
correct.
module is NO CONTACT error message the
likely causes are: LED flashing red light indicates error status as
follows:
• Power - Fuse (XS2 MODULE)
• One red primary flash and one secondary
• Ground
yellow flash indicates an error controlled by
• Address (ID-Tag) the master (MD3).
If the XS2-A0 MODULE NO CONTACT is • Two red primary flashes in a row and one
followed by an XA2-A0 and XA2-A1 NO yellow secondary flash indicates an error
CONTACT error the likely cause is: controlled by the master (MD3).
• CAN wire connection • Three red primary flashes in a row and one
yellow secondary flash indicates the fault is
LED indicator showing different XS2 and XA2 modes related to the CAN-bus.
Status Flash
• Three red primary flashes in a row and two
Normal operation (yel.)
yellow secondary flashes in a row indicates
Error Error Primary Flash (red) Secondary Flash (yellow) the fault is related to the address.
code Error category Error description
1:n See note a • Four red primary flashes in a row and one
2:n a
yellow secondary flash indicates a memory
See note
error.
3:1 CAN error
3:2 Address error

• Continuous red primary flashing indicates a
fatal error.
4:1 Memory errorb
FE Fatal error
Internal diagnostics in the master (MD3) can
a. Error groups 1:n and 2:n are controlled by the master.
be used to get more information about the XS2
b. FRAM memory error. module. The following values are supervised:
• Power supply (V)
• Reference voltage (V)
• CAN address voltage (V)
6.81
XA2 MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR
B
A
XA2-A0
FRAME MODULE 0 XA2

No contact
XA2 MODULE LED INDICATORS
2. Check module status indicators
Expect all machine functions controlled by this The XA2 module also indicates error status
module to cease and all alarms associated with through the yellow/red blinking LED. This
this module to be activated. gives an immediate diagnosis as to the nature
of the error that has occurred.
1. Check for other error/alarm messages on
screen (A) Supply Voltage LED (green).
Press OK to acknowledge each error LED with green light ON indicates supply
message. Note that module off line errors voltage is ON.
will be followed by other alarm messages LED OFF indicates supply voltage is OFF.
associated with the module(s) which is (are)
(B) Status indicator LED (yellow/red).
out of contact.
LED yellow flashing light indicates status is
NOTE: The XA2-A1 module is the terminal
correct.
module in the series connection. Therefore
failure of this module alone will not affect any LED flashing red light indicates error status as
other modules in the series. follows:
If XA2-A0 or XA2-A1 MODULE NO • One red primary flash and one secondary
CONTACT is the only module is NO yellow flash indicates an error controlled by
CONTACT error message the likely causes the master (MD3).
are: • Two red primary flashes in a row and one
• Power - Fuse (XA2 MODULE) yellow secondary flash indicates an error
controlled by the master (MD3).
• Ground
• Three red primary flashes in a row and one
• Address (ID-Tag)
yellow secondary flash indicates the fault is
• CAN wire connection related to the CAN-bus.
If the XA2-A0 NO CONTACT error is followed Three red primary flashes in a row and two yellow
by a XA2-A1 NO CONTACT error the likely secondary flashes in a row indicates the fault is
cause is: related to the address.
• CAN wire connection
LED indicator showing different XS2 and XA2 modes
If the XA2-A1 MODULE NO CONTACT error is Status Flash
not the only module no contact error message Normal operation (yel.)
check other affected modules in order from the
MD3 connection. Error
code
Error Primary Flash (red)
Error category
Secondary Flash (yellow)
Error description
Refer to MODULE NO CONTACT ERROR for 1:n See note a
each module for more detailed information. 2:n See note a
3:1 CAN error
3:2 Address error
4:1 Memory errorb
FE Fatal error
a. Error groups 1:n and 2:n are controlled by the master.

6.82
• Four red primary flashes in a row and one
yellow secondary flash indicates a memory
error.
• Continuous red primary flashing indicates a
fatal error.
Internal diagnostics in the master (MD3) can
be used to get more information about the XS2
module. The following values are supervised:
• Power supply (V)
• Reference voltage (V)
• CAN address voltage (V)
6.83
ALERT MESSAGES (YELLOW)
Alert messages advise the operator that machine
operation will be compromised.
Alert messages have the third highest level of
priority and are used to indicate to the operator
that action is required to prevent future damage to
the machine.
All alert message will give brief details of the fault
and advise what action is necessary.
Action should be taken to service the machine to
correct the problem at the earliest opportunity to Messages can be hidden by pressing the F2
prevent future damage to the machine. button (Hide).
Alert messages flash the alert symbol above Alert computer system generated messages are
the F4 button when active messages are hidden. generally activated by computer system error and
fault related conditions.
When a system generated alert message is
displayed the master alarm and light will sound
and flash three times to alert the operator of the
message.
The message remains on the screen until the

operator hides it.
reviewed by pressing the F4 button. The symbol
will continue to flash until the problem is resolved NOTE: Active hardware fault alert messages are
and the fault becomes inactive. acknowledged by pressing the F2 button (OK).
To recall these messages turn key off and on. On
NOTE: If both a critical level fault and an alert
screen messages will indicate to the operator that
level fault are present the critical symbol will take
an active hardware fault has been hidden.
priority until the critical fault becomes inactive.
There are two types of alert messages:
Alert programmed messages generally activated
by machine function related conditions.
When an alert message is displayed, the master
alarm and light will sound and flash three times to
alert the operator of the message. The message
remains on the screen until the operator hides it.
6.84
A list of ALERT MESSAGES is as follows:
• Charge Filter Restricted (Swing)
• Engine Air Intake Filter Restricted
• Hydraulic Oil Level Low
• RH Joystick Interlock
• LH Joystick Interlock
• Starter Disengaged
• Hardware Fault - MD3
• Hardware Fault - XS2
• Hardware Fault - XA2
• Hardware Failure - VIN
• Hardware Failure - DIN
• Hardware Failure -DOUT
• Hardware Failure -COUT
• Engine Voltage Low
• Engine Voltage High
• Engine Fault Code Messages - Alert
Some types of computer system generated alert
messages are listed below:
• Module High Temperature - Alert
• Module High Supply Voltage - Alert
• Module Low Supply Voltage - Alert
NOTE: Not all system generated alert
messages are shown.
6.85
AIR FILTER RESTRICTED HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL LOW
Air Filter Hydraulic Oil

Restricted. Service Machine. Level Low.
This message will be displayed when a signal is This message will be displayed when the main
received from the engine air filter restriction sensor hydraulic tank oil level is low.
on the engine air cleaner.
When this alarm is activated stop the engine and
The engine air intake pressure icon illuminates look for signs of broken hoses or other leaks.
YELLOW when service to the filter is required. Repair leaks and refill tank to the FULL mark on
the sight gauge. Restart the engine and inspect for
The engine air intake pressure icon illuminates
leaks. Operating machine with a low hydraulic oil
RED, along with an ALERT message, when
level can cause hydraulic pumps to fail.
service to the air filter has reached a critical state.
NOTE: The hydraulic oil level icon illuminates
When this happens the engine air cleaner requires
YELLOW when a hydraulic oil level low alert
immediate service.
message has been activated and RED when a
Refer to AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE in hydraulic oil level critically low critical message
SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL. has been activated.
6.86
HARDWARE FAULT – MD3 HARDWARE FAULT – XS2
Hardware Fault - MD3 Hardware Fault - XS2

This message will be displayed when an alert level This message will be displayed when an alert level
active hardware fault related to the MD3 Display active hardware fault related to the XS2 module
module has been hidden. has been hidden.
High temperature, low supply voltage and high High temperature, low supply voltage and high
supply voltage module alert messages are supply voltage module alert messages are
examples of the type of hardware fault which examples of the type of hardware fault which
will be the original active faults which trigger this will be the original active faults which trigger this
message. message.
HARDWARE FAULT – XA2
Hardware Fault - XA2

Active fault has been hidden. Turn key off and
on to recall active hidden hardware faults.
This message will be displayed when an alert level

active hardware fault related to an XA2 module
has been hidden.
To recall the original active fault(s) the operator
must turn the key off and on.
High temperature, low supply voltage and high
supply voltage module alert messages are
examples of the type of hardware fault which
will be the original active faults which trigger this
message.
6.87
HARDWARE FAILURE - VIN HARDWARE FAILURE - DOUT
Hardware Failure - VIN Hardware Failure - DOUT

This message will be displayed when a voltage This message will be displayed when a digital
input error message has been hidden. output error message has been hidden.
HARDWARE FAILURE - DIN HARDWARE FAILURE - COUT
Hardware Failure - DIN Hardware Failure - COUT

This message will be displayed when a digital This message will be displayed when a current
input error message has been hidden. output error message has been hidden.
6.88
ENGINE VOLTAGE LOW ENGINE FAULT CODE MESSAGES - ALERT
SPN: 168 FMI: 18 1 of 1 SPN: 110 FMI: 16 1 of 1

Engine voltage low - Engine coolant temperature high -
Below normal, severe Above normal, severe
This message will be displayed when engine Alert engine fault message(s) will be displayed,
voltage readings of less than 20 volts are alarm light will flash and alarm will sound when an
detected. alert engine fault message is received from the
engine electronic control unit.
When this alarm is activated investigate the cause
immediately. They provide the SPN code (suspect parameter
number) and the FMI code (fault mode identifier)
as well as a message describing the fault (when
available).
Alert engine fault codes are lower priority
messages than critical level engine fault code
messages. Alert messages can be hidden but
action (service engine) is required to resolve the
ENGINE VOLTAGE HIGH cause of the fault.
An example of an alert engine fault message is
shown above.
SPN: 168 FMI: 16 1 of 1 Note: some less common engine fault codes will
appear without a message describing the fault.
Engine voltage high - Make a note of the SPN and FMI codes and
Above normal, severe contact service for more information.
Refer to engine manufacturer's manual for specific
information regarding the engine.
This message will be displayed when engine

voltage readings of greater than 30 volts are
detected.
When this alarm is activated investigate the cause
immediately.
6.89
MODULE HIGH TEMPERATURE - ALERT
XS2-A0
MD3
CAB XS2
MD3 High temperature
High temperature
Value: 75 °C
Value: 75 °C
XA2-A0
Module high temperature alert message will be

displayed to indicate the computer control system
FRAME MODULE 0 XA2
has detected high temperature readings in a High temperature
system module.
The module is identified on the display screen.
The temperature reading value is also displayed. Value: 75 °C
corresponding module when active faults are XA2-A1
MESSAGES - ALERT – HARDWARE FAULT in FRAME MODULE 1 XA2
THIS SECTION.
High temperature
Value: 75 °C
6.90
MODULE HIGH SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT
XS2-A0
MD3
CAB XS2
MD3 High supply voltage
High supply voltage
Value: 36 V
Value: 35 V
XA2-A0
Module high supply voltage alert message will be

FRAME MODULE 0 XA2
has detected high supply voltage readings in a High supply voltage
system module.
The voltage reading value is also displayed. Value: 35 V
corresponding module when active faults are XA2-A1
MESSAGES - ALERT – HARDWARE FAULT in FRAME MODULE 1 XA2
THIS SECTION.
High supply voltage
Value: 35 V
6.91
MODULE LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE - ALERT
XS2-A0
MD3
CAB XS2
MD3 Low supply voltage
Low supply voltage
XA2-A0
Module low supply voltage alert message will be

FRAME MODULE 0 XA2
has detected low supply voltage readings in a Low supply voltage
system module.
recalled to the screen. Refer to COMPUTER – XA2-A1
MESSAGES - ALERT – HARDWARE FAULT in
THIS SECTION. FRAME MODULE 1 XA2
Low supply voltage
6.92
INFORMATION MESSAGES (BLUE)
Information messages give the operator
information regarding an event or problem
condition while the event or problem exists. FRAME MODULE 0 XA2
Information messages have lowest priority and are Low supply voltage
used to give the operator information that is useful
to the operator, but requires no action to prevent
immediate or future damage to the machine
When an information message is displayed on
the screen the message will either automatically
disappear when the condition no longer A list of the INFORMATION MESSAGES is as
exists or stay on the screen until the operator follows:
acknowledges the message.
• Hydraulic Oil Self Warmup - Begin Warmup ?
Information messages can be acknowledged
by pressing the F2 button (OK). Acknowledged • Self Warmup - Engaged
information messages are removed from the • Fan Full ON
screen.
Information messages do not have an indicator

after they have been acknowledged.
Most information messages that have been
acknowledged cannot be reviewed.
Recurrence of an event or problem condition
related to an information message may cause the
message to be shown again.
Restarting the machine may also cause the
message to be shown again.
6.93
FAN FULL ON
Fan Full ON
Switch Activated
This message will be displayed when the fan

switch is in the FULL ON position.
The fan control system is overridden and the fan
will run at FULL speed for cooling regardless of
charge air, coolant or oil temperatures. Normally
the fan control switch is placed in the AUTO
position for optimal cooling. The FULL ON position
is intended for use in the event of a temporary
failure of the fan control.
Refer to CAB CONTROLS – FAN SWITCH in
THIS SECTION.
6.94
ELECTRICAL KIT - SERVICE AND • ID-TAG ‘0T’ (AN071) (6)
DIAGNOSTICS This is a replacement address/terminating
This kit includes a variety of electrical connectors, tag. Refer to ID-TAG in this section for more
tools, cable, IQAN components, diagnostic break- detailed information.
out harnesses and service harnesses (Tigercat • DEUTSCH 2 POLE SERVICE HARNESS
part number 20045B). (24860B) (7)
SELECTED ITEMS FROM KIT 20045B: This harness is used to bypass a wiring
harness while troubleshooting electrical
problems. This will identify or eliminate the
wiring harness as a cause.
• AMP 2 POLE SERVICE HARNESS (24859B)
(8)
This harness is used to bypass a wiring
harness while troubleshooting electrical
problems. This will identify or eliminate the
wiring harness as a cause.
ADDITIONAL CABLES/ITEMS REQUIRED:

630C-211 • USB CABLE (TYPE A-B) (AN154) (9)
DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS This cable is used to connect the IQAN MD3
• DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS (via the machine USB port) to an isolated USB
DEUTSCH CONNECTOR - CURRENT hub plugged into a PC/Laptop.
(20036B) (1) IMPORTANT!
This harness is used to check current (amps) Connecting the USB cable directly to the USB
flow to a component with a Deutsch connector port on a PC/Laptop is not recommended.
and verify outputs. Using an isolated USB hub will protect your
PC/Laptop USB port and the MD3 module from
• DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS ground loops which can cause communication
DEUTSCH CONNECTOR - VOLTAGE signal problems or damage to the PC/Laptop
(20037B) (2) and MD3 module.
This harness is used to check voltage (volts) • USB HUB (4 PORT, TYPE A, ISOLATED )
to a component with a Deutsch connector and (AN155) (10)
verify inputs.
This isolated USB hub is used to protect your
• DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS PC/Laptop and the MD3 module from ground
AMP CONNECTOR - CURRENT (20038B) (3) loops which can cause communication signal
This harness is used to check current (amps) problems or damage to the PC/Laptop or
flow to a component with a Amp connector and module.
verify outputs.
• DIAGNOSTIC BREAKOUT HARNESS
AMP CONNECTOR - VOLTAGE (20039B) (4)
This harness is used to check voltage (volts) to
a component with an Amp connector and verify
inputs.
• ID-TAG ‘0’ (AN068) (5)
This is a replacement address tag. Refer
to ID-TAG in this section for more detailed
information.
6.95
SELECTED ITEMS FROM KIT 20045B
1 2 7
3 4 8
5 6
TWISTED PAIR WIRE

REPAIR HARNESS
ADDITIONAL ITEMS
9 10
SERV DIAG KIT 2 ELECTRICAL KIT - SERVICE AND DIAGNOSTICS - SELECTED ITEMS
6.96
IQAN SOFTWARE
IQAN Active Studio software can be downloaded
from the Tigercat Dealer Website.
All software required for PC/Laptop use is included
in this download. A user’s manual in PDF format
is also included. Some of the software requires a
software key (available from Tigercat).
Contact Tigercat Customer Service for more
information about specific hardware requirements
for PC/Laptop.
6.97
APPLICATION PROGRAM UPDATES
FOR PRODUCT SERVICE BULLETINS
Machine program updates are available on the
Tigercat dealer website. The latest version of the
application can be run on any machine provided
that all applicable Product Service Bulletin updates
have been completed.
DOWNLOADING APPLICATIONS FROM
THE TIGERCAT DEALER WEBSITE
NOTE: The following downloading instructions
apply to the Tigercat dealer website format at the
time of printing. If you experience difficulty due to
changes on the website contact Tigercat Customer
Service for assistance.
3. Select the folder you wish to save the program
in.
4. Click on Save.
5. The IQAN program vfile has now been
downloaded.
1. Click on the IDA to the right of the file you wish

to download.
2. Click on Save.
6.98
SERVICING THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2 IQANRUN 2 QUICK SUMMARY
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT & INFORMATION CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH IQANRUN 2
• PC/Laptop Servicing the computer system requires a
PC/ Laptop, the use of IQANrun 2 software, a USB
• MD3 SERVICE KIT (40705B)
hub and a USB cable. Refer to CONNECT TO
▪▪ IQAN Active Studio software,Tigercat part THE MD3 WITH IQANrun 2 in THIS SECTION for
number DG047. Refer to IQAN SOFTWARE details.
in THIS SECTION for dealer website
download information. LOGIN
Some service operations require username
▪▪ USB hub (4 port, Type A, isolated ), and password access. Refer to LOGIN in THIS
Tigercat part number AN155 SECTION for details.
▪▪ USB cable (Type A-B), Tigercat part number
UPDATE
AN154
Most commonly used operation. Use to update
• Service Password. Contact Tigercat Service the MD3 to a newer program or program revision.
department to obtain passwords and additional Does not overwrite settings. Refer to UPDATE
information. APPLICATION in THIS SECTION for details.
GET SETTINGS
Gets and saves the existing settings from the
MD3. Recommended as a backup prior to tuning
or updating the application. Refer to IQANRUN
2 – UPDATE APPLICATION – GET SETTINGS in
THIS SECTION for details.
SEND SETTINGS
Sends a previously saved settings file to the MD3.
Overwrites factory default, adjustable and stored
values. Only to be used under the direction of
Tigercat Customer Service or Engineering. Refer
to important notes on the use of settings files at
the end of IQANRUN 2 – UPDATE APPLICATION
– GET SETTINGS in THIS SECTION.
GET CLONE
Gets and saves the existing application, settings
and machine ID from the MD3. Recommended
as a backup prior to tuning or updating the
application. Refer to IQANRUN 2 – UPDATE
APPLICATION – GET CLONE in THIS SECTION
for details.
SEND CLONE
Sends a previously saved clone file to the MD3.
Overwrites the application, factory defaults,
adjustable values, stored values and machine ID.
Only to be used under the direction of Tigercat
Customer Service or Engineering. Refer to
important notes on the use of settings files at the
end of IQAN RUN 2 – UPDATE APPLICATION –
GET CLONE in THIS SECTION.
6.99
ADJUST
Allows access to adjustment groups. In addition
to adjust groups normally accessible on screen
additional adjust groups that require sufficient
rights restricted by username and password login.
Refer to IQANRUN 2 – ADJUST in THIS SECTION
for details.
MEASURE (GRAPH)
Allows the user record, graph and measure group
channel readings during machine operation,
testing or setup procedures. These recordings
can be saved or printed. Refer to IQANRUN
2 – MEASURE (GRAPH) in THIS SECTION for
details.
LOGS
Allows the user to access to logs for service
troubleshooting, maintenance documentation or
clearing. Some log operations require sufficient
rights to perform. Refer to IQANRUN 2 – LOGS in
THIS SECTION for details.
SYSTEM
Allows the user to access system information
including machine serial number information.
Refer to IQANRUN 2 – SYSTEM in THIS
SECTION for details.
6.100
CONNECT TO THE MD3 WITH
IQANRUN 2
GREY INDICATES,
NOT CONNECTED
TO MD3
4. Connect the other end of the USB A/B Cable
to the MD3 USB connector. Exact location
of the connector will vary between machine
models.
1. Turn on PC/Laptop and launch IQANrun by
double clicking the shortcut on your desktop.
IQANrun is part of the IQAN Active Studio.
2. Turn the machine key switch to the ‘ON’

position, so the MD3 has power. Do not start
machine.
GREEN INDICATES,
CONNECTED TO MD3
5. IQANrun will now indicate that it is online.

Proceed with service operations and login if
required. Refer to LOGIN in THIS SECTION.
NOTE: If the MD3 does not contain an application
(replacement module), the application will have
to be Updated, before a user can login. Refer
to UPDATE APPLICATION and LOGIN in THIS
3. Connect the USB Hub into the PC/Laptop SECTION.
USB jack. Then connect the USB cable into
the hub.
IMPORTANT!
Connecting the USB cable directly to the USB
port on a PC/Laptop is NOT recommended.
Using an isolated USB hub will protect
your PC/Laptop USB port and the MD3
module from ground loops which can cause
communication signal problems or damage to
the PC/Laptop and MD3 module.
6.101
LOGIN
1. Press the Login button on the left.
LOGIN
LOGGED IN
USERNAME
4. The Login status at the bottom of the screen

NOT LOGGED IN
now indicates the login username.
2. A dialogue box will appear, asking for a

username and Password. Contact the Tigercat
Service Department for the username and
Password.
NOTE: Each username and password

combination comes with access rights
appropriate for that user’s function.
If a user has insufficient rights to perform an
operation (or is not logged in when login is
required) a dialogue box will pop up to inform
3. A dialogue box will appear to confirm a the user that this operation is not possible
successful login. Click OK to continue. without the correct login and password.
NOTE: Contact Tigercat Service department to
obtain passwords and additional information.
NOTE: After a successfully login, Windows

provides the option to save the password. If
Yes is selected, only the username will be
required at the next login.
6.102
UPDATE APPLICATION GET CLONE FILE
Before updating an application, it is recommended
that a Clone file and Settings file are taken from
the MD3 and saved.
• Get Clone file and save (*.irc).
A Clone file contains the application, machine
ID, the settings and logs from the MD3. It
is a good record of exactly what was in the
machine before the update.
• Get Settings file and save (*.isa).
A Settings file contains only the settings
(factory defaults and adjustable values) from
GET CLONE
the MD3.
• Update application.
Application programs (*.ida) are available
on the Tigercat dealer website. Refer to
DOWNLOADING APPLICATIONS FROM 1. Click on the Get Clone button on the left.
THE TIGERCAT DEALER WEBSITE in THIS
SECTION. A dialogue box will appear prompting the user
to select whether or not to get the logs with the
clone.
2. Click on Yes to continue.
3. IQANrun will now get a clone. This might take

several minutes.
6.103
GET SETTINGS
1. A dialogue box will appear prompting selection GET SETTINGS FILE

of a suitable folder and file name to save the 3. Click on the Get Settings button on the left.
Clone file (.irc).
4. A dialogue box will appear prompting
The file name by default is the machine ID selection of a suitable folder and file name to
(serial number). It is recommended to use the save the Settings file (.irs).
serial number followed by the date for the file
name. The file name by default is the machine ID.
It is recommended to use the serial number
2. Press Save to continue. followed by the date for the file name.
IMPORTANT! 5. Press Save to continue.
A Clone file should rarely be used. It should
only be used if updating the application and/ or IMPORTANT!
settings file is not successful in returning A Settings file should rarely be used. It
a machine’s performance to a previously should only be used if manually adjusting
acceptable state. A Clone file may be date machine settings is not successful in returning
sensitive and should only be used on the day a machine’s performance to a previously
they were taken. acceptable state. Settings files may be date
sensitive and should only be used on the day
A Clone should NOT be used on a machine they were taken.
different than that which it was taken from, as
machine specific configurations may differ and If a Settings file is used on a machine
cause the machine to function improperly. different than that which it was taken from, all
adjustments must be reviewed in IQANrun to
ensure machine specific parameters (such as
options, pump/motor currents, hour counters)
are correct. If this is not done the machine
may function improperly.
6.104
UPDATE APPLICATION TO MD3
UPDATE
11. IQANrun 2 will provide warning to ensure the

machine is not moving and the engine is shut
down (keyswitch in the run position to power
the MD3, engine not running).
Ensure that a Clone file and Settings file are 12. Press OK to continue, if the machine is
saved as a backup prior to Update. Refer to inactive.
GET CLONE FILE and GET SETTINGS FILE
in THIS SECTION.
6. Click on the Update button on the left.
7. A dialogue box will appear, prompting the
selection of an MD3 application file (.ida).
Select the appropriate application file for the
machine.
8. Click on Open to continue.
13. IQANrun will now send the application to the

MD3.
9. IQANrun 2 will request confirmation the

application being loaded is correct.
10. Click on Yes to continue, if the application is
correct.
6.105
14. Once the application is loaded successfully,

the dialogue box will indicate the application
was successfully sent.
The MD3 will restart and show the Main

Display screen of the application.
The Update is now complete.
6.106
ADJUST
1. Click on the Adjust button on the left.
ADJUST
LOCK SYMBOL
INDICATES PIN
REQUIRED
EXAMPLE ADJUST SCREEN
WITHOUT LOGIN ACCESS
2. The adjust groups available will be shown on

the right.
3. Double click an adjust group to adjust
channels in that group.
NOTE: A lock symbol to the left of an adjust
group indicates that a PIN/password is
required to access that group. Contact EXAMPLE ADJUST SCREEN
Tigercat Service department to obtain WITHOUT LOGIN ACCESS
password information.
NOTE: Some adjust groups are accessible
through the MD3 menus unrestricted during
normal operation.
Other service related or owner/supervisor
use related adjust groups are restricted by
passwords on screen or available only through
IQANrun 2 with username and password
restrictions.
Some adjust groups are only visible on screen
for users with the appropriate username and
password login rights.
6.107
MEASURE/GRAPH
1. Click on the Measure button on the left.
STOP START PAUSE STOP

MEASURE
EXPAND
MEASURE
GROUP
USER
DEFINED
MEASURE
GROUPS
COMMENT ZOOM OUT DONE
+ADD -DELETE
9. User defined measure groups can be
customized with the available channels in the
existing groups.
2. All of the predefined measure groups available
It is not possible to add and delete measure
will be shown on the right.
groups or items while you are measuring.
Each group can be expanded to view the Click on the red square to stop measuring and
channels in the groups. enable the +Add and -Delete buttons.
3. To graph the channels in a measure group, Click the +Add button on screen to add a New
double click the measure group and the graph measure group. Click on the New measure
will appear. (A single channel can also be group, then right click to rename the new
chosen for graphing by double clicking on that measure group appropriately.
channel.)
Available channels can then be dragged and
4. Click on the red square to stop measuring. dropped into the New measure group.
Click on the green arrow to start measuring.
To delete User defined measure groups or
Click on pause to pause the graph illustration
items in a group click on the group or item you
while continuing to measure.
wish to remove then click the - Delete button.
5. Click on Comment to add comments to the
NOTE: User defined measure groups are
measure file at any time. The measure file
automatically saved on your PC. These groups
data must be saved (*.irm) retain comments
are application program specific and will be
for later viewing.
available the next time the same application
6. Click on the red square to stop measuring and is in use on any machine using the same
access the zoom function. Select an area of application program.
the graph to zoom in an view in more detail.
Click on Zoom Out to return to the full graph
view.
7. Click on the red square to stop measuring and
access save function. Click on Save to save
the measure data as a *.irm file.
8. Click on the red square to stop measuring and
access print function. Click on print to print
the graph and data recorded.
6.108
LOGS
1. Click on the Logs button on the left.
LOGS
2. Logs available to view and/or clear will be

shown on the right.
NOTE: User name and password access
level rights determine whether the logs can
be viewed and/or cleared. Some log items are
restricted to higher level users only.
3. Double click on the log you wish to view or
click on a log and click on Select to view the
records in the log. Click on Done to return to
the logs screen.
4. Click on Add Record to add a comment to
the system log. For example to record a filter
change or other service event in the log.
Entries are restricted to 250 characters.
5. Click on Clear log to clear log entries for the
selected log.
NOTE: This function is rights restricted.
6. Click on Get Log to get the log information and
save as a *.irf file.
7. Click on Print to print the log being viewed.
8. Click on Save to save the log file as *.irl file.
6.109
SYSTEM
1. Click on the System button on the left.
SYSTEM
2. System info is on the right including the

application program name and the Machine ID
(Serial Number).
3. The Machine ID (Serial Number) is factory set.
However, in the event the MD3 is replaced,
this information would need to be configured
for the new module.
Updating Machine ID information requires a
Login with sufficient rights.
Click on the Machine Id button. Enter the
correct Serial Number. Click Set.
If the update is successful a dialogue box will
pop up. Click OK to acknowledge the update.
A restart of the module will be requested.
Follow the on screen instructions to restart the
module before continuing. If further service
work is being performed you will need to login
to IQANrun 2 again.
6.110
(OPTIONAL)
SERIAL NUMBERS 845*1861 TO 845*2000
SHEET 1 OF 19
56512BR0 1 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC SHEET 1 OF 19
6.111

SHEET 2 OF 19
6.112

SHEET 3 OF 19
6.113

SHEET 4 OF 19
6.114

SHEET 5 OF 19
6.115

SHEET 6 OF 19
6.116

SHEET 7 OF 19
6.117

SHEET 8 OF 19
6.118

SHEET 9 OF 19
6.119

SHEET 10 OF 19
6.120

SHEET 11 OF 19
6.121

SHEET 12 OF 19
6.122

SHEET 13 OF 19
6.123

SHEET 14 OF 19
6.124

SHEET 15 OF 19
6.125

SHEET 16 OF 19
6.126

SHEET 17 OF 19
6.127

SHEET 18 OF 19
6.128

SHEET 19 OF 19
6.129
6.130
SECTION 7 – ENGINE AND ANTI-STALL
C
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM – ANTI-STALL......................................................................................................... 7.12

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM – LOAD SENSING.................................................................................................. 7.10
COMPUTER MD3 CONTROLLED ANTI-STALL DESCRIPTION.............................................................. 7.9
E
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM......................................................................................................... 7.7
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC - START CIRCUIT.................................................................................. 7.6–7.7
F
FLEX DRIVE HUB AND ELEMENT INSTALLATION............................................................................... 7.13

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................................. 7.13
H
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC – MAIN PUMP................................................................................................ 7.9

M
MD3 COMPUTER ANTI-STALL........................................................................................................... 7.7–7.8

HORSEPOWER LIMITING CONTROL – GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................. 7.7–7.8
S
STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE........................................................................................ 7.2–7.3

COLD WEATHER STARTING......................................................................................................... 7.3–7.4
RESTARTING AN ENGINE THAT HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL.......................................................... 7.4–7.5
STARTING THE ENGINE................................................................................................................ 7.2–7.3
STOPPING THE ENGINE............................................................................................................... 7.5–7.6
Engine and Anti-stall Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
STARTING AND STOPPING THE 9. Increase engine speed (rpm) slowly to provide
ENGINE adequate lubrication to the engine bearings
and allow the engine oil pressure to stabilize.
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Ensure that PRE-START CHECKS have been If the engine stalls while operating the
performed. machine, turn the ignition key switch to the
OFF position and REPEAT STEPS 1 to 5.
machine before starting engine. Refer to IMPORTANT!
OPERATING MACHINE – PRE-START Allow a cold engine to warm up at LOW IDLE
CHECKS in SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S for at least five minutes before applying
MANUAL. any load. Check all measured values on the MD3
display often during the warm-up period. Refer to
3. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run COLD WEATHER STARTING in this section.
position.
4. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine CAUTION
start-up.
5. Turn ignition key switch to the RUN Do not attempt to START the engine
position. by shorting across starter terminals as
personal injury could occur. START the
NOTE: The WAIT TO START icon below engine only from operator’s seat.
will appear on the display during the engine
pre-heat time. Heating elements (grid heater)
located in the engine intake manifold are WARNING
turned ON to heat the intake air when starting
the engine. The engine must not be started Do not use ether! Engine is equipped with
until this icon turns OFF. a electrical starting aid. Use of ether may
cause an explosion and severe injury.
6. Then turn the ignition key switch to the start

position to crank the engine.
7. When the engine starts, release the ignition
key switch to the RUN position.
NOTE: If the engine does not start after three
attempts, check the fuel supply system.
8. Set throttle to LOW IDLE speed and
wait three to five minutes before operating with
a load.
7.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Engine and Anti-stall
COLD WEATHER STARTING temperature increases. The warmup mode
operates automatically on cold start-ups
within a hydraulic oil temperature range.
WARNING The temperature range will vary based on
computer control system hydraulic oil settings.
Do not use ether! Engine is equipped with
• Do not activate pilot system.
a electrical starting aid. Use of ether may
cause an explosion and severe injury. • Hydraulic filter bypass icon must be off before
proceeding to Step 2.
IMPORTANT! • Check that the proper hydraulic oil grade is set
Cold start-ups can result in pump failure. Refer to in the computer selection.
APPROVED HYDRAULIC OILS in SECTION 3 of
• Engine coolant temperature must reach 60°C
THIS MANUAL.
(140°F) before proceeding to Step 2.
NOTE: Cold temperatures require the use of an
• Hydraulic Oil temperature must reach
engine block heater and a hydraulic oil heater.
Preheating of hydraulic oil is recommended as • -7°C (20°F) before proceeding to Step 2.
standard procedure in cold weather.
• Check that cooling fan is turning before
proceeding to Step 2.
NOTE: At -18°C (0°F) starting temperature it will
take approximately 30 minutes to complete step 1.
2. Increase engine speed to 1300 rpm and begin
slow boom movements.
• Hydraulic filter bypass icon must be off.
• Operate main boom to raise attachment off
ground.
• Operate stick boom slowly in and out.
• Operate telescopic boom if applicable IN and
H845C-45 AIR INTAKE BY-PASS OUT and check that it is operating correctly.
Remove the air intake by-pass cover to introduce • Rotate the harvesting head and check that it
warm engine compartment air into the engine air is operating correctly. Refer to manufacturer's
intake. Remove the two bolts and cover to open manual for more information.
the by-pass.
3. Swing the upper structure 360° to the left then
During warm weather operation reinstall the cover 360° to the right.
and bolts to block the by-pass.
4. Place travel speed switch in LOW position
and drive machine forward pressing the foot
pedals very gradually. Do not exceed ½ pedal
position.
5. Monitor hydraulic oil temperature, it must
reach 10°C (50°F) before any work may begin.
6. Increase engine speed to 1500 rpm, and begin
driving to work area in LOW travel speed. Do
not fully depress foot pedals until the hydraulic
oil reaches 32°C (90°F). Cutting may begin
but work very slowly. The machine functions
will seem to operate much slower until the
1. Start the engine. systems are warmed up. Avoid operating the
• Warm up mode limits engine rpm and applies boom functions quickly until the hydraulic oil is
the anti-stall so the system can be warmed above 32°C (90°F). Work the machine for 30
gradually from a cold start. Engine rpm minutes at 1500 rpm.
will increase automatically as hydraulic oil
7.3
RESTARTING AN ENGINE THAT HAS RUN 9. If the engine fails to start after 20 seconds,
OUT OF FUEL let go of the key. Wait for two minutes before
If the engine runs out of fuel perform the following: trying again.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely. IMPORTANT!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not
875-337
875-232 engage starter motor for more than 15–20
HAND PRIMER seconds. Wait two minutes between each
PUMP attempt to START the engine. If engine fails
GASKET to start, refer to engine OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
VENT
PLUG
FUEL
GASKET FILTER/
BOWL
FUEL BOWL HEATER
WATER IN FUEL SENSOR
FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

2. Loosen the metal vent plug on the filter head.
3. Turn the ignition key to the on position to
energize the fuel supply shut-off valve.
4. Prime filter by operation the hand primer pump
until fuel spills out the metal vent plug.
5. Close the vent plug.
6. Check for leaks.
7. Clean up any spilled fuel before returning
machine to operation.
WARNING
Do not use ether! The engine is equipped
with an electrical starting aid. Using ether
may cause an explosion and severe injury.
8. Turn the ignition key to the start position. Do

this until the engine starts. As soon as it does,
let go of the key.
7.4
STOPPING THE ENGINE
IMPORTANT!
Stopping the engine immediately after it has been
working under load can result in overheating and
premature wear of the engine components. Follow
the stopping procedure outlined below to allow the
engine to cool.
Always follow this engine shut down procedure.
The important benefits are:
• Extended life of engine, cooling and exhaust
systems.
• Reduced risk of post shutdown fires.
• Interior of machine cools significantly reducing
risk of touching hot surfaces.
1. Turn the saw switch to the OFF position and
STOP the saw. This should be done before
leaving the cutting area.
2. Find a clear and level area at least
15 m (50 ft) from any other equipment to park
the machine.
3. Park the machine and lower the felling head
onto firm ground.
4. Reduce engine speed to LOW IDLE , de-
activate the pilot system and let engine run at
low idle speed for approximately three minutes
minimum to allow dissipation of heat and also
to reduce turbo speed. This will also prevent
loss of coolant by after boil and possible hot
spot damage to the engine.
5. Open power roof and place fan switch in Full
ON position.
6. Do not increase engine speed before shut-off.
7. Place fan switch in AUTO position.
8. Stop the engine by turning ignition key switch
to the OFF position.
9. Perform daily maintenance at the end of the
shift (greasing, clean engine compartment
etc.). This allows the machine time to cool
down while under the watchful eye of the
operator.
7.5
ELECTRICAL BOX BAT + UNSWITCHED POWER

RED
418A 87a
SYSTEM 24 VOLTS
RED
ECM BATTERY DISCONNECT RELAY RED 87
30 418 2-12VOLT 925 CCA BATTERIES
441
85
IN SERIES.
86
60A IN BATTERY BOX
LOCATED IN UPPER FRAME ELECTRICAL BOX BATTERIES

RED + - + -
640
ELEC BOX SWITCHED POWER

T3
125A
125A
60A
60A
60A
40A
T4 BATTERY
RED DISCONNECT
352B INSIDE
FSS SYSTEM HARNESS MANUAL FIRE
RELAYS CAB
WORK LIGHTS IN BATTERY BOX
CAB POWER
KEY SWITCH RUN / ACC
START RELAY
SUPPRESSION
GRID HEATER
ROOF PUMP
BUTTON
10A AMEREX
RED RED RED FSS
418B 350
352A
RED RED RED

352 351A 351 THE FSS SYSTEM
RED RED HAS A BUILT IN
RED RELAY TO DISCONNECT
104 RED RED RED
BATTERY DISCONNECT 351B 351C 351D A POWER SOURCE WHEN
RED LOCKABLE SWITCH
To Sheet 5
To Sheet 4
RED SYSTEM IS ACTIVATED

460 98
To Sheet 3
TO SHEET 3 AC CHARGING
GND (B-)
To Sheet 3
To Sheet 2,4
TO SHEET 8 SYSTEM
RED RED TO SHEET 8 BAT (B+) ALTERNATOR
96 461 24 VOLT
ALTERNATOR CABLE START SOLENOID
To Sheet 3
To Sheet 5
BATTERY CABLE
+ - START
7.5A KEY
SWITCH TAN CIRCUIT
VACUUM RED
491 RED 467
CIRCUIT WORK LIGHT STARTER
491A TAN
SHEET 14 RELAY
BAT 792
SHEET 3 START SOLENOID RELAY
RED 87a
828 ST
RED FROM SHEET 4
TAN 30
START/ 87 760A
RELAY 827 BLK STARTER
RED LOCKOUT
354A RED VACUUM 86 85 G701 CONTROL
RELAY
& 354 CIRCUIT FROM IQAN XA2 #2
354B T2 TAN PIN 22
SHEET 14 701
SHEET 13
87a
T1
87a TO IQAN XS2 START
30 TAN
16B SHEET 9 SIGNAL
87
30 TAN
RUN 29
87 86 85
RELAY START RELAY BLK
86 85 G354A
GRN
RED TAN 537 USED ON HARVESTERS
607 87a RED 490 WITH A PILOT INTERLOCK
02 T1
INPUT TO HARVESTER
ACCESSORY 30
87 GRN T2 GRN
RELAY PILOT SIGNAL
11A 11C PILOT ON
86 85 PILOT TO IQAN XS2 MODULE
PILOT OFF SIGNAL
RESET SHEET 9
To Sheet 5 & 11
TAN
105 TAN GRN
T1 107 11F
87a PILOT
RED GRN BLK
RED 489 PILOT ON/OFF
T3 DOOR 11 ON G11
20 RED SOLENIOD
SWITCH
489 30 TAN
5A 105B GRN SAW SIGNAL
87 GRN 3
11C 11D 2 TO IQAN XS2 MODULE SAW SIGNAL
86 85 87a 1 SHEET 9
6 GRN
FUNCTION LOCK SAW 30 TAN 5
OUT RELAY 4 35A
RELAY 87 133B TAN SAW SWITCH
133A SHOWN OFF
86 85
BLK
G133
TAN
133
RED BLK
609 G11A
From IQAN
XS2 Pin 9
SHEET 9
3A
RED TO SENSORS
481 SHEET 10
3A
RED TO THROTTLE
07 SHEET 5
5A
RED BLK FUEL SHUT OFF
534 G534 VALVE
RED
02
RED
20 RUN (SHEET 4,9)
ACCESSORIES (SHEET 3,4,8,11,13)
56512BR0S1 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC - START CIRCUIT

7.6
MD3 COMPUTER ANTI-STALL
HORSEPOWER LIMITING CONTROL –
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
In the past it was common to overload an engine
when several high load functions were used at the
same time. Engine overload was typically avoided
only by the operator. To prevent engine overload,
the machine is equipped with an electronic system
which detects any decrease in engine rpm and de-
strokes the main pump to reduce the load on the
engine and at the same time maintain engine rpm.
This is done without any input from the operator.
An MD3 computer is used to prevent engine
overload and incorporates the following
components:
• MD3 computer and display MD3 COMPUTER AND DISPLAY
822C-188
• XS2–A0 Module (Cab)

• XA2–A0 Expansion Module
• XA2–A1 Expansion Module
• Engine Electronic Control Unit
XS2-A0
not shown
XA2-A1
XA2-A0
H845C-55 XA2 ENGINE FRAME MODULES H845C-137 XS2-A0 CAB MODULE
MD3 COMPUTER
AND DISPLAY
XS2-A0 MODULE XA2-A0 MODULE XS2-A1 MODULE
9 PIN ENGINE ENGINE ELECTRONIC

DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR
880-105 COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
7.7
860C-410
A two position anti-stall switch labelled ON -

OFF , is located on the front control panel and
is used to turn the anti-stall system ON or OFF.
When this switch is in the ON position and the
H845C-132
engine is set to FULL throttle the electronic
• The engine ECU provides engine rpm, anti-stall system will signal the main pump to
boost pressure and other engine signals to de-stroke and reduce the flow of oil to the main
the computer control system. These engine valve in order to reduce the load on the engine
signals are used by the computer to determine and prevent stalling.
anti-stall requirements.
During normal operating conditions the engine
• Other signals from sensors such as the air should be running at FULL throttle and the
filter restriction, hydraulic oil temperature hot anti-stall switch in the on position.
and fan purge are also used by the anti-stall
The engine anti-stall system can be turned OFF
system.
when required for maintenance work.
The MD3 control module in the cab receives and
distributes signals as follows:
Inputs:
The computer monitors analogue, digital, and
J1939 CAN Bus inputs. CAN Bus is a data bus
system that allows several input signals to be sent
between modules through a reduced number of
wires. The engine rpm is monitored as a J1939
input.
Outputs:
ENGINE The computer directs a proportional output
ANTI-STALL
'POR' ADJUSTING
SCREW (TURN OUT SOLENOID (24 Volt electrical current) to the solenoid
TO DECREASE VALVE on the main pump. This electrical signal is a
PRESSURE)
current output signal which provides for precise
MARGIN PRESSURE
ADJUSTING SCREW
LOAD SENSE modulation of the anti-stall solenoid valve on the
PRESSURE PORT
(TURN OUT TO (UNDERSIDE OF main pump.
DECREASE MARGIN BLOCK)
PRESSURE)
H845C-013 MAIN PUMP CONTROLLER
• A solenoid valve - mounted on the main pump

controller.
7.8
COMPUTER MD3 CONTROLLED ANTI- Warm-up mode
STALL DESCRIPTION This mode turns on the anti-stall output when
The computer anti-stall reduces main pump output the hydraulic oil temperature is below a
torque/hp by reducing pump displacement two predetermined minimum operating temperature.
ways. As the oil temperature approaches the minimum
temperature, the anti-stall output is reduced in a
linear fashion.
PROPORTIONAL Fan Purge
SOLENOID
When the fan purges (reverses), the anti-stall
comes on partially, to reduce engine load while
there is reduced cooling capacity.
Anti-stall
MAIN PUMP
845CH-077 HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
• The main pump has a mechanical output
torque limiter (the torque limiter is often
referred to as horse power control). To
determine the pumps output torque the pump
takes the current displacement and multiplies
it by the current operating pressure. The pump When the anti-stall switch is on, two things are
has a preset maximum torque value and monitored to determine how much anti-stall output
when either pressure or displacement tries is required. (Again, the higher the output (current)
to increase beyond this value, the pump will the more anti-stall or the lower the pump's torque/
mechanically reduce its displacement. hp)
• The MD3 computer also sends current to a First engine rpm. If the engine speed is less than
proportional solenoid on the pump. As current 1150 rpm, the anti-stall is on. The amount the
increases, the pump's preset maximum torque anti-stall is on is dependent on the speed.
value decreases. This type of torque control is Example: 1150 rpm - 0% anti-stall, 1050 rpm -
often referred to as horsepower (hp) control. 50% anti-stall, 950 rpm and below - 100% anti-
The amount of current to the proportional stall.
solenoid on the pump is displayed on the MD3 Second, and most recognizable, anti-stall comes
in the measure menu. Refer to COMPUTER on when the engine rpm drops or droops below
– MAIN MENU PAGE - MEASURE MENU the set Start Reduction Value (a range between 50
– INPUT AND OUTPUT CHANNELS in and 250 rpm) based on engine speed. Example:
SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL. at high idle the set point is 2250 rpm, the anti-stall
NOTE: The higher the current output the more comes on if the engine drops below 2200 rpm if
anti-stall or the lower the pump's torque/hp. Start Reduction Value is set at
50 rpm; set points are programed depending on
engine speed.
Anti-stall output is determined by looking at all the
above functions and the one that has the highest
output controls the current output to the main
pump solenoid control.
7.9
MD3 COMPUTER
AND DISPLAY
LOAD SENSE PRESSURE

SENSOR
PUMP HP LIMITER
(ANTI-STALL)
TO ANTI-STALL SWITCH
ON CONTROL PANEL
(IN CAB) TO OIL COOLER
TO TANK
J1939
ENGINE ECU
FROM OIL
COOLER
'P'
PRESSURE LS
PORT
TO OIL
COOLER
MAIN
MAIN CONTROL
PUMP VALVE
(PRESSURE
COMPENSATED)
'COMP' PORT
SAW VALVE
A
IN
SAW PUMP
'LS' SIGNAL TO MAIN

PUMP
'LS'
A
'LS' ('PL')
TEST PORT 'P'
TEST
PORT
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE

7.10
LEGEND
SUPPLY TO PILOT FROM SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE TO PILOT SAW PRESSURE LINE
REDUCING VALVE MANIFOLD VALVE DRAIN LINE
'G2' PORT PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE
SERVO PILOT PRESSURE

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
FOR PUMP
CONTROLLER
TO CASE DRAIN
STRAINER
PILOT SUPPLY TO ANTI-

STALL CONTROLLER
'LS' FROM
LEVELING VALVE
'LS' FROM MAIN

CONTROL VALVE
845C-117 MAIN PUMP LOAD SENSING, PILOT AND SERVO HOSE CONNECTIONS
7.11
XS2 MODULE
GRN 442 10 VIN A DOUT A 8
GRN 256 11 VIN B DOUT B 9
GRN 253 12 VIN C DOUT C 22
GRN 445 13 VIN D DOUT D 23
GRN 381 24 VIN E DOUT E 36
10A
GRN 380 25 VIN F DOUT F 37
RED ANTI STALL GRN 251 38 VIN G
20
RED 2 1 GRN
GRN 364 VIN H
39
353 GRN 364
7 8 364A RED 614 42 +VREF DOUT L 7
To Sheet 6
BLK BLK 615 29 -VREF DIN T 35
ACCESSORY RELAY G364
XA2 #1 MODULE
10 VIN A DOUT A 8 TAN 402
11 VIN B DOUT B 9 TAN 622
12 VIN C DOUT C 22 701
13 VIN D DOUT D 23 GRN 739
24 VIN E DOUT E 36 820
25 VIN F DOUT F 37 821
38 VIN G
39 VIN H
42 +VREF COUT F 7 TAN 586 N/U

29 -VREF CRET F- 35 817 N/U
CRET F+ 21 GRN 585 N/U
COUT E 6 TAN 440

CRET E- 34 N/U
CRET E+ 20 GRN 392
COUT D TAN
5 TAN 390
390
CRET D- 33 N/U
GRN
CRET D+ 19 GRN 391
391
ANTI STALL
(MAIN PUMP)
845CH-102 ANTI-STALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
7.12
FLEX DRIVE HUB AND ELEMENT
INSTALLATION
PUMP INPUT
SHAFT
FLEX DRIVE H845C-212

HUB
FLEX DRIVE
ELEMENT
845CH-223
When installing a flex drive hub, it is important that

the hub is mounted in the correct position on the
pump input shaft.
CRANK
Installing the hub to far onto the pump shaft will SHAFT
PULLEY
result in insufficient contact between the flex drive 845CH-224
element and hub resulting in component failure.
3. Install a dial indicator and magnetic base
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE at a suitable location. Position the indicator
1. The engine crank shaft end play must be extension on the outer face of the pulley.
checked before and after the pump assembly 4. Zero the dial indicator.
is installed on the engine.
5. Gently pry the crank shaft pulley away from
2. Measure crank shaft end play at the engine the engine noting the amount of end play.
crank shaft pulley. Gently pry the crank shaft
as far as it will go towards the engine. IMPORTANT!
Do not pry using the engine speed ring.
Severe component damage could occur.
6. Repeat steps 2, 4 and 5 several times and
average the readings. Record the average
crank shaft end play.
7. Fit the flex drive hub to the splined input shaft
of the pump.
7.13
MAIN PUMP
MOUNTING
FLANGE
44 mm
(1.730 in)
DOG INSIDE MAIN PUMP

EDGE ASSEMBLY
FLEX
DRIVE
HUB
PUMP INPUT
SHAFT
PUMP INPUT
SHAFT
FLEX DRIVE HUB
MAIN PUMP
MOUNTING
FLANGE
845CH-225 PUMP COUPLER (SIDE VIEW)
8. Position the flex drive hub so the distance

SET
between the inside edge of the dog and the SCREWS DOG INSIDE
EDGE
pump mounting flange is 44 mm (1.730 in)
FLEX
9. Apply loctite 242 to the flex drive hub set DRIVE
HUB
screws. Install and torque set screws to
120 Nm (89 lbf-ft)
DOGS
845CH-234
7.14
ENGINE FLEX DRIVE

FLYWHEEL ELEMENT
BOLTS (8)
POSSIBLE
INTERFERENCE
POINTS
FLEX DRIVE
ELEMENT
845CH-222
Apply loctite 242 to the flex drive element

bolts. Install the flex drive element to the
engine flywheel and torque bolts to
40 Nm (30 lbf-ft). Make sure to only use the
thin washers previously used on the assembly.
Using improper washers will cause component
interference between the flex drive element
bolts and the pump mounting plate and will
PUMP
MOUNTING
damage the engine.
ENGINE
PLATE
FLYWHEEL IMPORTANT!
It is important to replace fasteners and
LARGER FLEX DRIVE washers if necessary with the exact same
OFFSET
SURFACE
ELEMENT fasteners and washers.
BOLTS (8)
FLEX DRIVE
ELEMENT
845CH-229
10. The flex drive element has an offset surface

where the flex drive hub fits into. This offset
surface is greater on one side of the element
compared to the other side. The larger offset
surface must be facing the engine flywheel.
7.15
15. Repeat steps 2, 4 and 5 to measure crank
PUMP
MOUNTING shaft end play at the engine crank shaft pulley.
PLATE
PUMP MOUNTING The end play measured should be the same
PLATE BOLTS as the initial dimension recorded earlier. If the
dimension is less than the initial measurement
the cause of interference must be investigated
and corrected.
IMPORTANT!
Do not run the engine until the recorded crankshaft
end play is obtained or risk component failure.
PUMP BOLTS
845CH-221
11. Apply loctite 242 to the pump bolts. Use the

pump bolts to fasten the mounting plate to the
pump. Tighten the pump bolts just snug. The
bolts will be torqued after the pump assembly
has been installed to the engine.
12. Apply loctite 242 to the pump mounting plate
bolts.
13. Install the pump assembly to the engine bell-
housing and torque bolts to 34 Nm (25 lbf-ft).
14. Torque pump bolts to 542 Nm (400 lbf-ft).
7.16
Tigercat H845C/LH845C Feller Buncher
SECTION 10 – COOLING SYSTEM
C
CHARGE AIR COOLER (CAC).............................................................................................................. 10.30

COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM......................................................................................................... 10.10
COOLING SYSTEM................................................................................................................................. 10.2
E
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
FAN CONTROL.................................................................................................................................. 10.14
FAN CONTROL VALVE........................................................................................................................ 10.8
F
FAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................... 10.10

COOLING FAN SWITCH.................................................................................................................... 10.10
AUTO POSITION............................................................................................................................ 10.11
CLEAN POSITION.......................................................................................................................... 10.11
FULL ON POSITION....................................................................................................................... 10.10
FAN ROTATION.................................................................................................................................. 10.11
SERVICE MODE............................................................................................................................. 10.12
TIMED PURGE............................................................................................................................... 10.12
FAN SPEED........................................................................................................................................10.13
FAN CONTROL VALVE............................................................................................................................ 10.8
FAN MOTOR............................................................................................................................................10.9
FAN OPERATION................................................................................................................................... 10.17
A/C AND DEFROST FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 10.17
A/C AND DEFROST FUNCTION WHEN CLEAN MODE IS ON........................................................ 10.19
FAN FULL ON SPEED........................................................................................................................ 10.21
FAN SPEED – DEFAULT.................................................................................................................... 10.22
FILTER RESTRICTION PRESSURE SWITCH........................................................................................ 10.6
H
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

FAN CONTROL.................................................................................................................................. 10.16
OIL COOLER........................................................................................................................................ 10.6
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK............................................................................................................................ 10.5
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
FAN CONTROL.................................................................................................................................. 10.15
FAN CONTROL VALVE........................................................................................................................ 10.8
FAN MOTOR.........................................................................................................................................10.9
FAN PUMP............................................................................................................................................10.7
OIL COOLER BY-PASS VALVE............................................................................................................ 10.4
M
MAIN CONTROL VALVE.......................................................................................................................... 10.5

MAIN PUMP.............................................................................................................................................10.5
O
OIL COOLER CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 10.6

OIL COOLER RETURN MANIFOLD........................................................................................................ 10.4
OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAUGES................................................................................................................... 10.4
P
PRESSURE SETTINGS......................................................................................................................... 10.24

POR PRESSURE............................................................................................................................... 10.26
STAND-BY PRESSURE..................................................................................................................... 10.24
R
RADIATOR.............................................................................................................................................10.28
10.1
Cooling System Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
COOLING SYSTEM The cooler package components should
be checked every 8 hours (every shift) for
Cooling system components such as the
accumulation of twigs, leaves, pine needles and
hydraulic oil cooler, radiator, charge air cooler
dust. All engine enclosure doors should also be
and A/C condenser are mounted at the rear of
kept clean.
the upper structure. A debris screen is used to
protect the cooler package components. The
hydraulically powered cooling fan regulates CAUTION
fans speed according to working temperatures
for coolant, intake air, and hydraulic oil. The fan
draws air through the screen and cooler package
components.
The fan is designed to auto reverse periodically
or manually reverse to keep debris from
accumulating in the coolers. Refer to FAN
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION – FAN ROTATION in
THIS SECTION. Use personal protective equipment to
guard against flying debris.
Compressed air or water may be used to clean

the cooler package. Care must be taken not to set
the pressure too high otherwise damage to the
components could result.
For detailed cleaning procedures, refer to
PRESSURE WASHING in SECTION 3 of THIS
MANUAL.
COOLER PACKAGE LOCATION
10.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Cooling System
DEBRIS SCREEN
CHARGE AIR
COOLER (CAC)
A/C CONDENSER
RADIATOR
OIL COOLER
RADIATOR FILL
CAP
SURGE
TANK
COOLANT
LEVEL
SENSOR
FAN
FAN
SHROUD
FAN
MOTOR
FAN
GUARD NOTE: REGULARLY
CHECK FOR DEBRIS
ACCUMULATION
BETWEEN CHARGE AIR
COOLER, RADIATOR, AND
A/C CONDENSER
845CH-100 COOLING ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS

10.3
OIL COOLER
BYPASS VALVE
1
845C-062
845CH-105 MAIN CONTROL VALVE OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAUGES

Two sight gauges (1) are used to indicate the level
OIL COOLER RETURN MANIFOLD of the hydraulic oil in the tank with high and low
There is a return manifold attached to the main level limits. Also incorporated into the sight gauges
control valve. The return manifold contains an oil are level switches. These gauges are accessible
cooler bypass valve that is set at 7 bar (100 psi). through the left side door. Refer to SECTION
In the event that the pressure within the oil cooler 2 of the OPERATOR'S MANUAL for additional
becomes too high, the bypass valve will redirect information.
oil to the return filter manifold to prevent cooler
IMPORTANT!
failure.
Always keep the hydraulic oil level up to within 5
cm (2 in.) of the high mark. A low hydraulic oil level
will result in severe damage to pumps.
845C-247 OIL COOLER BY-PASS VALVE SCHEMATIC

10.4
1
1. HYDRAULIC TANK
2. RETURN FILTERS
3. STRAINERS
4. FILTER/BREATHER
845C-001 FILTER/
845C-097 BREATHER
AIR VENT
VALVE HANDLE
SCHRADER
VALVE
MANIFOLD
AIR VENT PRESSURE

3 EXHAUST GAUGE
845C-097
845CH-076 HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

Also refer to SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S
IMPORTANT!
PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK.
MANUAL and SECTION 3 for additional 34.5 kPa (5 psi) MAXIMUM.
information. Before servicing hydraulic system, wearing eye
Located on the left side of the machine behind the protection, release air pressure from tank using
cab, the hydraulic tank (1) has a capacity of air vent valve. FILTER/
BREATHER
190 L (50 US gal). AIR VENT
VALVE HANDLE
All return oil entering the tank passes through six SCHRADER
VALVE
spin-on hydraulic oil filters (2) and is screened
prior to entering the tank by passing through MANIFOLD
reusable strainers (3) attached to the ends of the
return tubes at the bottom of the tank.
Refer also to HYDRAULIC OIL TANK in SECTION
4 of this MANUAL.
845C-097
MAIN PUMP 845C-001
AIR VENT
EXHAUST
PRESSURE
GAUGE
For operation and adjustment of this pump refer to After service is completed, close air vent valve
SECTION 4 of THIS MANUAL. and add air pressure from a clean air source to
the hydraulic tank via the Schrader valve. Do not
MAIN CONTROL VALVE
exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi). Refer to HYDRAULIC
For operation and description of this valve refer to TANK PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS in
SECTION 4 of THIS MANUAL. SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for details.
10.5
OIL COOLER CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
OIL COOLER
LEGEND BYPASS VALVE
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE CAN
LINE WIRE FILTER RESTRICTION
PRESSURE SWITCH
A
B B B B
A A A A
RETURN FILTERS
OIL COOLER/
MAIN CONTROL VALVE BYPASS MANIFOLD
FROM MAIN PUMP
OIL COOLER
'A' PORT
845CH-228 OIL COOLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

The oil cooler circuit operates as part of the main FILTER RESTRICTION PRESSURE
hydraulic circuit. SWITCH
The main pump draws oil from the hydraulic tank
and sends it to the main control valve. Return oil
from the main control valve sections exits the base
manifold at two 'T' ports.
Hydraulic return oil from the swing motor, track
drive motors, stick, hoist and head rotate, pass
through the return circuits on the top and bottom of
the main valve.
Return oil flows from the oil cooler bypass
manifold to one of the inlet ports on the oil cooler
and through the cooler. 855C-035
Cooling of the oil occurs as air is drawn over the

oil cooler cooling fins by the cooling fan. Cooled A 1.4 bar (20 psi) filter restriction pressure switch
oil then flows through the return filter manifold, the is installed in the return manifold. When an oil flow
return filters and back to the hydraulic tank. A 1.7 in excess of 1.4 bar (20 psi) is encountered at the
bar (25 psi) bypass valve is incorporated into each return filters, this pressure switch closes and the
pair of return filter heads. Oil will bypass through hydraulic oil filter bypass icon displays RED on
these valves back to tank if filters get plugged. the MD3 computer. The master alarm and alarm
light will sound and flash continuously.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use these warnings as a substitute for
checking the oil level at regular intervals as per the
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE program in THIS
SECTION.
This information is assuming that operating
conditions and running temperatures are normal.
10.6
FAN PUMP STANDBY
MAXIMUM PRESSURE
845C-253 PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT SOLENOID
CONTROL
FAN PUMP CONTROLLER

SWASH CONTROL
CONTROL PLATE PISTON
SPRING
B C
Fan Pump
A Proportional Solenoid
B POR Adjustment Screw
C Standby Adjustment Screw
The fan pump is an axial-piston variable-

displacement pump with electronic controlled
proportional solenoid flow control valve.
ROTARY
GROUP
860C-277
860C-278 FAN PUMP CROSS SECTION
845C-249 FAN PUMP SCHEMATIC
10.7
FAN CONTROL VALVE
TO FAN MOTOR
The fan control valve controls fan direction and PILOT
OPERATED
limits system pressure. DIRECTIONAL
VALVE (PD1)
DIRECTIONAL
SOLENOID
VALVE (SV1)
A
RELIEF
VALVE (RV1)
B WITH ANTI-
CAVITATION
CHECK
C
Fan Control Valve

A Relief Valve
B Pilot Operated Directional Control Valve
C Directional Solenoid Valve
The main components in the fan control valve are:

FAN CONTROL VALVE
• Relief Vale 845CH-107 HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
• Pilot Operated Directional Control Valve
• Directional Solenoid Valve To 353
Sheet 3
A pilot operated directional valve and directional PIN 32 IQAN XS2

solenoid valve on the fan control valve are used PIN 18 SEE SHEET 9
FOR XS2 MODULE
TAN
by the MD3 computer to control fan direction. The 254
TAN
INFORMATION
directional solenoid valve is a cartridge style valve. 1

384
It is factory set and nonadjustable. The directional RED

353 2
3
solenoid valve (SV1) on the fan control valve FAN

SWITCH
determines fan rotation. POSITION 1, PURGE/CLEAN (REVERSE)

POSITION 3, FAN OVERRIDE (FORWARD FULL ON)
MIDDLE POSITION , AUTO (FORWARD AUTO VARIABLE SPEED)
The relief valve controls system pressure in the
fan circuit.
FAN CONTROL
NOTE: The relief valve is factory set and should TAN
402
FAN REVERSE BLK
G402
require no further adjustment. PIN 8 FAN

IQAN XA2 #1 CONTROL
PIN 6 TAN FAN SPEED
SEE SHEET 11
440
FOR XA2 #1 MODULE
PIN 20 GRN
INFORMATION 392
FAN SPEED COIL IS MOUNTED DIRECTLY

ON FAN PUMP, FAN REVERSE COIL IS
MOUNTED ON FAN MANIFOLD.
FAN CONTROL VALVE

860CH-115 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
10.8
FAN MOTOR FAN
The fan drive motor is a fixed displacement gear

motor. The fan drive motor is driven by hydraulic
oil from the fan pump via the fan control valve.The
motor directly drives the fan.
H845C-104
TO RETURN
STRAINER
FINGER
GUARD
FAN
MOTOR
R
H845C-56 FAN MOTOR
A B
FROM FAN FROM FAN

MANIFOLD 'B' MANIFOLD 'A'
(REVERSE) (FORWARD) H845C-135 FAN MOTOR
FAN MOTOR HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
10.9
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM FAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The computer control system is part of a network COOLING FAN SWITCH
of components. Temperature sensors, switches
and adjustments on the MD3 computer controls
the fan speed and direction. Refer to COMPUTER
CONTROL SYSTEM in SECTION 2 of the
OPERATOR'S MANUAL or SECTION 6 of the
FULL ON
SERVICE MANUAL for more information. POSTION
AUTO POSITON
CLEAN
POSITION
724G-011 COOLING FAN SWITCH
The cooling fan switch has three positions:

• Full on
• Auto
• Clean.
The switch sends input signals to the MD3
computer which sends output signals to the
fan control valve and fan pump. Fan speed is
determined when the switch is in the auto or full on
position.
FULL ON POSITION
When the switch is in the full on position, the fan
will run at full speed regardless of charge air,
coolant or oil temperatures. The full on position is
intended for use in the event of a temporary failure
of the fan control.
The fan full on icon will be shown in grey on
the MD3 display when the switch is in the full on
position.
NOTE: Placing the switch in the full on position
activates the MD3 computer to alert the operator.
Also when the switch is in the full on position the
automatic cleaning cycle is prevented. Refer to
COMPUTER – MESSAGES - INFORMATION –
FAN FULL ON in SECTION 6 of this MANUAL.
10.10
FAN ROTATION
Fan rotation is controlled by the directional
solenoid valve and pilot operated directional
control valve on the fan control valve. Fan rotation
will reverse when:
A/C POSITION
• Cooling fan switch is placed in the clean
position.
• Fan service mode has been selected on the
DEFROST
POSITION MD3 computer.
• A timed purge interval has been activated.
875-366 A/C DEFROST SWITCH

FULL ON
POSTION
AUTO POSITION
Auto position is the normal operating position for AUTO POSITON
the fan control switch. When the switch is in the
CLEAN
auto position, the fan will operate in automatic POSITION
mode. It will start, speed up, and slow down
based on the temperature of the charge air,
engine coolant and hydraulic oil temperatures. To
maintain optimal operating conditions, the MD3
computer automatically adjusts output current
to the proportional solenoid valve to adjust fan 724G-011 COOLING FAN SWITCH
speed.
Pressing the cooling fan switch in the clean
When the cooling fan switch is in the auto position position will reverse the fan. If the hydraulic oil
fan speeds also adjust to input signals from the temperatures are low this operation is prevented
A/C defrost switch. Turning ON the A/C or defrost to protect system components. Hydraulic oil
function will cause the MD3 computer to increase temperatures preventing the fan from reversing
cooling fan speed. This is to ensure that sufficient are dependent on the viscosity grade used. The
air flow is available for the A/C and defrost table below shows the hydraulic oil temperatures
systems even when the machine is warming up. that prevent the fan from reversing.
The fan auto icon will illuminate in green on
the MD3 display when the switch is in the auto Viscosity Grade Hydraulic Oil Temperature
position. ISO 22 5°C (41°F) or below
CLEAN POSITION ISO 32 15°C (59°F) or below
Momentarily pressing the switch in the clean Univis Ultra Multi 7°C (45°F) or below
position sends an input signal to the MD3 ISO 46 21°C (70°F) or below
computer. The MD3 computer then sends
ISO 68 31°C (87°F) or below
an output signal to the fan control valve. The
Directional solenoid valve shifts, re-directing The fan clean icon will illuminate in green on
airflow through the cooler package components the MD3 display when the clean cycle operates.
to remove dust and debris. Refer to CAB
CONTROLS – COOLING FAN - SWITCH in NOTE: The pilot system must be on to operate the
SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S MANUAL. clean cycle. Also, the MD3 computer will turn A/C
and defrost systems off when in the clean mode.
10.11
SERVICE MODE TIMED PURGE
The timed purge interval will reverse the fan at
automatic intervals. The MD3 computer sends an
output signal to the reversing valve on the motor.
The reversing valve shifts changing the flow of oil
through the motor, changing direction of rotation.
Refer to COMPUTER – MAIN MENU PAGE -
ADJUST MENU – MACHINE PARAMETERS –
TIMED PURGE INTERVAL of the OPERATORS
MANUAL.
When service mode is selected on the MD3

computer, an output signal is sent to the directional
solenoid valve on the fan control valve. This
causes the directional solenoid valve to shift
which allows hydraulic oil to flow to the pilot
operated direction control valve. The pilot operated
direction control valve will also shift causing the
fan motor to turn in the opposite direction. This
re-directs airflow through the cooler package
components to remove dust and debris. Refer to
CAB CONTROLS – COOLING FAN - SWITCH in
NOTE: The MD3 computer will turn service mode
off if the roof is closed. Also, the MD3 computer
will turn A/C and defrost functions off when fan
service mode is on.
10.12
FAN SPEED
Fan speed is determined by the amount of
current supplied from the MD3 computer to the
proportional solenoid valve on the fan pump. The
amount of current supplied by the MD3 computer
is determined by a number of factors:
• Hydraulic oil temperature (output current
varies with oil grade selected)
• Charge air temperature
• Engine coolant temperature
• Cooling fan switch
• A/C defrost switch
• MD3 computer adjustments
Fan speed is controlled by the MD3 computer
which receives input signals from temperature
sensors in the engine cooling system, hydraulic
tank and engine air intake system.
Input signals from temperature sensors, identifying
cool temperatures, prompt the MD3 computer to
reduce cooling system requirements. This results
in a higher output signal from the MD3 computer
to the fan pump proportional relief valve. Maximum
output current to the proportional relief valve is
600 mA.
Input signals from temperature sensors, identifying
hot temperatures, prompt the MD3 computer to
increase cooling system requirements. This results
in a lower output signal from the MD3 computer to
the fan pump proportional relief valve. Minimum
output current to the proportional relief valve is 0
mA.
NOTE: If the output signal should be lost or
interrupted to the proportional relief valve the
fan pump will automatically default to maximum
speed.
Fan speed can also be controlled by the MD3
computer when it receives input signals from the
cooling fan switch and A/C defrost switch.
10.13
CAB POWER FUSE

SHEET 1 AC / HEAT
COMBO UNIT
To 353 RED
Sheet 3 98 87a
OFF RED
87a
35A LOW
RED M
31 RED MED YEL 30
30 87
87 235 HI FAN MOTORS
RED
353 85 ORANGE 86 85
86
BLK CAB HEAT &
RED 87a M
A/C SYSTEM
BLK
G20 2 3 2 3 BLK
30
1 1 WHT
87
TEMP
RED 86 85
SWITCH
BLK
BLK/WHT
DEFROST
ORG ORG ORG ORG BLK COMPRESSOR
G 30 T1 T1 10 46 524 G524 CLUTCH
ORG
30A LOW HIGH
A/C T3 T2
2 1 ORG PRESSURE PRESSURE
DEFROST
3 655 SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH
7 87a
G 30
TAN TAN 87
A/C BLK
617 175 86 85 G175A
A/C OFF ORG
RELAY 662
BLK
G617
RED
2 3
353
TAN
DEFROST 654
RELAY
1 4 BLK
G654
PIN 23
PIN 31
PIN 17
PIN 3
PIN 32 IQAN XS2

PIN 18
TAN
254
SEE SHEET 9
FOR XS2 MODULE FAN CONTROL
TAN
INFORMATION
384
TAN FAN REVERSE BLK
1 402 G402
RED FAN CONTROL
353 2
3
PIN 8
FAN IQAN XA2 #1
SWITCH
PIN 6 TAN FAN SPEED
SEE SHEET 11 440
FOR XA2 #1 MODULE
INFORMATION PIN 20 GRN
392
FAN SPEED COIL IS MOUNTED DIRECTLY

POSITION 1, PURGE/CLEAN (REVERSE) ON FAN PUMP, FAN REVERSE COIL IS
POSITION 3, FAN OVERRIDE (FORWARD FULL ON) MOUNTED ON FAN MANIFOLD.
MIDDLE POSITION , AUTO (FORWARD AUTO VARIABLE SPEED)
56512BR0S6 FAN CONTROL ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC

10.14
To Case Drain
Strainer
FAN MOTOR
To Case Drain FAN MOTOR MANIFOLD

Strainer
FAN PUMP
DISPL. 45 cc/REV
From Pilot
Supply Valve
Return to
Tank
ENGINE MAX
From Hydraulic To Case Drain

Tank Strainer
845CH-106 FAN CONTROL HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

10.15
MD3 COMPUTER
AND DISPLAY
COOLING FAN
SWITCH
FAN FULL ON - DIN
FAN PURGE - DIN (CLEAN) FAN SPEED - COUT
FAN REVERSE - COUT
FAN MOTOR
TO CASE
DRAIN
STRAINER
FROM PILOT
SUPPLY VALVE
TO
MAIN
CONTROL FAN CONTROL VALVE
VALVE TANK
GALLERIES
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE
FAN PUMP
TO CASE
DRAIN
STRAINER
845CH-230 FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

10.16
FAN OPERATION
A/C AND DEFROST FUNCTION
When the A/C defrost switch is in the A/C or
defrost position, FAN SPEED COUT should
decrease allowing fan speed to increase. To
determine if this is occurring, the engine coolant,
hydraulic oil, and CAC temperatures must be
below normal operating temperatures.
• Charge air cooler temperature must be
100°F or below
• Engine coolant temperatures must be
195°F or below.
• Hydraulic oil temperature must be below
normal operating temperatures. Determine
what the normal operating temperature is for
the viscosity grade being used from the table 14. Make sure fan service mode is set to off on the
below. MD3. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
MENU – COOLING FAN SERVICE MODE in
Viscosity Grade Hydraulic Oil Temperature SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
ISO 22 43°C (110°F) or below 15. Set engine speed to high idle .
Univis Ultra Multi 65.5°C (150°F) or below
ISO 68 65.5°C (150°F) or below
FULL ON
POSTION
To check for proper operation perform the
following steps.
AUTO POSITON
CLEAN
attachment resting firmly on the ground. POSITION

6. Place a piece of reflecting tape on the fan. 724G-011 COOLING FAN SWITCH
7. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch. 16. Place fan switch in auto position .
position.
start-up
11. Start engine and set engine speed to
high idle .
system.
10.17
A/C POSITION
DEFROST
POSITION
17. Use the MD3 display to monitor FAN SPEED 19. Place A/C defrost switch in the A/C
COUT. The value should be 600 mA. Refer position .
to COMPUTER – MAIN MENU PAGE -
MEASURE MENU – EXAMPLE - MEASURE
MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
18. Use a photo-tachometer to measure the rpm

of the fan. Fan rpm should be 800–1000 rpm. 20. With the A/C Defrost switch in the A/C position,
FAN SPEED COUT should decrease from
600 mA to 571 mA. Fan rpm should increase
moderately.
21. Turn A/C Defrost switch to the OFF position.
22. With the A/C Defrost switch in the OFF
position, FAN SPEED COUT should increase
to 600 mA. Fan rpm should decrease
moderately.
23. Repeat steps 14–20 with the A/C defrost
switch in the defrost position .
10.18
A/C AND DEFROST FUNCTION WHEN
CLEAN MODE IS ON
When the fan is in clean mode the clutch
should disengage the A/C compressor (clutch is
stationary). To check for proper operation perform
the following steps.
temperature.
position.
start-up
10. Use the MD3 display to monitor FAN SPEED
6. Start the engine and set throttle to high idle COUT and FAN REVERSE COUT. Refer
. to COMPUTER – MAIN MENU PAGE -
MEASURE MENU – EXAMPLE - MEASURE
MENU of THIS MANUAL.
system.
NOTE: The pilot system must be ON to
operate clean mode.
A/C POSITION
DEFROST
POSITION
11. Place A/C defrost switch in the A/C

position .
CAUTION
9. Make sure fan service mode is set to off on the
MD3. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
Before placing the fan switch in the CLEAN
position make sure that there are no
personnel at the rear of the machine in the
area where the fan will expel debris!
10.19
FULL ON
POSITION
AUTO POSITION
CLEAN
POSITION

of the fan. Fan rpm should be 1600 rpm.
12. With the aid of an assistant momentarily press

the fan switch in the clean position .
15. The FAN SPEED COUT should be 136 mA

and FAN REVERSE DOUT should be 'True'.
16. When the CLEAN cycle is complete (15
seconds) the fan automatically returns to auto.
845C-252
The clutch should engage the A/C compressor
(clutch is rotating).
A/C Compressor Clutch
A Compressor Disengaged (Clutch is Stationary) 17. Repeat steps 11 – 13 with the A/C defrost
switch in the defrost position .
13. Visually check if the A/C compressor is
disengaged (clutch is stationary). The clutch
should be stationary. 19. Remove the ignition key.
10.20
FAN FULL ON SPEED
temperature.
FULL ON
POSITION
AUTO POSITION
position. CLEAN
POSITION
start-up
6. Start the engine and set throttle to high idle
.
8. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot 724G-011 COOLING FAN SWITCH
system.
10. Place fan switch in full on position .

of the fan. Fan rpm should be 2400 rpm.
9. Make sure fan service mode is set to off on the

MD3. Refer to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT
10.21
FAN SPEED – DEFAULT
In the event power should be lost to the fan pump,
the pump will default to full flow. To check for
proper operation perform the following steps
temperature.
position.
start-up
12. Use the MD3 display to monitor FAN SPEED .
COUT. This value should be 20 mA. Refer 7. Close and latch the front door.
to COMPUTER – MAIN MENU PAGE -
MEASURE MENU – EXAMPLE - MEASURE 8. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL. system.
9. Use the MD3 display to monitor FAN SPEED

COUT. Refer to COMPUTER – MAIN MENU
PAGE - MEASURE MENU – EXAMPLE -
MEASURE MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS
MANUAL.
10.22
845C-253
B C
Fan Pump 11. Use a photo-tachometer to measure the rpm

A Proportional Solenoid of the fan. Minimum fan rpm should be 2200
B POR Adjustment Screw
rpm.
10. Disconnect the wire connection to the

proportional solenoid valve on the fan pump
12. The MD3 computer will detect an open circuit

and set FAN SPEED COUT to 0mA . Make
sure FAN SPEED COUT is 0 mA.
NOTE: Disconnecting the wire connection to the
proportional solenoid valve on the fan pump will
activate the FAN SPEED COUT message on the 15. Remove the ignition key.
MD3 display. 16. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
17. Reconnect the wire connection to the
proportional solenoid on the fan pump.
10.23
PRESSURE SETTINGS STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
STAND-BY PRESSURE
pressure and speed values. TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
Make sure the engine coolant, hydraulic oil, and
860C-001
CAC temperatures are below normal operating
temperatures.
• Charge air cooler temperature must be attachment resting firmly on the ground.
100°F or below
• Engine coolant temperatures must be CAUTION
195°F or below.
• Hydraulic oil temperature must be below Use caution when in the cab as a slight
normal operating temperatures. Determine touch of the controls can cause sudden
what the normal operating temperature is for rotation of the upper structure and boom
the viscosity grade being used from the table assembly
below.
Viscosity Grade Hydraulic Oil Temperature CAUTION
ISO 32 49°C (120°F) or below Be aware of other personnel in the area.
Univis Ultra Multi 65.5°C (150°F) or below operation of the machine.
ISO 68 65.5°C (150°F) or below
WARNING

WARNING


To accurately set stand by pressure the Fan

Speed COUT signal must be 600 mA. Monitor
Fan Speed COUT on the MD3 computer display
throughout the test. Refer to COMPUTER – MAIN
MENU PAGE - MEASURE MENU – EXAMPLE
- MEASURE MENU in SECTION 6 of THIS
MANUAL.
10.24
10. Observe the pressure on the gauge at
the control valve 'G' test port. The value
B
should meet fan pump stand-by pressure
specifications.
845C-253
Fan Control Valve

A 'G' Test Port
1. Connect a 0–70 bar (0–1000 psi) pressure

gauge to the fan control valve 'G' test port.
2. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. B C
3. Check that all personnel are clear of the Fan Pump

machine before starting engine. A Proportional Solenoid
4. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run B POR Adjustment Screw
position.
5. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine 11. If the standby pressure requires adjustment
start-up loosen the fan pump standby pressure
. 12. Adjust the fan pump standby pressure screw
until the pressure gauge reading at 'G' meets
stand-by pressure specifications.
13. Tighten the saw pump margin pressure
system.
FULL ON
POSITION
AUTO POSITION 18. Remove pressure gauges.
CLEAN
POSITION
9. Place fan switch in auto position .
10.25
POR PRESSURE 3. Apply the swing brake.
temperature.
B
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
860C-001
Fan Control Valve

A 'G' Test Port
CAUTION gauge to the saw pump 'P' test port.
845C-253
assembly
A
CAUTION

Fan Pump
WARNING A Proportional Solenoid

Ensure that no one is standing near the proportional solenoid valve at the fan pump.
WARNING

10.26
845C-253
Fan Pump
A POR Adjustment Screw
16. Observe the pressure on the gauge at the

NOTE: Disconnecting the wire connection to the control valve 'G' test port. The value should
proportional solenoid on the fan pump will activate meet fan pump POR pressure specifications.
the FAN SPEED COUT message on the MD3
display. 17. If the POR pressure requires adjustment
loosen the fan pump POR pressure adjusting
9. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. screw locknut.
10. Check that all personnel are clear of the 18. Adjust the fan pump POR pressure screw until
machine before starting engine. the pressure gauge reading at 'G' meets POR
11. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run pressure specifications.
position. 19. Tighten the saw pump POR adjusting screw
12. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine locknut.
start-up 20. Reconnect the wire connection to the
13. Start the engine and set throttle to idle position proportional relief valve on the fan motor.
. 21. Apply swing brake if not already applied.
14. Close and latch the front door. 22. Turn OFF the engine.
15. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot 23. Remove the ignition key.
system.
26. Reconnect the wire connection to the
proportional relief valve on the fan motor.
10.27
RADIATOR
CHARGE AIR COOLER

RADIATOR
RAD CAP
SURGE TANK
OIL COOLER
COOLANT
LEVEL
SENSOR
H845C-47 RADIATOR/OIL COOLER/CHARGE AIR COOLER
The radiator is the centre core section of the side A radiator fill cap mounted on top of the surge
by side heat exchangers in the cooler package. tank maintains a 1.25 bar (18 psi) pressure on the
A surge tank is mounted at the top of the radiator coolant in the radiator. This pressure provides for
to provide for overflow protection during high over boil protection of the cooling system.
temperature and make up coolant when the
cooling system is cold. The surge tank has 5 L WARNING
(1.3 US gal) drawdown capacity, 3 L (0.8 US gal)
expansion capacity, total capacity is 8 L (2.1 US
gal).
SPN: 111 FMI: 1 1 of 1

Engine coolant level low - Only remove radiator fill cap when the
Below normal, severe. cooling system, including the radiator
fill cap and upper radiator tube, is no
longer hot. Turn the radiator fill cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops. Do not
press down while turning the radiator fill cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
A low coolant sensor is installed on the side of the means there is still some pressure left.
surge tank. The sensor will activate the engine Keep turning the radiator fill cap, but now
coolant level low message on the MD3 display. push down as you turn it. Remove the
Refer to COMPUTER – MESSAGES - CRITICAL radiator fill cap.
– ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL LOW in SECTION 6
of THIS MANUAL. A shut off valve located on the bottom of the
radiator tube provides a drain for the engine
coolant. It is recommended that the engine coolant
(60% antifreeze – 40% distilled water) be changed
every two years.
10.28
FLOW OF COOLANT WITH VENT

ENGINE RUNNING AT TUBES RADIATOR
OPERATING TEMPERATURE SURGE
AND THERMOSTAT OPEN TOP TANK
RADIATOR
HOSE
SHUNT
HOSE
BOTTOM DRAIN TAP ON

RADIATOR BOTTOM FACE
HOSE OF RAD
OVERFLOW
HOSE
HEATER
HOSE FROM
CAB
HEATER
HOSE TO
CAB
845CH-110 RADIATOR COOLING SYSTEM – RAD HOSE AND HEATER HOSE LOCATIONS
10.29
CHARGE AIR COOLER (CAC)
CHARGE AIR
When facing from fan side of the cooler package, COOLER
the charge air cooler is the left side core section
RADIATOR
of the side by side heat exchangers in the cooler
package.
Inspect air intake hoses and pipes for leaks, wear
or loose connections.
845CH-111
CHARGE AIR
COOLER (CAC)
COOLING FAN
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
TURBOCHARGER
845CH-109 CHARGE AIR COOLER: AIR FLOW DURING OPERATION
10.30
TRACK DRIVE................................................................................................................................................... 11

SECTION 11 – TRACK DRIVE
B
BOTTOM ROLLER RETAINING BOLTS................................................................................................ 11.32

BRAKE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................ 11.8
D
DRIVE MOTOR CROSSOVER RELIEF VALVES.................................................................................. 11.19

DRIVE MOTOR DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................... 11.5
DRIVE MOTOR START-UP PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 11.17
H

PILOT CIRCUIT – LEVELER.............................................................................................................. 11.13
PILOT CIRCUIT – NON LEVELER..................................................................................................... 11.12
PRESSURE CIRCUIT – LEVELER.................................................................................................... 11.15
PRESSURE CIRCUIT – NON LEVELER........................................................................................... 11.14
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
DRIVE MOTOR..................................................................................................................................... 11.4
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE....................................................................................................................... 11.16
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE SYSTEM............................................................................................................ 11.3
M
MEASURING TRACK SAG.................................................................................................................... 11.29

R
ROTARY MANIFOLD – LEVELING........................................................................................................ 11.39

ROTARY MANIFOLD – NON LEVELING............................................................................................... 11.37
ROTARY MANIFOLD SEAL INSTALLATION......................................................................................... 11.41
S
SET BEGIN OF REGULATION (DRIVE SPEED CHANGE VALVE)...................................................... 11.21

STRAIGHT TRAVEL................................................................................................................................. 11.2
T
TORQUING UNDERCARRIAGE BOLTS............................................................................................... 11.31

TRACK BRAKE RELEASE DELAY.......................................................................................................... 11.9
TRACK COMPONENTS......................................................................................................................... 11.28
OPERATING THE MACHINE............................................................................................................. 11.28
TRACK LOW LOGIC.............................................................................................................................. 11.10
TRACK SAG............................................................................................................................................. 11.2
TRACK SAG ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................................................. 11.30
COUPLER.......................................................................................................................................... 11.30
FITTING.............................................................................................................................................. 11.30
TRACK SHOE RETAINING BOLTS....................................................................................................... 11.32
TRACK SPEED ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................. 11.24
HIGH FORWARD (MOTOR MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT)................................................................. 11.26
LOW FORWARD (VALVE FLOW SETTING)...................................................................................... 11.25
LOW REVERSE (VALVE FLOW SETTING)....................................................................................... 11.27
TRACK SPEED SET-UP PROCEDURE................................................................................................ 11.24
TRAVEL SPEED CONTROL...................................................................................................................11.11
W
WEAR LIMITS........................................................................................................................................ 11.33

BOTTOM ROLLER WEAR................................................................................................................. 11.35
BUSHING WEAR, OUTSIDE DIAMETER.......................................................................................... 11.35
IDLER WEAR...................................................................................................................................... 11.36
PIN AND BUSHING WEAR................................................................................................................ 11.34
TRACK LINK WEAR........................................................................................................................... 11.33
TRACK SHOE GROUSER HEIGHT WEAR....................................................................................... 11.33
TRACK SLIDE WEAR......................................................................................................................... 11.36
11.1
Track Drive Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
TRACK SAG Make sure track components are always in good
condition. Periodic inspections should be made to
IMPORTANT
make sure components have:
Before driving a new machine make sure that track
sag is set correctly. Track sag may be set less • Have not come loose
than specified for shipping purposes. • Bolts are at the correct torque
During the initial operating period, frequent • Components are within the specified wear
adjustments to track sag must be made. limits
The track sag dimension is very important and Where applicable, check lubrication points.
should be checked regularly. A 50% increase
in the track life can be realized, particularly in STRAIGHT TRAVEL
bushing outer diameter wear and 'track pitch' by If the machine does not travel straight, the right
maintaining the correct amount of track sag. A and left track speeds are not set the same. Refer
track that is too tight will wear out significantly to TRACK SPEED SET-UP PROCEDURE in THIS
faster due to increased tension in the chain. SECTION.
Refer to TRACK COMPONENTS – MEASURING
TRACK SAG in THIS SECTION. Check speeds of each track and follow the set-up
procedures closely to obtain straight travel.
Track components operate under varying terrain
conditions, most of which cause excessive wear.
Wear to one component can quickly spread to the
rest of the track .
ROTARY MANIFOLD IDLER
UNDERCARRIAGE
LOWER HINGED
ACCESS COVER
SLIDES
UNDERCARRIAGE
LOWER
ROLLERS
INSPECTION
COVERS
DRIVE MOTOR
TRACK DRIVE
GEARBOX
DRIVE SPROCKET
TRACK
880-02 TRACK DRIVE

11.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Track Drive
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE SYSTEM hydraulic power. This flow of hydraulic oil is
then transmitted to the hydraulic motor through
The hydrostatic drive system is part of the
the rotary manifold and connecting hoses. The
main hydraulic system. Refer to SECTION 4 in
motor then reconverts the hydraulic power back
THIS MANUAL for a description of the MAIN
into mechanical power to drive the planetary
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
gearbox to propel the machine. The gearbox has
The primary components of each track drive an integral spring apply, hydraulic-release, multi-
system are a hydraulic pump, main valve, disc brake which is released via the pilot manifold
rotary manifold and hydraulic motors connected whenever the track pedals are activated.
together by hydraulic hoses. The pump converts
the mechanical power of the diesel engine into
PLANETARY
GEARBOX
DRIVE
MOTOR
SPRINGS
BRAKE
DISCS
845CH-128 TRACK DRIVE MOTOR AND GEARBOX
11.3
H845C-156
Bri X POR 3600 PSI
2 MAX
M
BRAKE T T
RELEASE 5000 PSI
250-725 PSI RELIEF
S
MA MB
DRIVE MOTOR - LEFT SIDE SHOWN

H845C-157
A Bre B
DRIVE MOTOR HYDRAULIC

845CH-129 SCHEMATIC
DRIVE MOTOR - RIGHT SIDE SHOWN
PLANETARY
GEARBOX
DRIVE
MOTOR
MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT
ADJUSTING SCREW
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT
ADJUSTING SCREW
860C-290A TRACK DRIVE MOTOR AND GEARBOX CROSS SECTION 860C-286
11.4
DRIVE MOTOR DESCRIPTION The motor rotating group consists of a cylinder
block with seven pistons and an output shaft that
The drive motor is a variable displacement
is attached to the rotating group by a retainer
rotary group of bent axis design. The motor is
plate.
interchangeable from side to side.
MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT
ADJUSTING SCREW CONTROL
HOUSING
AND PORT
PISTON PLATE
OUTPUT
SHAFT
ROTATING
GROUP
RETAINER
MAXIMUM CONTROL
DISPLACEMENT LENS
860C-286
CONTROL
HOUSING CONTROL
AND PORT HOUSING
COUNTER PLATE AND PORT
BALANCE PLATE
POSITIONING
VALVE PISTON
CROSS
OVER
RELIEF
VALVES
POSITIONING
TRUNNION
860C-288A
BEGIN OF 860C-298 860C-297
REGULATION
VALVE
11.5
Supply oil from the drive pump enters the motor
through the port plate to the pistons. During CONTROL
operation, high pressure supply oil enters the HOUSING
AND PORT
piston bores in the cylinder block. The position POSITIONING
PLATE
of the rotating group forces the cylinder block PISTON
against the concave surface of the port plate and
the pistons against the output shaft. Piston sliding
action causes the rotating group to turn.
The cylinder block is attached to the output shaft
which causes the output shaft to turn. During the
second half of the motor rotation, low pressure POSITIONING
TRUNION
is discharged as the pistons ride up to a higher
position on the concave surface of the port
plate. To reverse rotation, oil flow is reversed.
During operation a small amount of supply oil
flows through the centre of each piston. This oil
lubricates the piston to output shaft joint.
The rotating group angle is changed by the
positioning piston in the motor port plate from
minimum displacement to maximum displacement.
When the electric control solenoid demands
minimum displacement, the motor runs at its
highest speed. When the electric control solenoid
demands maximum displacement, the motor runs 860C-297 MOTOR PORT PLATE
at its slowest speed.
PLANETARY
GEARBOX
DRIVE
MOTOR
860C-290A TRACK DRIVE MOTOR AND GEARBOX 860C-286
11.6
The motors can be operated in two ranges; 845CH-131
TO "TRACK LOW"
• Maximum displacement Bri X PILOT MANIFOLD
DRIVE
• Minimum displacement SPEED
CHANGE
These two ranges are controlled by a solenoid FROM VALVE
PILOT
pilot valve on the pilot manifold which is operated MANIFOLD
by the TRACK (LOW/DRIVE) switch in the cab.
In the LOW position the solenoid on the pilot 2 MAX
valve is energized and the motor is in its maximum M
displacement mode which will give the slowest T
T
speed and maximum tractive effort. POSITIONING
BRAKE PISTON
For faster travelling modes the TRACK (LOW/ RELEASE S
DRIVE) switch can be put in the DRIVE MA MB
position and the motor will be in its minimum CROSSOVER

RELIEF
displacement position which will give the fastest VALVES
speed. When in this high speed mode the motor COUNTER-
will automatically increase motor displacement BALANCE
VALVE
in the event that a high load is encountered, e.g.
a short grade or obstacle. This increase in motor NOT USED
displacement is controlled by the drive speed
change valve. This valve controls the hydraulic
pressure signal to the maximum displacement A Bre B
NOT USED
piston. The piston increases motor displacement

as the pressure rises above the drive speed
change valve setting. DRIVE MOTOR HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
11.7
BRAKE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 845CH-131
TO "TRACK LOW"
PILOT MANIFOLD
REFER TO DRIVE MOTOR SCHEMATIC Bri X
DRIVE
DIAGRAM SPEED
CHANGE
When the travel pedals are activated, pedal FROM VALVE 'H'
pressure switches signal the XS2 module of the PILOT
MANIFOLD
computer control system to control the planetary
GAUGE TEST
gearbox brakes. Through internal logic, the PORT
2 MAX
computer control system uses the signal from
M
the pedal pressure switches to control a single
brake release solenoid valve on the pilot manifold. T T
When the solenoid valve is energized, pilot oil is POSITIONING

PISTON
BRAKE
delivered to both planetary gearbox brake pistons RELEASE S
causing them to release. If either travel pedal MA MB
is activated, both planetary gearbox brakes are CROSSOVER

RELIEF
released and a motion alarm is activated. VALVES
COUNTER-
When either travel pedal returns to the neutral BALANCE
position, pedal pressure switches signal to the VALVE
XS2 module of the computer control system to SUPPLY NOT USED
SHUTTLE
control drive motor displacement. Through internal VALVE
logic, the computer control system uses the signal
from the pedal pressure switches to control track NOT USED
A Bre B
low left and right solenoid valves on the pilot
manifold. If either solenoid valve is energized, pilot DRIVE MOTOR HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
oil is delivered to its respective drive motor shifting
it to maximum displacement. Shifting the motors A drive speed change valve (H) routes supply oil
to maximum displacement allows for improved to the maximum displacement piston to keep the
hydrostatic braking and steering by increasing drive motor in the lowest speed. A servo pressure
drive motor torque. reducing valve controls the pressure of the supply
oil entering the drive speed change valve.
PLANETARY
GEARBOX
DRIVE
MOTOR
BRAKE SPRINGS
DISCS
845CH-128 TRACK DRIVE MOTOR AND GEARBOX
11.8
TRACK BRAKE RELEASE DELAY
When the travel pedals are deactivated the current
to the brake release solenoid on the pilot manifold
is turned off allowing the gearbox brakes to be
applied. An adjustable delay is used when turning
off the solenoid to allow time for the track motors
to stop before the gearbox parking brakes are
applied.
The adjustment can be made through the MD3
screen.

Hydraulics Menu and press OK.
Press the menu button to go to the MAIN

MENU.
Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to

the Tr. Brake Release Delay Off selection in the
Hydraulics Menu and press OK.
Using the up or down arrow buttons to adjust the

value of the delay and then press OK. The default
setting is 500 mS.
11.9
TRACK LOW LOGIC
When the Track Low/Drive switch on the rear
control panel is in the Drive position there is an
adjustable setting through the MD3 computer
that will allow for different braking and steering
capability depending on the type of terrain. It will
also extend the life of the gearbox brakes.
When in the INDEPENDENT mode if either the
left or right foot pedals are released then the
corresponding track low solenoid on the pilot valve
will be activated providing independent maximum
displacement to the corresponding drive motor.
This mode is recommended for steep terrain.
When in the BOTH REQUIRED mode both foot
pedals would need to be released before both left
and right track low solenoids are activated. This Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to
mode is recommended for level ground. Machine parameters and press OK.
The adjustment is made through the MD3 screen.

Track Low Logic and press OK.
MENU.

option you require and press OK.
11.10
TRAVEL SPEED CONTROL
A Speed Indicator
The speed control feature of the MD3 computer

allows the operator to set the maximum speed of
the machine to maintain a given speed without
having to feather the drive pedals.
Push the down arrow button on the MD3 computer
to decrease the maximum speed of the machine.
The green track speed indicator will display a
reduction in speed as the adjustment is performed.
Push the up arrow button on the MD3 computer
to increase the maximum speed of the machine,
or press the OK button to reset back to maximum
speed.
This function can be used while the machine
is in motion in either HI or LOW travel speed
selections.
A travel speed control valve is used to control the
pilot pressure to the foot pedals.
NOTE: When the ignition key is turned OFF and
then turned back ON the travel speed control
resets back to maximum speed.
11.11
MD3
COMPUTER
XS2-A0 XA2-A0 XS2-A1
MODULE MODULE MODULE
MOTION ALARM
TRACK LOW
TRACK LOW LEFT
PILOT ON SWITCH TRACK LOW RIGHT
BRAKE RELEASE
PILOT ON/OFF CIRCUIT
FOOT PEDALS
T T
P P
2 3 1 2 3 1
RIGHT TRACK
PRESSURE
LEFT TRACK SWITCH TO RETURN
PRESSURE MANIFOLD
SWITCH
PILOT
TRACK LOW MANIFOLD
1 2 LEFT. C6
BRAKE RELEASE C8
8 TRACK LOW RIGHT
C7
LEGEND
8 PASSAGE 1
SUCTION LINE ROTARY 8
PRESSURE LINE MANIFOLD
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE
8 2 BRAKE
RELEASE
TRACK PORT 8
BRAKE RELEASE LOW
PORT 8 PORT 1
TRACK
LOW
PORT 2
CASE DRAIN
LEFT GEARBOX RIGHT

AND MOTOR GEARBOX
AND
MOTOR
845CH-214 TRACK DRIVE SYSTEM INSTALLATION – PILOT CIRCUIT – NON LEVELER

11.12
MD3
COMPUTER
XS2-A0 XA2-A0 XS2-A1
MODULE MODULE MODULE
MOTION ALARM
TRACK LOW
TRACK LOW LEFT
PILOT ON SWITCH TRACK LOW RIGHT
PILOT ON/OFF BRAKE RELEASE

CIRCUIT
FOOT PEDALS
BRAKE RELEASE
T T 1
P P
2 3 1 2 3 1 2
RIGHT TRACK
PRESSURE
LEFT TRACK SWITCH 12 C8
11
PRESSURE
SWITCH
TRACK LOW LEFT C6
TO RETURN PILOT MANIFOLD
MANIFOLD TRACK LOW RIGHT
C7
LEGEND 12 PASSAGE ROTARY

SUCTION LINE MANIFOLD
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN LINE 2
WIRE 12
1
CASE DRAIN CASE DRAIN
TRACK TRACK
LEFT GEARBOX LOW LOW
AND MOTOR LEFT RIGHT
RIGHT GEARBOX
AND MOTOR
BRAKE RELEASE
845CH-215 TRACK DRIVE SYSTEM INSTALLATION – PILOT CIRCUIT – LEVELER

11.13
T T
P TO PILOT MANIFOLD
P
2 1 LEFT TRACK 2 1 RIGHT TRACK
PEDAL PEDAL
Y6 A
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE Y2
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE B B B B
PILOT LINE
CAN LINE
WIRE
RIGHT LEFT
TRACK TRACK
A A A A
X2
X6
MAIN VALVE
3 6
8 PASSAGE TO RETURN
ROTARY MANIFOLD
MANIFOLD
4 5
3
5
4
6
B A
A B
LEFT GEARBOX RIGHT GEARBOX

AND MOTOR AND MOTOR
845CH-136 TRACK DRIVE SYSTEM INSTALLATION – PRESSURE CIRCUIT – NON LEVELER

11.14
T T
P P TO PILOT MANIFOLD
2 1 LEFT TRACK 2 1 RIGHT TRACK

PEDAL PEDAL
Y6 A
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE B B B B
CAN LINE
WIRE
RIGHT LEFT
TRACK TRACK
A A A A
X2
X6
MAIN VALVE
TO RETURN
10 MANIFOLD
10 7
9
12 PASSAGE
11 8 ROTARY
MANIFOLD
7B
8
9B 10
B
A
A LEFT GEARBOX RIGHT

AND MOTOR B
GEARBOX AND
MOTOR
845CH-137 TRACK DRIVE SYSTEM INSTALLATION – PRESSURE CIRCUIT – LEVELER

11.15
Bri X POR 3600 psi Bri X POR 3600 psi
TO RETURN
MANIFOLD
2 MAX 2 MAX
M M
BRAKE T T BRAKE T T
RELEASE 5000 psi RELEASE 5000 psi
250-725 psi RELIEF 250-725 psi RELIEF
S S
MA MB MA MB
A Bre B TOP TOP A S Bre B

PORT PORT
AQ146 AQ146
L.H. TRACK MOTOR R.H. TRACK MOTOR
B6 A6 B2 A2
FROM PILOT PRESSURE

REDUCING VALVE
a4
A a
STANDBY
PRESSURE
T 200-600 psi Psv
T T1
T2 MARGIN
LS LS PRESSURE
P P 290 psi
Y6 X6 Y2 LS X2
Pa
PL
MAX
ENGINE
275 hp, 2200 rpm
B Dr PUMP, MAIN
SUCTION SUPPLY
TO CASE DRAIN STRAINER
REV. FWD. REV. FWD.

2 P T 1 2 P T 1
3 3
FOOT PILOT VALVE, L.H. FOOT PILOT VALVE, R.H.
TELESCOPIC
WRIST OPTION TRACK SPEED
SWING TRACK BRAKE TRACK CCW/ CONTROL VALVE
BRAKE LOW R.H. RELEASE LOW L.H. PUMP 2 RETRACT EXTEND 1
C5 C7 C8 C6 C1 C2 C3 C4 G1 G
TS7 TS6 TS2 TS4

P
2 3
TS5 TS8 TS1 TS3
1000 psi
T
P1 T1 P2 T2 P3 T3 P4 T4
845CH-132 HYDROSTATIC DRIVE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

11.16
DRIVE MOTOR START-UP PROCEDURE 12. START the engine and leave at low idle
IMPORTANT! .
During start-up, it is important to vent entrapped 13. Check for leaks.
air from the drive motor. The drive motor will
be damaged if the entrapped air is not vented 14. Swing boom to side of machine.
and replaced with filtered hydraulic oil prior to
operating the drive function. This procedure must
be performed when a new drive motor or drive
pump is installed or when oil has been drained
from the motor.
ANGLE TO BE
1. Park machine on level ground with the BETWEEN 90°
& 110°
3. Turn OFF the engine. 845-12 LIFTING TRACK
4. Remove the ignition key. 15. Place the saw on the ground and by forcing
5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. down with boom controls, lift the track clear off
the ground.
6. Always cover or cap all case drain, control,
and high pressure hydraulic lines during the Refer to serial number plate for machine
installation of any new or replacement pumps weight (less attachment).
or motors. Refer to ATTACHMENT MANUFACTURER’S
7. Remove and plug the drive motor case drain MANUAL for correct attachment weight
hose. information.
8. Remove the drive motor case drain port 16. Use blocks to firmly support the undercarriage
adaptor from the drive motor case drain port. frame in raised position.
9. Manually fill the drive motor case at the case
drain port with filtered hydraulic oil.
10. Install the case drain port adaptor and re-
connect the drive motor case drain hose.
CASE DRAIN 860C-295A
PORT ADAPTER
DRIVE MOTOR
CASE DRAIN
HOSE
DRIVE MOTOR – LEFT SIDE SHOWN
11. Check the hydraulic tank oil level. Add filtered

hydraulic oil if required.
11.17
17. Place track drive speed control switch in the
LOW position.
WARNING
The tracks will turn during this next step.
18. Press the appropriate drive foot pedal in

forward and allow the track to rotate three
complete revolutions. The drive motor must be
free to rotate under no load.
19. Repeat step 17 for reverse operation.
20. Check track speeds and drive motor pressures
before returning to work. Refer to PRESSURE
AND SPEED SETTING and HYDRAULIC OIL
OPERATING RANGE chart in SECTION 3 of
THIS MANUAL for specific values.
21. Lower the tracks to the ground.
22. Park machine with the felling head firmly on
the ground.
11.18
DRIVE MOTOR CROSSOVER RELIEF
VALVES
HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATING RANGE chart in
SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for specific values.
TEST PROCEDURE:
temperature.
CAUTION

rotation of the upper structure and boom.
A B C
845C-232
CAUTION A 'XLS' Test Port
B 'XP' Test Port
Be aware of other personnel in the area. C 'LS' Pressure Relief Valve
operation of the machine. 7. Install a 0–700 bar (0-10,000 psi) gauge on
'XP' test port on main control valve.
WARNING track low proportional solenoid on the pilot
distribution manifold.
Make sure no one is standing near the
attachment during this procedure. 9. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
position.
start-up
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED 13. Start engine and set engine speed to high idle
.
860C-001
2. Park machine on level ground with the 15. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
attachment resting firmly on the ground. system.
3. Apply the swing brake. 16. Place the anti-stall switch in the OFF position.
11.19
23. Have an assistant hold the left track drive
foot pedal in the forward position. Observe
the gauge on (XP) test port and make sure
the pressure is set to left drive crossline relief
specifications.
860C-293A
B SIDE
FORWARD
CROSSOVER
RELIEF VALVE
A SIDE
REVERSE
CROSSOVER
RELIEF VALVE
DRIVE MOTOR – RIGHT SIDE SHOWN

mode to ON. Refer to COMPUTER –
24. If required loosen locknut on forward
ADJUSTMENT MENU – COOLING FAN
crossover relief valve adjusting screw, turn
SERVICE MODE SECTION 6 of THIS
adjusting screw in to increase pressure and
MANUAL.
out to decrease pressure then tighten locknut.
18. Place track low switch in the LOW
25. Repeat step 23 and 24 for the left reverse
position.
crossover relief valve.
19. Press the left track drive foot pedal in both
26. Repeat steps 8 to 25 for the right track drive
forward and reverse directions to make sure
motor.
the track does not move.
27. When testing is complete, reset the LS relief
20. Have an assistant hold the left track drive foot
valve to main control valve LS specifications.
pedal in either forward or reverse.
Refer to SET MARGIN PRESSURE in
21. Check pressure gauge at (XP) port. The SECTION 4.
gauge reading should meet main control valve
28. Reset fan service mode to OFF.
LS specified values.
29. Place the anti-stall switch in the ON position.
860C-295A
A SIDE
FORWARD
CROSSOVER
RELIEF VALVE 31. Turn OFF the engine.
35. Connect the wire connection to the track low
proportional solenoid on the pilot distribution
manifold.
B SIDE 36. Remove pressure gauge and wipe up any

REVERSE spills.
CROSSOVER
RELIEF VALVE
37. Replace both left and right drive motor
DRIVE MOTOR – LEFT SIDE SHOWN inspection covers.
22. Hold the left drive foot pedal in forward or

reverse. Observe the gauge on (XP) test port
and temporarily set the LS relief valve to 345
bar (5000 psi).
11.20
SET BEGIN OF REGULATION (DRIVE BRAKE HOSE
860C-295A
SPEED CHANGE VALVE) CONNECTION

TEST PROCEDURE: M PORT

temperature.
CAUTION

rotation of the upper structure and boom. DRIVE MOTOR – LEFT SIDE SHOWN
CAUTION 7. Install 0–700 bar (0–10,000 psi) gauge on the

drive motor gauge test port (M).
WARNING

STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
A B C
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY 845C-232
SUPPORTED
860C-001 A 'XLS' Test Port
B 'XP' Test Port
C 'LS' Pressure Relief Valve
attachment resting firmly on the ground. 8. Install a 0–700 bar (0-10,000 psi) gauge on
'XP' test port on main control valve.
4. Turn OFF the engine. track low proportional solenoid on the pilot
5. Remove the ignition key. distribution manifold.
11.21
10. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. 21. With the aid of an assistant, activate LEFT
drive foot pedal in FORWARD or REVERSE
and temporarily set LS relief valve to 248
bar (3600 psi) on gauge at (XP) test port on
12. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run main control valve. Refer to MAIN CONTROL
position. VALVE DESCRIPTION – SET LOAD SENSE
13. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine RELIEF VALVE in SECTION 4 of THIS
start-up MANUAL for instructions on setting the LS
relief valve.
875-234
. 860C-298

system.
BEGIN OF
REGULATION
ADJUSTMENT
DRIVE MOTOR – LEFT SIDE SHOWN

BEGIN OF REGULATION ADJUSTMENT
22. While monitoring the gauge on the (M) test

port, have an assistant slowly press the left
track drive foot pedal in forward or reverse and
load the motor. It should be in the range of left
18. Use the MD3 computer to set fan service drive motor begin of regulation specifications.
mode to ON. Refer to COMPUTER – 23. If adjustment is required, loosen the BEGIN
ADJUSTMENT MENU – COOLING FAN OF REGULATION adjusting screw locknut.
SERVICE MODE SECTION 6 of THIS Slowly turn the adjusting screw until the
MANUAL. pressure gauge reading at (M) port meets
19. Place track low switch in the LOW begin of regulation specifications (in to
position. increase, out to decrease).
20. Press the left track drive foot pedal in both 24. Release the track drive foot pedal and reduce
forward and reverse directions to make sure system pressure to the motor.
the track does not move. 25. Tighten the adjusting screw locknut taking
care not to turn the adjusting screw at the
same time.
26. Repeat steps 7 to 25 using the right side track
drive foot pedal.
11.22
SECTION 4.
29. Place the anti-stall switch in the ON position.
35. Connect the wire connection to the track low
proportional solenoid on the pilot distribution
manifold.
36. Remove pressure gauge and wipe up any
spills.
37. Replace both left and right drive motor
inspection covers.
11.23
TRACK SPEED SET-UP PROCEDURE 7. Remove both left and right side drive motor
inspection covers.
HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATING RANGE chart in 8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for specific values 9. Check that all personnel are clear of the
and TRACK TIMING CHART in THIS SECTION machine before starting engine.
for specific track rpm values.
NOTE: Changes in margin pressure affect position.
track speeds. Also the maximum displacement
adjustment screw on the motor is not adjusted 11. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine
during this procedure. start-up
Both left and right track drives have four speed 12. Start engine and set engine speed to high idle
settings which are dealt with in the following .
procedures, they are: 13. Close and latch the front door.
1. Forward – High 14. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
2. Forward – Low system.
3. Reverse – High 15. Place the anti-stall switch in the OFF position.
4. Reverse – Low.
There are only three adjustments required to set
track speeds.
• Forward flow stop adjusting screw (located at
the main control valve)
• Reverse flow stop adjusting screw (located at
the main control valve)
• Motor minimum displacement adjustment stop
(located at the drive motors)
TRACK SPEED ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION

touch of the controls can cause sudden 16. Use the MD3 computer to set fan service
rotation of the upper structure and boom. mode to ON. Refer to COMPUTER –
SERVICE MODE SECTION 6 of THIS
CAUTION MANUAL.


temperature.
11.24
17. Swing boom to the side of machine. LOW FORWARD (VALVE FLOW SETTING)
20. Place the track drive speed control in the LOW
position .
A TIMING MARK,
VISIBLE FROM
THE CAB CAN
ALSO BE PLACED
ANGLE TO BE ON THE TRACK
BETWEEN 90°
& 110°
ROTATION
845-12 LIFTING TRACK
TO RECORD TRACK
SPEED, PLACE TIMING
MARKS ON TRACK FRAME
18. Place the grapple on the ground. Force down AND GEARBOX HOUSING
with the boom controls to lift the track off the
ground. 84-18 SET TRACK SPEED
Refer to serial number plate for machine
weight (less attachment). 21. Have an assistant hold the left track drive foot
pedal in the forward position. Observe and
Refer to ATTACHMENT MANUFACTURER’S record the track drive sprocket speed.
MANUAL for correct attachment weight
information. For example a track containing 47 links: A
reading of 14 rpm is desired which equals 1
complete revolution of the track every 17.52
WARNING
seconds.
Do not place arms, legs or body under 845CH-235
FORWARD SPOOL REVERSE SPOOL
track while in the raised position. STOP SCREW FOR
RIGHT TRACK
STOP SCREW FOR
LEFT TRACK
19. Use blocks to firmly support the undercarriage

frame in a raised position. A
WARNING
B B B B

RIGHT LEFT
TRACK TRACK
A A A A
REVERSE SPOOL FORWARD SPOOL

STOP SCREW FOR STOP SCREW FOR
RIGHT TRACK LEFT TRACK
MAIN CONTROL VALVE (FRONT SIDE)
22. If required, adjust the left track drive flow

adjusting screw on the main control valve to
obtain the specified value.
11.25
HIGH FORWARD (MOTOR MINIMUM
DISPLACEMENT)
26. Place the track drive speed control in the high
FLOW ADJUSTING
position .
SCREW LOCKNUT
19 MM WRENCH 27. Have an assistant hold the left track drive foot
pedal in the forward position. Observe and
record the track drive sprocket speed.
FLOW ADJUSTING
SCREW
For example a track containing 47 links*:
6 mm ALLEN KEY
875-015 A reading of 28 rpm is desired which equals
one complete revolution of the track every
23. Turn the flow adjusting screw in (clockwise) 8.76 seconds.
to decrease flow or out (counterclockwise) to
860C-349
increase flow to the final drive. MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT
ADJUSTING SCREW
24. Tighten flow adjusting screw locknut taking
same time.
NOTE: Constant loosening and tightening of
the locknut on the flow adjusting screws will MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT
ADJUSTING SCREW –
eventually cause the seal in the nut to break DO NOT ADJUST
down and leak. Because of this it is best to
keep the adjusting procedure brief. 28. If required, adjust the minimum displacement
25. Re-check sprocket speed. adjusting screw on the left track drive motor.
29. Turn the displacement adjusting screw
in (clockwise) to slow down or out
(counterclockwise) to speed up the final drive.
NOTE: Constant loosening and tightening
of the locknut on the displacement adjusting
screws will eventually cause the seal in the nut
to break down and leak. Because of this it is
best to keep the adjusting procedure brief.
30. Re-check sprocket speed
IMPORTANT!
Do not exceed the recommended track speed
specified, over speeding will damage the drive
motor or gearbox input.
11.26
LOW REVERSE (VALVE FLOW SETTING) IMPORTANT!
31. Place the track drive speed control in the low Backing the main control valve adjusting screws
position . out to exceed specified speed values allows the
valve spool to travel beyond the optimum position
32. Have an assistant hold the left track drive foot for maximum oil flow. This causes a decrease in
pedal in the reverse position. Observe and flow to the motors and track rpm to slow down. If
record the track drive sprocket speed. over adjustment has occurred allow the valve to
33. If required, adjust the left track drive flow return to the neutral position and adjust the screw
adjusting screw on the main control valve to in until it just touches the valve spool. Repeat
obtain the specified value. TRACK SPEED SETUP PROCEDURE to set track
speed rpm. Do not turn the adjusting screw more
34. Turn the flow adjusting screw in (clockwise) than 12 turns out from where it just touches the
to decrease flow or out (counterclockwise) to valve spool when in the neutral position.
increase flow to the final drive.
TRACK TIMING CHART
NUMBER OF TRACK LINKS
GEARBOX
45 47 50 51
RPM
TRACK REVOLUTION TIME (SECONDS)
FLOW ADJUSTING DESIRE 10 23.48 24.52 26.09 26.61
SCREW LOCKNUT D LOW 11 21.34 22.29 23.72 24.19
19 mm WRENCH
12 19.57 20.43 21.74 22.17
13 18.06 18.86 20.07 20.47
14 16.77 17.52 18.63 19.01
15 15.65 16.35 17.39 17.74
FLOW ADJUSTING
SCREW 16 14.67 15.33 16.30 16.63
6 mm ALLEN KEY 17 13.81 14.42 15.35 15.65
875-015
18 13.04 13.62 14.49 14.78
LOWER
19 12.36 12.91 13.73 14.00
35. Tighten flow adjusting screw locknut taking TRACTIVE
EFFORT 20 11.74 12.26 13.04 13.30
care not to turn the adjusting screw at the 21 11.18 11.68 12.42 12.67
same time. 22 10.67 11.15 11.86 12.09
23 10.21 10.66 11.34 11.57
NOTE: Constant loosening and tightening of 24 9.78 10.22 10.87 11.09
the locknut on the flow adjusting screws will 25 9.39 9.81 10.43 10.64
26 9.03 9.43 10.03 10.23
eventually cause the seal in the nut to break 27 8.70 9.08 9.66 9.86
down and leak. Because of this it is best to DESIRE 28 8.39 8.76 9.32 9.50
keep the adjusting procedure brief. D HIGH 29 8.10 8.46 9.00 9.18
30 7.83 8.17 8.70 8.87
36. Re-check sprocket speed. DO NOT 31 7.57 7.91 8.42 8.58
EXCEED 32 7.34 7.66 8.15 8.32
37. Reset fan service mode to OFF. 33 7.11 7.43 7.91 8.06
34 6.91 7.21 7.67 7.83
38. Reset anti-stall mode to ON. 35 6.71 7.01 7.45 7.60
36 6.52 6.81 7.25 7.39
37 6.35 6.63 7.05 7.19
40. Remove pressure gauge and wipe up any 38 6.18 6.45 6.86 7.00
39 6.02 6.29 6.69 6.82
spills.
40 5.87 6.13 6.52 6.65
*45 LINK TRACK NOT APPLICABLE TO 860/870/L870
Repeat the TRACK SPEED ADJUSTMENT TRACK TIMING CHART.XLS
procedure for the right track adjustment.
11.27
TRACK COMPONENTS
OPERATING THE MACHINE
A B
Operate Machine With Attachment Over Idlers

A Sprocket
B Idler
Whenever possible the machine should always be

operated with the attachment over the idlers and
not over the sprockets.
Operating over the sprockets will result in
overloading of the contact surfaces between the
sprocket and the track bushings. Bushings could
crack during sprocket impact.
11.28
MEASURING TRACK SAG 8. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
1. Position the felling head in the vertical 9. Measure distance between top surface of
position ans swing the boom to the side of the track shoe at centre of lower surface of track
machine. frame.
ANGLE TO BE
BETWEEN 90°
& 110° UNDERSIDE SAG
OF TRACK DIMENSION
GUARD
845-12 LIFTING TRACK UPPER SURFACE

OF TRACK SHOE
2. Place the felling head on the ground and by 853ILL8 MEASURING SAG DIMENSION
forcing down with boom controls, lift the track
clear off the ground. 10. This dimension should be between 101
mm–152 mm (4 in–6 in) for normal operations.
Refer to serial number plate for machine
weight (less attachment). NOTE: If track sag is less than specified, track
chain wear will be accelerated and adjustments
Refer to ATTACHMENT MANUFACTURER'S
need to be made. Refer to TRACK SAG
MANUAL for correct attachment weight
ADJUSTMENT in THIS SECTION for information
information.
on adjusting track sag.
IMPORTANT!
4. Use blocks to firmly support the undercarriage If track sag is excessive, it is possible for the track
frame in a raised position. to jump off the sprocket.
WARNING
5. Rotate track in forward and reverse several

times. Stop the track while in reverse. Do not
clean the track.
11.29
Filling procedures for track sag adjustment will
depend on which undercarriage your vehicle is
equipped with.
VALVE
COUPLER
FILL
FITTING
VALVE FILL VALVE
845C-003
TRACK SAG ADJUSTMENT – COUPLER

To tighten the track, attach the coupler onto the fill
valve. Connect a grease gun to the grease fitting
845C-002
on the coupler. Add grease until the track sag
dimension is within recommended limits. Refer
TRACK SAG ADJUSTMENT – FITTING to MEASURING TRACK SAG in THIS SECTION
To tighten the track, use a grease gun and add for recommended limits. Remove the coupler and
grease at the fill valve. Add grease until the track store in a safe place.
sag dimension is within recommended limits. Refer
for recommended limits. WARNING
To loosen the track, slowly loosen the fill valve until
The grease is under very high pressure.
grease begins to escape through the vent passage
Removing the fill valve completely may
cause the valve to blow out and cause
the valve body threads. Remove grease until
bodily harm.
the track sag dimension is within recommended
limits. Refer to MEASURING TRACK SAG in THIS
SECTION for recommended limits. To loosen the track, slowly loosen the fill valve until
grease begins to escape through the vent passage
NOTE: The track sag fill valve is mechanically
the valve body threads. Remove grease until
the track sag dimension is within recommended
limits. Refer to MEASURING TRACK SAG in THIS
SECTION for recommended limits.
NOTE: The track sag fill valve is not mechanically
11.30
TORQUING UNDERCARRIAGE BOLTS
860C-133
TRACK COMPONENT TORQUE VALUES

It is important to check the torque values of
the track shoe retaining bolts and the bottom
roller retaining bolts at the NEW MACHINE
MAINTENANCE time period (first 100 hours)
and then EVERY 125 HOURS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE time period.
When installing new components, all traces of
paint and dirt must be removed from all mating
surfaces including the contact area under the bolt
head and nut.
Both the bolt and the nut on the track shoes
should be lightly lubricated with SAE 30 oil and
tightened using the torque-turn method.
The torque-turn method involves torquing the bolt
to an initial predetermined value, plus an additional
1
/3 turn (not the value shown in the torque charts).
This ensures a more accurate and consistent
torquing of the bolts, with less likelihood of the
bolt/nut coming loose later.
When checking the torque values at the first 100
hours and every 125 hours after that use the
CHECKING TORQUE values listed in the following
paragraphs.
If loose shoes or under torqued bolts are
discovered during the first 100 hour check, they
should be removed, surfaces cleaned, and reused
using the torque-turn method. If the shoe is not
loose but a single bolt is low on torque, loosen the
bolt and torque-turn again.
If loose or under torqued bolts are discovered
any time after the 100 hour check, the bolts and
nuts must be replaced with new ones, surfaces
cleaned, and torque-turned again.
11.31
TRACK SHOE RETAINING BOLTS BOTTOM ROLLER RETAINING BOLTS
Track shoes must be fastened together applying The bottom rollers must be fastened to the
the exact torque values shown below and using undercarriage applying the exact torque values
the torque-turn method described in TORQUING shown below.
UNDERCARRIAGE BOLTS in this SECTION.
When installing new rollers, apply anti-seize
Track shoe bolts and nuts are designed compound to the bolt threads.
specifically for this purpose and should not be
substituted with standard hardware.
hours and every 125 hours after that use the
Only bolts with grade 12.9 or 170 designation torque value(s) shown below.
forged in the head are approved.
Bottom Roller Bolts 3⁄4 in. UNC
hours and every 125 hours after that use the Torque 420 Nm (310 lbf-ft)
checking torque value. Bottom Roller Bolts 7⁄8 in. UNC
Torque 645 Nm (475 lbf-ft)
Track shoe bolts – 3⁄4 UNF
Torque-turn 300 Nm (220 lbf-ft) + 1⁄3 turn Bottom Roller Bolts 1 in. UNC
Checking torque 610 nm (450 lbf-ft) Torque 920 Nm (680 lbf-ft)
Track shoe bolts – M20 Bottom Roller Bolts M24

Torque-turn 350 Nm (260 lbf-ft) + 1⁄3 turn Torque 920 Nm (680 lbf-ft)
Checking torque 745 Nm (550 lbf-ft) For a complete maintenance check refer to the
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE in
Track shoe bolts – M24
Torque-turn 460 Nm (340 lbf-ft) + 1⁄3 turn
Checking torque 1410 nm (1040 lbf-ft)
11.32
WEAR LIMITS TRACK LINK WEAR
TRACK SHOE GROUSER HEIGHT WEAR WEAR LIMITS FOR D6D TRACK TYPE
Wear Height
SINGLE GROUSER
0% wear (new) 121.5 mm (4.78 in)
BERC-9
50% wear 116.8 mm (4.60 in)
75% wear 113.8 mm (4.48 in)
100% wear 110.2 mm (4.34 in)
DOUBLE GROUSER
BERC-10 WEAR LIMITS FOR F8 TRACK TYPE

Wear Height
0% wear (new) 125.0 mm (4.92 in)
TRIPLE GROUSER
50% wear 120.9 mm (4.76 in)
BERC-1
75% wear 118.7 mm (4.67in)
GROUSER WEAR (HEIGHT) 100% wear 115.0 mm (4.53 in)
WEAR LIMITS FOR D6D AND F8 TRACK TYPE WEAR LIMITS FOR FH400 TRACK TYPE
Shoe 75% 100% Wear Height

New
Grouser Wear Wear 0% wear (new) 129.0 mm (5.08 in)
71.6 mm 34.8 mm 26.6 mm 50% wear 124.9 mm (4.92 in)
Single
(2.82 in) (1.37 in) (0.93 in) 75% wear 122.1 mm (4.81in)
34.8 mm 18 mm 10.9 mm 100% wear 119.0 mm (4.68 in)
Double
(1.37 in) (0.71 in) (0.43 in)
26.9 mm 12.9 mm 9.14 mm
Triple
(1.06 in) (0.51 in) (0.36 in)
WEAR LIMITS FOR FH400 TRACK TYPE

Shoe 75% 100%
New
Grouser Wear Wear
74.4 mm 39.1 mm 25 mm
Single
(2.81 in) (1.5 in) (1 in)
49 mm 23 mm 12 mm
Double
(1.9 in) (0.9 in) (0.5 in)
30 mm 19 mm 15 mm
Triple
(1.2 in) (0.7 in) (0.6 in)
NOTE: Allowable wear for soft ground conditions

is 100%. Allowable wear for rocky ground
conditions is 75%.`
11.33
PIN AND BUSHING WEAR WEAR LIMITS FOR D6D AND F8 TRACK
TYPE
Wear Height
New length of four sections 813 mm (32 in)
75% worn 822.2 mm (32.37 in)
100% worn 825.5 mm (32.50 in)
BERC-3 MEASURING TRACK PITCH

To obtain the track internal wear, i.e., the wear Wear Height
between the pin and the internal diameter of New length of four sections 864.6 mm (34.04 in)
the bushing, measure the track pitch over four
75% worn 874.3 mm (34.42 in)
sections of track (5 pins).
100% worn 877.6 mm (34.55 in)
To take this measurement,
1. Remove slack by placing a steel pin between NOTE: Allowable wear in rocky ground is 75%.
sprocket and chain, then slowly move machine These wear limits are to be used as a guide for
in reverse to tighten chain. when to turn the pins and bushings. If pins and
bushings are not to be turned, the chain can be
2. Measure pitch across two four link sections, run past the 100% wear limit, until chain failure.
except section on each side of the master pin,
to find average chain wear.
INTERNAL PIN &

BUSHING WEAR
180°
EXTERNAL TURN
BUSHING PIN &
WEAR ROTATION BUSHING
180°
BERC-4 PIN/BUSHING INTERNAL WEAR
NOTE: Wear to the pins and bushings only occurs

in a small localized area, to extend the life of these
components, the pins and bushings may be turned
180° or replaced provided other components are
within specified wear limits:
• Track link wear is 75% or less.
• Change in track pitch has not exceeded 100%
wear.
• Bushing external wear less than 100% in soft
ground or 75% or less in rocky ground.
• There is at least 0.2 mm (0.008 in) press fit
available between pin and bushing and link.
11.34
BUSHING WEAR, OUTSIDE DIAMETER BOTTOM ROLLER WEAR
Measure the roller diameter on the tread contact
surface with a large calliper to obtain the worst
wear condition.
If accessibility to the rollers is impaired by guards,
then concentrate on the front and rear rollers,
these will be the most worn.
45° 45° REVERSE
SIDE WEAR
WEAR LIMITS FOR D6D AND F8 TRACK
FORWARD VERTICAL
SIDE WEAR WEAR TYPE
BERC-5 MEASURING BUSHING WEAR Wear Height
New roller 210.0 mm (8.26 in)
Use a calliper to measure the wear of the bushing 75% worn 194 mm (7.64 in)
outer diameter in three places.
100% worn 187 mm (7.36 in)
NOTE: Bushing outside diameter is measured at
three places because of the forward and reverse
travel of the machine and a vertical wear that
takes place.
Wear Height
WEAR LIMITS FOR D6D AND F8 TRACK New roller 200.0 mm (7.87 in)
TYPE
75% worn 188.5 mm (7.42 in)
Wear Height 100% worn 177.0 mm (6.97 in)
New bushing outer diameter 66.6 mm (2.62 in)
75% worn 63.5 mm (2.50 in)
100% worn 61.7 mm (2.43 in)

Wear Height
New bushing outer diameter 71.4 mm (2.81 in)
75% worn 68.6 mm (2.70 in)
100% worn 66.4 mm (2.61 in)
NOTE: Allowable wear in rocky ground is 75%
11.35
IDLER WEAR TRACK SLIDE WEAR
Measure the idler wheel side diameters (tread Track slide wear should be checked periodically
contact surface) at several points to obtain the to make sure that it does not go over the limit and
worst wear condition. Position a depth gauge or cause damage to the chain link bushings.
measuring tape as close as possible toward the
Since the checking 845-33A
centre of the idler with the gauge flat on the centre
area is not immediately
flange and parallel to the idler shaft.
visible, the measuring
WEAR LIMITS FOR D6D AND F8 TRACK may be done using a
TYPE gauge made from a
piece of 1⁄8 in. flat bar.
Wear Height The gauge is inserted
New idler dimension 22.0 mm (0.866 in) down through the holes
100% wear 30.0 mm (1.18 in) in the track and placed
between the track guide
WEAR LIMITS FOR FH400 TRACK TYPE and the track bushing. 1/8"
Make sure that dirt build- SUGGESTED

Wear Height up does not interfere MEASURING GAUGE
New idler dimension 22.0 mm (0.866 in) with the reading. Check
at several locations. The ends of the track slides
100% wear 28.0 mm (1.102 in)
tend to wear first. The slides should be replaced if
excessive wear is found.
'A'
'A'
845-32 TRACK SLIDE WEAR
CHAIN LINK
CHECK CHAIN LINK

THIS BUSHING
DIMENSION
TRACK
GUIDE
TRACK
SLIDE
845-33 SECTION A - A
The wear occurs on the top of the track slide

as the chain links slide along and this wear will
reduce the clearance between the track guide
and the chain link bushings. When this clearance
disappears the chain link bushings will start to
wear.
11.36
ROTARY MANIFOLD – NON LEVELING
The rotary manifold provides a 360° continuous
rotation hydraulic connection between the upper
structure and the undercarriage. The rotary A
manifold provides for 8 hydraulic connections.
B
A
A Collar Clamp
B Undercarriage Door
C Bolts
845C-235 To access the bottom of the rotary manifold

partially remove the bolt with the collar clamp.
A Rubber Cover
Make sure the collar clamp prevents complete
To access the top of the rotary manifold lift the removal of the bolt. Remove the remainder of the
rubber cover on the upper structure. bolts and swing the undercarriage door out of the
way.
860C-426
860C-425 7 1 7
2 6
3 4
1 3
5
8
8
6 2 4
8 Passage Rotary Manifold (Front and Rear View)

1 Right Track 'X1' Port 5 Left Track Motor 'B' Port
2 Left Track 'X1' Port 6 Left Track Motor 'A' Port
3 Right Track Motor 'A' Port 7 Track Motor Case Drain
4 Left Track Motor 'B' Port 8 Track Brake Release, Right and Left
11.37
SPOOL O-RING SNAP SEAL MOUNTING BARREL SEAL AND O-RING RETAINER CAP
RING FLANGE O-RING PLATE
QTY 8
845CH-143 8 PASSAGE ROTARY MANIFOLD CROSS SECTION
11.38
ROTARY MANIFOLD - LEVELING
A B
The rotary manifold provides a 360° continuous
rotation hydraulic connection between the upper
structure and the undercarriage. The rotary
manifold provides for 12 hydraulic connections.
C A
845C-190
A Bolts and Washers

B Left Rotary Manifold Guard
C Right Rotary Manifold Guard
To access the bottom of the rotary manifold

remove the left and right rotary manifold guards.
845C-235
A Rubber Cover
To access the top of the rotary manifold lift the

rubber cover on the upper structure.
6 11 9 8
7 5
12
3 10
2 1
3
12
4
6 2 1
7B
5 8 9B
10
11
845CH-139
845CH-140
12 Passage Rotary Manifold (Front and Rear View)

1 Track Brake Release, Right and Left Track 7 Left Track Motor 'A' Port
2 Track Low Left Track 8 Right Track Motor 'B' Port
3 Right Cylinder Extend 9 Left Track Motor 'B' Port
4 Right Cylinder Retract 10 Right Track Motor 'A' Port
5 Left Cylinder Extend 11 Track Motor Case Drain
6 Left Cylinder Retract 12 Track Low Right
11.39
SPOOL O-RING SNAP SEAL BARREL SEAL AND SEAL AND O-RING RETAINER CAP
RING O-RING O-RING PLATE
QTY 8 QTY 5
MOUNTING
FLANGE
845CH-138 12 PASSAGE ROTARY MANIFOLD CROSS SECTION
11.40
ROTARY MANIFOLD SEAL
INSTALLATION
GLIDELOC SEALS
The following information is provided to assist
in the installation of Glideloc seals in the rotary
manifold.
880-197
2. Position the seal lock tabs as shown.
LOCK TABS
860C-431 SEAL INSTALLATION TOOL

This procedure requires the use of a seal
installation tool for the proper installation of
Glideloc seals. See ROTARY MANIFOLD in the
machine parts catalog for tool part number.
GLIDELOC SEAL LOCK TABS
GUIDE
CLAMP
880-198
3. Seal shown clamped for installation. Note

orientation of the lock tabs.
880-196
1. Lubricate the seal with hydraulic oil or 10W30

oil and place seal raised off of table.
GLIDELOC SEAL
880-199
4. Position the tool in the manifold. Align one

side of the seal lock tabs with a groove in the
manifold barrel.
11.41
GLIDELOC SEAL LOCK TAB
880-200
9. Make sure the seal and lock tabs are correctly

positioned in the manifold barrel.
10. Repeat steps 1 - 7 for the seals.
880-201
5. Hold the installed side of the seal in the

manifold groove.
6. Slowly release the clamp while aligning the
seal lock tabs on the opposite side into the
manifold barrel.
7. Release clamp arms and remove tool.
GLIDELOC SEAL
880-202
8. Align the remaining seal lock tabs in the grove.
11.42
BOOM FUNCTIONS..........................................................................................................................................12

SECTION 12 – BOOM FUNCTIONS
A
ADJUST CONVENTIONAL BOOM OIL FLOW – CYCLE TIMES.......................................................... 12.16

HEAD TILT..........................................................................................................................................12.18
HOIST BOOM CYLINDERS............................................................................................................... 12.17
STICK BOOM CYLINDERS................................................................................................................ 12.17
ADJUST ER BOOM OIL FLOW – CYCLE TIMES.................................................................................. 12.19
STICK BOOM CYLINDER.................................................................................................................. 12.19
B
BOOM CONTROL VALVE........................................................................................................................ 12.8

BOOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................. 12.2
CONVENTIONAL BOOM SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 12.2
CONVENTIONAL BOOM MANIFOLD CONNECTIONS................................................................... 12.3
ER BOOM SYSTEM............................................................................................................................. 12.4
ER BOOM MANIFOLD CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................... 12.7
ER BOOM SYSTEM COMPONENTS............................................................................................... 12.6
ER OPERATION............................................................................................................................... 12.4
C
CONVENTIONAL TO ER BOOM SYSTEM............................................................................................ 12.23

E
ER TO CONVENTIONAL BOOM SYSTEM............................................................................................ 12.21

H

ER BOOM...........................................................................................................................................12.10
LOAD SENSING................................................................................................................................... 12.9
L
LOAD SENSING\ENGINE ANTI-STALL................................................................................................... 12.9

P
PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTIONS.................................................................................................. 12.11

S
SETTING PORT RELIEF VALVES......................................................................................................... 12.12

HOIST BOOM, STICK BOOM, HEAD TILT........................................................................................ 12.12
HEAD TILT PORT RELIEFS........................................................................................................... 12.15
HOIST BOOM PORT RELIEFS...................................................................................................... 12.13
STICK BOOM PORT RELIEFS....................................................................................................... 12.14
T
TYPICAL CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES.................................................................................................... 12.20
12.1
Boom Functions Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
BOOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONVENTIONAL BOOM SYSTEM
The ER boom system is standard equipment on Two hoist cylinders, with a 140 mm diameter bore,
845C feller bunchers. The ER boom system can are used to raise and lower the main boom.
be converted to a conventional boom system Two cylinders with a 120 mm diameter bore are
through the Tigercat dealer network. used side-by-side in the stick position. See ER
BOOM SYSTEM for operational details.
These cylinders receive oil from the main pump via
valve sections on the main hydraulic valve.
Left Joystick Right Joystick
Two joystick handles in the cab control the

movement of each cylinder by directing pilot oil to
the pilot end caps on each end of the appropriate
valve sections on the main valve manifold to shift
the spool and move the cylinder(s). The left moves
the stick boom IN and OUT. The right joystick
moves the hoist boom UP and DOWN.
12.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Boom Functions
O P Q R S A
M
D
L K J I H G B F E
845C-273
Conventional Boom Manifold Connections

A Rear View K Port – D2 (Left Side Cylinder Rod End)
B Front View L Port – P1 (Plugged)
C Port – B1 (From Hoist Valve Port – B) M Port – D1 (From Stick Valve Port – B)
D Port – A1 (From Hoist Valve Port – A) N Port – C1 (From Stick Valve Port – A)
E Port – T1 (Tank Return) O Port – C2 (Left Side Stick Cylinder Base End)
F Port – P2 and Check Valve (Located on Bottom) P Port – C3 (Right Side Stick Cylinder Base End)
G Port – A3 (Plugged) Q Port – B3 (Plugged)
H Port – A2 (Plugged) R Port – B4 (Hoist Cylinder Rod End)
I Port – D3 (Right Stick Cylinder Rod End) S Port – A4 (Hoist Cylinder Base End)
J Port – B2 (Plugged)
12.3
ER BOOM SYSTEM
These machines are equipped with a ER valve to WARNING
provide ER boom function.
ER OPERATION
system and may behave in an unexpected
The ER boom valve, located on the upper manner compared to a conventional boom
structure at the base of the main boom, connects system.
one of the STICK cylinders with the HOIST
cylinders circuit in such a way that allows the
boom system to be controlled by movement of a When performing maintenance procedures or
single joystick lever. setting up a machine equipped with an ER boom
system, the following points must be noted:
860-01.AI
• The main and stick boom cylinder circuits are
connected hydraulically. Thus, disconnecting
a hydraulic line to a boom cylinder may cause
either boom to move unexpectedly.
• The boom may also move unexpectedly if
a port relief adjusting screw is unscrewed
(counterclockwise) too far and the pressure
drops below that which is required to hold the
PUSH LEFT JOYSTICK FORWARD TO MOVE weight of the boom and head.
FELLING HEAD AWAY FROM MACHINE
• Ensure the head is resting squarely on a
860-01.AI
solid footing and the stick cylinders are fully
extended, tank pressure is relieved and
engine is shut off before disconnecting any
hydraulic lines.
PULL LEFT JOYSTICK BACK TO MOVE

FELLING HEAD TOWARDS THE MACHINE
Pushing the left joystick FORWARD moves the
attachment STRAIGHT OUT away from the
machine. Pulling back on the left joystick moves
the head IN towards the machine.
12.4
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
HOIST CYLINDER
FULLY RETRACTED
TIP OF STICK BOOM

FULLY SUPPORTED
Before attempting to disconnect hydraulic hoses or

• The machine is parked on level ground with
the attachment on the ground (Fig. 1).
• The stick cylinders are fully extended (Fig. 1)
or the hoist cylinder fully collapsed (Fig. 2).
• The tip of the stick boom is supported.
For additional safety precautions refer to ER
BOOM SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS in SECTION 1
OF THIS MANUAL.
NOTE: Because of the hydraulic connection
between the hoist boom and ER cylinders, the ER
cylinder can overpower the stick cylinder under
certain conditions, causing the stick boom to move
unexpectedly. This most often occurs when setting
the HOIST BOOM UP relief valve, causing the
stick to extend, but it may also happen at other
times if the relief settings are not correct. Ensure
that all personnel and equipment are clear of the
boom path and that there is sufficient overhead
clearance for the head to rise before making any
adjustments.
12.5
ER BOOM SYSTEM COMPONENTS Refer also to ER BOOM SYSTEM in THIS
SECTION for ER boom system service safety
information.
WARNING
This machine may be equipped with an

ER boom system . Because of this, it may
behave in an unexpected manner compared
to a conventional boom system.
HOIST CYLINDER
B4 A4
D1 C1 C2 C3 D3 B4 B3 A4
B1
L.H. STICK
CYL. BASE
A1
L.H. STICK
CYL. ROD
D2
R.H. STICK
CYL. ROD
R.H. STICK A3 T1
CYL. BASE
BOOM HYDRAULICS
ER
NON-ER
C2 C3 D3 B3
BOOM (ER)
VALVE
L.H. STICK CYLINDER
D2
TO TELESCOPIC CYLINDER A3
R.H. STICK CYLINDER
BULKHEAD FITTING
- BELOW ER VALVE
(OPTIONAL)
845CH-149 ER/NON-ER BOOM SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS

12.6
O P Q R S A
M
D
L K J I H G B F E
845C-273
Er Boom Manifold Connections

A Rear View K Port – D2 (Left Side Cylinder Rod End)
B Front View L Port – P1 (Plugged)
C Port – B1 (From Hoist Valve Port – B) M Port – D1 (From Stick Valve Port – B)
D Port – A1 (From Hoist Valve Port – A) N Port – C1 (From Stick Valve Port – A)
E Port – T1 (Tank Return) O Port – C2 (Left Side Stick Cylinder Base End)
F Port – P2 and Check Valve (Located on Bottom) P Port – C3 (Plugged)
G Port – A3 (Right Stick ER Cylinder Base End) Q Port – B3 (Right Stick ER Cylinder Rod End)
H Port – A2 (Plugged) R Port – B4 (Hoist Cylinder Rod End)
I Port – D3 (Plugged) S Port – A4 (Hoist Cylinder Base End)
J Port – B2 (Plugged)
12.7
BOOM CONTROL VALVE
The hoist and stick spool sections each have port
relief valves with anti-cavitation features to protect
the circuit from abnormally high pressures induced
by the working load. FLOW ADJUSTING SCREWS
Adjustable spool travel stops on each pilot end cap

of the spool sections can be adjusted to limit spool
travel and control the flow of oil to the cylinder(s).
Controlling the flow of oil to the cylinders also
controls the operating speed.
To adjust the relief valves, refer to SET MAIN
BOOM AND STICK PORT RELIEF VALVES in
THIS SECTION. MAIN CONTROL
To adjust the oil flow, refer to ADJUST OIL FLOW 845CH-158 VALVE(FRONT VIEW)
TO CYLINDERS in THIS SECTION.
HOIST BOOM 'UP' FLOW STICK BOOM 'OUT' FLOW

ADJUSTING SCREW ADJUSTING SCREW
STICK BOOM 'IN'

HOIST BOOM 'DOWN' B B B B PORT CONNECTION
PORT CONNECTION
HOIST STICK
HOIST BOOM 'UP'

PORT CONNECTION A A A A STICK BOOM 'OUT'
PORT CONNECTION
HOIST BOOM 'DOWN' STICK BOOM 'IN' FLOW

FLOW ADJUSTING SCREW ADJUSTING SCREW
NOTE: PORTS 'A' TO CYLINDER BASE

END. PORTS 'B' TO CYLINDER ROD
END.
845CH-130 MAIN CONTROL VALVE FLOW ADJUSTING SCREWS (FRONT VIEW OF VALVE)
12.8
LOAD SENSING\ENGINE ANTI-STALL For a full description of the engine anti-stall, Refer
to SECTION 9 in THIS MANUAL.
The boom hydraulics along with the swing, pump
2, head rotate and track drive, telescopic stick For a full description of the pilot system including
functions (if equipped) circuits are all under the the joystick handles, refer to SECTION 5 in THIS
control of the load sensing system incorporated MANUAL.
into the main hydraulic circuit.
For a full description of the main hydraulic system
including load sensing, main pump and the
main control valve, Refer to SECTION 4 in THIS
MANUAL.
MD3 COMPUTER
XS2 MODULE (CAB) XA2-A0 MODULE XS2-A1 MODULE

(ENGINE FRAME) (ENGINE FRAME)
J1939 ENGINE LOAD SENSE

PUMP HP LIMITER PRESSURE
ECU (RPM) (ANTI-STALL) SENSOR
TO ANTI-STALL
SWITCH ON CONTROL
PANEL (IN CAB)
TO OIL
COOLER
TO TANK
FROM
'P' OIL
PRESSURE COOLER
PORT
TO OIL
COOLER
MAIN
CONTROL
VALVE
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
A CAN LINE
WIRE
MAIN PUMP
'LS' SIGNAL TO
MAIN PUMP

12.9
HOIST BOOM STICK STICK

CYLINDER VALVE CYLINDER CYLINDER
D1 C1
B3
B4 A3
LEFT JOYSTICK RIGHT JOYSTICK
D3
A4
C3
C2
D2
T1 B 1 A1
TP1234 TO TANK 1234TP
TO OIL
COOLER
'LS' TO MAIN
PUMP B B B B
TO TANK
FROM OIL
A A A A COOLER
FROM MAIN
PUMP TO 'P'
PORT TO OIL
COOLER
MAIN CONTROL
VALVE
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
MAIN CAN LINE
CONTROL WIRE
VALVE
TO TANK
'XP'
TEST
'XLS' PORT
PILOT MANIFOLD
TEST
PORT
FROM PILOT PRESSURE
REDUCING VALVE
845CH-148 ER BOOM SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

12.10
PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTIONS
H845C-84
MAIN
SYSTEM OVER VALVE
PRESSURE MANIFOLD
CONTROL
RELIEF
'P'
PRESSURE
PORT
'LS' PRESSURE
CONTROL
RELIEF
'XLS' 'XP'
TEST TEST
PORT PORT
MAIN CONTROL VALVE 'XLS' & 'XP' PORTS
The pressure gauge connections are the 'XP' and

'XLS' gauge tests port on the main valve manifold.
‘P’
TEST
PORT
‘LS’
TEST
PORT
845C-105 MAIN PUMP 'LS' (PL) AND 'P' TEST PORTS

12.11
SETTING PORT RELIEF VALVES 3. Apply the swing brake.
HOIST BOOM, STICK BOOM, HEAD TILT 4. Turn OFF the engine.
Refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTING and 5. Remove the ignition key.
temperature.
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
860C-001

A B C
845C-232
CAUTION A 'XLS' Test Port
B 'XP' Test Port
Use caution when in the cab as a slight C 'LS' Pressure Relief Valve
7. Connect a 0–700 bar (0–10 000 psi) pressure
gauge on 'XP' test port of main control valve.
assembly
8. Turn the port relief valve adjusting screws fully
IN (clockwise) for functions being set, do not
CAUTION over tighten or breakage will result.
Operator is responsible for the safe 10. Check that all personnel are clear of the
operation of the machine. machine before starting engine.
WARNING position.
Ensure that no one is standing near the start-up
13. Start the engine and set throttle to idle position
.
WARNING 14. Close and latch the front door.

12.12
15. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot HOIST BOOM PORT RELIEFS
system. NOTE: When making these relief adjustments,
16. Place ANTI-STALL switch in the OFF position. the upper structure should be positioned with the
boom in the straight ahead position between the
17. Place FAN SERVICE mode to 'ON'. Refer tracks.
to COMPUTER – ADJUSTMENT MENU –
COOLING FAN SERVICE MODE in SECTION
6 of THIS MANUAL. WARNING
18. With the aid of an assistant, bottom out the
cylinder of the function being set. The boom will fall and injury or death may
occur if the relief valve adjusting screw is
19. Loosen the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting turned (counterclockwise) too far out.
screw locknut.
20. Temporarily increase 'LS' relief valve setting to
22. With the aid of an assistant, hold the right
345 bar (5000 psi) on gauge 'XP'.
hand joystick in the HOIST BOOM UP position
21. Tighten the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting (fully extended).
screw locknut.
SPOOL TRAVEL PILOT
STOP END CAP
• 19 mm WRENCH
• 6 mm ALLEN KEY
ADJUSTING SCREW
• 5 mm ALLEN KEY
LOCKNUT
• 17 mm
WRENCH
PORT RELIEF
VALVE
MAIN
VALVE
BODY
23. Loosen the HOIST BOOM UP port relief valve

cartridge locknut.
24. Slowly turn the adjusting screw
counterclockwise until the pressure gauge
reading at (P) port drops below HOIST BOOM
UP port relief specifications.
25. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise until the
pressure gauge reading meets hoist boom
port relief specifications.
26. Tighten the adjusting screw locknut taking
same time.
12.13
27. With the aid of an assistant, hold the right STICK BOOM PORT RELIEFS
hand joystick in the HOIST BOOM DOWN NOTE: When making these relief adjustments,
position (fully retracted). the upper structure should be positioned with the
28. Loosen the HOIST BOOM DOWN port relief boom in the straight ahead position between the
valve cartridge locknut. tracks.
29. Slowly turn the adjusting screw Repeat steps 1 to 21 of SETTING PORT RELIEF
counterclockwise until the pressure gauge VALVES – HOIST BOOM, STICK BOOM, HEAD
reading at (P) port drops below HOIST BOOM TILT to set the port relief valves for the STICK
DOWN port relief specifications. BOOM IN and OUT functions.
pressure gauge reading meets hoist port relief
WARNING
specifications.
The boom will fall and injury or death may
31. Tighten adjusting screw locknut taking care occur if the relief valve adjusting screw is
not to turn the adjusting screw at the same turned (counterclockwise) too far out.
time.
32. Reset the main valve (LS) relief pressure 9. With the aid of an assistant, hold the left hand
specifications. Refer to MAIN CONTROL joystick in the STICK BOOM OUT position
VALVE DESCRIPTION – SET LOAD SENSE (fully extended).
SPOOL TRAVEL PILOT
MANUAL. STOP END CAP
• 19 mm WRENCH
33. Reset fan service mode to OFF. • 6 mm ALLEN KEY
34. Reset anti-stall mode to ON. ADJUSTING SCREW

• 5 mm ALLEN KEY
LOCKNUT
attachment resting firmly on the ground. • 17 mm
WRENCH
PORT RELIEF
VALVE
38. Remove the ignition key. MAIN
VALVE
39. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. BODY
40. Remove pressure gauges. MAIN VALVE PORT RELIEF VALVE

90744-3
10. Loosen the STICK BOOM OUT port relief

valve cartridge locknut.
reading at (P) port drops below STICK BOOM
OUT port relief specifications.
pressure gauge reading meets stick boom port
relief specifications.
13. Tighten adjusting screw locknut taking care
not to turn the adjusting screw at the same
time.
12.14
14. With the aid of an assistant, hold the left hand HEAD TILT PORT RELIEFS
joystick in the STICK BOOM IN position (fully NOTE: When making these relief adjustments,
retracted). the upper structure should be positioned with the
15. Loosen the STICK BOOM IN port relief valve boom in the straight ahead position between the
cartridge locknut. tracks.
16. Slowly turn the adjusting screw Repeat steps 1 to 21 of SETTING PORT RELIEF
counterclockwise until the pressure gauge VALVES – HOIST BOOM, STICK BOOM, HEAD
reading at (P) port drops below STICK BOOM TILT to set the port relief valves for the HEAD TILT
IN port relief specifications. FORWARD and BACKWARD functions.
pressure gauge reading meets stick port relief
WARNING
specifications.
The boom will fall and injury or death may
18. Tighten adjusting screw locknut taking care occur if the relief valve adjusting screw is
not to turn the adjusting screw at the same turned (counterclockwise) too far out.
time.
19. Reset the main valve (LS) relief pressure 9. With the aid of an assistant, hold the right
specifications. Refer to MAIN CONTROL hand joystick in the HEAD TILT FORWARD
VALVE DESCRIPTION – SET LOAD SENSE position.
MANUAL. SPOOL TRAVEL PILOT
STOP END CAP
20. Reset fan service mode to OFF. • 19 mm WRENCH
• 6 mm ALLEN KEY
21. Reset anti-stall mode to ON.
ADJUSTING SCREW
• 5 mm ALLEN KEY
attachment resting firmly on the ground. LOCKNUT
• 17 mm
23. Apply swing brake if not already applied. WRENCH
PORT RELIEF
24. Turn OFF the engine. VALVE

MAIN
VALVE
26. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. BODY
10. Loosen the HEAD TILT FORWARD port relief

reading at (P) port drops below HEAD TILT
FORWARD port relief specifications.
pressure gauge reading meets HEAD TILT
time.
14. With the aid of an assistant, hold the right
hand joystick in the HEAD TILT BACKWARD
position.
15. Loosen the HEAD TILT FORWARD port relief
12.15
16. Slowly turn the adjusting screw ADJUST CONVENTIONAL BOOM OIL
counterclockwise until the pressure gauge FLOW – CYCLE TIMES
reading at (P) port drops below HEAD TILT
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE OPERATING
17. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise until the RANGE chart in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for
pressure gauge reading meets HEAD TILT specific pressure and speed values.
FORWARD relief specifications.
NOTE: Constant loosening and tightening of the
18. Tighten adjusting screw locknut taking care locknut (seal nut) on the adjusting screws will
not to turn the adjusting screw at the same eventually cause the seal in the nut to break down
time. and leak. Because of this it is best to keep the
19. Reset the main valve (LS) relief pressure adjusting procedure brief.
specifications. Refer to MAIN CONTROL 1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating
VALVE DESCRIPTION – SET LOAD SENSE temperature.
MANUAL.
22. Park machine on level ground with the position.
23. Apply swing brake if not already applied. start-up
24. Turn OFF the engine. 6. Start the engine and set throttle to full .
25. Remove the ignition key. 7. Close and latch the front door.
26. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. 8. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
27. Remove pressure gauges. system.
MANUAL.
11. Use the MD3 computer to set anti-stall
mode to OFF. Refer to COMPUTER –
ADJUSTMENT MENU – ANTI-STALL MODE
in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
12.16
HOIST BOOM CYLINDERS STICK BOOM CYLINDERS
6. Move the left joystick forward to move the Repeat steps 1 to 11 of ADJUST CONVENTIONAL
STICK BOOM OUT and fully extend the BOOM OIL FLOW – CYCLE TIMES to set oil flow
cylinder. to the STICK BOOM CYLINDERS.
7. Move the right joystick forward to lower the 1. Move the left joystick forward to move the
HOIST BOOM and retract BOTH cylinders STICK BOOM out and fully extend the
until the attachment is 1 m (3.3 ft) above cylinder.
ground level.
2. Move the left joystick back to move the STICK
8. Move the joystick back to raise the hoist boom BOOM in and fully retract the cylinder. Record
and fully extend both cylinders. Record the the cycle time from stop to stop.
cycle time from stop to stop.
3. Move the left joystick forward to move the
9. Move the joystick forward to lower the HOIST STICK BOOM out and fully extend the
BOOM and retract cylinders until attachment cylinder. Record the cycle time from stop to
is 1 m (3.3 ft) above ground. Record the cycle stop.
time from stop to stop.
4. If required, adjust the flow adjusting screw for
10. If required, adjust the flow adjusting screw for STICK BOOM OUT speed or STICK BOOM IN
HOIST BOOM UP speed or HOIST BOOM speed for the stick boom cylinder.
DOWN speed for hoist boom cylinders.
13. Park machine on level ground with the attachment resting firmly on the ground.
12.17
HEAD TILT
Repeat steps 1 to 11 of ADJUST CONVENTIONAL
BOOM OIL FLOW – CYCLE TIMES to set oil flow
to the HEAD TILT CYLINDER.
1. Move the right joystick to the right to tilt the
head OUT and fully retract the cylinder.
2. Move the right joystick to the left to tilt the
head IN and fully extend the cylinder. Record
the cycle time from stop to stop.
3. Move the right joystick to the right to tilt the
head OUT and fully retract the cylinder.
Record the cycle time from stop to stop.
4. If required, adjust the flow adjusting screw
for HEAD TILT IN speed or HEAD TILT OUT
speed for the head tilt cylinder.
12.18
ADJUST ER BOOM OIL FLOW – CYCLE STICK BOOM CYLINDER
TIMES 12. Move the left joystick forward to move the
Refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTING and STICK BOOM out and fully extend the
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE OPERATING cylinder.
RANGE chart in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for 13. Move the left joystick back to move the STICK
specific pressure and speed values. BOOM in and fully retract the cylinder. Record
NOTE: Constant loosening and tightening of the the cycle time from stop to stop.
locknut (seal nut) on the adjusting screws will 14. Move the left joystick forward to move the
eventually cause the seal in the nut to break down STICK BOOM out and fully extend the
and leak. Because of this it is best to keep the cylinder. Record the cycle time from stop to
adjusting procedure brief. stop.
1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating 15. If required, adjust the flow adjusting screw
temperature. for STICK BOOM OUT (ER BOOM) speed or
2. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. STICK BOOM IN (ER BOOM) speed for the
stick boom cylinder.
machine before starting engine. 16. Reset fan service mode to OFF.
4. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run 17. Reset anti-stall mode to ON.
position. 18. Park machine on level ground with the
5. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine attachment resting firmly on the ground.
start-up 19. Apply swing brake if not already applied.
6. Start the engine and set throttle to full . 20. Turn OFF the engine.
7. Close and latch the front door. 21. Remove the ignition key.
8. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot 22. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
system.
MANUAL.
11. Use the MD3 computer to set anti-stall
mode to OFF. Refer to COMPUTER –
ADJUSTMENT MENU – ANTI-STALL MODE
in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
12.19
TYPICAL CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES
Do not over adjust the flow adjusting screws to
provide faster cycle times, this will increase stress
on boom components and the hydraulic system.
To set cylinder cycle times, loosen the spool
travel-stop locknut on the adjusting screw. Turn the
adjusting screw IN (clockwise) to SLOW DOWN
and OUT (counterclockwise) to SPEED UP.
Tighten the adjusting screw locknut and re-check
times.
IMPORTANT!
Backing the adjusting screw out to exceed
PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS in SECTION
3 of THIS MANUAL allows the valve spool to travel
beyond the optimum position for maximum oil flow.
This causes cylinder cycle times to INCREASE
and boom function to SLOW DOWN. If over
adjustment has occurred allow the valve to return
to the neutral position and adjust the screw IN until
it just touches the valve spool. Repeat ADJUST
OIL TO CYLINDERS PROCEDURE to set cylinder
cycle times. Do not turn the adjusting screw more
than 12 turns out from where it just touches the
valve spool when in the neutral position.
12.20
CONVERTING ER BOOM SYSTEM TO
CONVENTIONAL BOOM SYSTEM IMPORTANT!
STICK CYLINDERS 34.5 kPa (5 psi) MAXIMUM.
FULLY EXTENDED
Before servicing hydraulic system, wearing
eye protection, release air pressure from
tank using air vent valve.
FILTER/
AIR VENT BREATHER
VALVE HANDLE
TIP OF STICK SCHRADER
BOOM FULLY VALVE
SUPPORTED MANIFOLD
860C-001
HOIST CYLINDER
FULLY RETRACTED
PRESSURE
GAUGE
845C-097 AIR VENT
EXHAUST
After service is completed, close air vent valve

and add air pressure from a clean air source to
TIP OF STICK BOOM the hydraulic tank via the Schrader valve. Do not
FULLY SUPPORTED
860C-002 exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi). Refer to HYDRAULIC
SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for details.
2. Apply swing brake.
1
2
5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. 3
6. Depressurize the hydraulic tank. Refer to 4

INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 3 of THIS
MANUAL
845CH-144
NOTE: To prevent excessive loss of hydraulic
oil from the system while servicing the
boom system, it may be necessary to install 7. Remove the bolts (1), washers (2), retainer
a vacuum on the hydraulic tank. Refer to plate (3) and belting (4) from the access hole
HYDRAULIC TANK VACUUM SWITCH in below the hoist boom to gain access to the
SECTION 4 of THIS MANUAL. boom manifold.
8. Install a drain pan and wiper cloths under
boom manifold to catch any spilled oil.
9. Disconnect the right stick cylinder hoses from
the A3 and B3 ports on the boom manifold.
10. Remove the fittings from the A3 and B3 ports
on the boom manifold.
11. Remove the plugs from the C3 and D3 ports
and install them in the A3 and B3 ports on the
boom manifold.
12. Install the fittings removed from A3 and
B3 ports in C3 and D3 ports on the boom
manifold.
12.21
13. Install the right stick cylinder (rod end) hose
D1 C1 C2 C3 B4 B3 A4
(removed from the A3 port) on the D3 port.
Install the right stick cylinder (base end) hose
(removed from the B3 port) on the C3 port. L.H. STICK
B1
CYL. BASE
14. Tighten fittings and plugs in manifold to 142- L.H. STICK
CYL. ROD
156 Nm (105-115 lbf-ft), and hose connections R.H. STICK
D2 A1
to fittings to 115-122 Nm (85-90 lbf-ft). CYL. BASE

D3
R.H. STICK A3 T1
15. Turn off vacuum pump, remove hose and CYL. ROD
CHECK VALVE
B2 A2
reinstall hydraulic tank breather filter. P1 Front
AND P2 PORT
(ON BOTTOM)
16. Close air vent valve (push handle up). Add air 845CH-146
pressure to the hydraulic tank via the schrader
valve from a clean air source. Do not exceed NON-ER BOOM MANIFOLD
34.5 kPa (5 psi). CONNECTIONS
17. Remove drain pan and wiper cloths, and wipe The Boom Manifold connections for NON-ER
up any spilled oil. boom systems are as follows:
18. Reinstall the belting, retainer plate, washers • A1 Hoist Valve 'A' Port
and bolts over the access hole below the main • A2 Plugged
boom.
• A3 Plugged
• A4 Hoist Cylinder Base End
machine before starting engine. • B1 Hoist Valve 'B' Port
21. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run • B2 Plugged
position. • B3 Plugged
22. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine • B4 Hoist Cylinder Rod End
start-up
• C1 From Stick Valve 'A' Port
23. Start the engine and set throttle to full .
• C2 Left Stick Cylinder Base End
• C3 Right Stick Cylinder Base End
system. • D1 From Stick Valve 'B' Port
26. Refer to SECTION 2 of the Operator's Manual • D2 Left Stick Cylinder Rod End
to ensure the hoist and stick boom functions • D3 Right Stick Cylinder Rod End
are correct.
• P1 Plugged
27. Refer to CONVERTING NON-ER TO
ER BOOM to revert back to ER boom • P2 Plugged
configuration. • T1 Return to Tank
12.22
CONVERTING CONVENTIONAL TO ER
BOOM SYSTEM IMPORTANT!
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED 34.5 kPa (5 psi) MAXIMUM.
Before servicing hydraulic system, wearing
eye protection, release air pressure from
tank using air vent valve.
FILTER/
AIR VENT BREATHER
TIP OF STICK VALVE HANDLE
BOOM FULLY SCHRADER
SUPPORTED VALVE
860C-001 MANIFOLD
HOIST CYLINDER
FULLY RETRACTED
PRESSURE
GAUGE
845C-097 AIR VENT
EXHAUST

TIP OF STICK BOOM
860C-002
FULLY SUPPORTED the hydraulic tank via the Schrader valve. Do not
exceed 34.5 kPa (5 psi). Refer to HYDRAULIC
1. Park machine on level ground with the SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for details.
1
2
3
6. Depressurize the hydraulic tank. Refer to
HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION 4
MANUAL
845CH-144
boom system, it may be necessary to install 7. Remove the bolts (1), washers (2), retainer
a vacuum on the hydraulic tank. Refer to plate (3) and belting (4) from the access hole
HYDRAULIC TANK VACUUM SWITCH in below the hoist boom to gain access to the
SECTION 4 of THIS MANUAL. boom manifold.
8. Install a drain pan and wiper cloths under
boom manifold to catch any spilled oil.
9. Disconnect the right stick cylinder hoses from
the C3 and D3 ports on the boom manifold.
10. Remove the fittings from the C3 and D3 ports
on the boom manifold.
11. Remove the Plugs from the A3 and B3 ports
and install them in the C3 and D3 ports on the
boom manifold.
12.23
12. Install the fittings removed from C3 and
D3 ports in A3 and B3 ports on the boom D1 C1 C2 C3 B4 B3 A4
manifold.
B1
13. Install the right stick cylinder (rod end) hose L.H. STICK
CYL. BASE
(removed from the C3 port) on the B3 port. L.H. STICK
Install the right stick cylinder (base end) hose CYL. ROD
D2 A1
R.H. STICK
(removed from the D3 port) on the A3 port. CYL. ROD D3
R.H. STICK A3 T1
14. Tighten fittings and plugs in manifold to 142- CYL. BASE
B2 A2 CHECK VALVE
156 Nm (105-115 lbf-ft), and hose connections P1 AND P2 PORT
Front
to fittings to 115-122 Nm (85-90 lbf-ft). (ON BOTTOM)
845CH-145
15. Turn off vacuum pump, remove hose and
reinstall hydraulic tank breather filter. ER BOOM MANIFOLD CONNECTIONS
16. Close air vent valve (push handle up). Add air The Boom Manifold connections for ER boom
pressure to the hydraulic tank via the schrader systems are as follows:
valve from a clean air source. Do not exceed • A1 Hoist Valve 'A' Port
34.5 kPa (5 psi).
• A2 Plugged
17. Remove drain pan and wiper cloths, and wipe
up any spilled oil. • A3 Right Stick ER Cylinder Base End
18. Reinstall the belting, retainer plate, washers • A4 Hoist Cylinder Base End
and bolts over the access hole below the main • B1 Hoist Valve 'B' Port
boom.
• B2 Plugged
19. Start the engine, engage the pilot switch and
operate the joysticks. Refer to SECTION 2 of • B3 Right Stick ER Cylinder Rod End
the Operator's Manual to ensure the hoist and • B4 Hoist Cylinder Rod End
stick boom functions are correct.
• C1 From Stick Valve 'A' Port
20. Refer to CONVERTING ER TO NON-ER
• C2 Left Stick Cylinder Base End
BOOM to revert back to NON-ER boom
configuration. • C3 Plugged
• D1 From Stick Valve 'B' Port
• D2 Left Stick Cylinder Rod End
• D3 Plugged
• P1 Plugged
• P2 Plugged
• T1 Return to Tank
12.24
LEVELING.........................................................................................................................................................13

SECTION 13 – LEVELING
A
ADJUSTING CYLINDER TRACKING AND MIN/MAX SETTINGS......................................................... 13.16

ADJUSTING FORWARD/REAR LEVELING SPEED............................................................................. 13.21
ADJUSTING START AND STOP RAMPS.............................................................................................. 13.19
C
CHECKING LEVELING SPEED............................................................................................................. 13.15

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM................................................................................................................................. 13.4
COUNTERBALANCE VALVE PRESSURES.......................................................................................... 13.24
E
JOYSTICK............................................................................................................................................13.5
MD3 COMPUTER................................................................................................................................. 13.6
XA2-A1 MODULE................................................................................................................................. 13.5
H
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
COUNTERBALANCE VALVE............................................................................................................. 13.13
LEVELING............................................................................................................................................13.3
LEVELING CONTROL VALVE.............................................................................................................. 13.9
L
LEVELER COMPONENT LUBRICATION.............................................................................................. 13.49

INTERMEDIATE PIVOT BEARING.................................................................................................... 13.49
LUBRICATING CYLINDERS AND PINS............................................................................................. 13.49
SIDE PIVOT AXIS BEARINGS........................................................................................................... 13.49
LEVELING CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................... 13.2
LEVELING CONTROL VALVE................................................................................................................. 13.8
PORT CONNECTIONS........................................................................................................................ 13.8
PORT RELIEFS.................................................................................................................................... 13.8
PRESSURE COMPENSATION............................................................................................................ 13.8
REPLACING LEVELING CONTROL VALVE PORT RELIEFS:.......................................................... 13.11
SPOOL SECTIONS.............................................................................................................................. 13.8
LEVELING CYLINDER COUNTERBALANCE VALVES......................................................................... 13.12
OPERATING DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................. 13.12
TILT BACKWARD............................................................................................................................ 13.12
TILT FORWARD.............................................................................................................................. 13.12
TILT LEFT.......................................................................................................................................13.12
TILT RIGHT..................................................................................................................................... 13.12
LEVELING CYLINDER TAPER LOCK PINS.......................................................................................... 13.35
ADJUSTING AXIAL MOVEMENT OF THE BALL BUSHING ALONG THE PIN................................. 13.38
REPLACE LEVELING CYLINDER BALL BUSHINGS........................................................................ 13.41
SUPPORTING THE UPPER STRUCTURE....................................................................................... 13.36
BOOMS AND HEAD SUPPORTING UPPER STRUCTURE.......................................................... 13.36
HYDRAULIC JACKS AND WOOD BLOCKS.................................................................................. 13.36
OVERHEAD CRANE....................................................................................................................... 13.36
LEVELING ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................. 13.14
CYLINDER OPERATING SPEEDS.................................................................................................... 13.14
CYLINDER TRACKING...................................................................................................................... 13.14
START RAMP..................................................................................................................................... 13.14
STOP RAMP....................................................................................................................................... 13.14
LEVELING VALVE PORT RELIEF PRESSURE..................................................................................... 13.25
S
SIDE PIVOT AXIS BEARING................................................................................................................. 13.27

CHECKING SIDE PIVOT AXIS BEARING ENDPLAY........................................................................ 13.27
FRONT PIVOT AXIS BEARING...................................................................................................... 13.31
REAR PIVOT AXIS BEARING........................................................................................................ 13.27
13.1
Leveling Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
IMPORTANT!
This manual is applicable to factory installed machine functions and controls. It does not take
into account any changes or modifications made after shipment. Verify all functions before
operating this machine.
LEVELING CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Two leveling cylinders are used to operate the
leveling function. The left leveling cylinder retracts
Hydraulic oil for the leveling circuit is supplied by
while the right cylinder extends to tilt LEFT. To tilt
the main pump. Refer to HYDRAULIC PUMPS
RIGHT, the right leveling cylinder retracts while the
– MAIN PUMP in SECTION 4. The circuit is
left cylinder extends. Both cylinders extend at the
integrated into the main hydraulic system which
same time to tilt FORWARD or retract at the same
uses load sensing to control leveling functions.
time to tilt BACKWARD. Each cylinder is equipped
Two valve sections on the leveling control valve with a counterbalance valve for load holding.
supply oil to the rod and base ends of the two
leveling cylinders. The pilot manifold supplies
lower pressure pilot oil to the pilot end caps of the
two valve sections on the leveling control valve.
IDLER
860C-034
NOTE: All tilt directions (left, right, forward and

backward) in this section refer to direction of
The leveling function is operated by switches on tilt when the operator is facing the front of the
the joysticks (factory joystick installation shown machine (toward the idler).
above). The joystick switches provide input For additional information regarding SAFETY and
signals for the MD3 computer control system. The OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, refer to SECTION
computer control system then transmits output 1 of THIS MANUAL and SECTION 2 of the
signals to the XA2-A1 module and out to the OPERATOR'S MANUAL
electro-hydraulic spool actuators on the leveling
control valve. The leveling control valve then
directs oil to the two leveling cylinders.
13.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Leveling
FROM PILOT
SUPPLY VALVE
R.H. CYLINDER L.H. CYLINDER
COUNTER- COUNTER-
BALANCE BALANCE
VALVE VALVE
CASE DRAIN 1000 psi

PORT ON
ROTARY 5600 psi 5600 psi (5.5 CCW FROM FULLY CW) 5600 psi 5600 psi
MANIFOLD
3 5
EXT.
TELESCOPIC
4 6 OPTION
RET.
4785 psi 4785 psi 4785 psi 4785 psi

TRACK
LOW L.H.
BRAKE
RELEASE
TRACK
LOW R.H.
SWING
BRAKE
LEVELING CONTROL VALVE PILOT MANIFOLD
25 psi
25 psi
25 psi
MAX
RETURN
MANIFOLD
MAIN PUMP
1 psi
LEGEND
PRESSURE
PILOT HYDRAULIC TANK
TANK
SUCTION
EQUIPMENT
RETURN STRAINER
845CH-152 LEVELING HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

13.3
COUNTERBALANCE TO TANK
VALVES (ATTACHED
TO CYLINDERS) ROTARY
MANIFOLD
RIGHT JOYSTICK
LEFT JOYSTICK
VC
DR CC VR VC
DR CC
CR
VR
CR
FROM TRACK
MOTOR 'T'
PORTS
MD3 COMPUTER
LEFT CYLINDER
RIGHT
CYLINDER
TO
T1 'T' PORT XA2-A1
ON FAN MODULE
VALVE
XS2
LSPB PS MODULE
LS
XA2-A0
MODULE
LEVELER
CONTROL
VALVE
FROM G2 PORT PILOT

ON PUMP1 VALVE PRESSURE
LEGEND PILOT PRESSURE

SUCTION LINE
REDUCING VALVE
PRESSURE LINE TO MAIN
DRAIN LINE CONTROL
PILOT LINE VALVE
CAN LINE P
WIRE
TO TANK P1
PILOT TO TANK
MANIFOLD
MAIN PUMP
‘LS’ (PL)
'LS' PRESSURE
845CH-153 LEVELING CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

13.4

2 3 SWITCHES SWITCHES
2 3
1 4 1 4
1 442 YEL TO IQAN XS2 PIN 10 1 443 YEL TO IQAN MD3 C2-1
5 6 5 6
TO IQAN XS2 PIN 42 614 2 256 GRN TO IQAN XS2 PIN 11 TO IQAN XS2 PIN 42 614 2 258 GRN TO IQAN MD3 C2-2
SHEET 7 RED SHEET 7 RED
3 253 BLU TO IQAN XS2 PIN 12 3 257 BLU TO IQAN MD3 C2-3
4 445 PUR TO IQAN XS2 PIN 13 4 446 PUR TO IQAN MD3 C2-4
5 381 BRN TO IQAN XS2 PIN 24 5 383 BRN TO IQAN MD3 C2-9
6 380 WHT TO IQAN XS2 PIN 25 6 382 WHT TO IQAN MD3 C2-10
7 251 ORG (TRIG) TO IQAN XS2 PIN 38 7 252 ORG (TRIG) TO IQAN MD3 C2-11
1. Pump 1 1. Pump 2
2. Tilt Left (if equipped) 2. Tilt Forward (if equipped)
3. Tilt Right (if equipped) 3. Tilt backward (if equipped)
4. Not Used 4. Not used
7. Telescopic Retract (if equipped) 7. Telescopic Extend (if equipped)
56512BR0S7 JOYSTICK ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC

TO SHEET 10 RED 631 42 +VREF D OUT 7 822 N/U

TO SHEET 10 BLK 632 29 -VREF D IN 35 TAN 102 ENGINE RPM UP (SHEET 5)
CRET C- 32 - N/U
CRET B- 31 GRN 274 LEVEL, LEFT CYLINDER - (SHEET 12)
CRET B+ 17 GRN 275 LEVEL, LEFT CYLINDER + (SHEET 12)

CRET A- 30 GRN 277 LEVEL, RIGHT CYLINDER - (SHEET 12)
CRET A+ 16 GRN 278 LEVEL, RIGHT CYLINDER + (SHEET 12)
ACCESSORY RELAY
SHEET 1 N/U 40 CAN-L
N/U 26 CAN-H
RED
20 1
ADDRESS 1T
TAG 14
15A
RED 450 28 +BAT
BLK G450 15 -BAT
56512BR0S13 XA2-A1 MODULE ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
13.5
ACCESSORY RELAY
SHEET 1
RED
20 BATTERY POWER
SHEET 1
RED
351C
2A
RED
648
IQAN MD3
BLK G283 C1-1 -BAT VIN-A C2-1 GRN 443 RIGHT JS SHEET 7
N/U RS232 -VREF BLK

C1-5 DATA IN C2-5

620 ohm
N/U RS232 +VREF RED 612

C1-8 DATA OUT C2-8 N/U

3A
N/U 1-RED
2-WHT
USB
3-GRN PORT
4-BLK
N/U DRAIN
PANEL
HORN BLK
G50
56512BR0S8 MD3 COMPUTER ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
13.6
ROTARY MANIFOLD
UNDERCARRIAGE LEFT LEVELING IDLER
CYLINDER LEVELING ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
RIGHT LEVELING
CYLINDER
INSPECTION
COVERS
TRACK
DRIVE MOTOR ROLLER
TRACK
ASSEMBLY
DRIVE SPROCKET TRACK
TRACK DRIVE
GEARBOX ROLLER
845CH-151 LEVELING UNDERCARRIAGE
13.7
LEVELING CONTROL VALVE SPOOL SECTIONS
The valve spool sections are equipped with
ELECTRO- 845CH-119
HYDRAULIC proportional, electro-hydraulic spool actuators.
SPOOL
ACTUATORS RETURN The actuators are spring centred to the neutral
PORT position. The actuators are shifted by a variable
PILOT voltage signal sent to the appropriate solenoid.
PRESSURE
PRESSURE COMPENSATION
PORT
RELIEF The primary purpose of pressure compensation
VALVES
is to maintain a constant flow rate to functions
(i.e., maintain the same speed of movement),
LOAD regardless of pressure variations in the system.
SENSE
PORT The pressure compensator also contains a
A
A load-hold check valve. An orifice is installed
immediately down stream of the pressure
B compensator to smoothly regulate the response of
B the compensator.
PORT RELIEFS
845CH-119 LEFT
PORT
RELIEF CYLINDER
VALVES RIGHT
INLET CYLINDER
PORT
PORT
LEVELING CONTROL VALVE RELIEF
VALVES
The leveling control valve is located in the upper
structure inside the hydraulic valve compartment.
Hydraulic oil for the leveling function is supplied by
the main pump. LEFT
ROD - 'A' PS
A
The spool sections of the leveling control valve are RIGHT A
LS
ROD - 'A'
equipped with proportional, electro-hydraulic spool B
LEFT
actuators. The actuators are spring centred to BASE - 'B' B
the neutral position, and are shifted by sending a RIGHT
BASE - 'B'
variable voltage signal (from the XA2-A1 module)
to the appropriate solenoid.
PORT T1
RELIEF
The leveling control valve is equipped with port VALVES
reliefs on each side of all spool sections. Their P
function is to protect the valve and the function LEVELING CONTROL VALVE
from pressure spikes in the system. The port
reliefs also act as anti-cavitation valves, which The leveling valve is equipped with port reliefs on
means they allow oil to flow from the tank gallery each port of the spool sections. The function of the
in the valve to the service ports in the event of port relief is to protect the valve and the function
under pressure. from pressure spikes in the system.
Port reliefs cannot be adjusted. Port reliefs The port reliefs also act as anti-cavitation valves,
installed in each section are specifically designed which means they allow oil to flow from the tank
for use in that section and should not be gallery in the valve to the service ports in the
interchanged with port reliefs from other valve event of under pressure. Port reliefs cannot be
sections . adjusted. Port reliefs installed in each section
PORT CONNECTIONS are specifically designed for use in that section
and should not be interchanged with port reliefs
The 'B' ports (bottom ports) are connected to
from other valve sections. Refer to REPLACING
the base end of the cylinders and the 'A' ports
LEVELING CONTROL VALVE PORT RELIEFS in
(top ports) are connected to the rod end of the
THIS SECTION.
cylinders.
13.8
845C-254
LEVELING CONTROL VALVE SCHEMATIC
13.9
END
CAP
PORT
RELIEF
SPRING
ASSEMBLY
HOUSING
24V PROPORTIONAL
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC
SPOOL ACTUATORS
AIR
BLEED
SCREW PRESSURE
COMPENSATOR
END
CAP
845CH-122 SPOOL SECTION EXPLODED VIEW
PORT RELIEF ‘B’ PORT RELIEF ‘A’ 24V PROPORTIONAL

SIDE SIDE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC
SPOOL ACTUATORS
SPOOL
PRESSURE
COMPENSATOR
1018-30 SPOOL CROSS SECTION

13.10
REPLACING LEVELING CONTROL VALVE 860C-146
PORT RELIEFS: 27
100 1
NOTE: Port relief valves installed in each section
are specifically designed for that section. They
should not be substituted with port reliefs from
other valves or sections.
860C-155
= Slot screw
1. Park machine on level ground with the = Socket head (mm)
attachment resting firmly on the ground. = Hexagon
= Tightening torque N·m
3. Turn OFF the engine. PORT RELIEF VALVE CARTRIDGES

7. Remove the relief cartridge using a a 27 mm
5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. wrench or socket.
6. Depressurize the hydraulic tank. Refer to 8. Install the replacement relief cartridge with
HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION new O-ring, and tighten to 100 Nm (74 lbf-ft).
9. Remove the vacuum and pressurize the
MANUAL
hydraulic tank.
oil from the system while servicing the leveling
control valve , it may be necessary to install
a vacuum on the hydraulic tank. Refer to
HYDRAULIC TANK VACUUM SWITCH in
13.11
LEVELING CYLINDER OPERATING DESCRIPTION
COUNTERBALANCE VALVES TILT LEFT
A counterbalance valve is mounted on each of the Oil flows proportionally from both the right and left
two leveling cylinders. Each counterbalance valve leveling sections of the leveling control valve to
consists of a steel body and two adjustable pilot both the right and left leveling cylinders. Oil enters
operated counterbalance cartridges. the right cylinder base end and the left cylinder
rod end via the cylinder counterbalance valves
The purpose of each counterbalance valve is to mounted directly to the cylinders.
provide load holding and more precise control of
leveling stability by minimizing creep. TILT RIGHT
Oil flows proportionally from both the right and left
leveling sections of the leveling control valve to
both the right and left leveling cylinders. Oil enters
DANGER
the right cylinder rod end and the left cylinder
base end via the cylinder counterbalance valves
Never work under the machine or near mounted directly to the cylinders.
the leveler area when it is unsupported.
contact with moving frames and cylinders TILT FORWARD
could result in death or serious injury! Oil flows proportionally from both the right and left
Properly support and brace the leveler leveling sections of the leveling control valve to
cylinders and shut off the engine before both the right and left leveling cylinders. Oil enters
performing service work in this area. the left cylinder base end and the right cylinder
base end via the cylinder counterbalance valves
mounted directly to the cylinders.
TILT BACKWARD
Oil flows proportionally from both the right and left
leveling sections of the leveling control valve to
both the right and left leveling cylinders. Oil enters
the left cylinder rod end and the right cylinder
rod end via the cylinder counterbalance valves
mounted directly to the cylinders.
13.12
DANGER TO
TO CYLINDERS
CYLINDERS
DR
DR
Extreme care and attention must be
exercised when making adjustments to the CR2
CR2 CC2
CC2
leveling hydraulic and electrical circuits.
Ensure that all personnel not directly
associated with the servicing are well clear
of the machine.
The whole upper structure/cab/engine 5600
5600 PSI psi VR
VR VC
VC 5600
5600 PSIpsi
compartment, boom and attachment can TO LEVELLING

TO LEVELING
CONTROL VALVE
tilt unexpectedly from side to side or CONTROL
forward and backwards during servicing, VALVE
creating "pinch points" between the upper
structure and track assembly and the COUNTERBALANCE
845CH-124 VALVE SCHEMATIC
ground.
'2A' RELIEF '2B' RELIEF

Load control is provided by internal pilot operated VALVE VALVE
ADJUSTING ADJUSTING
relief valves which balance the pressure of SCREW SCREW
hydraulic fluid in the cylinders. Oil entering the
counterbalance valves provides pilot pressure to 'VR' PORT
operate the relief valve in the opposite line which
DRAIN
allows return oil from the cylinders to pass back PORT
'CR' PORT
to the leveling control valve. In addition there is a
second internal pilot line which operates the relief 'VC' PORT
valve from the return line to reduce pressure in the
cylinders when necessary.
LEVELING
830-D28 COUNTERBALANCE VALVE
13.13
LEVELING ELECTRONIC
ADJUSTMENT DANGER
Adjustments to the leveling system through the
ADJUST MENU from the MAIN MENU of the MD3
exercised when making adjustments to the
computer control system, electronically adjusts
the performance of the leveling system to suit
operating conditions. Refer to ELECTRONIC Ensure that all personnel not directly
SETTINGS DESCRIPTION in SECTION 2 in the associated with the servicing are well clear
OPERATOR'S MANUAL of the machine.
Four types of adjustment can be made to the The whole upper structure/cab/engine
leveling system: compartment, boom and attachment can
tilt unexpectedly from side to side or
CYLINDER OPERATING SPEEDS forward and backwards during servicing,
The speed the leveler cylinders extend and retract. creating "pinch points" between the upper
structure and track assembly and the
CYLINDER TRACKING
ground.
Adjustment of left and right leveler cylinder speeds
to prevent tracking (one cylinder extending or
retracting faster than the other).
START RAMP
Adjustment of the time it takes for the current to
go from Min to Max to provide a smooth initial
movement once a function is activated.
STOP RAMP
Adjustment of the time it takes for the current to
go from Min to Max to provide a smooth initial
movement once a function is deactivated.
13.14
CHECKING LEVELING SPEED 7. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
(CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES) system.
Refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTING and 8. Apply the swing brake.
HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATING RANGE chart 9. Place anti-stall switch in the OFF position.
pressure and speed values. 10. Press the backward tilt leveling switch and
fully retract both leveling cylinders.
NOTE: If the FORWARD and BACKWARD speeds
are within specifications then generally the left 11. Press the forward tilt leveling switch and fully
and right speeds will be also. Some adjustments extend leveling cylinders. Record cycle time
may be required to the left and right speeds to from stop to stop.
prevent the upper structure from tracking during 12. Operate the backward tilt leveling switch and
the FORWARD/BACKWARD movement. Refer to fully retract leveling cylinders. Record cycle
ADJUSTING CYLINDER TRACKING AND MIN/ time from stop to stop.
MAX SETTINGS in this section.
13. If required, adjust the MD3 computer settings
for forward and backward leveling speeds
CAUTION to meet LEVEL FORWARD and LEVEL
BACKWARD specifications.
Be aware of other personnel in the area. Refer to ADJUSTING FORWARD/
Operator is responsible for the safe BACKWARD LEVELING SPEED (CYLINDER
operation of the machine. OPERATING SPEED) in THIS SECTION.
CAUTION

rotation of the upper structure and booms
or movement of the tracks.
WARNING


temperature.
position.
start-up
5. Start the engine and set engine speed to high
idle .
13.15
ADJUSTING CYLINDER TRACKING The Adjust Menu appears.
AND MIN/MAX SETTINGS

Press the menu button to go to the MAIN Leveling Menu item. Press OK to confirm the
MENU. selection.
Press F1 to access the Adjust menu. Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the
RIGHT LEVEL CYLINDER (CYL OL) menu item
and press OK.
13.16
Press the F3 button to access the Plus + (cylinder Activate and hold the Tilt Left function on the
extend) selection and press OK. joystick and then using the up or down arrow
in the coils, spool cut on the valve, and various
attachment manufacturers) and of course, the

should be used.
adjusted press OK.
Press the F4 button to access the Minus -

(Retract) menu and then press OK twice.
13.17
The Min Current default setting is 300 mA and this Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the
should be used. LEFT LEVEL CYLINDER (CYL OL) and repeat the
procedure to set the Min and Max settings for the
LEFT LEVEL CYLINDER.
adjusted press OK. The left and right (+extend and -retract) cylinder
speeds have been set and now need to be
checked to ensure that the cylinders extend and
retract at the same rate.
To check this activate the Tilt Forward and Tilt
Backward functions on the joystick and ensure that
the cab tilts forward and backward evenly without
tracking to one side.
If the right cylinder extends faster than the left
cylinder it bottoms out first. Reducing the Right
(+Extend) Max current reduces the speed at which
the right cylinder extends to match the left cylinder
speed and vice versa.
Activate and hold the Tilt Right function on the

joystick and then using the up or down arrow
in the coils ,spool cut on the valve, and various
attachment manufacturers) -and of course, the
The Right Level Cylinder Min and Max settings
have now been set.
13.18
ADJUSTING START AND STOP RAMPS
Adjustment of the start and stop ramps will affect
how the function begins to move once activated
and how it stops once deactivated.
The start ramp is the time (mS) that it takes for the
current to climb from the Min current to the Max
current when a function is activated.
The stop ramp is the time (mS) that it takes for the
current to drop from the Max current to the Min
current when a function is deactivated.
860C-529
NOTE: The adjustment of the start and stop ramps

will apply to both the left and right cylinders

selection.

menu.
13.19
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to the
LEVELER START RAMP and press OK. LEVELER STOP RAMP and press OK.
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the
LEVELER START RAMP mS setting. Use the LEVELER STOP RAMP mS setting. Use the
Tilt Forward and Tilt Backward functions on the Tilt Forward and Tilt Backward functions on the
joystick and note how the cab begins to tilt when joystick and note how the cab comes to a stop
the function is activated. Increasing this setting will when the function is deactivated. Increasing
result in a less aggressive start while decreasing this setting will result in a less aggressive stop
the setting will result in a more aggressive start. while decreasing the setting will result in a more
Once the setting has been adjusted press OK. aggressive stop. Once the setting has been
adjusted press OK.
13.20
ADJUSTING FORWARD/BACKWARD
LEVELING SPEED (CYLINDER
OPERATING SPEED)
The forward and backward leveling speed
adjustment is used to adjust the CYLINDER
CYCLE TIMES. The cylinder extend and retract
speeds will be adjusted proportionally to the Max
mA settings described earlier in this section.
NOTE: The side to side speeds will also be a
product of these settings

selection.

MENU.

FORWARD LEVELING SPEED and press OK.
13.21
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust the Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust
FORWARD LEVELING SPEED to attain the the REAR LEVELING SPEED to attain the
recommended CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES or a recommended CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES or a
preferred speed. To check the CYLINDER CYCLE preferred speed. To check the CYLINDER CYCLE
TIMES refer to CHECKING LEVELING SPEED TIMES refer to CHECKING LEVELING SPEED
earlier in this section. Press OK after adjusting. earlier in this section. Press OK after adjusting.
The leveler adjustments are now complete.
NOTE: The default setting for the Forward and
Rear leveling speed is 100% so if the Cylinder
Cycle Time cannot be achieved then further
adjustment of the Max Current of the Left and
Right Level Cyl OL may be required. See the
previous pages for more detail.

REAR LEVELER SPEED and press OK.
13.22
Below is a table showing all the leveler default
settings.

Default
Settings
WRIST -CW / +CCW
LEVELER ADJUSTMENT
13.23
COUNTERBALANCE VALVE 5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
PRESSURES 6. Install leveling cylinder support braces to
prevent tilting of the upper structure during this
DANGER procedure.
7. Access the leveling counterbalance relief
Extreme care and attention must be valves located on the leveling cylinders.
8. Loosen locknut on '2A' counterbalance relief
valve and turn the adjusting screw all the way
Ensure that all personnel not directly IN (turning clockwise).
of the machine. '2A' RELIEF '2B' RELIEF
VALVE VALVE
The whole upper structure/cab/engine ADJUSTING
SCREW
ADJUSTING
SCREW
compartment, boom and attachment can
tilt unexpectedly from side to side or 'VR' PORT
forward and backwards during servicing,
creating "pinch points" between the upper DRAIN
PORT
structure and track assembly and the 'CR' PORT
ground.
'VC' PORT
LEVELING CROSSLINE
830-D28 RELIEF VALVE
9. Turn the adjusting screw OUT 51⁄2 turns

(turning counter clockwise). Tighten locknut
on adjusting screw taking care not to turn the
adjusting screw itself. This will set the relief
valve at approximately 386 bar (5600 psi).
NOTE: Each valve is factory set and should
require no further adjustment. 10. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the '2B'
counterbalance relief valve.
If adjustment is required, counterbalance
valves must be set manually using the following 11. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for the counterbalance
instructions. valve on the other cylinder (total of 4 reliefs, 2
on each counterbalance valve).
860C-155

13.24
LEVELING VALVE PORT RELIEF
PRESSURE DANGER
NOTE: The leveling port relief valves are cartridge
type relief valves and are not adjustable. Service
of the relief valves is limited to checking the relief
pressure and removal and replacement of the
valve cartridge. Ensure that all personnel not directly
of the machine.
temperature.
The whole upper structure/cab/engine
860C-155 compartment, boom and attachment can
tilt unexpectedly from side to side or
forward and backwards during servicing,
creating "pinch points" between the upper
structure and track assembly and the
ground.

attachment resting firmly on the ground. 4. Turn OFF the engine.
CAUTION 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

assembly
CAUTION

7. Install leveling cylinder support brace to
prevent tilting of the upper structure during this
WARNING procedure.
8. Connect a 0-350 bar (0-5000 psi) pressure
Ensure that no one is standing near the gauge on 'LS' test port of main control valve.
WARNING machine before starting engine.
The swing brake must be applied at all 11. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run
times during this procedure. position.
start-up
.
13.25
system.
NOTE: It may be necessary to increase the
engine rpm sufficiently to prevent the engine
from stalling.
16. Place ANTI-STALL switch in OFF position.
TILT FORE OR AFT TILT LEFT OR RIGHT

SECTION 4.
30. Remove the leveler cylinder locks on the
leveling cylinders.
B
A
845C-232
A 'XLS' Test Port

B 'LS' Pressure Control Relief
17. Loosen the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting

screw locknut.
18. Turn the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting
screw all the way in.
19. Tighten the 'LS' pressure relief valve adjusting
screw locknut.
20. With the aid of an assistant, press and hold
the tilt forward thumb switch.
21. Make sure the pressure gauge reading at port
'XLS' is approximately 331 bar (4850 psi).
NOTE: The port relief valves are not
adjustable. If observed pressures are not
within 3.5 bar (50 psi) one of the port relief
valves will need to be replaced. Refer to
REPLACING LEVELING CONTROL VALVE
PORT RELIEFS in THIS SECTION.
22. With the aid of an assistant, press and hold
the tilt backward thumb switch.
23. Make sure the pressure gauge reading at port
'XLS' is approximately 331 bar (4850 psi).
13.26
SIDE PIVOT AXIS BEARING 2. Apply the swing brake.
Preload is required on the side pivot axis bearings. 3. Turn OFF the engine.
If excessive endplay is noticed, the bearings will 4. Remove the ignition key.
need to be adjusted to a preload condition.
CHECKING SIDE PIVOT AXIS BEARING
ENDPLAY
860C-155
REAR PIVOT AXIS BEARING

1. Park machine on level ground with the 6. Install the leveler cylinder locks on the leveling
attachment in a relaxed state in front of the cylinders.
machine.
NOTE: Do not apply any external forces on
the boom or attachment. Parking the machine
in a relaxed state is necessary to adjust the
side pivot axis bearings.
845C-189
Side Pivot Axis Bearings

A Rear Pivot Axis Bearing Location B Front Pivot Axis Bearing Location
Note: Leveling cylinders removed for clarity.
13.27
845C-195
A B 845C-194
845C-193
845C-192
A B
C A
845C-190
C D
A Bolts and Washers
B Left Rotary Manifold Guard
C Right Rotary Manifold Guard A Rear Pivot Axis Bearing Lock Washer
B Front Pivot Axis Bearing Lock Washer
7. Remove the left and right rotary manifold C Rear Pivot Axis Bearing Locknut
guards. D Front Pivot Axis Bearing Locknut
9. Unlock the rear and front pivot axis bearing

lock washers.
10. Inspect the rear and front pivot axis bearing
lock washers. Replace the washers if the
locking tabs are broken, cracked or damaged.
C B
11. Turn the rear and front pivot axis bearing
locknuts counterclockwise three turns each.
845C-197
A C
845C-191
A Bolts and Washers (QTY 6)

B Rear Pivot Axis Bearing Cover
C Plastic Hose Guard
8. Remove the plastic hose guards located on

the rear pivot axis bearing cover.
A
A Front Retaining Cap Bolts (QTY 8)
12. Loosen the front retaining cap mounting bolts.

Finger tighten the bolts until there is no gap
between the washer and the retaining cap.
13.28
19. Loosen the 4 rear retaining cap mounting
bolts.
20. Tighten the 4 rear retaining cap mounting bolts
and washers until they are snug.
21. Torque the rear retaining mounting bolts to 1⁄3
A B C D of the recommended torque of 136 Nm (100
lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as in the previous
steps.
22. Repeat using the same sequence until the
recommended final torque of 136 Nm (100 lbf-
ft) is attained.
leveling cylinders.
845C-196 machine before starting engine.
A Bolts (QTY 8) 26. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run
B Washers (QTY 8) position.
C Rear Retaining Cap
D Shim
start-up
13. Remove the rear retaining cap mounting bolts 28. Start the engine and set throttle to idle position
and washers. .
14. Remove the rear retaining cap. 29. Close and latch the front door.
15. Remove the rear pivot axis bearing shims. 30. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
system.
860C-155
1 2
31. Remove external loads on the rear pin

4 by lightly pushing the attachment into the
ground using boom down then releasing the
845C-198 downward pressure by using boom up.
16. Re-install the rear retaining cap using 4 rear
attachment in a relaxed state in front of the
retaining cap mounting bolts and washers until
machine.
they are snug only.
of the recommended torque of 339 Nm (250 34. Turn OFF the engine.
lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as shown above.
ft) is attained. 37. Install the leveler cylinder locks on the leveling
cylinders.
13.29
3
1 2
1 2
4
845C-198 845C-198
Gap Measuring Locations

38. Torque the rear retaining mounting bolts to
136 Nm (100 lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as
845C-199
shown above.
A B
A Rear Retaining Cap

B Rear Lug
A
41. Measure the gap between the rear retaining
cap and the surface of the rear lug. Measure
in the four locations shown above.
NOTE: The measurements may vary up to
0.25 mm (0.010")
845C-200
A Rear Pivot Axis Bearing Locknut

42. Using the lowest measured value obtained in
step 41, make a combination of shims equal to
that value.
39. Turn the rear pivot axis bearing locknut
clockwise until it is snug. NOTE: Measure shims individually for
accurate measurement.
40. Repeat steps 21 to 39 until the rear retaining
mounting bolts remain torqued to 136 Nm (100 43. Remove the rear retaining cap.
lbf-ft) and the rear pivot axis bearing locknut 44. Install the combination of shims on the rear
can not be turned clockwise by hand. pin.
13.30
45. Apply loctite 243 to the retaining cap mounting FRONT PIVOT AXIS BEARING
bolts.
46. Re-install the rear retaining cap using all
they are snug only.
3
5 7
1 2
8 6
4
845C-198
A B C D
845C-196
of the recommended torque of 532 Nm (400
lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as shown above. A Shim
B Front Retaining Cap
48. Repeat using the same sequence until the C Washers (QTY 8)
recommended final torque of 532 Nm (400 lbf- D Bolts (QTY 8)
ft) is attained.
1. Remove the front retaining cap mounting bolts
and washers.
2. Remove the front retaining cap.
3. Remove the front pivot axis bearing shims.
1 2
845C-202
4. Re-install the front retaining cap using 4 front

they are snug only.
5. Tighten the 4 front retaining cap mounting
bolts and washers until they are snug.
6. Torque the front retaining mounting bolts to 1⁄3
lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as in the previous
steps.
13.31
ft) is attained.
3
leveling cylinders.
9. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. 1 2

4
position.
845C-202
start-up 23. Torque the front retaining mounting bolts to
237 Nm (175 lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as
shown above.
.
system.
860C-155
16. Remove external loads on the front pin

by lightly pushing the attachment into the A
ground using boom down then releasing the
downward pressure by using boom up.
attachment in a relaxed state in front of the
machine. 845C-200
18. Apply the swing brake. A Front Pivot Axis Bearing Locknut
19. Turn OFF the engine. 24. Turn the front pivot axis bearing locknut
20. Remove the ignition key. clockwise until it is snug.
21. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. 25. Repeat steps 6 to 24 until the front retaining
mounting bolts remain torqued to 237 Nm (175
22. Install the leveler cylinder locks on the leveling lbf-ft) and the front pivot axis bearing locknut
cylinders. can not be turned clockwise by hand.
13.32
3
5 7
3
1 2 1 2
4
8 6
4
845C-202 845C-206
32. Re-install the front retaining cap using all

they are snug only.
33. Torque the front retaining mounting bolts to 1⁄3
lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as shown above.
A B ft) is attained.
845C-208
845C-204
A Front Lug
B Front Retaining Cap
26. Measure the gap between the front retaining

cap and the surface of the front lug. Measure
in the four locations shown above.
0.25 mm (0.010 in)
27. Using the lowest measured value obtained in
that value.
NOTE: Measure shims individually for
28. Remove the front retaining cap mounting bolts 35. Snug the rear and front axis bearing locknuts
and washers. to about 54 Nm (40 lbf-ft) using a chisel and
hammer.
29. Remove the front retaining cap.
30. Install the combination of shims on the front
pin.
31. Apply loctite 243 to the retaining cap mounting
bolts.
13.33
845C-209 46. While the boom is aggressively being raised
and lowered have an assistant visually check
A
for any axial movement at the rear and front
side pivot axis pin and bearing areas. No axial
movement is allowed.
47. If axial movement is seen after the setup has
been completed, contact the Tigercat Service
department.
52. Install the plastic hose guards located on the
rear pivot axis bearing cover.
53. Install the left and right rotary manifold guards.
A Pivot Axis Bearing Lock Washer Locking Tab
36. Bend the pivot axis bearing lock washer

locking tab down and engage the pivot axis
bearing locknut.
NOTE: If the locking tab is not aligned, tighten
the pivot axis bearing locknut just enough for
alignment.
leveling cylinders.
position.
start-up
.
system.
845C-210
45. With the boom over the track drive gearbox,

operate the boom function aggressively up
and down.
13.34
LEVELING CYLINDER TAPER LOCK 845C-220
PINS C D
High loads and abrasive wear will result in A
movement at the connection points of the leveling A
cylinders. B
B
Movement will occur in two areas:
• Axial movement of the leveling cylinder ball
bushing along the pin.
• Axial and radial movement in the leveler
cylinder ball bushings.
A Ball Bushing Outer Ring

B Ball Bushing Inner Ring
C Axial Movement
D Radial Movement
Determine if there is excessive axial movement

in the ball bushing at the rod end of the leveler
cylinder and the undercarriage frame.
NOTE: Axial movement can be determined by
the amount of movement between the inner and
outer ring. Too much axial movement will make the
845C-233 leveler feel loose when operating.
If there is excessive axial movement then remove
A Axial Movement Along the Pin
the ball bushings located on the rod end of the
leveling cylinder and on the undercarriage frame.
Adjusting the axial movement at the rod and
Refer to REPLACE LEVELING CYLINDER BALL
base end of the leveling cylinders may eliminate
BUSHINGS in THIS SECTION.
movement of the ball bushing along the pin.
If movement persists after adjusting the axial
movement at the rod and base ends it may be
required to replace the ball bushings in the leveling
cylinders.
13.35
SUPPORTING THE UPPER STRUCTURE BOOMS AND HEAD SUPPORTING UPPER
The following illustrate three different methods STRUCTURE
of supporting the upper structure during leveling
cylinder service.
HYDRAULIC JACKS AND WOOD BLOCKS
845C-005A
Swing the upper structure over the side of the

860C-218 tracks and tilt the leveling mechanism so that the
left cylinder is fully extended and the right cylinder
Install hydraulic jacks and (new solid hardwood) is fully retracted. Lower the attachment to the
wood blocks in four places to fully support the ground so it is resting squarely on a solid footing
upper structure. Be sure that the supporting jacks with the head and boom fully supported on the
and wood blocks are installed in such a way they ground.
will prevent movement of the upper structure when
the taper lock pins are removed from the leveling NOTE: Adjust the jacks, overhead crane or boom
cylinders. system to remove the load on the cylinder pin that
is to be removed. The load is removed when the
OVERHEAD CRANE cylinder rod can be rotated easily using a small pry
bar to turn the cylinder rod eye.
Use a portable lifting device and attach a suitable
lifting strap to support the weight of the leveling
cylinder being serviced during taper lock pin
removal and installation.
860C-219
Use an overhead crane with suitable lifting straps/

chains and support beams. Position the lifting
straps/chains in such a way to prevent contact with
the cab.
13.36
A B C D E L D F G H I J A K
K M
E
J D
I C
H
G B
F A
845C-213
845C-212
845C-211
Leveling Cylinder Tapered Lock Pins (Right Side)

A Bolt H Sleeve Retaining Cap
B Washer I Spacer
C Collar J Leveler Pin Washer
D Sleeve K Sleeve Retaining Cap Bolts and Washers
E Pin L Upper Pivot Lugs
F Expanding Sleeve M Leveling Cylinder
G Shims N Undercarriage Frame
13.37
ADJUSTING AXIAL MOVEMENT OF THE 845C-215
BALL BUSHING ALONG THE PIN
LEVELER CYLINDER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: The leveler cylinder adjustment will
need to be done for both leveling cylinders.
attachment in a relaxed state in front of the 1 3
machine.
2. Support the upper structure from moving.
Refer to SUPPORTING THE UPPER
4 2
STRUCTURE in THIS SECTION.
NOTE: Do not apply any external forces on
the boom or attachment. Parking the machine
in a relaxed state is necessary to measure
leveling cylinder axial movement.
12. Remove the rod end shims (F).
13. Re-install the sleeve retaining cap using 4 rod
end retaining cap mounting bolts and washers
845C-214 until they are snug only.
14. Torque the sleeve retaining cap mounting bolts
to 1⁄3 of the recommended torque of 136 Nm
(100 lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as shown
above.
C ft) is attained.
E D B A
7. Remove the rod end bolt (A).

8. Remove the sleeve retaining cap mounting
bolts and washers (B).
9. Remove the rear sleeve retaining cap (E)
10. Remove the rod end washer (C).
11. Remove the rod end spacer (D).
13.38
845C-215 17. Using the lowest measured value obtained in
that value minus 0.127 mm (0.005").
NOTE: Measure shims individually for
18. Remove the sleeve retaining cap mounting
1 3 bolts and washers.
19. Remove the sleeve retaining cap.
20. Install the combination of shims with the rod
4 2 end retaining cap using 4 sleeve retaining
cap mounting bolts and washers until they are
snug only.
21. Torque the sleeve retaining mounting bolts
to 1⁄3 of the recommended torque of 373 Nm
(275 lbf-ft) in numerical sequence as in the
previous steps. .
845C-216
ft) is attained.
A Undercarriage Lug
B Sleeve Retaining Cap
16. Measure the gap between the sleeve retaining

cap and the surface of the undercarriage lug.
Measure in the four locations shown above.
0.25 mm (0.010")
13.39
845C-217 25. Torque the bolt to 610 Nm (450 ft-lb).
26. Remove the upper structure supports.
A
B
position.
C
start-up
.
system.
34. Seat the pins by operating the machine for
A Spacer one hour. Make sure to use both the boom
B Washer and leveling cylinders to seat the pins.
C Bolt
NOTE: This adjustment procedure will only
eliminate movement of the ball bushing along
23. Install the spacer, washer and bolt into the pin. the pin. There is no adjustment for axial play
on pin or ball bushing running surfaces.
845C-218
35. Repeat LEVELER CYLINDER ADJUSTMENT
for the base end of the leveler cylinder.
B A
A Washer
B Sleeve Retaining Cap
24. Make sure there is a 0.125 to 0.187 mm (1⁄8 to

3
⁄16 in) space between the washer and sleeve
retaining cap.
NOTE: Extra washers may need to be
installed to reach the desired spacing.
13.40
REPLACE LEVELING CYLINDER BALL 8. Attach a suitable lifting device to both ends of
BUSHINGS the leveling cylinder so that it will not fall when
the pins are removed.
WARNING 9. Depressurize the hydraulic tank. Refer to
To prevent personal injury release the INSTRUCTIONS in SECTION 3 of THIS
pressure from they hydraulic system MANUAL.
before any lines are removed or
disconnected. NOTE: To prevent excessive loss of hydraulic
1. Park machine on level ground with the leveling cylinders, it may be necessary to
attachment in a relaxed state in front of the install a vacuum on the hydraulic tank. Refer
machine. to HYDRAULIC TANK VACUUM SWITCH in
2. Support the upper structure from moving.
Refer to SUPPORTING THE UPPER 10. Remove all hydraulic lines to the leveling
STRUCTURE in THIS SECTION. cylinder.

845C-219
A
B
C
A Cylinder Bar
B Cover
C Rubber Shield
7. Remove the cylinder bar (A), cover (B) and

rubber shield (C) from the leveling cylinder.
13.41
845C-213
845C-212 L
A B C D E D F G H I J A K
845C-211
K M
E
J D
I C
H
G B
F A
Leveling Cylinder Tapered Lock Pins (Right Side)

A Bolt H Sleeve Retaining Cap
B Washer I Spacer
C Collar J Leveler Pin Washer
D Sleeve K Retaining Cap Bolts and Washers
E Pin L Upper Pivot Lugs
F Expanding Sleeve M Leveling Cylinder
G Shims N Undercarriage Frame
11. Remove the rod end and base end leveling

cylinder tapered lock pins by disassembling
parts A–N shown above.
NOTE: Do not mix shims from the rod and
base end of the leveler cylinder.
12. Remove the leveling cylinder.
13.42
845C-221
E
C
A
B
A Ball Bushing
B Undercarriage Frame
C Cylinder Stop Retainer
D Cylinder Stop
E Cylinder Stop Retainer Bolts and Washers
13. Remove the cylinder stop retainer bolts and

washers.
14. Remove the cylinder stop retainer.
NOTE: Mark the orientation of the cylinder
stop to the undercarriage frame.
15. Remove the ball bushings located on the
rod end of the leveling cylinder and on the
undercarriage frame.
13.43
16. Position the ball bushing so the outer race split
line is 90° to the direction of the load.
17. Press the ball bushings into the leveling
cylinder using a hydraulic cylinder.
NOTE: Movement of the hydraulic cylinder
A must be parallel with the movement of the ball
bushing
A Outer Race Split Line
845C-225
C
A D
E
D
A
F
Ball Bushing Installation – Leveler Cylinder Right Side Rod End

A Nut D Collet
B Leveler Cylinder E Ball Bushing
C Hydraulic Cylinder F Threaded Rod
13.44
845C-224
C
D
A E
D
A
F
B
Ball Bushing Installation – Undercarriage Frame Right Side

A Nut D Collet
B Undercarriage Frame E Ball Bushing
C Hydraulic Cylinder F Threaded Rod
18. Position the ball bushing so the outer race split 23. Support the leveling cylinder into position with
line is 90° to the direction of the load. the base end cylinder lugs aligned with the
undercarriage frame ball bushing.
19. Press the ball bushings into the undercarriage
frame using a hydraulic cylinder. Make sure to
position the ball bushing so the joint is 90° to
the direction of the load.
NOTE: Movement of the hydraulic cylinder
must be parallel with the movement of the ball
bushing
20. Apply loctite 243 to the cylinder stop retainer
bolts.
21. Install the cylinder stop retainer and cylinder
stop retainer bolts and washers.
22. Torque the cylinder stop retainer bolts to 108
Nm (80 lbf-ft).
13.45
845C-212
A
C
G
D
E
Leveler Cylinder Installation (Right Side,

Base End)
A Cylinder Lug
B Pin
C Sleeve
D Collar
E Spacer
F Bolt
G Undercarriage Frame
24. Insert the pin (B) through the cylinder lugs (A)
and ball bushing located in the undercarriage
frame (G).
25. Install the sleeve (C), collar (D), spacer (E)
and bolt (F). Snug the bolt hand tight.
26. Make sure there is a 0.125 to 0.187 mm (1⁄8
to 3⁄16 in.) space between the spacer (E) and
cylinder lug (A).
27. Torque the bolt (F) to 610 Nm (450 ft-lb).
13.46
845C-227 30. Repeat using the same sequence until the
A
B ft) is attained.
C 31. Install the spacer (E), leveler pin washer (B),
D
and bolt (D) into the pin. Snug the bolt hand
tight.
E
F to 3⁄16 in) space between the spacer (E) and
cylinder lug (A).
G
H
33. Torque the bolt (D) to 610 Nm (450 ft-lb).
I A B C D E F

Base End)
A Retaining Cap Bolts And Washers
B Leveler Pin Washer
C Sleeve Retaining Cap
D Bolt
E Spacer
F Shims G
G Expanding Sleeve
H Collar
I Undercarriage Frame
845C-228
28. Install the sleeve (H), expanding sleeve
(G), shims (F), retainer cap (C), and sleeve Leveler Cylinder Installation (Right Side,
retaining cap bolts and washers (A). Rod End)
A Bolt
845C-226 B Washer
C Collar
D Sleeve
E Pin
F Upper Pivot Lugs
G Leveling Cylinder (Rod End)
3
34. Insert the pin (E) through the upper pivot lugs
(F) and ball bushing located in the leveling
1 cylinder (G).
2
35. Install the sleeve (D), collar (C), spacer (B)
and bolt (A). Snug the bolt hand tight.
4
to 3⁄16 in) space between the spacer (E) and
upper pivot lug (F).
37. Torque the bolt (A) to 610 Nm (450 ft-lb).
29. Torque the retaining mounting bolts to 1⁄3 of the

ft) in numerical sequence as shown above.
13.47
845C-229 845C-251
D
A B C E
1 3
F G H 4 2
I

Rod End)
A Upper Pivot Lugs
B Expanding Sleeve
C Shims
D Sleeve Retainer Cap
E Leveler Pin Washer
F Collar 39. Torque the retaining mounting bolts to 1⁄3 of the
G Spacer recommended final torque of 373 Nm (275 lbf-
H Bolt ft) in numerical sequence as shown above.
I Retaining Cap Bolts And Washers
38. Install the sleeve (F), expanding sleeve recommended final torque of 373 Nm (275 lbf-
(B), shims (C), sleeve retainer cap (D), and ft) is attained.
retaining cap bolts and washers (I). 41. Install the spacer (G), leveler pin washer (E),
and bolt (H) into the pin. Snug the bolt hand
tight.
to 3⁄16 in.) space between the spacer (E) and
upper pivot lugs (A).
43. Torque the bolt (D) to 610 Nm (450 ft-lb).
44. Remove the portable lifting device and support
straps, hydraulic jacks and wood blocks.
45. Run the machine for one hour, operating the
boom and leveling mechanism to seat the
pins.
13.48
LEVELER COMPONENT LUBRICATION INTERMEDIATE PIVOT BEARING
The intermediate pivot axis bearing is shown
SIDE PIVOT AXIS BEARINGS
below. The grease point for the roller bearing is
Shown below are the lubrication points on the 2 located under a ¾ NPT plug on the stub shaft
leveler cylinders. flange (1 grease point per bearing). The greasing
The grease points for the side-to-side pivot pin interval for the roller bearings is about 10 shots
tapered roller bearings are located under a ¾ NPT every 250 hours. If the bearing housing is
plug on either side of the bearing housing lug (2 frequently submerged the greasing interval should
grease points per bearing). The greasing interval be increased to 8 hours.
for the roller bearings is about 10 shots every 250 There is no adjustment required in the
hours. intermediate pivot arrangement and if more than
A bronze thrust washer exists in the rear lug 0.762 mm (0.030 in) movement is detected in
arrangement and receives grease from two grease either the axial or radial direction contact Tigercat
lines connected to the underside of the leveler Engineering for service recommendations.
cylinder covers. The grease interval is about 5
LUBRICATING CYLINDERS AND PINS
shots every 8 hours. Grease will normally exit the
bronze bearing face but occasionally it will travel Refer to LUBRICATION SCHEDULE AND
from this zone through the tapered roller bearing DIAGRAM in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
and exit at the extreme rear lug connection.
The other grease point on the leveler cylinder
cover directs grease to the lower ball bushing of
the leveler cylinder. The grease interval for the
leveler cylinders is about 5 shots every 8 hours.
13.49
13.50
SWING...............................................................................................................................................................15

SECTION 15 – SWING
A
ADJUST SWING BEARING BACKLASH............................................................................................... 15.20

H
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - SWING SYSTEM............................................................................ 15.7

HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
PRIORITY SWING VALVE.................................................................................................................... 15.6
SWING DRIVE MOTOR....................................................................................................................... 15.2
SWING SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................. 15.8
P
PRIORITY SWING VALVE....................................................................................................................... 15.5

PRIORITY SWING PLATE.................................................................................................................... 15.5
SWING VALVE SECTION..................................................................................................................... 15.5
S
SWING BEARING REPLACEMENT...................................................................................................... 15.24

SWING BEARING WEAR LIMITS.......................................................................................................... 15.19
SWING DRIVE......................................................................................................................................... 15.2
SWING DRIVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT................................................................................................ 15.2
SWING DRIVE LUBRICATION................................................................................................................ 15.9
LUBRICATION OF SWING DRIVE GEARBOX LOWER BEARINGS.................................................. 15.9
LUBRICATION OF SWING DRIVE GEARBOX UPPER GEARING................................................... 15.10
LUBRICATION OF SWING PINION AND SWING BEARING............................................................... 15.9
PREFILLING SWING PUMP AND MOTOR........................................................................................ 15.11
SWING PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS...................................................................................... 15.12
CROSSLINE RELIEF VALVES........................................................................................................... 15.14
PRIORITY SWING PLATE.................................................................................................................. 15.17
SWING SPEED SETTINGS................................................................................................................ 15.12
15.1
Swing Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
SWING DRIVE 845CH-154
SWING BRAKE
SWING DRIVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
860C-093 PG
ANTI-REACTION
RIGHT VALVES LEFT
ROTATION ROTATION DB
MOTOR FROM PILOT

MANIFOLD L
M
TO RETURN
MANIFOLD
CROSSLINE PA PB
RELIEF VALVE CROSSLINE
LEFT RELIEF VALVE TO 'T3' ON
ROTATION RIGHT CROSSLINE MAIN CONTROL
ROTATION RELIEF VALVE VALVE
CROSSLINE
RELIEF VALVE
ANTI- REACTION
VALVES
SWING
BRAKE
A B
GEARBOX
SWING DRIVE MOTOR SCHEMATIC
The swing motor is a fixed displacement piston

SWING DRIVE motor with crossline relief valves. The crossline
GEARBOX AND MOTOR relief valves provide a cushion to the high forces
that occur during start and stop of the swing
The main pump supplies oil to the swing motor via function.
the priority swing valve section on the main control
Power is transmitted from the motor to a double
valve.
reduction planetary gearbox. The motor has a
The swing function is controlled by the left joystick spring-applied, hydraulic-release, multi-disc brake
valve which sends proportional pilot signals to the in the motor housing. This brake is normally on.
main control valve which supplies oil to the swing Placing the swing brake switch in the OFF position
motor. energizes the swing brake solenoid pilot valve
'TS5', on the pilot manifold and allows pilot oil
pressure to flow to the swing brake via port 'C5', to
release the swing brake.
In the event that electrical power or hydraulic
pressure is lost to the swing brake solenoid pilot
valve 'TS5', the swing brake will engage (on)
automatically.
15.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Swing
SWING DRIVE GEARBOX SWING BEARING
The swing drive gearbox consists of a two stage
planetary, output pinion and an input flange for
the hydraulic motor. The hydraulic swing motor
bolts to the input flange. The swing drive gearbox
A C
is fastened to the upper structure and the output
pinion meshes with the swing bearing B
D
A
B 845CH-158
Swing Bearing
C A Swing Drive Gearbox (Mounted to the Upper Structure)
B Inner Race (Mounted to the Undercarriage)
C Pinion
D Outer Race (Mounted to the Upper Structure)
The function of the swing bearing is to allow the

upper structure to rotate on the undercarriage.
860C-343
A
D
D
845CH-159
Swing Drive Gearbox

A Hydraulic Motor
B Input Flange
C Swing Drive Gearbox (Includes Planetary Gear Set)
D Pinion B C
A
The planetary gearbox reduces the high speed,
low torque output of the hydraulic motor into low
Swing Bearing Seal (Internal Seal)
speed, high torque required to swing the upper A Sealing Lip
structure. B Outer Race
C Ball Bearings
D Inner Race
The swing bearing consists of an inner and outer

race separated by ball bearings. The inner race is
fastened to the undercarriage while the outer race
is fastened to the upper structure. Gear teeth are
cut into the inner race and mate with the swing
drive gearbox pinion. As the swing drive gearbox
pinion begins to turn the upper structure rotates on
the bearing.
15.3
JOYSTICK CONTROL VALVE
The swing function is controlled by the LH Joystick
valve which sends proportional pilot signals to the
swing section pilot end caps.
PORT 2 PORT 4
880-228 JOYSTICK PILOT VALVE
The joystick is held centered in the neutral position

by return springs (4). When the lever (1) is
operated, the push rod pushes against the return
spring (4). At the same time the regulating spool
(2) is moved down against the regulating spring
(3). When the regulating stroke begins, there is
a connection made between the pressure port,
through holes (6) in the spool and work ports in the
base of the valve.
Pilot pressure is directly proportional to the
operator position of the joystick and the regulating
spring characteristics.
15.4
PRIORITY SWING VALVE PRIORITY SWING PLATE
A B
845C-183
845C-185
Priority Swing Valve Priority Swing Plate

A Priority Swing Plate A Priority Swing Plate
B Swing Valve Section B Compensator Valve
C PCO valve
The priority swing valve is mounted on the main
control valve and consists of a priority swing plate The priority swing plate has two main functions.
and swing valve section. The priority valve makes Limiting pressure and flow to the swing circuit. It
sure the swing circuit takes precedence over all does this using two valves.
other functions on the main control valve. Compensator Valve
SWING VALVE SECTION Located in the priority swing plate regulates flow
Refer to MAIN CONTROL VALVE DESCRIPTION to the swing motors. It constantly adjusts to the
– CONTROL VALVE SECTIONS in SECTION 4 for pressure required by the swing motors and load
information on the swing valve section. sense (LS) pressure.
Pressure Cut Off Valve (PCO)
An adjustable pressure cut off valve which limits
circuit pressure.
15.5
A A
E F G H
Priority Swing Valve

A Make up Anti Cavitation Check Valve F Pressure Port
B Valve Section Spool G Tank Port
C Pressure Cut Off Valve (PCO) H Load Sense
D Compensator Valve I Swing Valve Section
E Tank Port J Priority Plate
15.6
FROM FAN
DRIVE
CONTROL
VALVE
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
TO TANK VIA RETURN
PRESSURE LINE
FILTERS
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
BRAKE CAN LINE
RELEASE SWING
8 WIRE
DRIVE,
MOTOR &
GEARBOX
LEFT JOYSTICK NOTE: THE MAIN CONTROL VALVE
CONFIGURATION FOR THE SWING
SYSTEM IS THE SAME FOR ALL
MACHINE CONFIGURATIONS.
Y1
TO OIL
COOLER
B B B
TO
A
TANK TOP VIEW
A A A
TO OIL
COOLER MAIN CONTROL
VALVE
REAR VIEW X1
SWING
FROM 'G2' VALVE
PORT ON SECTION
PUMP 1
VALVE SWING BRAKE
SOLENOID PILOT VALVE
PILOT 'TS5'
PRESSURE
REDUCING VALVE
PILOT
MANIFOLD
TO
TANK
P3 T3 C5
TO TANK
MAIN
PUMP 'P'
TEST
PORT
'LS' SIGNAL TO MAIN PUMP

'LS' (PL)
TEST
PORT
845C-156 SWING SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

15.7
BRAKE RELEASE
290-710 psi
LEGEND
PRESSURE PG
PILOT
DB
TANK
SUCTION
L
EQUIPMENT M
PA PB
5000 psi 5000 psi
A B
JOYSTICK L.H.
SWING DRIVE
25 psi
25 psi
COOLER OIL COOLER
BYPASS
100 psi
25 psi
Y1 B1 A1 X1
RETURN
MANIFOLD
3200 psi
PS 1 psi
T3
T1
T2
LS
P
HYDRAULIC TANK
T0
MAX
'LS' PRESSURE MAIN PUMP

4550 psi ON 'P' MAX DISPL. 200 CC/REV
TELESCOPIC
WRIST OPTION
SWING TRACK BRAKE TRACK CCW/
BRAKE LOW R.H. RELEASE LOW L.H. PUMP 2 RETRACT EXTEND
C5 C7 C8 C6 C1 C2 C3 C4 G1 G
TS7 TS6 TS2 TS4 69 bar

(1000 psi)
P
TS5 TS8 TS1 TS3
T
P1 T1 P2 T2 P3 T3 P4 T4
845CH-179 SWING SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

15.8
SWING DRIVE LUBRICATION 860-096
845C-099
24
SWING PINION SWING BEARING

GREASE FITTING GREASE FITTING
SWING PINION AND BEARING

GREASE FITTINGS
LOWER BEARINGS GREASE FITTINGS
LUBRICATION OF SWING DRIVE GEARBOX LUBRICATION OF SWING PINION AND SWING
LOWER BEARINGS BEARING
The cavity in the lower portion of the gearbox To lubricate the swing bearing, apply 10 shots of
where the two lower bearings are housed is grease while swinging every 24 hours to the lower
completely filled with grease. grease fitting located on the seat pedestal in the
operator’s cab. To lubricate the swing pinion (or
845C-017
teeth) apply 20 shots of grease every 8 hours
while swinging, to the upper grease fitting located
on the seat pedestal. The grease fittings are
clearly labelled.
ROTARY MANIFOLD
SEAL GREASE For lubrication schedule, refer to lubrication
FITTING schedule and SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE - 250
HOURS in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
LOWER BEARINGS
GREASE FITTINGS THIS MANUAL.
LOWER BEARINGS AND ROTARY

MANIFOLD SEAL GREASE FITTINGS
Open the hydraulic pump compartment and locate

the grease fittings. Using a hand grease gun and
with the gearbox at operating temperature slowly
add 5 shots of lithium based EP2 grease to each
side of gearbox every 250 hours.
DO NOT OVER GREASE.
NOTE: During cold weather applications the swing
function must operate for several hours to achieve
operating temperature. If machine is not warmed
up, the lower seal can be damaged.
IMPORTANT!
DO NOT force grease, gearbox failure may result.
DO NOT use a power grease gun to lubricate this
machine. Use a hand grease gun only.
THIS MANUAL.
15.9
LUBRICATION OF SWING DRIVE GEARBOX
UPPER GEARING
GEAR OIL
BOTTLE
845C-084 UPPER GEARING LUBRICATION

The swing gearbox upper gearing is filled with
gear oil. Check oil level in the bottle every
8 hours. Oil level in the bottle must be kept at the
half full mark at all times. Drain and replace swing
drive gear box upper bearing gear oil every
250 hours.
Use 75W-90 or 80W-140 gear oil.
For lubrication schedule refer to SECTION 3 of
THIS MANUAL.
15.10
PREFILLING SWING PUMP AND MOTOR 7. Crank the engine over for 5 to 10 seconds,
When the swing pump or motors have been stop cranking, wait 20 seconds then crank
removed and replaced for service, it is important to engine over again for 5 to 10 seconds.
pre-fill them with hydraulic oil prior to starting the 8. Have an assistant watch for oil to flow from the
engine. case drain return hose. Once oil free of air is
1. After replacing the pump or motors and all seen, stop cranking engine and tighten hose
hoses are reconnected, refill the hydraulic connection.
tank. 9. Install the multi-pin plug on the engine ECU.
start-up
.
system.
14. Very gently operate the swing system five
times in each direction.

H845C-173 - LEFT SIDE OF ENGINE
2. Disconnect the multi-pin plug from the engine

ECU to prevent the engine from starting.
CASE DRAIN
RETURN - 'DB'

H845C-197 - LEFT SIDE OF ENGINE
3. Loosen the swing motor case drain return
hose on the motor to purge air from the
system.
position.
6. Sound horn to warn personnel of possible
machine start-up
15.11
SWING PRESSURE AND SPEED SWING SPEED SETTINGS
SETTINGS 1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature.
CAUTION 2. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
operation of the machine. 4. Insert the ignition key and turn to the run
position.
CAUTION 5. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine

start-up
Use caution when in the cab as a slight 6. Start the engine and set throttle to idle position
touch of the controls can cause sudden .
or movement of the tracks.
system.
WARNING


locknut on the adjusting screws will eventually
cause the seal in the locknut to break down
and leak. Because of this it is best to keep the
adjusting procedure brief.

MANUAL.
15.12
NOTE: Time for one 360° revolution is calculated 14. Turn the SWING LEFT flow adjusting screw
by dividing 60 seconds by the number of in (Clockwise) to decrease flow or out
suggested revolutions per minute. For example (counterclockwise) to increase flow to the
60 seconds divided by 8 equals 7.5 seconds per swing motor.
revolution.
15. Tighten the SWING LEFT flow adjusting screw
10. Raise the attachment off ground. locknut taking care not to turn the adjusting
screw at the same time.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the upper structure is rotating at NOTE: Over adjusting to provide a faster
maximum speed before timing rpm. swing speed will increase the stress on boom
components and increase the heat load in the
11. Hold the left joystick lever in the SWING LEFT
hydraulic system.
position and rotate the upper structure. Record
the cycle time for one complete revolution. 16. Repeat the swing speed settings for the
SWING RIGHT adjustment.
12. If required, adjust the SWING LEFT flow
adjusting screw on the main control valve to 17. Use the MD3 computer to set fan service
obtain the specified value. mode to OFF.
FLOW ADJUSTING
SCREW LOCKNUT
19 MM WRENCH
FLOW ADJUSTING
SCREW
6 mm ALLEN KEY
875-015
13. Loosen the SWING LEFT flow adjusting

screw.
Swing Valve Section Flow Adjusting Screws (Rear View)

A Swing Right Flow Adjusting Screw C Swing Right Port Connection
B Swing Left Port Connection D Swing Left flow Adjusting Screw
15.13
CROSSLINE RELIEF VALVES
IMPORTANT!
Set swing speeds on the main control valve before
setting swing motor crossline reliefs. Refer to
SWING PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS –
SWING SPEED SETTINGS in THIS SECTION.
temperature.
CAUTION

B A
CAUTION
845C-232
Use caution when in the cab as a slight A 'XP' Test Port

touch of the controls can cause sudden B 'XLS' Pressure Control Relief
or movement of the tracks. 7. Install a 0–350 bar (0–5000 psi) pressure
gauge in the 'XP' test port on the main control
valve.
WARNING


15.14
position.
start-up
A
high idle .
system.
A Priority Swing Plate Adjustment Screw
8. Loosen the swing plate relief adjusting screw

locknut.
9. Turn swing plate relief adjusting screw fully in
(seat lightly).
WARNING
Do not overtighten the swing plate valve

adjusing screw . This can cause severe
damage to the hydraulic components.
10. Tighten the swing plate relief adjusting screw

locknut.
MANUAL.
WARNING

20. Operate the left joystick in both CCW and CW

directions to make sure the upper structure
does not rotate.
the RIGHT (CW) position.
22. Check the pressure gauge at 'XP' port. The
gauge reading should meet crossline relief
specifications.
15.15
ANTI-REACTION
VALVES
CROSSLINE CROSSLINE
RELIEF VALVE RELIEF VALVE
CCW CW ROTATION
ROTATION
• 12 mm ALLEN KEY
• 30 mm WRENCH
860C-093 CROSSLINE RELIEF VALVES
23. If adjustment to the CW crossline relief valve

pressure is required loosen the adjusting
screw locknut.
WARNING
The crossline relief valve adjusting screw

is not mechanically restricted from being
removed completely. Removing the valve
completely may cause the valve to blow
out and cause bodily harm
24. Set the crossline relief valve pressure by

adjusting the crossline relief adjusting screw.
• CW rotation increases valve pressure
• CCW rotation decreases valve pressure.
25. Tighten the CW crossline relief valve adjusting
screw locknut taking care not to turn the
adjusting screw at the same time.
26. Repeat steps 22 to 26 for swing LEFT (CCW)
rotation
27. Re-set the priority swing valve. Refer to
SWING PLATE RELIEF in THIS SECTION.
mode to OFF.
15.16
PRIORITY SWING PLATE
MPORTANT!
Set swing speeds on the main control valve
and swing motor crossline reliefs before
setting the priority swing plate pressure relief.
Refer to SWING PRESSURE AND SPEED
SETTINGS – SWING SPEED SETTINGS and
SWING PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS –
A
CROSSLINE RELIEF VALVES in this section.
temperature.
CAUTION

A Priority Swing Plate Adjustment Screw

CAUTION
8. Loosen the swing plate relief adjusting screw
Use caution when in the cab as a slight locknut.
rotation of the upper structure and booms 9. Turn swing plate relief adjusting screw fully in
or movement of the tracks. (seat lightly).
WARNING WARNING
Make sure no one is standing near the Do not overtighten the swing plate valve
attachment during this procedure. adjusing screw . This can cause severe
damage to the hydraulic components.
attachment resting firmly on the ground. 10. Tighten the swing plate relief adjusting screw
3. Apply the swing brake. locknut.
4. Turn OFF the engine. 11. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
5. Remove the ignition key. 12. Check that all personnel are clear of the
7. Install a 0–350 bar (0–5000 psi) pressure position.
gauge in the 'XP' test port on the main control
valve. 14. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine
start-up
high idle .
system.
15.17
mode to OFF.

MANUAL.
WARNING

20. Operate the left joystick in both CCW and CW

directions to make sure the upper structure
does not rotate.
the LEFT (CCW) or RIGHT (CW) position.
22. Check the pressure gauge at 'XP' port. The
gauge reading should meet priority swing plate
specifications.
23. If adjustment to the priority swing plate
pressure is required loosen the swing plate
relief adjusting screw locknut.
24. Set the priority swing plate pressure by
adjusting the priority swing plate relief
adjusting screw.
• CW rotation increases valve pressure
• CCW decreases valve pressure.
25. Tighten the priority swing plate adjusting screw
locknut taking care not to turn the adjusting
screw at the same time.
15.18
SWING BEARING WEAR LIMITS The following procedure will verify the amount of
It is important that the swing bearing be wear in the ball race:
periodically inspected for wear. Any significant 1. Position machine with boom fully extended as
wear will be noticeable by observing too much in POSITION 1.
'tilting' of the upper structure relative to the lower
frame. A small amount of designed-in clearance 2. Set dial indicator (Detail A) to zero.
in the bearing is normal and is present in a new 3. Raise boom as in POSITION 2.
machine.
4. Note tilt reading on dial indicator.
Too much clearance will affect the backlash
5. Return machine to POSITION 1.
between the ring gear and the drive pinion and if
left unchecked will cause damage to the gear teeth 6. Check to see if reading on dial indicator has
and ultimately the swing drive gearbox. returned to zero, if not repeat steps 1 to 4.
The main cause of wear in the ball race can be 7. The bearing is considered worn if measured
due to a lack of lubricant or not following the tilting is 2.7 mm (0.105 in.) or greater.
proper lubricating procedure. A damaged or
8. Rotate upper structure 90° and repeat
missing peripheral seal will also contribute to early
steps 1 to 6.
wear by allowing dirt particles to enter the ball
race.
Regular inspection of the seal should be carried
out and the proper lubricating procedure should
be followed. Refer to FILTER AND LUBRICATION
SCHEDULE in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
A 61 cm (24 in.)
15 cm (6 in.)
845CH-191 845CH-192
POSITION 1 POSITION 2
DIAL
INDICATOR
DETAIL A
860C-397
15.19
ADJUST SWING BEARING BACKLASH 845CH-162
STEEL PLATE NUT

6.35 mm
(0.25 in.)
101.6 mm 101.6 mm
(4 in.) (4 in.)
845CH-161 ADJUSTMENT TOOL

To adjust the swing bearing backlash:
1. Make an adjustment tool from a
101.6 x 101.6 mm (4 x 4 in.) piece of SWING BRAKE
SUPPLY 'C5'
6.35 mm (0.25 in.) thick steel plate. Weld a
25.4 mm (1 in.) nut on the plate as shown. PILOT MANIFOLD - ISO VIEW
ADJUSTMENT 4. The swing drive motor system is equipped with
TOOL
spring applied multi disc brakes. Deactivating
the swing braking system requires a portable
hydraulic supply. Remove the swing brake
supply hose from the pilot manifold 'C5'.
Connect the hose to a remote hydraulic power
source. Plug the port on pilot manifold 'C5'.
Pressurize the swing brake circuit to 24–49
bar (348–710 psi) to disengage the swing
braking system.
845CH-163
2. Position the adjustment tool against the

underside of the upper structure 12.7 mm
(0.50 in.) away from the bearing. Weld the tool
to the upper structure as shown using a
6.35 mm (0.25 in.) fillet weld. Refer to
WELDING, PRIOR TO in SECTION 1 of THIS
MANUAL for safety precautions.
HEX HEAD
BOLT
845CH-164
3. Install a 25.4 x 152.4 mm (1 x 6 in.) hex head

bolt in the nut.
15.20
GEAR TEETH
MARKED WITH SWING BEARING
PAINT GEAR TEETH
PINION
PINION
2 1 18
34 17
35 10
36 9
15 27
GEAR
16
BACKLASH 26
DIMENSION 24 25
23 PINION G
6
7 5
8 21
28 22
29 14
30 13
11 31
12 32
GEAR TEETH 19 33
MARKED WITH 20 3 4
PAINT 845CH-168
7. Using the adjustment tool set minimum gear

880-231 backlash between the pinion and the swing
845CH-166
bearing gear teeth to 0.40 – 0.64 mm
5. Locate the gear teeth marked with paint on the (0.016 – 0.025 in.).
inner swing bearing. Rotate the bearing so the
2 1 18
edges marked with paint are in contact with 34 17
35 10
the pinion. 36 9
15 27
16 26
24 25
23 G
6
7 5
8 21
28 22
29 14
30 13
11 31
FEELER GAUGES 12 32
19 33
20 3 4
880-234 845CH-167
6. Use a pry bar to rotate the pinion against the 8. Tighten swing bearing outer race bolt #1 to a
swing bearing. Measure the backlash between temporary setup torque of 406 Nm (300 lbf-ft).
the pinion and the swing bearing using feeler
gauges.
15.21
2 1 18 2 1 18
34 17 34 17
35 10 35 10
36 9 36 9
15 27 15 27
16 26 16 26
24 25 24 25
23 G
6 23 G
6
7 5 7 5
8 21 8 21
28 22 28 22
29 14 29 14
30 13 30 13
11 31 11 31
12 32 12 32
19 33 19 33
20 3 4 20 3 4
845CH-167 845CH-167
9. Tighten swing bearing outer race bolts #2 11. Torque lubricated swing bearing mounting
through #12 to a temporary setup torque of bolts #1 through #36 in sequence shown
406 Nm (300 lbf-ft) above. Refer to TORQUE CHART in
SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for torque
SWING BEARING settings.
GEAR TEETH
PINION
2 1 18
34 17
35 10
36 9
15 27
GEAR
16
BACKLASH 26
DIMENSION 24 25
23 PINION 6 LETTER
G
45°
7 5
DESIGNATION 'G' AT
HARDNESS GAP
8 21
28 22
29 14
30 13
11 31
12 32
19 33
20 3 4
845CH-168
10. Measure and adjust gear bearing backlash

880-232
every 45° of gear rotation. Acceptable
backlash values are in the range of 12. Locate the heat treatment hardness gap on
0.40 – 0.64 mm (0.016 – 0.025 in.). the inner bearing race. The gap is designated
If measured backlash values are less than by a letter stamped on the bearing surface.
0.40 mm (0.016 in.) repeat steps 6 to 8 of
ADJUST SWING BEARING BACKLASH
in THIS SECTION starting at the smallest
measured backlash location.
15.22
HARDNESS
GAP
25
G
BOTTOM VIEW 6
2 1 18 17
34
35 10
36 9
15 27
16 26
24 25
23 G
6
7 5
8
21
22
28
29 14
30 13
11 31
12 32
19 20 4 33
3
UPPER STRUCTURE - FRONT
845CH-170 SWING BEARING POSITIONING

13. Position the inner bearing race hardness gap
90º from the front of the upper structure.
14. Brush lithium based EP2 grease containing
molybdenum disulfide onto the swing bearing
and pinion gear teeth. Completely cover both
sides of every gear tooth.
15.23
SWING BEARING REPLACEMENT 9. Wearing eye protection, release air from the
In the event of a swing bearing failure, for example hydraulic tank by opening the air vent valve.
the limits of tilting clearance have been exceeded For a full description of the HYDRAULIC TANK
during an inspection, the swing bearing must be PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS refer to
replaced. SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL.
IMPORTANT!
34.5 kPa (5 psi) MAXIMUM
Before servicing hydraulic system, release
air pressure from tank using air vent valve.
FILTER/
880-220 AIR VENT BREATHER
VALVE HANDLE
SCHRADER
1. Position the machine on flat ground with VALVE
the hoist cylinder fully retracted and stick MANIFOLD
cylinders fully extended. Depending on the
type of loader system being used, it may be
necessary to remove the attachment.
2. Open the engine compartment right side
door and power roof. For a full description on
845C-097 AIR VENT PRESSURE
side door and power roof operation refer to 845C-001 EXHAUST GAUGE
SERVICE ACCESS DOORS in SECTION 2 of
the OPERATORS MANUAL. 10. Remove the filter/breather. To prevent oil loss
3. Apply the swing brake. when servicing the hydraulic system, apply a
vacuum to the hydraulic tank. Installing a plug
4. Turn OFF the engine. in the coupling will also prevent loss of oil.
5. Remove the ignition key. NOTE: Before removing any hydraulic hoses,
H845C-173 ensure all contamination entry points are clean
and clear of foreign material and debris.
11. Remove and cap all hydraulic and grease
hoses to the boom. Disconnect wiring
harnesses to the boom.
12. Attach a lifting device and remove the
boom. It may be necessary to use cylinder
support braces to prevent the cylinders from
collapsing.
880-221
ENGINE ECU DISCONNECT- LEFT

SIDE OF ENGINE
7. Disconnect the multi-pin plug from the engine
ECU to prevent engine starting.
13. Lower the boom onto support stands.
8. Remove all panels.
14. Remove the rotary manifold torque arm.
15. Remove and cap all hoses to the rotary
manifold and pinion cover.
15.24
880-223
18. Lower the upper structure onto support stands.

880-222
WARNING
Do not exceed rated load (capacity)

or working load limit of the crane.
Overloading and improper use of crane
could result in death or serious injury.
880-224
NOTE: Since the counterweight adds significantly

to the total weight of the machine, removing it may
be necessary prior to lifting the upper structure. 19. Support the swing bearing by positioning the
16. Attach a lifting device to support the upper forks of a lift truck directly beneath the swing
structure. Ensure that the rated capacity of bearing. Remove outer race swing bearing
the crane is sufficient to safely lift the upper bolts.
structure.
880-227
GREASE FITTING
OUTER RACE
MOUNTING BOLTS FILLING PLUG
880-225
20. Lower and remove the swing bearing.

INNER RACE
MOUNTING BOLTS
21. Remove from all machined surfaces (swing
SWING BEARING MOUNTING BOLTS bearing and upper structure) nicks, burrs,
paint, welding beads and all foreign material.
17. Remove the inner race swing bearing
mounting bolts.
Note and mark the orientation of the swing bearing
grease fittings and filling plug to the undercarriage.
15.25
24. Install the bolts in the outer swing bearing
race. Finger tighten the bolts until there is no
gap between the washer and outer bearing
race.
WASHER
(CROSS SECTION)
CHAMFER
880-224
BOLT HEAD
22. Using a lift truck, position the new swing
bearing under the upper structure. Position the
swing bearing grease fittings and filling plug
with the undercarriage as previously noted.
875-340
FILLING PLUG
IMPORTANT!
The washers must be positioned on the bolt
so the inner diameter chamfer on the washers
face towards the head of the bolts.
25. Adjust the swing bearing backlash. Refer
to ADJUST SWING BEARING BACKLASH
MAXIMUM LOAD in THIS SECTION for adjusting the swing
ZONE
bearing backlash.
26. Ensure that all nicks, burrs, paint, welding
880-235 MAXIMUM LOAD ZONE beads and foreign material have been
removed from the undercarriage flange and
NOTE: Mount the swing bearing outer race with swing bearing outer race
the filling plug 90° to the maximum load zone.
23. Lubricate the threads of new bolts with lithium
based EP2 grease containing molybdenum
disulfide.
880-230
27. Position the upper structure on the

undercarriage.
28. Lubricate the threads of new bolts with lithium
based EP2 grease containing molybdenum
disulfide. Install the bolts in the inner swing
bearing race. Turn the bolts in until 'just snug'
using an ordinary wrench or air tool.
15.26
29. Install the bolts and washers in the inner swing
2 1 18
bearing race. Turn the bolts in until 'just snug' 34 17
35 10
using an ordinary wrench or air tool. 36 9
WASHER 15 27
(CROSS SECTION) 16 26
24 25
23 G
6
CHAMFER 7 5
8 21
BOLT HEAD
28 22
29 14
30 13
11 31
12 32
875-340 19 33
20 3 4
845CH-167
IMPORTANT!
31. Torque swing bearing mounting bolts in
The washers must be positioned on the bolt
numerical sequence as shown above. Refer
so the inner diameter chamfer on the washers
to TORQUE CHART in SECTION 3 of THIS
face towards the head of the bolts.
MANUAL for torque settings.
32. Install all hoses to the rotary manifold and
pinion cover.
33. Install the rotary manifold torque arm. Refer
to TORQUE CHART in SECTION 3 of THIS
MANUAL for torque settings.
34. Attach the boom.
SWING 35. Install all hydraulic and grease hoses to the
BEARING
FEELER GAUGE boom. Connect the wiring harnesses to the
boom.
UNDERCARRIAGE 36. Install the filter/breather and breather valve.
880-229 37. Connect the multi-pin plug to the engine ECU.
38. Before machine startup, refer to STARTUP
30. With feeler gauges, determine if a gap PROCEDURE AFTER MAJOR MACHINE
exists between the swing bearing and the MAINTENANCE in SECTION 3 of THIS
undercarriage flange. If a gap does exist, MANUAL for machine startup procedures.
measure the clearance or gap. The clearance
or gap should not be greater than IMPORTANT!
0.46 mm (0.018 in.) Entrained air in the boom hydraulic system will
cause the boom to act slow, sluggish and often
unpredictable. Caution should be taken with boom
functions until all the air is removed from the
hydraulic system.
15.27
860C-343
A
B C
Swing Bearing Seal (Internal Seal)

A Sealing Lip
B Outer Race
C Ball Bearings
D Inner Race
39. To lubricate the swing bearing, inject

grease into all four grease fittings on outer
circumference of bearing until a bead of
grease forms from the sealing lips. Rotate
machine 30° and repeat greasing. Rotate
machine 30° more in same direction and
repeat greasing. Refer to SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE in SECTION 3 of THIS
MANUAL for information on lubricating the
swing bearing.
40. Measure swing bearing wear (tilting). Refer
to SWING BEARING WEAR LIMITS in THIS
SECTION for measuring wear limits.
15.28
SAW DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................17

SECTION 17 – SAW DRIVE

SAW DRIVE....................................................................................................................................... 17.7
SAW CIRCUIT................................................................................................................................... 17.5
SAW DRIVE..................................................................................................................................... 17.11
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
SAW DRIVE..............................................................................................................................17.8–17.9
SAW PUMP HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC............................................................................................ 17.2
PRESSURE SETTINGS......................................................................................................................... 17.12
MOTOR BEGIN OF STROKE.......................................................................................................... 17.15
MOTOR MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT.............................................................................................. 17.15
PUMP AND SAW CONTROL VALVE............................................................................................... 17.13
STAND-BY PRESSURE.................................................................................................................. 17.12
SAW CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................ 17.5
SAW SWITCH OFF............................................................................................................................ 17.6
SAW SWITCH ON............................................................................................................................. 17.5
SAW CONTROL VALVE........................................................................................................................... 17.3
OPERATING DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................ 17.4
SAW PUMP..............................................................................................................................................17.2
SAW PUMP DISPLACEMENT/FLOW...................................................................................................... 17.2
17.1
Saw Drive Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
SAW PUMP
A
A E
Saw Pump Hydraulic Schematic Saw Pump Pressure Compensator

A POR Valve A Margin Pressure Adjusting Screw
B Load Sense Valve B POR Adjusting Screw
C Rotate Group
D Servo Piston A pressure compensator is mounted directly on
E Margin pressure spring the pump and has load sense (LS) and POR
adjustments.
The saw pump is an axial-piston variable The saw pump is load sense, so there is no flow
displacement pump controlled by a pressure (or very little) until an LS signal is received from
compensator, and is mounted on the back of the the saw control valve.
main pump. The main pump is attached to the bell
housing of the engine. The saw pump supplies oil to the saw motor via
the saw control valve located in the hydraulic
pump compartment mounted on the inner side
wall of the pump compartment. The saw control
valve controls the flow of oil from the saw pump
to the saw motor. See SAW CONTROL VALVE
operation later in this section.
SAW PUMP DISPLACEMENT/FLOW
Refer to to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS
A in SECTION 3 for saw speed specifications.
B
Pump Assembly
A Main Pump
B Saw Pump
C Attachment Pump
17.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Saw Drive
SAW CONTROL VALVE The saw control valve will only allow hydraulic oil
Saw pump hydraulic oil flow to the saw motor flow from the saw pump to the saw motor if:
is controlled by the saw control valve. The saw • Front door is closed.
control valve is in the pump compartment.
• Pilot system must be on.
The control valve consists of a steel valve body
into which are housed a solenoid control valve • Saw button is on
cartridge, a main relief valve cartridge and a pilot • MD3 computer energizes the solenoid valve
operated check valve. on the saw control valve
A B E
H I
B F
D E
C D
H H
845C-156
845C-157 I
845C-158
845C-159
Saw Control Valve

A 'G2' Port with pressure gauge connection F 'COMP' Port For LS Signal
B 'OUT' Port G 'T' Port, Tank Return
C 'IN' Port H 'DR' Port, Drain To Tank
D Saw Control Solenoid Valve I Main relief valve
E Pilot Operated Check Valve
17.3
Operating Description A main relief valve (E) is included with the saw
H855C-097 control valve but is not used in normal operation.
D It is a safety relief that will limit system pressure if
the saw pump POR malfunctions.The main relief
C valve is adjusted by loosening the locknut and
turning the adjusting screw. Turn clockwise to
increase the pressure and counter-clockwise to
decrease the pressure.
SAW CONTROL VALVE
The saw control valve is regulated by the MD3

computer. When the MD3 computer sends an
electrical signal to the saw control valve, hydraulic
oil from the saw pump is allowed to flow through
the saw control valve to the saw motor.
A
Without an electrical signal from the MD3
computer, hydraulic oil from the saw pump (A)
is blocked from reaching the saw motor. A pilot
operated check valve (B) in the control valve
prevents any hydraulic oil from reaching the saw A Red Push Button
motor. The check valve will remain closed until
actuated by a pilot signal. For diagnostic purposes a red push button on the
end of the solenoid valve can be used to operate
With an electrical signal from the MD3 computer, the valve manually.
the solenoid (C) on the saw control valve is
energized allowing it to open. When opened, a
pilot signal from saw pump passes through the WARNING
solenoid valve to the check valve. The pilot signal
allows the check valve to open and saw pump
Saw guard must be installed when working
hydraulic oil to reach the saw motor. The pilot
on the saw motor hydraulic circuit or when
signal is also passed through the COMP port (D)
the saw head is not being used.
to the saw pump (LS port) demanding the pump
provide flow to the saw motor.
A guage tes port 'G2' is provided for attaching a
pressure gauge when checking pressure.
17.4
SAW CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION SAW SWITCH ON
A variable displacement hydraulic pump supplies When the front door is closed on and the pilot
hydraulic oil to the motor. The pump is fixed to the system on, the saw relay and saw switch will be
PTO of the main pump. Hydraulic oil to the motor powered. If interruption occurs to any of these two
from the pump is controlled by the saw control items while the saw switch is on, the saw relay will
valve. Refer to SAW CONTROL VALVE in THIS be disabled. The saw switch must be moved to the
SECTION for operating description of the saw off position before the saw can be engaged again.
control valve. Turning the saw switch on sends current to the
XS2 module. Through internal logic, the MD3
A computer allows current to the saw control valve
solenoid. This allows high pressure oil to flow from
the pump to the saw motor.
NOTE: Engine rpm must be greater than 500 rpm
before the MD3 computer will energize the saw
control valve. This prevents the saw control valve
from being engaged while the engine is being
started.
When the saw control valve is energized, hydraulic
oil from the COMP port is fed back to the ‘LS’ port
B on the pump compensator. When the saw is first
turned on, the pressure required to turn the saw
blade is very high. This high pressure is fed back
to the ‘LS’ port on the pump compensator forcing
845C-134
the saw pump to shift to maximum displacement.
Saw Switch When in maximum displacement, pump pressure
A Saw Switch ON will increase until the pump POR setting is
B Saw Switch OFF achieved. At the POR setting, the pump will shift
The saw switch on the control panel in the cab is from maximum back to minimum displacement
used to turn the saw ON or OFF. This two position until the pressure at the pump drops below the
switch when energized sends electrical current to POR setting. When the pump is no longer at the
the XS2module. The switch is energized only if POR setting the pump will again shift back to
these parameters are met: maximum displacement. The pump will remain at
maximum displacement until:
• Front door is closed
• The saw switch is turned OFF.
• Pilot system is ON
• POR setting is achieved at the pump.
845C-171 SAW CIRCUIT ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC

17.5
Return oil from the saw motor is directed back to SAW SWITCH OFF
tank through the return filter manifold.
Case drain oil from the saw motor is directed back WARNING
to a return strainer then to tank through a check
valve mounted at the hydraulic tank. Always idle the engine and allow the saw
blade to slow down before shutting the
Saw will not operate with the pilot system OFF. If saw switch OFF. Never shut the engine
interuption to the pilot system occurs while the saw OFF until the saw blade has come to a
switch is on, the saw relay will be disabled. compete stop.
If the engine has been turned off or the pilot shut
off system tripped (Front Door Opened) with the With the saw switch in the OFF position, the saw
saw switch left in the ON position, the saw will not control valve solenoid is de-energized. The saw
start up when the engine is restarted or the front control valve prevents flow of hydraulic oil from
door closed. In this case press the PILOT RESET the saw pump to the saw motor. Pressure at the
button and turn the saw switch OFF and then ON. COMP port on the saw control valve no longer
feeds a signal to the LS port on the saw pump
controller. Without a signal at the ‘LS’ port, the
pump will shift to minimum displacement.
For an explanation of saw motor system, refer to
the SAW HEAD MANUFACTURERS MANUAL.
17.6
A B C D
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
845C-173 PILOT LINE
845C-174 CAN CABLE
845C-178
WIRE
845C-172
Saw Drive Electrical Circuit Diagram

A MD3 Computer and displaly module E Pilot Reset Switch
B XS2 Module F Saw Switch
C XA2–A0 Module G Door Interlock Switch
D XA2–A1 Module H Saw Control Valve
17.7
SAW DRIVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC

17.8
SAW DRIVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC CONT.

17.9
845C-181
845C-152
845C-155
A B
P OUT
COMP C
G2
IN
3
T 2
E
K
P2 1
F
G
P1
I
T
J
PSV
LEGEND
LS
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN CABLE
WIRE
17.10
Saw Drive Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
A Main Control Valve G Main Pump
B To Saw Motor H Saw Pump
C Saw Control Valve I To Fan Valve
D Pilot Distribution Manifold J To Return Strainer
E To Return Strainer K To Cooler bypass Valve
F Pilot Valve
17.11
PRESSURE SETTINGS 3. Apply the swing brake.
STAND-BY PRESSURE 4. Turn OFF the engine.
in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for specific 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
pressure and speed values. 7. Connect a 0–350 bar (0–5000 psi) pressure
1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating gauge to the saw pump 'P' test port.
temperature. 8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
STICK CYLINDERS 9. Check that all personnel are clear of the
FULLY EXTENDED
position.
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY start-up
SUPPORTED
860C-001 12. Start the engine and set throttle to idle position
.
2. Park machine on level ground with the 13. Close and latch the front door.
system.
CAUTION

A
rotation of the upper structure and boom B
assembly
CAUTION

WARNING

Saw Pump Control Valve
WARNING A Margin Pressure Adjusting Screw Locknut
B Margin Pressure Adjusting Screw
The swing brake must be applied at all 15. Loosen the saw pump margin pressure
times during this procedure. adjusting screw locknut.
16. Adjust the saw pump margin pressure screw
until the pressure gauge reading at 'P' meets
stand-by pressure specifications.
17. Tighten the saw pump margin pressure
17.12
18. Park machine on level ground with the PUMP AND SAW CONTROL VALVE
19. Apply swing brake if not already applied. HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATING RANGE chart
22. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. temperature.
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
860C-001

CAUTION

assembly
CAUTION

WARNING

WARNING

17.13
7. Prevent the saw blade from rotating
as outlined in the SAW HEAD
MANUFACTURER’S MANUAL.
gauge to the attachment control valve 'G2' test
port. A

gauge to the saw pump 'P' test port.
B
Saw Control Valve

A Main Relief Valve Adjusting Screw Locknut
A B Main Relief Valve Adjusting Screw
B 13. Loosen the saw control valve main relief valve

14. Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise
until spring tension is relieved.
CAUTION
Damage to the saw pump could occur if

spring tension is not relieved on the saw
control valve main relief valve.
Saw Control Valve
A POR Adjusting Screw Locknut
B POR Adjusting Screw 15. Tighten the saw control valve main relief valve
10. Loosen the saw pump POR adjusting screw 16. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
locknut.
11. Turn the saw pump POR adjusting screw all machine before starting engine.
the way in.
12. Tighten the saw pump POR adjusting screw position.
locknut.
start-up
.
system.
17.14
23. Turn the saw switch ON.
24. Loosen the saw control valve main relief valve
25. Slowly turn the saw control valve main relief
valve screw in until the pressure gauge
reading at 'G2' meets saw control valve main
relief valve specifications.
26. Tighten the saw control valve main relief valve
27. Loosen the saw pump POR adjusting screw
locknut.
28. Slowly turn the saw pump POR adjusting
screw out until the pressure gauge reading at
'G2' meets saw pump POR specifications.
29. Tighten the saw pump POR adjusting screw
locknut.
30. Turn saw OFF.
31. Observe pressure gauge reading at 'P' port on
the saw pump. If pressure gauge reading does
not meet stand-by pressure specifications,
stand-by pressure will need to be adjusted.
Refer to PRESSURE SETTINGS – STAND-BY
PRESSURE in THIS SECTION for information
on setting stand-by pressure.
MOTOR BEGIN OF STROKE
Refer to FELLING ATTACHMENT
MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE LITERATURE for
information on motor begin of stroke.
MOTOR MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT
Refer to FELLING ATTACHMENT
MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE LITERATURE for
information on motor minimum displacement.
17.15
17.16
ACCUMULATOR, CLAMPS AND WRIST..........................................................................................................18

SECTION 18 – ACCUMULATOR, CLAMPS AND WRIST
A
ADJUST OIL FLOW FOR CYCLE TIMES.............................................................................................. 18.34

TYPICAL CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES................................................................................................. 18.35
WRIST................................................................................................................................................18.34
ATTACHMENT CIRCUITS........................................................................................................................ 18.3
ACCUMULATOR AND CLAMP ARMS................................................................................................. 18.3
ATTACHMENT PUMP.............................................................................................................. 18.3–18.5
ATTACHMENT VALVE...................................................................................................................... 18.6
CHECK VALVE.......................................................................................................................... 18.10
END SECTION.......................................................................................................................... 18.11
INLET SECTION......................................................................................................................... 18.9
PORT RELIEF VALVE............................................................................................................... 18.10
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE....................................................................................................... 18.9
PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID................................................................................................... 18.10
SPOOL SECTIONS................................................................................................................... 18.10
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................... 18.14
ACCUMULATOR ARM.................................................................................................................... 18.14
CLAMP ARM................................................................................................................................... 18.14
WRIST.............................................................................................................................................18.15
JOYSTICK CONTROLS..................................................................................................................... 18.13
MD3 COMPUTER SYSTEM............................................................................................................... 18.12
WRIST................................................................................................................................................ 18.11
ATTACHMENT PUMP PRESSURE SETTINGS.................................................................................... 18.25
STAND-BY PRESSURE..................................................................................................................... 18.25
ATTACHMENT VALVE PRESSURE SETTINGS.................................................................................... 18.27
ACCUMULATOR PORT RELIEF........................................................................................................ 18.28
CLAMP ARM PORT RELIEF.............................................................................................................. 18.29
MAIN RELIEF.....................................................................................................................................18.27
PORT RELIEFS REPLACEMENT:..................................................................................................... 18.31
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT.................................................................................. 18.30
E

ACCUMULATOR AND CLAMP ARM.................................................................................................. 18.19
WRIST................................................................................................................................................18.24
JOYSTICK..........................................................................................................................................18.13
ELECTRONIC SETTINGS DESCRIPTION............................................................................................ 18.36
ACCUMULATING ARM - PWM OUT.................................................................................................. 18.36
ACCUMULATOR ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................................ 18.44
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE............................................................................................................ 18.38
CLAMP ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................................................... 18.40
CLAMP ARM - PWM OUT.................................................................................................................. 18.36
ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT TABLE................................................................................................ 18.39
WRIST ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................................................... 18.48
H

ACCUMULATOR AND CLAMP ARM.................................................................................................. 18.18
WRIST.....................................................................................................................................18.22–18.23
18.1
Accumulator, Clamps And Wrist Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
ACCUMULATOR AND CLAMP ARM....................................................................................... 18.16–18.17
ATTACHMENT PUMP........................................................................................................................... 18.4
ATTACHMENT VALVE.......................................................................................................................... 18.8
WRIST.....................................................................................................................................18.20–18.21
HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................... 18.52
I
INSTALLING A VACUUM PUMP ON THE HYDRAULIC TANK............................................................. 18.52

J
JOYSTICK CONTROLS......................................................................................................................... 18.13

M
MD3 COMPUTER SYSTEM................................................................................................................... 18.12

W
WRIST VALVE PRESSURE SETTINGS................................................................................................ 18.32
18.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Accumulator, Clamps And Wrist
A B
C
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN CABLE
D WIRE
A Main Control Valve C Attachment Pump

B Attachment Valve D Main Pump
ATTACHMENT CIRCUITS ATTACHMENT PUMP

Hydraulic oil to the saw head comes from varying
sources. Accumulator and clamp arm functions
receive hydraulic oil from the attachment pump
and attachment valve. The wrist functions receive
hydraulic oil from the main pump and main control
valve. Both sources of hydraulic oil are load sense
(LS) systems, meaning very low hydraulic flows
unless a function has been operated.
The saw motor is powered by a dedicated saw
pump through the saw valve. Refer to SECTION
17 of THIS MANUAL for details about the SAW
DRIVE
ACCUMULATOR AND CLAMP ARMS
The accumulator and clamp arm functions receive
hydraulic oil from:
• Attachment Pump 845C-163
• Attachment Valve
The attachment pump is an axial-piston variable
displacement pump mounted to the PTO of the
saw pump. The pump is controlled by a pressure
compensator. The controller has adjustments for
margin pressure and pressure override (POR).
18.3
845C-163
A E
A
B
D C
845C-164
Attachment Pump Control
Attachment Pump Control
A Pump Controller
A POR Valve
B Load Sense Valve
C POR Adjustment
C Rotate Group
D 'LS' Port
D Servo Piston
860C-303A
E Margin Pressure Adjusting Screw
When the accumulator or clamp arms are

operated, a load sense (LS) signal from the
attachment valve is sent to the ‘LS’ port on the
attachment pump controller. The LS signal begins
to shift the attachment pump load sense spool in
the controller. When the load sense spool shifts:
Hydraulic oil in the servo piston that would
normally hold the pump in minimum displacement
is released to tank.
Pump pressure in the ‘P’ port shifts the pump
towards maximum displacement to match flow
requirements of the attachment valve.
ATTACHMENT PUMP – CROSS SECTION
When the attachment valve is in the neutral

position the pump is de-stroked. Output is just
sufficient to maintain a pressure of approximately
34.5 bar (500 psi) in the pump ‘P’ port. The
swashplate control piston is in a condition where
control cylinder spring force, swashplate forces
and control pressure forces are balanced.
18.4
Pump pressure ‘P’ also acts on the load sense
spool, opposing the spring force and LS signal
from the attachment valve. When the pressure
on the ‘P’ side of the load sense valve is greater
than the combined spring force and LS signal
the LS valve will shift. When the LS valve shifts,
pump pressure is supplied to both ends of the
servo piston. The servo piston will begin to put
the pump into minimum displacement because
the surface areas are different at either end of the
servo piston. A spring is installed on one side of
the servo piston to smooth out the operation and
provide a relatively stable operating condition.
The pump is constantly reacting to the changes
in the load sense signal, and never produces
more flow than required for the functions being
operated.
The POR limits the maximum pressure the
pump can build. The POR spool is held in its
normal position by a spring force applied by the
POR adjustment. Pump pressure acts against
the opposite end of the spool. When the pump
pressure exceeds the POR setting, the POR spool
shifts. This allows pump pressure to act on both
sides of the servo piston, forcing the pump to de-
stroke as described above.
18.5
ATTACHMENT VALVE The two spool sections are electro-hydraulically
controlled and supply oil to the accumulator and
clamp arm functions. When the pilot system is on,
hydraulic oil from the pilot distribution manifold
is used to shift the spools. Each spool section
is equipped with its own port relief valve. The
end section is equipped with a tank ‘TP’ and 'PS'
connection.
IMPORTANT!
This manual is applicable to factory installed
machine functions and controls. It does not take
into account any changes or modifications made
after shipment. Verify all functions before operating
this machine.
845C-134 ATTACHMENT VALVE

The attachment valve is located in the hydraulic
valve compartment directly behind the main
control valve. The attachment valve has load
sensing and pressure compensated control.
The valve consists of an inlet section, two spool
sections, and an end section. The inlet section has
two pump connections ‘P1’ and ‘P2’ and a tank
connection, ‘T2”. The pressure relief valve is also
located in the inlet section.
845C-138 ATTACHMENT VALVE – LOCATION

18.6
B F
B E
A G
D F
D G
845C-136
Attachment Valve Port Locations

A 'P2' Port F Proportional Solenoid
B Port Relief Valve G Flow adjusting screws
C 'T2' Port H Pressure Relief Valve
D Check Valve I 'PS' Port
E 'TP' Port
18.7
845C-135 ATTACHMENT VALVE SCHEMATIC

18.8
Inlet Section Integrated into the inlet section is a main pressure
relief valve.
Pressure Relief Valve
A
A B
A
C
A
D
A
845C-137
Inlet Section
A Attachment Pump 'P1' Port
B Return Manifold 'T2' Port
845C-139
C Attachment Pump Load Sense Signal 'P2' Port
D Pressure Relief Valve
Attachment Valve – Inlet Section
A Inlet Section This pressure relief valve is designed to protect
the attachment circuit from pressure spikes. The
The inlet section is equipped with connection ports
pressure relief valve when needed, directs high
to:
pressure hydraulic oil from the attachment valve
• 'P1' Port - Attachment pump through the ‘T2’ port to the return manifold. The
pressure relief valve is not adjustable.
• 'T2' Port - Return manifold
• ‘P2’ Port - Attachment pump load sense signal
'P1' Port
When a function on the attachment valve is
actuated, hydraulic oil supplied to the attachment
valve enters through the ‘P1’ port on the inlet
section. The pressure at the port is regulated by a
pressure relief valve.
'T2" Port
When a function on the attachment valve is
actuated, return oil from the function passes
through the ‘T2’ port to the return manifold.
Hydraulic oil from the spool section port reliefs
also passes through the ‘T2’ port.
'P2' Port
The ‘P2’ port is on the attachment valve is directly
connected to the LS port on the attachment
pump. When a function on the attachment valve
is actuated, a LS signal from the actuated spool
section is sensed at the ‘P2’ port. The LS signal is
used by the attachment pump to control flow to the
attachment valve. When more than one function
on the attachment valve is actuated, the highest
LS pressure from the valve is used to regulate
pump flow.
18.9
SPOOL SECTIONS
B A
E 845C-140
A Check Valve
B Proportional Solenoid
C Flow Adjustment Screw
D Spring
E Port Relief Valve
845C-139 Check Valve

Attachment Valve – Spool Sections Load hold check valve in each section to prevent
A Spool sections undesirable load sinking.
The spool sections on the attachment valve supply Proportional Solenoid

hydraulic oil to open and close the accumulator The spool sections are equipped with proportional,
and clamp arms. The spool sections consist of the electro-hydraulic spool actuators. The actuators
following components: are spring centered to the neutral position when
not energized. Shifting the spools is done by
• Check valve
sending a variable voltage signal from the XA2-1
• Proportional solenoid Valves module to the appropriate solenoid. Each spool
• Flow adjusting screws section has a pilot damping restrictor installed
to create a ‘ramping’ effect for smooth function
• Spring operation.
• Port relief valve Port Relief valve
• Dampen restrictor The attachment valve is equipped with port relief
valves on each side of all spool sections. The
function of the port relief is to protect the valve
section and the function from pressure spikes in
the system.
The port relief valves also act as anti-cavitation
valves. They allow hydraulic oil to flow from the
valve tank gallery to the service ports in the
event of underpressure. Port relief valves cannot
be adjusted. Port relief valves installed in each
section are specifically designed for that section.
They should not be substituted with port reliefs
from other valves. Refer to REPLACING PORT
RELIEF in THIS SECTION.
18.10
END SECTION WRIST
The wrist functions receive hydraulic oil from:
• Main Pump
• Main Control Valve
For detailed information of the main pump and
main control valve refer to SECTION 4 of THIS
MANUAL.
845C-139
Attachment Valve – End Section

A End Section
The end section on the attachment valve is an

entry and exit point for pilot oil. The attachment
valve uses the pilot oil to shift the accumulator and
clamp valve sections. The end section is equipped
with connection ports to:
• 'TP' Port to Return Manifold
• 'PS' Port - Main Control Valve
'TP' Port
The spool sections on the attachment valve when
actuated drain hydraulic oil through the ‘TP’ port to
the return manifold.
'PS' Port
Hydraulic oil to the ‘PS’ port is supplied by the pilot
distribution manifold. The hydraulic oil is used to
shift the spools on the attachment valve.
18.11
MD3 COMPUTER SYSTEM The engine electronic control module provides
The machine electronic control is an MD3 electronic information to the MD3 computer
computer display and control system used to via J1939 CAN BUS links. This information is
actuate and regulate the accumulator or clamp displayed on the computer display.
arms and writst function operation as well as other NOTE: The computer control system is software-
machine functions. based. This software may be updated after the
machine is in service as a part of on-going product
improvement programs and service newsletters.
The information contained in this manual is
accurate at the time of printing. Improvements to
the machine and/or software are on-going and
may not be covered. In these cases contact your
Tigercat dealer for appropriate information.
860C-498
The MD3 computer is part of a network of

components. The system is made up of the
following components:
• MD3 Computer and Display Module
• XS2 Module (Cab)
• XA2-A0 Expansion Module (Frame)
• XA2-A1 Expansion Module (Frame)
• Engine Electronic Control Module
• Joysticks
not shown
The MD3 computer is the main controller in
the system. The MD3 computer program is the
operating system for the computer display as well
as the control system for the machine operating
parameters.
18.12
JOYSTICK CONTROLS clamp and accumulator arm functions. Refer to
The factory installed left (1) and right (2) joysticks JOYSTICK in SECTION 2 of the OPERATOR'S
are equipped with thumb switches and finger MANUAL for a complete description of factory
buttons that are used as an operator interface equipped joystick control function.
with the electronic control system to activate the
1 2
860C-310A 860C-310
1. Wrist CCW 1. Not Used

2. Level Left (if equipped) 2. Level Forward (if equipped)
3. Level Right (if equipped) 3. Level Back (if equipped)
4. Not Used 4. Wrist CW
5. Accumulator Arm Open 5. Clamp Arm Close
6. Accumulator Arm Close 6. Clamp Arm Open
7. Wrist CCW 7. Wrist CW
860C-483 JOYSTICK ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC (FACTORY INSTALLATION SHOWN)

18.13
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ACCUMULATOR ARM
Oil flow to the attachment valve functions (clamp The accumulator arm function is operated by a
arm and accumulator arm) is supplied by the hydraulic cylinder.
attachment pump. An accumulator arm open or close electrical
The attachment pump is a variable displacement signal from an accumulator arm buttons on the
pump. Refer to ATTACHMENT PUMP in THIS joystick is sent to the XS2 module. The XA2-A0
SECTION. module sends an electrical signal out to the
Oil flow from the attachment pump to the corresponding accumulator arm solenoid in the
attachment functions (clamp and accumulator attachment valve. The corresponding solenoid coil
arm) is controlled by the clamp and accumulator shifts the solenoid cartridge spool and allows the
sections of the attachment control valve. The section spool to be shifted by the internal pilot oil.
attachment control valve is electro-hydraulically When there is no accumulator arm open or close
controlled. signal, the solenoid valve is in the de-energized
The clamp and accumulator arm functions position preventing pilot oil flow from shifting the
are operated by switches on the left and right spool in the valve section.
joysticks. When there is a signal from the accumulator arm
NOTE: that the joystick switch positions shown in open or close control via the XA2-A0 module, the
this manual are factory installed and do not reflect solenoid valve will be placed in the energized
changes or modifications made after shipment. position directing pilot oil to shift the spool in the
Verify all functions before operating this machine. accumulator arm valve section. This will direct high
pressure oil (system) from the attachment pump to
CLAMP ARM one end of the accumulator arm cylinder.
The clamp arm is operated by a hydraulic cylinder.
A clamp arm open or close electrical signal from
the clamp arm buttons on the joystick is sent to
the MD3 computer. The XA2-A0 module sends an
electrical signal out to the corresponding clamp
arm solenoids on the attachment valve. The
corresponding solenoid coil shifts the solenoid
cartridge spool and allows the section spool to be
shifted by the internal pilot oil.
When there is no clamp arm open or close signal,
the solenoid valve is in the de-energized position
preventing pilot oil flow from shifting the spool in
the valve section.
When there is a signal from the clamp arm open
or close control via the XA2-A0 module, the
solenoid valve will be placed in the energized
position directing pilot oil to shift the spool in
the clamp arm valve section. This will direct high
pressure oil (system) from the attachment pump to
one end of the clamp arm cylinder.
18.14
WRIST
A wrist clockwise (CW) and counterclockwise
(CCW) electrical signal from a wrist button or
trigger is sent to the MD3 computer or XS2-A0
module. The MD3 computer sends an electrical
signal out to the corresponding wrist solenoid on
the pilot manifold, the corresponding solenoid
shifts and allows pilot pressure to shift the spool in
the wrist valve section of the main control valve.
When there is no wrist CW or CCW signal, the
solenoid valve is in the de-energized position
preventing pilot oil flow to the wrist section pilot
end caps.
When there is a signal from the wrist CW or CCW
control via the MD3 computer, the solenoid valve
will be placed in the energized position directing
pilot oil to shift the spool in the wrist valve section.
This will direct oil from the main pump to one end
of the wrist cylinder(s) or motor(s).
For additional information regarding setup,
operation, maintenance and service of the
WRIST ASSEMBLIES refer to the OPERATING
AND SERVICE MANUAL-TIGERCAT SAWS or
ATTACHMENT MANUFACTURER'S MANUALS.
18.15
845C-149 ACCUMULATOR AND CLAMP ARM HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

18.16
845C-149 ACCUMULATOR AND CLAMP ARM HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC CONT.

18.17
F B
LS
T2 P2 P1
TP PS
P1
LS
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN CABLE
WIRE D
845C-179
845C-143
Accumulator and Clamp Arm Hydraulic Circuit Diagram

A Accumulator Arms Cylinder E Pilot Manifold
B Clamp Arms Cylinder F Main Control Valve
C Attachment Valve G Return Manifold
D Attachment Pump
18.18
A B C D
F G H
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN CABLE
WIRE
845C-178
845C-174
845C-149
Accumulator and Clamp Arm Electrical Circuit Diagram

A MD3 Computer F Door Interlock Switch
B XS2 Module G Left Joystick
C XA2–A0 Module H Right Joystick
D XA2–A1 Module I Attachment Valve
E Pilot Reset Switch
18.19
845C-166 WRIST HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

18.20
845C-166 WRIST HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC CONT.

18.21
OUT
COMP (LS) A
P
G2
IN
C P
C2 C1
3
2
P2 E D
P1
K
T A
P
PSV
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE LS
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN CABLE
WIRE
845C-144
845C-167
845C-182 WRIST HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
18.22
Wrist Hydraulic Circuit
A Saw Control Valve G Saw Pump
B Main Control Valve H To Wrist Cylinder/Motor
C Pilot Distribution Manifold I To Wrist Cylinder/Motor
D Cooler Bypass Valve J To Saw Motor
E Pressure Reducing Valve K To Fan Valve
F Main Pump L To Return Strainer
18.23
845C-178
845C-174
845C-169
845C-181
A B C D
F
G H
TS2
TS1
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
CAN CABLE K
WIRE
Wrist Electrical Circuit Diagram

A MD3 Computer G Left Joystick
B XS2 Module H Right Joystick
C XA2–A0 Module I Attachment Valve
D XA2–A1 Module J Main Pump
E Pilot Reset Switch K Anti-Stall Solenoid Valve
F Door Interlock Switch
18.24
ATTACHMENT PUMP PRESSURE 3. Apply the swing brake.
SETTINGS 4. Turn OFF the engine.
STAND-BY PRESSURE
HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATING RANGE chart 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for specific 7. Connect a 0–350 bar (0–5000 psi) pressure
pressure and speed values. gauge to the attachment pump 'P' test port.
1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating 8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
temperature.
STICK CYLINDERS machine before starting engine.
FULLY EXTENDED
position.
TIP OF STICK
start-up
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED 12. Start the engine and set throttle to idle position
860C-001 .
system.
CAUTION
Use caution when in the cab as a slight A

assembly B
CAUTION

WARNING

Attachment Pump Control Valve
A Margin Pressure Adjusting Screw Locknut
WARNING
15. Loosen the attachment pump margin pressure
The swing brake must be applied at all adjusting screw locknut.
16. Adjust the attachment pump margin pressure
screw until the pressure gauge reading at 'P'
meets stand-by pressure specifications.
17. Tighten the attachment pump margin pressure
18.25
18.26
ATTACHMENT VALVE PRESSURE 3. Apply the swing brake.
SETTINGS 4. Turn OFF the engine.
RANGE chart in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
specific pressure and speed values.
MAIN RELIEF gauge to the attachment control valve 'P2' test
1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating port.
temperature. 8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.
STICK CYLINDERS 9. Check that all personnel are clear of the
FULLY EXTENDED
start-up
TIP OF STICK
11. Insert the ignition key
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED 12. Start the engine.
860C-001
13. Close and latch the cab door.
system.
860C-404 MARGIN PRESSURE 'LS' PORT
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION POR
ADJUSTMENT

assembly
CAUTION

PUMP CONTROLLER
ATTACHMENT PUMP COMPONENTS
WARNING 15. With an assistant, loosen the margin pressure
Ensure that no one is standing near the 16. Turn the adjusting screw all the way in.
17. Tighten adjusting screw locknut.
18. Loosen the POR adjusting screw locknut.
WARNING
19. Temporarily increase POR valve setting to 276
The swing brake must be applied at all bar (4000 psi) on gauge at ‘P2’ test port.
18.27
20. Tighten POR adjusting screw locknut. ACCUMULATOR PORT RELIEF
21. Loosen the main relief valve adjusting screw When checking the accumulator pressure it is
locknut on the attachment valve. necessary to use the accumulator open and close
function. The function is electronically controlled
22. Slowly turn the adjusting screw by a proportional solenoid valve on the attachment
counterclockwise until the pressure gauge valve. It is important to supply maximum current
reading at ‘P2’ test port drops below 276 bar to the proportional solenoid valve to ensure it is at
(4000 psi). 100% of its maximum rated flow. The maximum
23. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise until current can be checked and set with the MD3
the main relief valve first opens (cracking computer. Refer to ELECTRONIC SETTING
pressure). DESCRIPTION – ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE in
THIS SECTION.
24. Tighten the main relief valve adjusting screw
locknut. 1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature.
STICK CYLINDERS
26. Reset the POR valve pressure specifications. FULLY EXTENDED
27. Tighten POR adjusting screw locknut.

28. Loosen the margin pressure adjusting screw
locknut.
TIP OF STICK
29. Reset the stand-by pressure. BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
Refer to ATTACHMENT PUMP PRESSURE 860C-001
SETTINGS – STAND-BY PRESSURE in THIS
SECTION for information on setting stand-by
pressure.
30. Tighten adjusting screw locknut.
31. Turn OFF the engine. CAUTION
33. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. touch of the controls can cause sudden
34. Remove gauges. rotation of the upper structure and boom
assembly
CAUTION

WARNING

WARNING

18.28
3. Apply swing brake. CLAMP ARM PORT RELIEF
4. Turn OFF the engine. When checking the clamp arm pressure it is
necessary to use the clamp arm open and close
5. Remove the ignition key. function. The function is electronically controlled
6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. by a proportional solenoid valve on the attachment
valve. It is important to supply maximum current
7. Connect a 0–350 bar (0–5000 psi) pressure to the proportional solenoid valve to ensure it is at
gauge to the attachment control valve 'P2' test 100% of its maximum rated flow. The maximum
port. current can be checked and set with the MD3
8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. computer. Refer to ELECTRONIC SETTING
DESCRIPTION – ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE in
THIS SECTION.
temperature.
start-up
STICK CYLINDERS
11. Insert the ignition key FULLY EXTENDED
12. Start the engine.

TIP OF STICK
system. BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED
15. Loosen the POR adjusting screw locknut. 860C-001
16. Temporarily increase POR valve setting to 276

bar (4000 psi) on gauge at ‘P2’ test port. 2. Park machine on level ground with the
17. Tighten POR adjusting screw locknut. attachment resting firmly on the ground.
18. pre
CAUTION
adjustable. If observed pressures are not Use caution when in the cab as a slight
within 3.5 bar (50 psi) the valve will need to be touch of the controls can cause sudden
replaced. rotation of the upper structure and boom
19. With aid of an assistant operate the assembly
ACCUMULATOR ARM OPEN function. Make
sure pressure gauge reading at ‘P2’ test
port meets ACCUMULATOR ARM OPEN
CAUTION
specifications.
NOTE: The port relief valves are not Operator is responsible for the safe
adjustable. If observed pressures are not operation of the machine.
within 3.5 bar (50 psi) the valve will need to be
replaced.
WARNING
21. Reset the POR valve pressure specifications. Ensure that no one is standing near the
22. Tighten POR adjusting screw locknut. attachment during this procedure.

24. Remove the ignition key. WARNING
25. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. The swing brake must be applied at all
26. Remove gauges. times during this procedure.
18.29
3. Apply swing brake. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT
4. Turn OFF the engine. STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
gauge to the attachment control valve 'P2' test TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
port. SUPPORTED
860C-001
start-up
6. Depressurize hydraulic tank.
system.
15. Loosen the POR adjusting screw locknut. IMPORTANT!
16. Temporarily increase POR valve setting to 276 PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK
bar (4000 psi) on gauge at ‘P2’ test port.
A
18. With aid of an assistant operate the CLAMP
ARM CLOSE function. Make sure pressure
gauge reading at ‘P2’ test port meets CLAMP
ARM CLOSE specifications.
within 3.5 bar (50 psi) the valve will need to be 845C-097 B
845C-001
replaced.
Before servicing the hydraulic system, open
19. With aid of an assistant operate the CLAMP the air vent valve (A) to release air pressure
ARM OPEN function. Make sure pressure from the hydraulic oil tank.
gauge reading at ‘P2’ test port meets CLAMP
Air vent valve is open when handle is parallel
ARM OPEN specifications.
to valve.
Air vent valve is closed when handle is
perpendicular to valve (shown).
within 3.5 bar (50 psi) the valve will need to be
replaced. After service is complete, close the air vent
valve and add air pressure to the hydraulic
20. Loosen the POR adjusting screw locknut. tank using the Schrader valve (B). Make
21. Reset the POR valve pressure specifications. sure the air is clean and dry. Do not exceed
34.5 kPa (5 psi). Refer to HYDRAULIC
23. Turn OFF the engine. SECTION 3 for details.
7. Install a vacuum pump, refer to INSTALLING A
25. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch. VACUUM PUMP ON THE HYDRAULIC TANK
26. Remove gauges. later in this section.
18.30
8. Remove the relief cartridge using a a 27 mm PORT RELIEFS REPLACEMENT:
wrench or socket. 1. Repeat steps 1 to 7 of PRESSURE RELIEF
9. Install the replacement relief cartridge with VALVE REPLACEMENT in THIS SECTION
new O-ring, and tighten to 100 Nm (74 lbf-ft). 2. Remove the port relief cartridge using a 12
mm allen key.
3. Install the replacement port relief cartridge
with new O-ring, and tighten to 100 Nm (74
lbf-ft).
4. Remove the vacuum pump and pressurize
hydraulic tank.
18.31
WRIST VALVE PRESSURE SETTINGS
When checking the wrist pressure it is necessary
CAUTION
to use the wrist CW and CCW functions. The
functions are electronically controlled by a Use caution when in the cab as a slight
proportional solenoid valve on the pilot distribution touch of the controls can cause sudden
valve. It is important to supply maximum current rotation of the upper structure and boom
to the proportional solenoid valve to ensure it is at assembly
100% of its maximum rated flow. The maximum
current can be checked and set with the MD3 CAUTION
computer.
Refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTING and Be aware of other personnel in the area.
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE OPERATING Operator is responsible for the safe
RANGE chart in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for operation of the machine.
IMPORTANT! WARNING
Position attachment on the ground during this
procedure except when adjusting the wrist port
relief valves.
temperature.
WARNING
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
SUPPORTED 4. Turn OFF the engine.
860C-001
2. Park machine on level ground with the 6. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
845C-110
SYSTEM OVER MAIN

PRESSURE VALVE
CONTROL MANIFOLD
RELIEF
'P'
PRESSURE
PORT
'LS' PRESSURE
'XLS' 'XP' CONTROL
'LS' PORT TEST
TEST RELIEF
PORT PORT
MAIN CONTROL VALVE 'XLS' & 'XP' PORTS

AND RELIEF VALVE LOCATIONS

gauge to the main control valve 'xP' test port.
18.32
8. Turn on the battery disconnect switch. 24. Turn OFF the engine.
9. Check that all personnel are clear of the 25. Remove the ignition key.
27. Remove gauges.
start-up
system.
15. With the aid of an assistant raise the boom
and rotate the attachment fully CW. Continue
pressing the trigger switch.
16. Check gauge pressure reading at port 'xP' on
the main control valve.
17. Release the trigger switch.
18. Pressure should meet wrist port relief
specifications. If pressure does not
specifications, adjustment is required.
WRIST CW
PORT RELIEF
WRIST CCW
845C-168 PORT RELIEF
19. With the aid of an assistant raise the boom

and rotate the attachment fully CW. Continue
pressing the trigger switch.
20. Loosen the WRIST CW port relief valve
cartridge locknut.
21. Slowly turn the adjusting screw until the
pressure gauge reading at 'xP' meets WRIST
CW port relief specifications.
time.
23. Repeat steps 15 to 22 for wrist CCW function.
18.33
ADJUST OIL FLOW FOR CYCLE TIMES 3. Sound horn to warn personnel of machine
WRIST start-up
Refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTING and 4. Insert the ignition key
5. Start the engine and set the throttle to full
RANGE chart in SECTION 3 of THIS MANUAL for
.
locknut (seal nut) on the adjusting screws will 7. Apply swing brake.
eventually cause the seal in the nut to break down 8. Press pilot reset switch to activate the pilot
and leak. Because of this it is best to keep the system.
adjusting procedure brief.
9. With the aid of an assistant lift the attachment
1. Make sure the hydraulic oil is at operating 1 m (3.3 ft) above the ground.
temperature.
10. Use the RH joystick trigger or button 4 to
rotate the attachment fully CW.
CAUTION
11. Use the LH joystick trigger or button 1 to rotate
Use caution when in the cab as a slight the attachment fully CCW. Record the cycle
touch of the controls can cause sudden time from stop to stop.
rotation of the upper structure and boom 12. Use the RH joystick trigger or button 4 to
assembly rotate the attachment fully CW. Record the
cycle time from stop to stop.
CAUTION 13. If required, adjust the flow adjusting screw for
WRIST CW speed or WRIST CCW speed for
Be aware of other personnel in the area. the wrist function.
Operator is responsible for the safe 14. Park machine on level ground with the
operation of the machine. attachment resting firmly on the ground.
WARNING
Ensure that no one is standing near the 17. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.
WARNING


18.34
TYPICAL CYLINDER CYCLE TIMES
Do not over adjust the flow adjusting screws to
provide faster cycle times, this will increase stress
on boom components and the hydraulic system.
To set cylinder cycle times, loosen the spool
travel-stop locknut on the adjusting screw. Turn the
adjusting screw IN (clockwise) to SLOW DOWN
and OUT (counterclockwise) to SPEED UP.
Tighten the adjusting screw locknut and re-check
times.
IMPORTANT!
Backing the adjusting screw out to exceed
PRESSURE AND SPEED SETTINGS in SECTION
3 of THIS MANUAL allows the valve spool to travel
beyond the optimum position for maximum oil flow.
This causes cylinder cycle times to INCREASE
and boom function to SLOW DOWN. If over
adjustment has occurred allow the valve to return
to the neutral position and adjust the screw IN until
it just touches the valve spool. Repeat ADJUST
OIL TO CYLINDERS PROCEDURE to set cylinder
cycle times. Do not turn the adjusting screw more
than 12 turns out from where it just touches the
valve spool when in the neutral position.
18.35
ELECTRONIC SETTINGS DESCRIPTION Stop Slope
Attachment performance and control is adjusted This is the amount of time in mS that it takes for
using the MD3 computer from the ADJUST the current to get from the Max Current to the Min
MENU. The adjustments can vary to suit operating current when turning off a function. A higher setting
conditions. will cause a delay in the time that it takes for the
function to come to a stop from top speed. Note
Refer to COMPUTER – (ADJUSTMENT) MENU
that if the mS setting is set at 0mS then the min
OPERATION in SECTION 6 of THIS MANUAL.
current setting is negated and the function would
By regulating the amount of current supplied to stop as soon as it is turned off. Below is a typical
the proportional solenoids on the attachment valve graph showing the four settings.
we can control the volume of hydraulic oil to the
cylinders. Accumulator and clamp arm cylinder
speeds change depending on settings made from
the adjust menu.
Two adjustments can be made using the adjust
menu:
CLAMP ARM - PWM OUT
Adjustments to fine tune the operating speed and
start/stop ramps for the clamp arm open and close
functions.
ACCUMULATING ARM - PWM OUT
Adjustments to fine tune the operating speed and
start/stop ramps for the accumulating arm open
and close functions.
Within the two groups (accumulator and clamp)
that can be adjusted there are four adjustments
that can be made through the MD3 computer to
customise the operation of each function.
The four adjustments are:
Min Current
This is the minimum amount of current that causes
the function to just begin to creep.
inaccurate.
Max Current
This is the current the controls the maximum
speed of the function. A higher setting will cause
the function to move faster.
Start Slope
This is the amount of time in mS that it takes for
the current to get from the Min Current value to
the Max Current when turning on a function. A
higher setting will cause a delay in the time that it
takes the function to reach top speed. Note that if
the mS setting is set to 0ms then the min current
setting is negated as the function will start at max
current as soon as it is turned on.
18.36
CLAMP EXAMPLE (DEFAULT SETTINGS) CLAMP EXAMPLE (SLOPE SETTINGS
Below is a screen shot of the Clamp settings ADJUSTED)
showing the defaults as follows Below is a screen shot of the Clamp settings
• Min mA =300 shown after an adjustment has been made to the
Start and Stop Slopes.
• Max mA =750
Min mA = 300
• Start Slope =0mS Max mA = 750
• Stop Slope =0mS Start Slope =500mS
Stop Slope = 500mS
860C-526
NOTE: The graph reflects the default settings and

as the Start and Stop Slopes are set to 0mS there
is no ramp up or down showing that the clamp will 860C-527
travel immediately at max speed once the button
is activated. The graph reflects the adjustments made to the
start and stop slopes. This will affect the clamp
operation in three ways. The overall time it takes
for the clamp to open or close will be longer. The
initial movement of the clamp will be slower when
the button is activated and the final movement of
the clamp will also be slower when the button is
deactivated.
18.37
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE:
For best results ensure hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature before doing any adjustments.
In addition, the function(s) being adjusted
should be operated at a rate similar to normal
operation to ensure that the coil is at a typical
operating temperature. Due to the nature of the
electrical components some signals will vary
with temperature and should always be adjusted
at normal operating temperature to improve the
accuracy of adjustments for operating conditions
and operator preference.
temperature.
CAUTION

assembly
CAUTION

WARNING

WARNING


start-up
5. Start the engine and set the throttle to full
.
system.
18.38
ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT TABLE
Default
Settings
WRIST -CW / +CCW
LEVELER ADJUSTMENT
18.39
CLAMP ADJUSTMENT

MENU.
Use the up or down arrow buttons scroll to Clamp

Open/Close and push OK.
18.40
Push the F3 button to access the Clamp + (Close) NOTE: When in the Clamp + Max Adjust menu
adjust section and press OK. only the Max current will be applied to the clamp
joystick and at the same time use the up or down
arrow buttons to adjust the Clamp + Max setting.
close and Clamp open on the joystick to set this
adjustment.
Adjustment of this setting will determine the
speed of the Clamp when closing. Increasing this
NOTE: When in the Clamp + Min Adjust menu

only the Min current will be applied to the clamp
arrow buttons to adjust the Clamp + Min setting so
that the Clamp just starts to creep.
inaccurate.
Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust

the Clamp + Start setting. Adjustment of this
setting (along with the Clamp + Min setting
) will determine how the clamp will begin to
close. Increasing this setting will result in a less
18.41
Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust the NOTE: When in the Clamp - Min Adjust menu
Clamp + Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting only the Min current will be applied to the clamp
(along with the Clamp + Min setting) will determine when the function is activated.
deactivated. Increasing this setting will result in a
less aggressive stop while decreasing the setting
arrow buttons to adjust the Clamp - Min setting so
will result in a more aggressive stop. Once the
that the Clamp just starts to creep.
setting has been adjusted press OK. The Clamp +
Close adjustment is now complete. NOTE: An inaccurate adjustment of the Min
inaccurate.
Press the F4 button to access the Clamp - (Open)

NOTE: When in the Clamp - Max Adjust menu
only the Max current will be applied to the clamp
arrow buttons to adjust the Clamp - Max setting.
open and Clamp close on the joystick to set this
adjustment.
18.42
Adjustment of this setting will determine the CLAMP DEFAULT SETTINGS
speed of the Clamp when opening. Increasing this

Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust the setting to the factory default.
Clamp - Start setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Clamp - Min setting ) will determine
how the clamp will begin to open. Increasing
adjusted press OK.

Clamp - Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Clamp - Min setting) will determine
deactivated.
has been adjusted press OK. The Clamp - Open
adjustment is now complete.
18.43
ACCUMULATOR ADJUSTMENT

MENU.

Accum Open/Close and push OK.
18.44
Push the F3 button to access the Accum + (Close) NOTE: When in the Accum + Max Adjust menu
adjust section and press OK. only the Max current will be applied to the
on the joystick and at the same time use the up
or down arrow buttons to adjust the Accum + Max
NOTE: When in the Accum + Min Adjust menu

only the Min current will be applied to the
or down arrow buttons to adjust the Accum + Min
setting so that the accumulator just starts to creep.
inaccurate.
Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust
the Accum + Start setting. Adjustment of this
setting (along with the Accum + Min setting )
will determine how the accumulator will begin to
close. Increasing this setting will result in a less
18.45
Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust the NOTE: When in the Accum - Min Adjust menu only
Accum + Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting the Min current will be applied to the accumulator
(along with the Accum + Min setting) will determine when the function is activated.
Activate and hold the Accumulator Open function
or down arrow buttons to adjust the Accum - Min
setting so that the accumulator just starts to creep.
Accumulator + Close adjustment is now complete. NOTE: An inaccurate adjustment of the Min
inaccurate.
Press the F4 button to access the Accum - (Open)

NOTE: When in the Accum - Max Adjust menu

only the Max current will be applied to the
or down arrow buttons to adjust the Accum - Max
18.46
Adjustment of this setting will determine the speed ACCUMULATOR DEFAULT SETTINGS

Use the up or down arrow buttons to adjust setting to the factory default.
the Accum - Start setting. Adjustment of this
setting (along with the Accum - Min setting ) will
determine how the accumulator will begin to
open. Increasing this setting will result in a less

Accum - Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the Accum - Min setting) will determine
Accumulator - Open adjustment is now complete.
18.47
WRIST ADJUSTMENT

MENU.
Using the up or down arrow buttons scroll to wrist

and push OK.
18.48
Push the F3 button to access the NOTE: When in the CCW Max Adjust menu only
Counterclockwise (CCW) adjust section and press the Max current will be applied to the wrist when
OK. the function is activated.
buttons adjust the CCW Wrist Max setting. It may
be necessary to switch between the Wrist CCW
and CW on the joystick to set this adjustment.
of the Wrist in the CCW direction. Increasing this
the setting will slow it down. Once the setting
has been adjusted press OK. For recommended
speed setting refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED
SETTINGS in SECTION 3 of this manual.
NOTE: When in the CCW Min Adjust menu only

the Min current will be applied to the wrist when
the function is activated.
buttons adjust the CCW Wrist Min setting so that
the wrist just starts to creep.
inaccurate.
CCW Wrist Start setting. Adjustment of this
setting (along with the CCW Min setting) will
determine how the Wrist will start in the CCW
18.49
Using the up or down arrow buttons adjust NOTE: When in the CW Min Adjust menu only the
the CCW Wrist Stop setting. Adjustment of Min current will be applied to the wrist when the
this setting (along with the CCW Min setting) function is activated.
will determine how the wrist stops in the CCW
buttons adjust the CW Wrist Min setting so that the
wrist just starts to creep.
has been adjusted press OK. The CCW wrist
adjustment is now complete. NOTE: An inaccurate adjustment of the Min
inaccurate.
Press the F4 button to access the CW adjust

section and press OK twice.
NOTE: When in the CW Max Adjust menu only the

Max current will be applied to the wrist when the
function is activated.
buttons adjust the CW Wrist Max setting. It may
be necessary to switch between the Wrist CW and
CCW on the joystick to set this adjustment.
18.50
Adjustment of this setting will determine the speed WRIST DEFAULT SETTINGS
of the Wrist in the CW direction. Increasing this
the setting will slow it down. Once the setting
has been adjusted press OK. For recommended
speed setting refer to PRESSURE AND SPEED
SETTINGS in SECTION 3 of this manual.

860C-505 window by pushing F2 again. This will reset the

CW Wrist Start setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the CW Min setting ) will determine
how the Wrist will start in the CW direction.
860C-506
Using the up arrow or down arrow adjust the

CW Wrist Stop setting. Adjustment of this setting
(along with the CW Min setting) will determine how
the wrist stops in the CW direction. Increasing
this setting will result in a less aggressive stop
aggressive stop. Once the setting has been
adjusted press OK. The CW wrist adjustment is
now complete.
18.51
HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZATION INSTALLING A VACUUM PUMP ON THE
INSTRUCTIONS HYDRAULIC TANK
IMPORTANT!
STICK CYLINDERS
FULLY EXTENDED
PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK. 34.5 kPa

(5 psi) MAXIMUM.
Before servicing hydraulic system, release
air pressure from tank using air vent valve.
TIP OF STICK
BOOM FULLY
AIR VENT VALVE SUPPORTED
FILTER
HANDLE (SHOWN BREATHER
IN UP POSITION) 860C-155 SERVICE POSITION FIG.1
UP = CLOSED
DOWN = OPEN
PRESSURE 1. Park machine on level ground with the
GAUGE attachment resting firmly on the ground.
5 PSI MAX
(34.5 KPA)
SCHRADER VALVE
ADD 5 PSI (34.5 KPA) IMPORTANT!
AIR PRESSURE TO
PRESSURIZE TANK PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC TANK
AFTER SERVICE IS
COMPLETED
A
H845C-59
To release pressure from the hydraulic tank:

Wearing eye protection, release air from the
hydraulic tank by opening the AIR VENT VALVE.
Pull valve handle down 90° to open. Push valve
handle up to close.
845C-097 B
NOTE: Expelled air from vent valve will blow 845C-001
accumulated loose debris into the enclosure.

Before servicing the hydraulic system, open
Releasing hydraulic tank pressure in the event of a the air vent valve (A) to release air pressure
hose breakage may reduce oil loss. from the hydraulic oil tank.
IMPORTANT! Air vent valve is open when handle is parallel
Air vent valve must be opened before changing to valve.
hydraulic filters and strainers or performing any Air vent valve is closed when handle is
other service on hydraulic circuits. Do not operate perpendicular to valve (shown).
machine with the air vent in the open position.
After service is complete, close the air vent
During a filter change or return hose replacement, valve and add air pressure to the hydraulic
air is able to enter the return hydraulic circuit. tank using the Schrader valve (B). Make
It is important to bleed as much of this air as sure the air is clean and dry. Do not exceed
possible out prior to restarting the machine. See 34.5 kPa (5 psi). Refer to HYDRAULIC
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTERS "filter change TANK PRESSURIZATION INSTRUCTIONS in
procedure" for instructions on bleeding air from SECTION 3 for details.
return circuit. Air bubbles in the hydraulic system
will damage the pumps.
the hydraulic tank via the Schrader valve. Do not
18.52
6. Install Vacuum Pump
7. Remove the hydraulic tank breather filter hose
clamp at the tank
8. Lift the hose off the tank spout.
9. Install a vacuum pump hose on tank breather
port spout. Turn vacuum pump on to apply a
vacuum in hydraulic tank.
10. When service is complete, turn off vacuum
pump and remove the hose.
11. Re-install hydraulic tank breather filter hose
and clamp on the tank spout.
12. Close the air vent valve and add air pressure
from a clean air source to the hydraulic tank
via the schrader valve. Do not exceed 34.5
kPa (5 psi).
18.53
18.54
MISCELLANEOUS............................................................................................................................................25

SECTION 25 – MISCELLANEOUS
C
CIRCUITS, HYDRAULIC
ELECTRIC PUMP OPERATED SYSTEM............................................................................................ 25.3
HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP OPERATED SYSTEM.............................................................................. 25.3
COMPUTER
MD3 'ROOF OPEN' ALERT MESSAGE............................................................................................... 25.7
E
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, POWER ROOF........................................................................................... 25.5

ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, POWER ROOF SENSOR.......................................................................... 25.7
ELECTRIC PUMP OPERATED POWER ROOF...................................................................................... 25.4
CHECKING OIL LEVEL........................................................................................................................ 25.5
LIMIT SWITCH...................................................................................................................................... 25.5
POWER ROOF CYLINDER.................................................................................................................. 25.4
POWER ROOF ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC........................................................................................ 25.5
POWER ROOF ELECTRIC PUMP............................................................................................. 25.4, 25.6
POWER ROOF SENSOR..................................................................................................................... 25.7
POWER ROOF SWITCH............................................................................................................ 25.2, 25.4
VALVE COMPARTMENT COVER/DOOR............................................................................................ 25.5
H
HAND PUMP OPERATION, POWER ROOF........................................................................................... 25.6

HAND PUMP, LOCATION........................................................................................................... 25.2, 25.6
LIMIT SWITCH...................................................................................................................................... 25.6
MANUAL OVERRIDE........................................................................................................................... 25.6
VALVE COMPARTMENT COVER/DOOR............................................................................................ 25.6
HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS, POWER ROOF................................................................................................ 25.3
ELECTRIC PUMP OPERATED SYSTEM............................................................................................ 25.3
HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP OPERATED SYSTEM.............................................................................. 25.3
HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP...................................................................................................................... 25.6
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC, ELECTRIC POWER ROOF......................................................................... 25.3
L
LIMIT SWITCH, VALVE COMPARTMENT COVER/DOOR...................................................................... 25.5

M
MANUAL OVERRIDE, POWER ROOF ELECTRIC PUMP...................................................................... 25.6

P
POWER ROOF CYLINDER..................................................................................................................... 25.4

POWER ROOF ELECTRIC PUMP................................................................................................ 25.4, 25.6
MANUAL OVERRIDE........................................................................................................................... 25.6
RESERVOIR.........................................................................................................................................25.4
POWER ROOF SENSOR........................................................................................................................ 25.7
MD3 'ROOF OPEN' ALERT MESSAGE............................................................................................... 25.7
POWER ROOF SENSOR ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC........................................................................... 25.7
POWER ROOF SWITCH............................................................................................................... 25.2, 25.4
S
SCHEMATICS
ELECTRIC POWER ROOF HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC...................................................................... 25.3
POWER ROOF ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC........................................................................................ 25.5
POWER ROOF SENSOR ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC........................................................................ 25.7
V
VALVE COMPARTMENT COVER/DOOR................................................................................................ 25.5
25.1
Miscellaneous Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher
POWER ROOF
The upper enclosure power roof is operated by an
POWER ROOF
electric pump operated hydraulic system.
POWER ROOF – SWITCH
845C-095
H845C-51
H845C-55 POWER ROOF SWITCH
An OPEN – CLOSE , spring return to

centre OFF, three position 'momentary' switch is
used to open and close the power roof. Push and
hold the switch in the open position to open the
power roof or push and hold in the close position
to close the power roof.
NOTE: The power roof is equipped with a motion
alarm that sounds when the power roof is moved.
UPPER ENCLOSURE POWER ROOF
NOTE: In the event of electric pump operated HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP
hydraulic system trouble, it is possible to open and
close the power roof with an alternate hydraulic
hand pump. The hand pump is located inside the
upper enclosure, mounted on the bottom rear of
the hydraulic tank.
Refer to HAND PUMP OPERATION in THIS
SECTION.
25.2
Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher Miscellaneous
POWER ROOF POWER ROOF

ELECTRIC PUMP ELECTRIC PUMP
C2 C1
OPEN P T
MANUAL
OVERRIDE TEST
CLOSE PORT
SOLENOID
RESERVOIR
FILL CAP
RESERVOIR
RESERVOIR
LEFT SIDE
RIGHT SIDE CYLINDER
CYLINDER
HAND
PUMP
P
FREE FLOW
FREE FLOW
BULKHEAD
FITTINGS (2)
BOTTOM OF
CHECK CHECK FUEL TANK
VALVE VALVE T
HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP

OPERATED SYSTEM
LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE
DRAIN LINE
PILOT LINE
ELECTRIC PUMP CAN LINE
OPERATED SYSTEM WIRE
845CH-199 POWER ROOF HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS
VENT/FILL
POWER ROOF PUMP POWER ROOF CYLINDERS
C2
C1
207 bar (3000 psi)
P T
HAND
PUMP
‘IN’ TO
OPERATE
‘OUT’ TO
LOWER
845CH-197 ELECTRIC POWER ROOF HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

25.3
ELECTRIC PUMP OPERATED POWER ROOF
This system has a separate electric powered
hydraulic pump to open and close the power roof.
POWER
ROOF
ELECTRIC
PUMP
RIGHT SIDE POWER
ROOF HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER
RESERVOIR
POWER ROOF
H845C-205 ELECTRIC PUMP
The electric pump assembly is located in the

breather cabinet behind the cab above the H845C-201 POWER ROOF CYLINDER
hydraulic tank. This system is self contained,
in that it has its own hydraulic oil (Dexron III) When the power roof switch in the cab is activated
reservoir. the electric pump will direct oil up to 207 bar
(3000 psi) to the two hydraulic cylinders (mounted
at the rear of the engine compartment) to open or
close the engine compartment power roof.
SOLENOID C2 C1
MANUAL
OVERRIDE
TEST
PORT
RESERVOIR
FILL CAP
RESERVOIR -
REFILL WITH
H845C-42 POWER ROOF SWITCH DEXRON III OIL
POWER ROOF
ELECTRIC PUMP
CAUTION H845C-205
Ensure all personnel are clear before Shown in the photo above are the port
opening the power roof. designations on the pump:
C1 Port = Roof Open (to base end of cylinder)
C2 Port = Roof Close (to rod end of cylinder)
25.4
A test port is provided on the 'C1' side of the pump
for checking hydraulic oil pressure (207 bar / VALVE
COMPARTMENT
3000 psi maximum) when cylinders are fully COVER/DOOR -
CLOSED POSITION
extended (roof open).
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level when the cylinders are fully
retracted and if required refill the pump reservoir
with Dexron III transmission fluid.
NOTE: Adding oil to the reservoir when the
cylinders are extended (roof open) will result in
over filling of the reservoir.
H845C-202
VALVE
COMPARTMENT
COVER/DOOR -
OPEN POSITION
H845C-204
VALVE
COMPARTMENT
COVER/DOOR
H845C-206 LIMIT SWITCH

H845C-203
NOTE: The power roof electric circuit has a limit
switch located under the valve compartment cover/
door. This switch prevents electric operation of the
power roof if the valve compartment cover/door is
in the open position.
BLK MOTION
1 G48 ALARM
2 DIODE
TAN
61 AM1301
POWER ROOF
MOTOR RELAY BLK
ROOF PUMP FUSE G61
RED BLK
RED M
468 + - G468
POWER ROOF
VALVE COMPARTMENT
COVER/DOOR POWER ROOF
LIMIT SWITCH SWITCH GRN NOT
TAN 62 USED
1
RED RED 2 61A
459 65 3
7.5A RED
65A 4 GRN BLK
5 63 G63
6 CLOSE
845CH-198 POWER ROOF ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
25.5
HAND PUMP OPERATION NOTE: The breather cabinet door is removed
If required the hand pump can be used to to allow access to the manual override when
hydraulically open and close the power roof. Insert the power roof is in the closed position. This is
the handle in the pump lever and pump the power only required if the failed electric pump cannot
roof open or close. The handle is stored inside the be repaired or replaced immediately and it is
left side access door. necessary to close the power roof. After the power
roof has been closed, push in the manual override
H845C-51
on the electric pump and rotate ¼ turn clockwise.
To use the hand pump to open the power roof:
If the power roof requires opening using the hand
pump, the manual override must be pushed in fully
and turned ¼ turn clockwise.
H845C-204
ENGINE ENCLOSURE POWER ROOF

HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP
To use the hand pump to close the power roof:

VALVE
Open the door on the breather cabinet behind the COMPARTMENT
cab and above the hydraulic tank and lift the door COVER/DOOR
off the hinges.
H845C-206 LIMIT SWITCH
Locate the manual override on the electric pump
solenoid, it must be pushed in and rotated ¼ turn NOTE: The limit switch will not work while using
counterclockwise and released. Use the hand the hand pump. Ensure the valve compartment
pump to close the power roof. cover/door is closed before using the hand pump
to close the power roof.
MANUAL
OVERRIDE POWER
ROOF
ELECTRIC
PUMP
POWER ROOF
H845C-205 ELECTRIC PUMP
25.6
POWER ROOF SENSOR
H845C-208
POWER
ROOF
The alarm light will flash and the master alarm

H845C-207 POWER ROOF SENSOR will sound three times to alert the operator of the
The power roof sensor is active when the power message. The roof open icon will display in yellow.
roof and the right engine side door are closed.
If the door or the power roof are open the IQAN
MD3 computer will display a 'Roof Open' Alert
message when the pilot reset switch is pressed.
POWER ROOF SENSOR

(PROXIMITY SENSOR)
481C RED 1
478 YEL 2
NOT USED 3
4
BLK
G481B
845CH-201 POWER ROOF SENSOR ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
25.7
25.8

845C Manual de Serviço 44739AENG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

845C Manual de Serviço 44739AENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

845C/L845C FELLER BUNCHER

ISSUE 1.0, APRIL 2016

Tigercat Industries Inc.

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS..................................................................................... vi

STANDARDS ROPS, TOPS, FOPS, OPS..........................................................................................................vii

NON-APPROVED FIELD PRODUCT CHANGES.............................................................................................viii

USING HIGH-SPEED DISC SAWS SAFELY.............................................................APPENDIX TO SECTION 1

CONTROLS AND OPERATION................................................................See separate OPERATOR'S MANUAL

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................3

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTERS.......................................................................................................................6

ENGINE AND ANTI-STALL..................................................................................................................................7

ACCUMULATOR, CLAMPS AND WRIST..........................................................................................................18

845C/L845C FELLER BUNCHER Available Literature

Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher

Tigercat Industries Inc.

The machine serial number plate is located inside the

Machine Model Number: _________________________

Cab machine serial number plate location.

Upper structure serial number stamp location.

Engine Serial Number: __________________________

Engine identification label and stamped engine serial

Tigercat Industries Inc.

Introduction Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher

Tigercat Industries Inc.

Tigercat 845C/L845C Feller Buncher

CONTENTS – SECTION 1 ISSUE 1.1, APRIL 2016

BACKOVER ACCIDENTS – AVOIDING..................................................................................................... 1.9

Wear a suitable hearing protective device such

Vibration Level - Whole-body

Vibration Level - Hand/Arm

SAFETY SYMBOLS GENERAL

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

Use recommended protective clothing and safety

The following diagram illustrates the hazard zone.

860C-039 HAZARD ZONE

Avoid mounting or dismounting the

It is not recommended to walk on machine

Be aware when performing service and

Lead-acid batteries contain sulphuric

Never use a liquid starting aid to start an engine.

WARNING Keep the cab doors closed when driving or

Do not open the cab doors or window

Whenever possible work within the normal working 860C-009

range of the boom system as shown in FIG. 1.

• Do not lift or move objects that exceed

On a daily basis prior to operating the equipment A

Single Shackle Configuration

Do not open cab doors or window screens

Conduct maintenance inspections at least as

TIP OF STICK WARNING

1. Park the machine on level ground with the

5. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

Diesel fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure

Do not change any pressure or relief setting

WARNING If you don't have an exhaust pipe extension, either

Do not work below or behind a machine

Dispose of fluids properly.

Ensure all personnel are clear before opening or

Always install support braces in the leveling

If the engine is running inside a building, ensure

9. Disconnect the engine electronic control unit

ENGINE GROUND DISCONNECT

13. Disconnect the multi-pin connectors on the